Appendix To Annex I To ED Decision 2018-001-R

Appendix to Annex I to ED Decision 2018/001/R
‘Acceptable Means of Compliance (AMCs) and Guidance Material (GM) to Part-FCL

Amendment 4’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 10 — AIR LAW’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
‘Theoretical knowledge examinations’
Page 1 of 681
European Aviation Safety Agency Appendix to Annex I to ED Decision 2018/001/R
SUBJECT 010 — AIR LAW

Note that the term ‘mass’ is used to describe a quantity of matter, and ‘weight’ when describing the force. However, the term ‘weight’ is normally used in
aviation to colloquially describe mass. The professional pilot should always note the units to determine whether the term ‘weight’ is being used to describe a
force (e.g. unit newton) or quantity of matter (e.g. unit kilogram).
(1) The subjects ‘Air law’ and ‘ATC procedures’ are primarily based on ICAO documentation and European Union regulations.
(2) National law should not be taken into account for theoretical examination purposes; it should remain relevant though during practical training and
operational flying.
Syllabus BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives Aeroplane Helicopter IR CB-IR(A) Remarks
reference and EIR
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
010 00 00 00 AIR LAW
010 01 00 00 INTERNATIONAL LAW: CONVENTIONS, AGREEMENTS AND
ORGANISATIONS
010 01 01 00 The Convention on International Civil Aviation (Chicago) —
ICAO Doc 7300/9
Convention on the High Seas (Geneva, 29 April 1958)
010 01 01 01 The establishment of the Convention on International Civil
Aviation, Chicago, 7 December 1944
(01) X Explain the circumstances that led to the establishment of X X X X X
the Convention on International Civil Aviation, Chicago, 7
December 1944.
Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9 Preamble
010 01 01 02 Part I — Air navigation
Page 2 of 681
(01) X Recall the general contents of relevant parts of the X X X X X

following chapters:
— general principles and application of the
Convention;
— flight over territory of Contracting States;
— nationality of aircraft;
— international standards and recommended practices
(SARPs), especially notification of differences and
validity of endorsed certificates and licences.
Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9 Part 1, Articles 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 37, 38, 39, 40
(02) X General principles X X X X X
Describe the application of the following terms in civil
aviation:
— sovereignty;
— territory and high seas according to the UN
Convention on the High Seas.
Source:
Convention on the High Seas (Geneva, 29 April 1958)
Articles 1, 2;
ICAO Doc 7300/9 Part 1, Articles 1, 2
(03) Explain the following terms and how they apply to X X X X X
international air traffic:
— right of non-scheduled flight (including the two
technical freedoms of the air);
— scheduled air services;
— cabotage;
— landing at customs airports;
— Rules of the Air;
Page 3 of 681
— search of aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9, Articles 5, 6, 7, 10, 12, 16
(04) X Explain the duties of Contracting States in relation to: X X X X X
— documents carried on board the aircraft:
 certificate of registration;
 certificates of airworthiness;
 licences of personnel;
 recognition of certificates and licences;
— cargo restrictions;
— photographic apparatus.
010 01 01 03 Part II — The International Civil Aviation Organization
(ICAO)
(01) X Describe the objectives of ICAO. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9, Article 44
(02) X Recognise the organisation and duties of the ICAO X X X X X
Assembly, Council and Air Navigation Commission (ANC).
(03) X Describe the annexes to the Convention. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9, Articles 54, 90, 94, 95
010 01 02 00 Other conventions and agreements
010 01 02 01 The International Air Services Transit Agreement
(ICAO Doc 7500)
(01) Explain the two technical freedoms of the air. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 7500
010 01 02 02 The International Air Transport Agreement
(ICAO Doc 9626)
Page 4 of 681
(01) Explain the three commercial freedoms of the air. X X X X X

010 01 02 03 Suppression of Unlawful Acts Against the Safety of Civil
Aviation — The Montreal Convention of 1988
(01) Describe the measures and actions to be taken by the pilot- X X X X X
in-command (PIC) of an aircraft in order to suppress unlawful
acts against the safety of the aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 9518 — Protocol supplementary to the
Convention for the Suppression of Unlawful Acts Against
the Safety of Civil Aviation, done at Montreal on
23 September 1971, and signed at Montreal on
24 February 1988
010 01 02 04 Intentionally left blank
010 01 02 05 International private law
(01) Explain the legal significance of the issue of a passenger X X X X X
ticket or of baggage/cargo documents (that the issue is a
form of contract).
(02) Describe the consequences for an airline or the PIC when a X X X X X
passenger ticket is not issued (that the contract is
unaffected).
(03) X Explain the consequences for an airline operator of X X X X X
Regulation (EC) No 261/2004 on passenger rights in the
event of delay, cancellation or denial of boarding.
Source: Regulation (EC) No 261/2004
(04) Explain the liability limit in relation to destruction, loss, X X X X X
damage or delay of baggage.
010 01 03 00 World organisations
Page 5 of 681
010 01 03 01 The International Air Transport Association (IATA)

(01) Describe the objectives of IATA. X X X
Source: http://www.iata.org/about/pages/mission.aspx
010 01 04 00 European organisations
010 01 04 01 European Aviation Safety Agency (EASA)
Regulation (EC) No 216/2008
(01) X Describe the objectives of EASA. X X X X X
(02) Describe the role of EASA in European civil aviation. X X X X X
(03) State that the structure of the regulatory material related X X X X X
to EASA involves:
— hard law (regulations, implementing rules);
— soft law (certification specifications, acceptable means
of compliance, guidance material).
(04) State the meaning of the terminology associated with the X X X X X
EASA regulations’ structure, specifically: regulations;
implementing rules; certification specifications; acceptable
means of compliance; guidance material.
010 01 04 02 EUROCONTROL
(01) X Describe the Single European Sky (SES) regulations. X X X X X
010 02 00 00 AIRWORTHINESS OF AIRCRAFT, AIRCRAFT NATIONALITY

AND REGISTRATION MARKS
010 02 02 00 Certificate of Airworthiness (CofA)
010 02 02 01 Certificate of Airworthiness (CofA) — Details
Page 6 of 681
(01) State the issuing authority of a CofA. X X X X X

Source: ICAO Annex 8, Chapter 3.2 Issuance and continued
validity of a Certificate of Airworthiness
(02) State the necessity to hold a CofA. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 7300, Article 31
(03) X Explain the prerequisites for the issue of a CofA according to X X X X X
Commission Regulation (EU) No 748/2012.
Source: Commission Regulation (EU) No 748/2012,
SUBPART H
(04) State who shall determine an aircraft’s continuing X X X X X
airworthiness.
Source: ICAO Annex 8, Chapter 3.2 Issuance and continued
validity of a Certificate of Airworthiness
(05) Describe how a CofA can be renewed or may remain valid. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 8
Chapter 3.2 Issuance and continued validity of a Certificate
of Airworthiness;
Chapter 3.5 Temporary loss of airworthiness;
Chapter 3.6 Damage to aircraft
010 02 03 00 ICAO Annex 7 — Aircraft Nationality and Registration Marks
010 02 03 01 ICAO Annex 7 — Definitions
(01) X Recall the definition of the following terms: X X X X X
— aircraft;
— heavier-than-air aircraft;
— State of Registry.
Source: ICAO Annex 7, Chapter 1 Definitions
010 02 04 00 Nationality marks, common marks and registration marks
Page 7 of 681
010 02 04 01 Nationality marks, common marks and registration marks

— assignment and location
Source: ICAO Annex 7
(01) State the location of nationality marks, common marks and X X
registration marks.
Source:
ICAO Annex 7, Chapter 4.3 Heavier-than-air aircraft;
ICAO Annex 7, Chapter 9 Identification plate
(02) Explain who is responsible for assigning nationality marks, X X X X X
common marks and registration marks.
Source: ICAO Annex 7, Chapter 3 Nationality, common and
registration marks to be used
010 04 00 00 PERSONNEL LICENSING
010 04 01 00 ICAO Annex 1
010 04 01 01 Differences between ICAO Annex 1 and Regulation (EU)
No 1178/2011 (hereinafter: Aircrew Regulation)
(01) X Describe the relationship and differences between ICAO X X X X X X
Annex 1 and the Aircrew Regulation.
010 04 02 00 Aircrew Regulation — Annex I (Part-FCL)
Source: Aircrew Regulation
010 04 02 01 Definitions
(01) Define the following: X X X X X X X
Category, class and type of aircraft, cross-country, dual
instruction time, flight time, student pilot-in-command
(SPIC), instrument time, instrument flight time, instrument
ground time, night, private pilot, proficiency check, renewal,
Page 8 of 681
revalidation, skill test, solo flight time.

Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.010 Definitions
(02) Define the following: X X X X X
multi-crew cooperation (MCC), multi-pilot aircraft, rating.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.010 Definitions
010 04 02 02 Content and structure
(01) X Explain the structure of Part-FCL. X X X X X X X
Source: Aircrew Regulation, Article 1 Subject matter
(02) Explain the requirements to act as a flight crew member of a X X X X X X
civil aircraft registered in a Member State, and know the
general principles of the licensing system (light aircraft pilot
licence (LAPL), private pilot licence (PPL), commercial pilot
licence (CPL), multi-crew pilot licence (MPL), airline transport
pilot licence (ATPL)).
(03) X List the two factors that are relevant to the exercise of the X X X X X X
privileges of a licence.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.040 Exercise of the
privileges of licences
(04) X State the circumstances in which a language proficiency X X X X X X
endorsement is required.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.055 Language
proficiency
(05) X List the restrictions for licence holders with an age of X X X X X
60 years or more.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.065 Curtailment of
privileges of licence holders aged 60 years or more in
commercial air transport
(06) X Explain the term ‘competent authority’. X X X X X X
Page 9 of 681
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.001 Competent

authority
(07) Describe the obligation to carry and present documents X X X X X X
(e.g. a flight crew licence) under Part-FCL.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.045 Obligation to
carry and present documents
010 04 02 03 Commercial pilot licence (CPL)
(01) X State the requirements for the issue of a CPL. X X X X X
Source: Aircrew Regulation
point FCL.300 CPL — Minimum age;
Appendix 3, D. CPL integrated course — Aeroplanes,
Flying Training (8, a–f);
Appendix 3, E. CPL modular course — Aeroplanes,
Experience (12, a–d)
(02) State the privileges of a CPL. X X X X X
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.305 CPL — Privileges
and conditions
010 04 02 04 Airline transport pilot licence (ATPL) and multi-crew pilot
licence (MPL)
(01) X State the requirements for the issue of an ATPL. X X X
Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.500 ATPL — Minimum age;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.510.A ATPL(A) —
Prerequisites, experience and crediting ((a) and (b));
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.510.H ATPL(H) —
Prerequisites, experience and crediting
(02) State the privileges of an ATPL. X X X
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.505 ATPL —
Page 10 of 681
Privileges
(03) X State the requirements for the issue of an MPL. X

Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.400.A MPL — Minimum age;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.410.A MPL — Training
course and theoretical knowledge examinations and
Appendix 5 (items 1 to 8)
(04) State the privileges of an MPL. X
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.405.A MPL —
Privileges
010 04 02 05 Ratings
(01) State the requirements for class ratings, their validity and X X
privileges.
Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.740 Validity and renewal of
class and type ratings;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.705 Privileges of the holder
of a class or type rating;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.720.A Experience
requirements and prerequisites for the issue of class or
type ratings — aeroplanes
(02) State the requirements for type ratings, their validity and X X X X X
privileges.
Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.705 Privileges of the holder
of a class or type rating;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.720.A Experience
requirements and prerequisites for the issue of class or
type ratings — aeroplanes;
Page 11 of 681
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.740 Validity and renewal of

class and type ratings
(03) State the requirements for instrument ratings, their X X X X
validity and privileges (instrument rating (IR), competency-
based instrument rating (CB-IR) and en-route instrument
rating (EIR)).
Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.610 IR — Prerequisites and
crediting;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.605 IR — Privileges;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.625 IR — Validity,
revalidation and renewal
(04) State the requirements for other ratings, their validity and X X X X X
privileges according to Part-FCL.
Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.900 Instructor certificates;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.915 General prerequisites
and requirements for instructors;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.940 Validity of instructor
certificates
010 04 03 00 Aircrew Regulation — Annex IV (Part-MED)
010 04 03 01 Aircrew Regulation — Annex IV (Part-MED) — Details
(01) X Describe the relevant content of Part-MED — Medical X X X X X X
requirements (administrative parts and requirements
related to licensing only).
Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.001 Competent authority;
Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.005 Scope;
Page 12 of 681
Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.045 Validity, revalidation

and renewal of medical certificates
(02) State the requirements for the issue of a medical X X X X X X
certificate.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.040 Issue,
revalidation and renewal of medical certificates
(03) Name the class of medical certificate required when X X X X X
exercising the privileges of a CPL, MPL or ATPL.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.030 Medical
certificates
(04) State the actions to be taken in case of a decrease in X X X X X X
medical fitness.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.020 Decrease in
medical fitness
010 05 00 00 RULES OF THE AIR ACCORDING TO ICAO ANNEX 2 AND
SERA
010 05 01 00 Overview of ICAO Annex 2 and SERA (Commission
Implementing Regulation (EU) No 923/2012 and its
references and subsequent amendments)
010 05 01 01 ICAO Annex 2 and SERA — Relationship and content
(01) Explain the scope and purpose of ICAO Annex 2. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 2, Foreword, Applicability
(02) Explain the main content of SERA. X X X X X X
Source: SERA, Article 1 Subject matter and scope
010 05 02 00 Rules of the Air
010 05 02 01 Applicability of the Rules of the Air
(01) Explain the principle of territorial application of the various X X X X X
Page 13 of 681
Rules of the Air, e.g. ICAO, SERA, national rules.

Source:
ICAO Annex 2, Chapter 2, 2.1 Territorial application of the
rules of the air;
SERA.1001 and SERA.2001
(02) Explain the necessity to comply with the Rules of the Air. X X X X X
Source: SERA.2005 Compliance with the rules of the air
(03) State the responsibilities of the PIC. X X X X X
Source: SERA.2010 Responsibilities
(04) Identify under what circumstances departure from the X X X X X

Rules of the Air may be allowed.
(05) Explain the duties of the PIC concerning pre-flight actions X X X X
in case of an instrument flight rule (IFR) flight.
(06) State that the PIC of an aircraft has final authority as to the X X X X X
disposition of the aircraft while in command.
Source: SERA.2015 Authority of pilot-in-command of an
aircraft
(07) Explain when the use of psychoactive substances, taking into X X X X X X
consideration their effects, by flight crew members is
prohibited.
Source: SERA.2020 Problematic use of psychoactive
substances
010 05 03 00 General rules
010 05 03 01 General rules — Collision avoidance — SERA
(01) Describe the rules for the avoidance of collisions. X X X X X
Page 14 of 681
Source: SERA Chapter 2 Avoidance of collisions (except
water operations)
(02) Describe the lights, including their angles, to be displayed by X X X X X
aircraft.
Source: SERA.3215 Lights to be displayed by aircraft
(03) Interpret marshalling signals. X X X X X
Source: SERA Appendix 1, Chapter 4 Marshalling signals
(04) State the basic requirements for minimum height (HGT) for X X X X X
the flight over congested areas of cities, towns or
settlements, or over an open-air assembly of persons.
Source: SERA.3105 Minimum heights
(05) Define when the cruising levels shall be expressed in terms of X X X X X
flight levels (FLs).
Source: SERA.3110 Cruising levels
(06) Define under what circumstances cruising levels shall be X X X X X
expressed in terms of altitude (ALT).
Source: SERA.3110 Cruising levels
(07) Explain the limitation for proximity to other aircraft and the X X X X X
right-of-way rules, including holding at runway (RWY) holding
positions and lighted stop bars.
Source:
SERA.3205 Proximity;
SERA.3210 Right-of-way
(08) Describe the meaning of light signals displayed to aircraft and X X X X X
by aircraft.
Source:
SERA.3215 Lights to be displayed by aircraft;
SERA, Appendix 1, Chapter 3 Signals for aerodrome traffic
Page 15 of 681
(09) Describe the requirements when carrying out simulated X X X X

instrument flights.
Source: SERA.3220 Simulated instrument flights
(10) Explain the basic rules for an aircraft operating on and in the X X X X X
vicinity of an aerodrome (AD).
Source: SERA.3225 Operation on and in the vicinity of an
aerodrome
(11) Explain the requirements for the submission of an air traffic X X X X X
service (ATS) flight plan.
Source: SERA.4001 Submission of a flight plan
(12) Explain the actions to be taken in case of flight plan change X X X X X X
or delay.
Source:
SERA.4015 Changes to a flight plan;
SERA.8020 Adherence to flight plan
(13) State the actions to be taken in case of inadvertent changes X X X X X X
to track, true airspeed (TAS) and time estimate affecting the
current flight plan.
Source: SERA.8020 Adherence to flight plan
(14) Explain the procedures for closing a flight plan. X X X X X
Source: SERA.4020 Closing a flight plan
(15) State for which flights an air traffic control (ATC) clearance X X X X X
shall be obtained.
Source: SERA.8015 Air traffic control clearances
(16) State how a pilot may request ATC clearance. X X X X X
(17) State the action to be taken if an ATC clearance is not X X X X X
satisfactory to a PIC.
Page 16 of 681
(18) Describe the required actions to be carried out if the X X X X X

continuation of a controlled visual flight rule (VFR) flight in
visual meteorological conditions (VMC) is not practicable any
more.
Source: SERA.8020 Adherence to flight plan
(19) Describe the provisions for transmitting a position report to X X X X X X X
the appropriate ATS unit including time of transmission and
normal content of the message.
Source: SERA.8025 Position reports
(20) Describe the necessary action when an aircraft experiences a X X X X X X X
communication (COM) failure.
Source: SERA.8035 Communications
(21) State what information an aircraft being subjected to X X X X X X
unlawful interference shall give to the appropriate ATS unit.
Source: SERA.11001 Unlawful interference
010 05 04 00 Visual flight rules (VFRs)
010 05 04 01 Visual flight rules (VFRs) — SERA
(01) Describe the VFRs as contained in Commission X X X X X
Implementing Regulation (EU) No 923/2012.
Source:
SERA.5001 VMC visibility and distance from cloud minima;
SERA.5005 Visual flight rules;
SERA.5010 Special VFR in control zones
010 05 05 00 Instrument flight rules (IFRs)
010 05 05 01 Instrument flight rules (IFRs) — SERA
Page 17 of 681
(01) Describe the IFRs as contained in Commission Implementing X X X X

Regulation (EU) No 923/2012.
Source:
SERA.5015 Instrument flight rules (IFR) — Rules applicable
to all IFR flights;
SERA.5020 IFR — Rules applicable to IFR flights within
controlled airspace;
SERA.5025 IFR — Rules applicable to IFR flights outside
controlled airspace
010 05 06 00 Interception of civil aircraft
010 05 06 01 Interception of civil aircraft — SERA
(01) List the possible reasons for intercepting a civil aircraft. X X X X X
Source: SERA.11015 Interception
(02) State what primary action should be carried out by an X X X X X
intercepted aircraft.
(03) State which frequency should primarily be tried in order to X X X X X
contact an intercepting aircraft.
(04) State on which mode and code a transponder on board the X X X X X
intercepted aircraft should be operated.
(05) Recall the interception signals and phrases. X X X X X
Source: SERA.11015 Interception, Tables S11-1, S11-2, S11-3
010 06 00 00 AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS
Page 18 of 681
010 06 02 00 Definitions and abbreviations (PANS-OPS Flight Procedures,

ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I)
010 06 02 01 Definitions and abbreviations — ICAO Doc 8168, Volume 1
(01) X Recall all definitions included in ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, X X X
Part I, Section 1, Chapter 1.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1,
Chapter 1
(02) X Interpret all abbreviations and acronyms as shown in ICAO X X X
Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1, Chapter 2.
Chapter 2
010 06 03 00 Departure procedures — (ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I)
010 06 03 01 General criteria (assuming all engines operating)
(01) X State the factors dictating the design of instrument X X X X
departure procedures.
Chapter 1, 1.1 General
(02) Explain in which situations the criteria for omnidirectional X X X X
departures are applied.
Chapter 1, 1.3 Instrument departure procedure: 1.3.1; 1.3.2;
1.3.3
010 06 03 02 Standard instrument departures (SIDs)
(01) Explain the terms ‘straight departure’ and ‘turning X X X X
departure’.
Chapter 2, 2.1 General; 2.2 Straight Departures; 2.3 Turning
Page 19 of 681
(excluding maximum speeds)
010 06 03 03 Omnidirectional departures

(01) Explain when the ‘omnidirectional method’ is used for X X X X
departure.
010 06 04 00 Approach procedures — ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I
010 06 04 01 General criteria
(01) State the general criteria (except ‘Speeds for procedure X X X
calculations’) of the approach procedure design:
— instrument approach areas;
— accuracy of fixes;
— fixes formed by intersections;
— intersection fix-tolerance factors;
— other fix-tolerance factors;
— descent gradient.
Chapter 1
(02) Name the five possible segments of an instrument approach X X X X
procedure.
Chapter 1, 1.2.2 Segments of the approach procedure
(03) State the reasons for establishing aircraft categories for the X X X X
approach.
Chapter 1, 1.3 Categories of aircraft
Page 20 of 681
(04) State the maximum angle between the final approach track X X X X
and the extended RWY centre line to still consider a non-
precision approach as being a ‘straight-in approach’.
Chapter 1, 1.2.3 Types of approach
(05) State the minimum obstacle clearance (MOC) provided by X X X X
the minimum sector altitudes (MSAs) established for an
aerodrome.
Chapter 2, 12.3 Minimum sector altitudes
(MSA)/terminal arrival altitudes (TAA)
(06) X State that a pilot shall apply wind corrections when carrying X X X X
out an instrument approach procedure.
(07) State the most significant factor influencing the conduct of X X X X
instrument approach procedures.
Chapter 1, 1.2.1 External factors influencing the approach
procedure
(08) Explain why a pilot should not descend below obstacle X X X X
clearance altitude/height (OCA/H), which are established for:
— precision approach procedures;
— non-precision approach procedures;
— visual (circling) procedures;
— APV approach procedures.
Chapter 1, 1.5 Obstacle clearance altitude/height
(OCA/H)
(09) Describe in general terms the relevant factors for the X X X X
calculation of operational minima.
Page 21 of 681

Chapter 1, 1.6 Factors affecting operational minima
(10) State the following acronyms in plain language: X X X X
DA, DH, OCA, OCH, MDA, MDH, MOC, DA/H, OCA/H, MDA/H.
Chapter 1
(11) Explain the relationship between the terms: X X X X
DA, DH, OCA, OCH, MDA, MDH, MOC, DA/H, OCA/H, and
MDA/H.
Chapter 1
010 06 04 02 Approach procedure design
(01) Describe how the vertical cross section for each of the five X X X X
approach segments is broken down into the various areas.
Chapter 1
(02) State within which area of the cross section the minimum X X X X
obstacle clearance (MOC) is provided for the whole width of
the area.
Chapter 2
(03) Define the terms ‘IAF’, ‘IF’, ‘FAF’, ‘FAP’, ‘MAPt’ and ‘TP’. X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1
Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms and units of
measurement
(04) X State the accuracy of facilities providing track (VHF X X X X
omnidirectional radio range (VOR), instrument landing
system (ILS), non-directional beacon (NDB)).
Page 22 of 681
Chapter 2, Table I-2-2-1. System use accuracy (2 SD) of
facility providing track guidance and facility not providing
track guidance
(05) State the optimum descent gradient (preferred for a X X X X
precision approach) in degrees and per cent.
Chapter 1, 1.9 Descent gradient
010 06 04 03 Arrival and approach segments

(01) Name the five standard segments of an instrument approach X X X X
procedure, and state the beginning and end for each of
them.
Chapter 1, 1.2 Instrument approach procedure
(02) Describe where an arrival route normally ends. X X X X
Chapter 2 Arrival segment
(03) State the main task of the initial approach segment. X X X X
Chapter 3 Initial approach segment
(04) Describe the maximum angle of interception between the X X X X
initial approach segment and the intermediate approach
segment (provided at the intermediate fix) for a precision
approach and a non-precision approach.
Chapter 3 Initial approach segment
(05) Describe the main task of the intermediate approach X X X X
segment.
Page 23 of 681
Chapter 4 Intermediate approach segment
(06) State the main task of the final approach segment. X X X X

Chapter 5 Final approach segment
(07) Name the two possible aims of a final approach. X X X X
(08) Explain the term ‘final approach point’ in case of an ILS X X X X
approach.
(09) State what happens if an ILS glide path (GP) becomes X X X X
inoperative during the approach.
010 06 04 04 Missed approach
(01) Name the three phases of a missed approach procedure and X X X X
describe their geometric limits.
Chapter 6 Missed approach segment
(02) State the main task of a missed approach procedure. X X X X
(03) Define the term ‘missed approach point (MAPt)’. X X X X
measurement
Page 24 of 681
(04) Describe how an MAPt may be established in an approach X X X X

procedure.
(05) State the pilot’s action if, upon reaching the MAPt, the X X X X
required visual reference is not established.
(06) Describe what a pilot is expected to do in the event a missed X X X X
approach is initiated prior to arriving at the MAPt.
(07) State whether the pilot is obliged to cross the MAPt at the X X X X
height (HGT)/altitude (ALT) required by the procedure or
whether they are allowed to cross the MAPt at a HGT/ALT
greater than that required by the procedure.
010 06 04 05 Visual manoeuvring (circling) in the vicinity of the
aerodrome (AD)
(01) Describe what is meant by ‘visual manoeuvring (circling)’. X X X X
Chapter 7 Visual manoeuvring (circling) area
(02) Describe how a prominent obstacle in the visual X X X X
manoeuvring (circling) area outside the final approach and
missed approach area has to be considered for the visual
circling.
Page 25 of 681
(03) State for which category of aircraft the obstacle clearance X X X X

altitude/height (OCA/H) within an established visual
manoeuvring (circling) area is determined.
(04) Describe how the minimum descent altitude/height (MDA/H) X X X X
is specified for visual manoeuvring (circling) if the OCA/H is
known.
(05) State the conditions to be fulfilled before descending below X X X X
MDA/H in a visual manoeuvring (circling) approach.
(06) Explain why there can be no single procedure designed that X X X X
will cater for conducting a circling approach in every
situation.
(07) State how the pilot is expected to act after initial visual X X X X
contact during a visual manoeuvring (circling).
(08) Describe what the pilot is expected to do if visual reference is X X X X
lost while circling to land from an instrument approach.
010 06 04 06 RNAV approach procedures based on VOR/distance-
measuring equipment (DME)
Page 26 of 681
(01) Describe the provisions that must be fulfilled before carrying X X X X

out VOR/DME RNAV approaches.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part II, Section 3,
Chapter 3
(02) Explain the disadvantages of the VOR/DME RNAV system X X X X
compared to a DME/DME RNAV approach.
Chapter 3
(03) List the factors the navigational accuracy of the VOR/DME X X X X
RNAV system depends on.
Chapter 3
(04) State whether the VOR/DME RNAV approach is a precision or X X X X
a non-precision procedure.
Chapter 3
010 06 05 00 Holding procedures — ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I
010 06 05 01 Entry and holding
(01) Explain why deviations from the in-flight procedures of a X X X X
holding established in accordance with ICAO Doc 8168 are
dangerous.
(02) State that if for any reason a pilot is unable to conform to the X X X X
procedures for normal conditions laid down for any
particular holding pattern, this pilot should advise ATC as
early as possible.
Chapter 1
Page 27 of 681
(03) Describe the shape and terminology associated with the X X X X

holding pattern.
Chapter 1
(04) State the bank angle and rate of turn to be used whilst flying X X X X
in a holding pattern.
Chapter 1
(05) Explain why a pilot in a holding pattern should attempt to X X X X
maintain tracks and how this can be achieved.
Chapter 1
(06) Describe where outbound timing begins in a holding pattern. X X X X
Chapter 1
(07) State where the outbound leg in a holding terminates if the X X X X
outbound leg is based on DME.
Chapter 1
(08) Describe the three heading entry sectors for entries into a X X X X
holding pattern.
Chapter 1
(09) Describe the terms ‘parallel entry’, ‘offset entry’ and ‘direct X X X X
entry’.
Chapter 1
(10) Determine the correct entry procedure for a given holding X X X X
Page 28 of 681
pattern.
Chapter 1
(11) State the still-air time for flying the outbound entry heading X X X X
with or without DME.
Chapter 1
(12) Describe what the pilot is expected to do when clearance is X X X X
received specifying the time of departure from the holding
point.
Chapter 1
010 06 05 02 Obstacle clearance
(01) X Describe the layout of the basic holding area, entry area and X X X X
buffer area of a holding pattern.
Chapter 2
(02) X State which obstacle clearance is provided by a minimum X X X X
permissible holding level referring to the holding area, the
buffer area (general only) and over high terrain or in
mountainous areas.
Chapter 2
010 06 06 00 Altimeter-setting procedures — ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I
010 06 06 01 Basic requirements and procedures
(01) Describe the two main objectives of altimeter settings. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1,
Chapter 1
Page 29 of 681
(02) Define the terms ‘QNH’ and ‘QFE’. X X X X X X X

Chapter 2
(03) Describe the different terms for ALT or flight levels (FLs) X X X X X X X
respectively, which are the references during climb or
descent to change the altimeter settings from QNH to
1013.2 hPa and vice versa.
Chapter 2
(04) Define the term ‘flight level (FL)’. X X X X X X X
measurement
(05) State where FL zero shall be located. X X X X X X X
Chapter 2
(06) State the interval by which consecutive FLs shall be X X X X X X X
separated.
Chapter 2
(07) Describe how FLs are defined. X X X X X X X
Chapter 2
(08) Define the term ‘transition altitude (TA)’. X X X X X X X
measurement
(09) State how TAs shall normally be specified. X X X X X X X
Page 30 of 681

Chapter 2
(10) Explain how the HGT of the TA is calculated and expressed in X X X X X X X
practice.
Chapter 2
(11) State where TAs shall be published. X X X X X X X
Chapter 2
(12) Define the term ‘transition level (TRL)’. X X X X X X X
measurement
(13) State when the TRL is normally passed on to the aircraft. X X X X X X X
Chapter 2
(14) State how the vertical position of the aircraft shall be X X X X X X X
expressed at or below the TA and TRL.
Chapter 2
(15) Define the term ‘transition layer’. X X X X X X X
measurement
(16) Describe when the vertical position of an aircraft passing X X X X X X X
through the transition layer shall be expressed in terms of
FLs and when in terms of ALT.
Chapter 2
Page 31 of 681
(17) State when the QNH altimeter setting shall be made X X X X X X X

available to departing aircraft.
Chapter 2
(18) Explain when the vertical separation of an aircraft during en- X X X X X X X
route flight shall be assessed in terms of ALT and when in
terms of FLs.
Chapter 3
(19) Explain when, in air–ground communications during an en- X X X X X X X
route flight, the vertical position of an aircraft shall be
expressed in terms of ALT and when in terms of FLs.
Chapter 3
(20) Describe why QNH altimeter-setting reports should be X X X X X X X
provided from sufficient locations.
Chapter 2
(21) State how a QNH altimeter setting shall be made available to X X X X X X X
aircraft approaching a controlled aerodrome (AD) for landing.
Chapter 2
(22) State under which circumstances the vertical position of an X X X X X X X
aircraft above the TRL may be referenced in ALT.
Chapter 2
010 06 06 02 Procedures for operators and pilots
(01) State on which setting at least one altimeter shall be set prior X X X X X X X
Page 32 of 681
to take-off.
Chapter 3
(02) State where during the climb the altimeter setting shall be X X X X X X X
changed from QNH to 1013.2 hPa.
Chapter 3
(03) Describe when a pilot of an aircraft intending to land at an X X X X X X X
AD shall obtain the TRL.
Chapter 3
(04) Describe when a pilot of an aircraft intending to land at an X X X X X X X
AD shall obtain the actual QNH altimeter setting.
Chapter 3
(05) State where the altimeter settings shall be changed from X X X X X X X
1013.2 hPa to QNH during descent for landing.
Chapter 3
010 06 07 00 Parallel or near-parallel instrument RWYs — ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume I
010 06 07 01 Simultaneous operation on parallel or near-parallel
instrument RWYs
(01) X Describe the difference between independent and X X X X X X X
dependent parallel approaches.
Chapter 1
02) Describe the following different operations: X X X X X X X
Page 33 of 681
— simultaneous instrument departures;

— segregated parallel approaches/departures;
— semi-mixed and mixed operations.
Chapter 1
(03) Describe the terms ‘normal operating zone (NOZ)’ and ‘no X X X X X X
transgression zone (NTZ)’.
Chapter 1
(04) State the aircraft avionics requirements for conducting X X X X X X
parallel instrument approaches.
Chapter 1
(05) State where guidance material may be located for X X X X X X
simultaneous operations on parallel or near-parallel
instrument runways.
(06) State the radar requirements for simultaneous, independent, X X X X X X
and parallel instrument approaches, and how weather
conditions effect these.
Chapter 1
(07) State the maximum angle of interception for an ILS localiser X X X X X X
course (CRS) or microwave landing system (MLS) final
approach track in case of simultaneous, independent, and
parallel instrument approaches.
Chapter 1
(08) Describe the special conditions for tracks on missed X X X X X X
Page 34 of 681
approach procedures and departures in case of simultaneous

or parallel operations.
Chapter 1
010 06 08 00 Secondary surveillance radar (transponder) operating
procedures — ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I
010 06 08 01 Operation of transponders
(01) State when and where the pilot shall operate the X X X X X X X
transponder.
Chapter 1
(02) State the modes and codes that the pilot shall operate in the X X X X X X X
absence of any ATC directions or regional air navigation
agreements.
Chapter 1
(03) State when the pilot shall operate Mode C. X X X X X X
Chapter 1
(04) State when the pilot shall ‘SQUAWK IDENT’. X X X X X X X
Chapter 1
(05) State the transponder code to indicate: X X X X X X X
— a state of emergency;
— a COM failure;
— unlawful interference.
Chapter 1
Page 35 of 681
(06) Describe the consequences of a transponder failure in flight. X X X X X X X

Chapter 1
(07) State the primary action of the pilot in the case of an X X X X X X X
unserviceable transponder before departure when no repair
or replacement at the given AD is possible.
Chapter 1
(08) State when the pilot shall operate Mode S. X
Chapter 1
010 06 08 02 Operation of airborne collision avoidance system (ACAS)
equipment
(01) Describe the main reason for using ACAS. X X X X X X X
Chapter 3, 3.1 ACAS overview
(02) State whether the ‘use of ACAS indications’ described in X X X X X X
ICAO Doc 8168 is absolutely mandatory.
Chapter 3, 3.2 Use of ACAS indications
(03) Explain the pilots’ reaction required to allow ACAS to fulfil its X X X X X X
role of assisting pilots in the avoidance of potential collisions.
(04) Explain why pilots shall not manoeuvre their aircraft in X X X X X X
response to traffic advisories (TAs) only.
Page 36 of 681
(05) Explain the significance of TAs in view of possible resolution X X X X X X

advisories (RAs).
(06) State why a pilot should follow RAs immediately. X X X X X X
(07) List the reasons which may force a pilot to disregard an RA. X X X X X X
(08) Explain the importance of instructing ATC immediately that X X X X X X
an RA has been followed.
(09) Explain the duties of a pilot with regard to ATC when an RA X X X X X X
situation is resolved.
010 06 09 00 REGULATION (EU) No 965/2012 ON AIR OPERATIONS
010 06 09 01 Regulation structure
(01) Describe the subject matter and scope of that Regulation. X X X X X X X
Source: Regulation (EU) No 965/2012, Article 1 Subject
matter and scope
(02) X State that Regulation (EU) No 965/2012 covers all types of X X X X X X X
commercial and non-commercial operations.
010 06 09 02 Definitions (Annex I)
Page 37 of 681
(01) Recall the definitions in the Regulation not already given in X X X X X X X

ICAO PAN-OPS.
Source: Regulation (EU) No 965/2012, Article 2 Definitions
010 06 09 03 Part-SPA (Annex V), Part-NCC (Annex VI) and Part-NCO
(Annex VII)
(01) Describe the structure of these Parts. X X X X X
(02) X Explain the main content of these Parts, except the X X X X X
operational procedures.
010 07 00 00 AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES (ATS) AND AIR TRAFFIC
MANAGEMENT (ATM)
010 07 01 00 ICAO Annex 11 — Air Traffic Services
(01) X Recall the definitions given in ICAO Annex 11. X X X X X X
010 07 01 02 General
(01) X State the objectives of ATS. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.2 Objectives of ATS
(02) X Describe the three basic types of ATS. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.3 Divisions of the
air traffic services
(03) X Describe the three basic types of ATC services. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.3 Divisions of the
air traffic services
(04) State on which frequencies a pilot can expect ATC to contact X X X X X X
them in case of an emergency.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.25 In-flight
Page 38 of 681
contingencies
(05) Describe the procedure for the transfer of an aircraft from X X X X X

one ATC unit to another.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.6.1 Transfer of
responsibility for control
010 07 01 03 Airspace
(01) Describe the purpose for establishing flight information X X X X X X
regions (FIRs) including upper flight information regions
(UIRs).
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2: 2.10; 2.11
(02) Describe the various rules and services that apply to the X X X X X X X
various classes of airspace.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.6 Classification of
airspaces and Annex 11, Appendix 4
(03) Explain which airspace shall be included in an FIR or UIR. X X X X X X
(04) State the designation for those portions of the airspace X X X X X X
where flight information service (FIS) and alerting service
shall be provided.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.5 Designation of the
portions of the airspace and controlled aerodromes
where air traffic services will be provided
(05) State the designations for those portions of the airspace X X X X X X
where ATC services shall be provided.
(06) Identify whether or not control areas (CTAs) and control X X X X X X
Page 39 of 681
zones (CTRs) designated within an FIR shall form part of that

FIR.
(07) State the lower limit of a CTA as far as ICAO Standards are X X X X X X
concerned.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.11.3 Control areas
(08) State whether or not the lower limit of a CTA has to be X X X X X X
established uniformly.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.11.3 Control areas
(09) Explain why a UIR or upper CTA should be delineated to X X X X X X
include the upper airspace within the lateral limits of a
number of lower FIRs or CTAs.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.11.4 Flight
information regions or control areas in the upper
airspace
(10) Describe in general the lateral limits of CTRs. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.11.5 Control zones
(11) State the minimum extension (in NM) of the lateral limits of X X X X X X
a CTR.
(12) State the upper limits of a CTR located within the lateral X X X X X X
limits of a CTA.
010 07 01 04 Air traffic control (ATC) services
(01) Name all classes of airspace in which ATC services shall be X X X X X X
provided.
Page 40 of 681
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.1 Application
(02) Name the ATS units providing ATC services (area control X X X X X X X
service, approach control service, aerodrome control
service).
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.2 Provision of air
traffic control service
(03) Describe which unit(s) may be assigned with the task to X X X X X X X
provide specified services on the apron.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.2 Provision of air
(04) State the purpose of clearances issued by an ATC unit. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.3 Operation of air
(05) List the various (five possible) parts of an ATC clearance. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.7.1 Contents of
clearances
(06) Explain why the movement of persons, vehicles and towed X X X X X X
aircraft on the manoeuvring area of an AD shall be controlled
by the aerodrome control tower (TWR) (as necessary).
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.8 Control of persons
and vehicles at aerodromes, 3.8.1
010 07 01 05 Flight information service (FIS)
(01) X State for which aircraft FIS shall be provided. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.1 Application
(02) X State whether or not FIS shall include the provision of X X X X X X
pertinent significant meteorological information (SIGMET)
and air meteorological information report (AIRMET)
information.
Page 41 of 681
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.2 Scope of flight

information service
(03) X State which information FIS shall include in addition to X X X X X X
SIGMET and AIRMET information.
information service
(04) X Indicate which other information the FIS shall include in X X X X X X
addition to the special information given in Annex 11.
information service, 4.2.2 Note 2 and Attachment B
(05) X State the meaning of the acronym ‘ATIS’ in plain language. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.3.4 Voice-automatic
terminal information service (Voice-ATIS) broadcasts
(06) List the basic information concerning automatic terminal X X X X X X
information service (ATIS) broadcasts (e.g. frequencies used,
number of ADs included, updating, identification,
acknowledgment of receipt, language and channels, ALT-
setting).
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.3.4 Voice-automatic
terminal information service (Voice-ATIS) broadcasts
(07) State the content of an ATIS message. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.3.7 ATIS for arriving
and departing aircraft
(08) State the reasons and circumstances when an ATIS message X X X X X X
shall be updated.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.3.6 Automatic
terminal information service (voice and/or data link)
010 07 01 06 Alerting service
Page 42 of 681
(01) State who provides the alerting service. X X X X X

Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.10 Establishment
and designation of the units providing air traffic services
(02) State who is responsible for initiating the appropriate X X X X X
emergency phase.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 5 Alerting service
(03) State the aircraft to which alerting service shall be provided. X X X X X
(04) State which unit shall be notified by the responsible ATS unit X X X X X
immediately when an aircraft is considered to be in a state of
emergency.
(05) Name the three stages of emergency and describe the basic X X X X X
conditions for each kind of emergency.
(06) X State the meaning of the expressions ‘INCERFA’, ‘ALERFA’ and X X X X X
‘DETRESFA’.
(07) X State the information to be provided to those aircraft that X X X X X
operate in the vicinity of an aircraft that is either in a state of
emergency or unlawful interference.
010 07 01 07 Principles governing required navigation performance
(RNP) and air traffic service (ATS) route designators
(01) State the meaning of the acronym ‘RNP’. X X X X X
(02) State the factors that RNP is based on. X X X X X
Page 43 of 681
(Navigation specification)
(03) X Describe the reason for establishing a system of route X X X X X

designators and navigation specifications.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Appendix 1, 1. Designators for
ATS routes and navigation specifications
(04) State whether or not a prescribed RNP type is considered an X X X X X
integral part of the ATS route designator.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Appendix 1, 1. Designators for
ATS routes and navigation specifications
(05) Explain the composition of an ATS route designator. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Appendix 1, 2. Composition of
designator (not to the extent of memorising the codes in
2.2.1)
010 07 02 00 ICAO Doc 4444 — Air Traffic Management
010 07 02 01 Foreword (Scope and purpose)
(01) State which ATS units provide clearances that do, and do not, X X X X X X X
include the prevention of collision with terrain.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Foreword, 2 Scope and purpose, 2.1
(01) X Recall all definitions given in ICAO Doc 4444 except the X X X X X X
following:
accepting unit/controller, AD taxi circuit, aeronautical fixed
service (AFS), aeronautical fixed station, air-taxiing,
allocation, approach funnel, assignment, data convention,
data processing, discrete code, D-value, flight status, ground
effect, receiving unit/controller, sending unit/controller,
transfer of control point, transferring unit/controller,
unmanned free balloon.
Page 44 of 681
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 1 Definitions
010 07 02 03 ATS system capacity and air traffic flow management

(ATFM)
(01) X Explain when and where ATFM services shall be X X X X X X X
implemented.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 3, 3.2 Air traffic flow
management, 3.2.1 General
010 07 02 04 General provisions for air traffic services (ATS)
(01) X Describe who is responsible for the provision of flight X X X X X X
information and alerting services within an FIR, within
controlled airspace and at controlled ADs.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.2 Responsibility for the
provision of flight information service and alerting service
010 07 02 05 ATC clearances
(01) State which information the issue of an ATC clearance is X X X X X X X
based on.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5 Air traffic control
clearances, 4.5.1 Scope and purpose
(02) Describe what a PIC should do if an ATC clearance is not X X X X X X X
suitable.
(03) State who bears the responsibility for adhering to the X X X X X X X
applicable rules and regulations whilst flying under the
control of an ATC unit.
(04) X State the two primary purposes of clearances issued by ATC X X X X X X
Page 45 of 681
units.
(05) State why clearances must be issued ‘early enough’ to X X X X X X
aircraft.
(06) Explain what is meant by the expression ‘clearance limit’. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5.7 Description of air
traffic control clearances, 4.5.7.1 Clearance limit
(07) Explain the meaning of the phrases ‘cleared via flight X X X X X X X
planned route’, ‘cleared via (designation) departure’ and
‘cleared via (designation) arrival’ in an ATC clearance.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5.7 Description of air
traffic control clearances, 4.5.7.2 Route of flight
(08) List which items of an ATC clearance shall always be X X X X X X X
read back by the flight crew.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5.7.5 Readback of
clearances
010 07 02 06 Horizontal speed control instructions
(01) Explain the reason for speed control by ATC. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.6 Horizontal speed
control instructions, 4.6.1 General
(02) X Define the maximum speed changes that ATC may impose. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.6.3 Descending and
arriving aircraft
(03) State within what distance from the THR the PIC should not X X X X X X X
expect any kind of speed control.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.6.3 Descending and
Page 46 of 681
arriving aircraft
010 07 02 07 Change from IFR to VFR flight

(01) Explain how the change from IFR to VFR can be initiated by X X X X
the PIC.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.8 Change from IFR to
VFR flight
(02) Describe the expected reaction of the appropriate ATC unit X X X X
upon a request to change from IFR to VFR.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.8 Change from IFR to
VFR flight
010 07 02 08 Wake turbulence
(01) State the wake-turbulence categories of aircraft. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.9.1 Wake turbulence
categories of aircraft
(02) State the wake-turbulence separation minima. X X X X X X
Source:
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.8 Time-based wake turbulence
longitudinal separation minima;
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.7.3.4 (table of distance-based
wake turbulence separation minima) and 8.7.3.4.1
(appropriate conditions for application)
(03) Describe how a ‘heavy’ aircraft shall indicate this in the initial X X X X X X
radiotelephony contact with ATS.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.9.2 Indication of heavy
wake turbulence category
010 07 02 09 Altimeter-setting procedures
(01) Define the following terms: X X X X X X X
— TRL;
Page 47 of 681
— transition layer; and

— TA.
(02) Describe how the vertical position of an aircraft in the X X X X X X X
vicinity of an AD shall be expressed at or below the TA, at or
above the TRL, and while climbing or descending through the
transition layer.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.1 Expression of
vertical position of aircraft
(03) Describe when the HGT of an aircraft using QFE during an X X X X X X X
NDB approach is referred to the landing THR instead of the
AD elevation.
(04) State in which margin altimeter settings provided to aircraft X X X X X X X
shall be rounded up or down.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.4 Provision of
altimeter setting information
(05) Describe the expression ‘lowest usable FL’. X X X X X X X
(06) Determine how the vertical position of an aircraft on an en- X X X X X X X
route flight is expressed at or above the lowest usable FL and
below the lowest usable FL.
(07) State who establishes the TRL to be used in the vicinity of an X X X X X X X
AD.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.2 Determination of
Page 48 of 681
the transition level
(08) Decide how and when a flight crew member shall be X X X X X X X

informed about the TRL.
(09) State whether or not the pilot can request TRL to be included X X X X X X X
in the approach clearance.
010 07 02 10 Position reporting
(01) Describe when position reports shall be made by an aircraft X X X X X X X
flying on routes defined by designated significant points.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.11.1 Transmission of
position reports, 4.11.1.1
(02) List the six items that are normally included in a voice X X X X X X X
position report.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.11.2 Contents of voice
position reports
(03) X State the requirements for using a simplified position report X X X X X X X
with FL, next position (and time-over) and ensuing significant
points omitted.
position reports
(04) State the item of a position report which must be forwarded X X X X X X X
on to ATC with the initial call after changing to a new
frequency.
position reports
Page 49 of 681
(05) Indicate the item of a position report which may be omitted X X X X X X X

if secondary surveillance radar (SSR) Mode C is used.
position reports
(06) Explain in which circumstances the airspeed should be X X X X X X
included in a position report.
position reports
(07) Explain the meaning of the acronym ‘ADS’. X X X X X X
(08) Describe which expression shall precede the level figures in a X X X X X X
position report if the level is reported in relation to
1013.2 hPa (standard pressure).
Source:
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5.7.5 Readback of clearances;
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.11.2 Contents of voice position
reports
010 07 02 11 Reporting of operational and meteorological information
(01) List the occasions when special air-reports shall be made. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.12.3 Contents of
special air-reports 4.12.3.1 (a to k inclusive)
010 07 02 12 Separation methods and minima
(01) Explain the general provisions for the separation of X X X X
controlled air traffic.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.2.1 General and 5.2.2
Degraded aircraft performance
(02) X Name the different kinds of separation used in aviation. X X X X
Source:
Page 50 of 681
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5;

ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.5.2
(03) State the difference between the type of separation provided X X X X
within the various classes of airspace and the various types
of flight.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.2 Provisions for the
separation of controlled traffic
(04) State who is responsible for the avoidance of collision with X X X X
other aircraft when operating in VMC.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.9 Clearances to fly
maintaining own separation while in VMC
(05) Describe how vertical separation is obtained. X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.3.1 Vertical
separation application
(06) State the required vertical separation minimum. X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.3.2 Vertical
separation minimum
(07) Describe how the cruising levels of aircraft flying to the same X X X X
destination and in the expected approach sequence are
correlated with each other.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.3.3 Assignment of
cruising levels for controlled flights
(08) Name the conditions that must be adhered to when two X X X X
aircraft are cleared to maintain a specified vertical separation
between them during climb or descent.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.3.4 Vertical separation
during climb or descent
(09) State the two main methods for horizontal separation. X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5
Page 51 of 681
(10) Describe how lateral separation of aircraft at the same level X X X X

may be obtained.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.4.1 Lateral separation,
5.4.1.1.2
(11) Explain the term ‘geographical separation’. X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.4.1 Lateral separation
(12) Describe track separation between aircraft using the same X X X X
navigation aid or method.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.4.1.2 Lateral
separation criteria and minima, 5.4.1.2.1.2
(13) Describe the three basic means for the establishment of X X X X
longitudinal separation.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.4.2
(14) State the minimum standard horizontal radar separation in X X X X
NM.
(15) Describe the method of the Mach number technique. X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.4.2.4 Longitudinal
separation minima with mach number technique based on
time
010 07 02 13 Separation in the vicinity of aerodromes (ADs)
(01) Describe the expression ‘essential local traffic’. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.2 Essential local traffic
(02) State which possible decision the PIC may choose to take X X X X X X
if they are asked to accept take-off in a direction which is
not ‘into the wind’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.3.3 Departure
sequence
Page 52 of 681
(03) State the condition to enable ATC to initiate a visual X X X X X X X

approach for an IFR flight.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.3 Visual approach,
6.5.3.1
(04) State whether or not separation shall be provided by ATC X X X X X X X
between an aircraft executing a visual approach and other
arriving or departing aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.3 Visual approach,
6.5.3.4
(05) State in which case, when the flight crew are not familiar X X X X X X X
with the instrument approach procedure being carried out,
only the final approach track has to be given to them by ATC.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.4 Instrument
approach
(06) Describe which FL should be assigned to an aircraft first X X X X X X X
arriving over a holding fix for landing.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.5 Holding
(07) State which kinds of priority can be applied to aircraft for X X X X X X X
a landing.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.6 Approach
sequence, 6.5.6.1 General
(08) Describe the situation when a pilot of an aircraft in an X X X X X X X
approach sequence indicates their intention to hold for
weather improvements.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.6 Approach
sequence, 6.5.6.1 General
(09) Explain the term ‘expected approach time’ and the X X X X X X X
procedures for its use.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.7 Expected approach
Page 53 of 681
time
(10) State the reasons which could probably lead to the decision X X X X X X X
to use another take-off or landing direction than the one into
the wind.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.2 Selection of runway-
in-use
(11) State the possible consequences for a PIC if the ‘RWY-in-use’ X X X X X X X
is not considered suitable for the operation involved.
010 07 02 14 Miscellaneous separation procedures
(01) State the minimum separation between departing and X X X X X X X
arriving aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.7 Separation of
departing aircraft from arriving aircraft
(02) State the non-radar wake-turbulence longitudinal separation X X X X X X X
minima.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5 and 6
(03) Describe the consequences of a clearance to ‘maintain own X X X X X X X
separation’ while in VMC.
Source:
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.8 Time-based wake
turbulence longitudinal separation minima, 5.8.1;
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.3 Visual approach
(04) Give a brief description of ‘essential traffic’ and ‘essential X X X X X X X
traffic information’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.10 Essential traffic
information
(05) Describe the circumstances under which a reduction in X X X X X X X
Page 54 of 681
separation minima may be allowed.

Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.1 Reduction in
separation minima in the vicinity of aerodromes
010 07 02 15 Arriving and departing aircraft
(01) List the elements of information which shall be transmitted X X X X X X X
to an aircraft as early as practicable if an approach for
landing is intended.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.6 Information for
arriving aircraft
(02) List the elements of information to be transmitted to an X X X X X X X
aircraft at the commencement of final approach.
arriving aircraft
(03) List the elements of information to be transmitted to an X X X X X X X
aircraft during final approach.
arriving aircraft
(04) State the prerequisites for operating on parallel or near- X X X X X X
parallel RWYs including the different combinations of parallel
arrivals or departures.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.7 Operations on
parallel or near-parallel runways
(05) State the sequence of priority between aircraft landing (or in X X X X X X X
the final stage of an approach to land) and aircraft intending
to depart.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.8 Order of priority
for arriving and departing aircraft
(06) State the significant changes in the meteorological conditions X X X X X X X
in the take-off or climb-out area that shall be transmitted
Page 55 of 681
without delay to a departing aircraft.

Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.4.1 Meteorological
conditions
(07) State the significant changes that shall be transmitted as X X X X X X X
early as practicably possible to an arriving aircraft,
particularly changes in the meteorological conditions.
arriving aircraft
010 07 02 16 Procedures for aerodrome (AD) control service
(01) Name the operational failure or irregularity of AD equipment X X X X X X X
which shall be reported by the TWR immediately.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.1.3 Failure or
irregularity of aids and equipment
(02) Explain that, after a given period of time, the TWR shall X X X X X X X
report to the area control centre (ACC) or flight information
centre (FIC) if an aircraft does not land as expected.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.1.2 Alerting service
provided by aerodrome control towers
(03) Describe the procedures to be observed by the TWR X X X X X X X
whenever VFR operations are suspended.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.13 Suspension of visual
flight rules operations
(04) Explain the term ‘RWY-in-use’ and its selection. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.2 Selection of runway-
in-use
(05) List the information the TWR should give to an aircraft prior X X X X X X
to:
— taxiing for take-off;
Page 56 of 681
— take-off;
— entering the traffic circuit.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.4.1.2 Aerodrome and
meteorological information
(06) Explain that a report of surface wind direction given to a pilot X X X X X X
by the TWR is magnetic.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 11, 11.4.3.2 Messages
containing meteorological information
(07) Explain the exact meaning of the expression ‘RWY vacated’. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.10.3.4
010 07 02 17 Radar services
(01) State the basic identification procedures used with radar. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.2.3 SSR and/or MLAT
identification procedures and Chapter 8, 8.6.2.4 PSR
identification procedures
(02) Define the term ‘PSR’. X X X X X X X
(03) Describe the circumstances under which an aircraft provided X X X X X X X
with radar service should be informed of its position.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.4 Position
information
(04) List the possible forms of position information passed on to X X X X X X X
the aircraft by radar services.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.4 Position
information
(05) Describe the term ‘radar vectoring’. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.5 Vectoring
Page 57 of 681
(06) State the aims of radar vectoring as shown in ICAO Doc 4444. X X X X X X X
(07) Describe how radar vectoring shall be achieved. X X X X X X X
(08) Describe the information which shall be given to an aircraft X X X X X X X
when radar vectoring is terminated and the pilot is instructed
to resume own navigation.
(09) Explain the procedures for the conduct of surveillance radar X X X X X X X
approaches (SRAs).
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.9.7.1 Surveillance
radar approach
(10) Describe what kind of action (concerning the transponder) X X X X X X X
the pilot is expected to perform in case of emergency if they
have previously been directed by ATC to operate the
transponder on a specific code.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.8.1 Emergencies
010 07 02 18 Air traffic advisory service
(01) Describe the objective and basic principles of the air traffic X X X X X X
advisory service.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 9, 9.1.4.1 Objective and
basic principles
(02) State to which aircraft air traffic advisory service may be X X X X X X
provided.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 9, 9.1.4.1 Objective and
basic principles
(03) Explain the difference between advisory information and X X X X X X
clearances, stating which ATS units are responsible for their
Page 58 of 681
issue.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 9, 9.1.4.1.3
010 07 02 19 Procedures related to emergencies, communication (COM)
failure and contingencies
(01) State the mode and code of SSR equipment a pilot might X X X X X X X
operate in a (general) state of emergency or (specifically) in
case the aircraft is subject to unlawful interference.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.1 Emergency
procedures
(02) State the special rights an aircraft in a state of emergency can X X X X X X X
expect from ATC.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.1.1 General;
15.1.2 Priority; 15.1.3 Unlawful interference and aircraft
bomb threat
(03) Describe the expected action of aircraft after receiving a X X X X X X X
broadcast from ATS concerning the emergency descent of an
aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.1.4 Emergency
descent
(04) State how it can be ascertained, in case of a failure of two- X X X X X X X
way COM, whether the aircraft is able to receive
transmissions from the ATS unit.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.3 Air-ground
communications failure
(05) State on which frequencies appropriate information, for an X X X X X X X
aircraft encountering two-way COM failure, shall be sent by
ATS.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.3.5
(06) State what is meant by the expressions ‘strayed aircraft’ and X X X X X X X
Page 59 of 681
‘unidentified aircraft’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.5.1 Strayed or
unidentified aircraft
(07) Explain the reasons for fuel-dumping and state the minimum X X X X X X
level.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.5.3 Fuel dumping
(08) Explain the possible request of ATC to an aircraft to change X X X X X X
its radio-telephone (RTF) call sign.
010 07 02 20 Miscellaneous procedures

(01) Explain the meaning of ‘AIRPROX’. X X X X X X
Source:
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 1 Definitions;
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 16, 16.3 Air traffic incident report
(02) Describe the task of an air traffic incident report. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 16, 16.3 Air traffic incident
report
010 08 00 00 AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICE (AIS)
010 08 01 00 Introduction
010 08 01 01 Introduction to ICAO Annex 15 — Aeronautical Information
Service (AIS)
(01) State, in general terms, the objective of an AIS. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 1, Note 1
010 08 02 00 Definitions of ICAO Annex 15
010 08 02 01 Definitions of ICAO Annex 15
(01) Recall the following definitions: X X X X X X X
Page 60 of 681
aeronautical information circular (AIC), aeronautical

information publication (AIP), AIP amendment, AIP
supplement, aeronautical information regulation and control
(AIRAC), danger area, integrated aeronautical information
package, international airport, international NOTAM office
(NOF), manoeuvring area, movement area, NOTAM, pre-
flight information bulletin (PIB), prohibited area, restricted
area, SNOWTAM, ASHTAM.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 1, 1.1 Definitions
010 08 03 00 General
010 08 03 01 General — AIS responsibilities and functions
(01) State during which period of time an AIS shall be available X X X X X X
with reference to an aircraft flying in the area of
responsibility of an AIS, provided a 24-hour service is not
available.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 2, 2.2 AIS responsibilities
and functions
(02) List, in general, the kind of aeronautical information/data X X X X X X
which an AIS service shall make available in a suitable form
to flight crew.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 2, 2.2 AIS responsibilities
and functions
(03) Summarise the duties of an AIS concerning aeronautical X X X X X X
information data for the territory of a particular State.
Source:
ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 2, 2.2 AIS responsibilities and
functions;
ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 2, 2.3 Exchange of aeronautical
data and aeronautical information
Page 61 of 681
010 08 04 00 Integrated aeronautical information package

010 08 04 01 Aeronautical information publication (AIP)
(01) State the primary purpose of the AIP. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 4, Notes 1 and 2
(02) Name the different parts of the AIP. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 4, 4.1 Contents
(03) State the main parts of the AIP where the following X X X X X X X
information can be found:
— differences from the ICAO Standards, Recommended
Practices and Procedures;
— location indicators, AIS, minimum flight ALT,
meteorological information for aircraft in flight
(VOLMET) service, SIGMET service;
— general rules and procedures (especially general rules,
VFR, IFR, ALT-setting procedure, interception of civil
aircraft, unlawful interference, air traffic incidents);
— ATS airspace (especially FIR, UIR, TMA);
— ATS routes (especially lower ATS routes, upper ATS
routes, area navigation routes);
— AD data including aprons, taxiways (TWYs) and check
locations/positions data;
— navigation warnings (especially prohibited, restricted
and danger areas);
— aircraft instruments, equipment and flight documents;
— AD surface movement guidance and control system
and markings;
— RWY physical characteristics, declared distances,
approach (APP) and RWY lighting;
Page 62 of 681
— AD radio navigation and landing aids;

— charts related to an AD;
— entry, transit and departure of aircraft, passengers,
crew and cargo, and the significance of this
information to flight crew.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 1
(04) State how permanent changes to the AIP shall be published. X X X X X X
Source:
ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 4, 4.3 Specifications for AIP
Amendments;
ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 4, 4.5 Distribution
(05) Explain what kind of information shall be published in the X X X X X X
form of AIP Supplements.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 4, 4.4 Specifications for
AIP Supplements
010 08 04 02 Notices to airmen (NOTAMs)
(01) Describe how information shall be published which in X X X X X X X
principle would belong to NOTAMs but includes extensive
text or graphics.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 5, 5.1.1 and Notes 1 and 2
(02) Summarise the essential information which leads to the issue X X X X X X X
of a NOTAM.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 5, 5.1.1.1
(03) State to whom NOTAMs shall be distributed. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 5, 5.3.1
(04) Explain how information regarding snow, ice and standing X X X X X X X
water on AD pavements shall be reported.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 2 Instructions for the
Page 63 of 681
completion of the SNOWTAM format
(05) Describe the means by which NOTAMs shall be distributed. X X X X X X

Source:
ICAO Annex 15, 5.2 General specifications;
ICAO Annex 15, 5.3 Distribution;
ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 5
(06) Define and state which information an ASHTAM may X X X X X X
contain.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 3 ASHTAM format
010 08 04 03 Aeronautical information regulation and control (AIRAC)
(01) X List the circumstances under which the information X X X X X X X
concerned shall or should be distributed as an AIRAC.
Source:
ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 6;
ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 4 Information to be notified by
AIRAC
010 08 04 04 Aeronautical information circulars (AICs)
(01) X Describe the type of information that may be published in X X X X X X
AICs.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 7, 7.1 Origination
(02) Explain the organisation of AICs. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 7, 7.2 General
specifications
010 08 04 05 Pre-flight and post-flight information/data
(01) Summarise, in addition to the elements of the integrated AIP X X X X X X
and maps/charts, the additional current information relating
to the AD of departure that shall be provided as pre-flight
Page 64 of 681
information.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 8, 8.1 Pre-flight
information
(02) Describe how a recapitulation of current NOTAM and other X X X X X X X
information of urgent character shall be made available to
flight crew.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 8, 8.1 Pre-flight
information
(03) State which post-flight information from flight crew shall be X X X X X X
submitted to AIS for distribution as required by the
circumstances.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 8, 8.3 Post-flight
information
010 08 05 00 ATM service providers
010 08 05 01 ATM
(01) State that Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) X X X

No 1035/2011 provides:
— general requirements for the provision of air
navigation services;
— specific requirements for the provision of air traffic
services;
— specific requirements for the provision of
meteorological services;
aeronautical information services;
communication, navigation or surveillance services.
010 09 00 00 AERODROMES
(ICAO Annex 14, Volume I — Aerodrome Design and
Page 65 of 681
Operations, and Regulation (EU) No 139/2014)
010 09 01 00 General
010 09 01 01 General — AD reference code
(01) Describe the intent of the AD reference code and state the X X X X X X
functions of the two code elements.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 1, 1.6 Reference
Code
010 09 02 00 Aerodrome (AD) data
010 09 02 01 Aerodrome (AD) reference point
(01) Describe where the AD reference point shall be located and X X X X X X X
where it shall normally remain.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 2,
2.2 Aerodrome reference point
010 09 02 02 Pavement strengths
(01) Explain the terms: ‘pavement classification number (PCN)’ X X X X X X
and ‘aircraft classification number (ACN)’, and describe their
mutual dependence.
2.6 Strength of pavements
(02) Describe how the bearing strength for an aircraft with an X X X X X X
apron mass equal to or less than 5 700 kg shall be reported.
2.6 Strength of pavements
010 09 02 03 Declared distances
(01) State that ICAO Annex 14 provides guidance on the X X X X X X
calculation of declared distances (TORA, TODA, ASDA, LDA).
Page 66 of 681
(02) Recall the definitions for the four main declared distances. X X X X X X
1.1 Definitions
010 09 02 04 Condition of the movement area and related facilities
(01) State the purpose of informing AIS and ATS units about the X X X X X X
condition of the movement area and related facilities.
2.9 Condition of the movement area and related
facilities
(02) List the matters of operational significance or affecting X X X X X X
aircraft performance which should be reported to AIS and
ATS units to be transmitted to aircraft involved.
2.9 Condition of the movement area and related facilities
(03) Describe the three different types of water deposit on RWYs. X X X X X X
(04) Explain the different types of frozen water on the RWY and X X X X X X
their impact on aircraft braking performance.
(05) Describe the five levels of braking action including the X X X X X
associated coefficients and codes.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Annex A,
6. Assessing the surface friction characteristics of snow-,
slush-, ice- and frost-covered paved surfaces
010 09 03 00 Physical characteristics
010 09 03 01 Runways (RWYs)
Page 67 of 681
(01) Describe where a THR should normally be located. X X X X X X

Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.1.5 and
3.1.6 Location of threshold
(02) Describe the general considerations concerning RWYs X X X X X X X
associated with a stopway (SWY) or clearway (CWY).
3.1.9 Runways with stopways or clearways
010 09 03 02 Runway (RWY) strips
(01) Explain the term ‘runway strip’. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.4 General,
3.4.1
010 09 03 03 Runway-end safety area
(01) Explain the term ‘runway-end safety area’. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.5 Runway
end safety area 3.5.1 and 3.5.2
010 09 03 04 Clearway (CWY)
(01) Explain the term ‘clearway’. X X X X X X X
3.6 Clearways
010 09 03 05 Stopway (SWY)
(01) Explain the term ‘stopway’. X X X X X X X
3.7 Stopways
010 09 03 07 Taxiways (TWYs)
(01) Describe the reasons and the requirements for rapid-exit X X X X X X
Page 68 of 681
TWYs.
3.9 Taxiways – Rapid-exit taxiways
(02) Explain TWY widening in curves. X X X X X X
3.9.5 Taxiways curves
(03) Explain when and where holding bays should be provided. X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.12
(04) Describe where RWY holding positions shall be established. X X X X X X X
(05) Describe the term ‘road holding position’. X X X X X X
(06) Describe where intermediate TWY holding positions should X X X X X X
be established.
010 09 04 00 Visual aids for navigation
010 09 04 01 Indicators and signalling devices
(01) Describe the wind-direction indicators with which ADs shall X X X X X X X
be equipped.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.1.1 Wind
direction indicator (Application, Location and
Characteristics)
(02) Describe a landing-direction indicator. X X X X X X
5.1.2 Landing direction indicator
(03) Explain the capabilities of a signalling lamp. X X X X X X X
Page 69 of 681
(04) X State which characteristics a signal area should have. X X X X X X X

5.1.4 Signal panels and signal area, 5.1.4.1 to 5.1.4.3
(05) X Interpret all indications and signals that may be used in a X X X X X X X
signal area.
Source: Commission Implementing Regulation (EU)
No 923/2012 (SERA) — Appendix 1 Signals, 3.2 Visual
ground signals
010 09 04 02 Markings
(01) Name the colours used for the various markings (RWY, TWY, X X X X X X X
aircraft stands, apron safety lines).
5.2 Markings
(02) State where a RWY designation marking shall be provided X X X X X X X
and describe the different layouts (excluding dimensions).
5.2 Markings
(03) Describe the application and general characteristics X X X X X X X
(excluding dimensions) of:
— RWY-centre-line markings;
— THR markings;
— touchdown-zone (TDZ) markings;
— RWY-side-stripe markings;
— TWY-centre-line markings;
— RWY holding position markings;
— intermediate holding position markings;
— aircraft-stand markings;
— apron safety lines;
Page 70 of 681
— road holding position markings;

— mandatory instruction markings;
— information markings.
5.2 Markings
010 09 04 03 Lights
(01) Describe the mechanical safety considerations regarding X X X X X X X
elevated approach lights and elevated RWY, SWY and TWY
lights.
5.3.1.4 to 5.3.1.8 (Elevated approach lights, elevated lights
and surface lights)
(02) List the conditions for the installation of an aerodrome X X X X X X X
beacon (ABN) and describe its general characteristics.
5.3.3 Aeronautical beacons
(03) Describe the different kinds of operations for which a simple X X X X X X X
approach lighting system shall be used.
5.3.4 Approach lighting systems
(04) Describe the basic installations of a simple approach lighting X X X X X X X
system including the dimensions and distances normally
used.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.4.2
(05) Describe the principle of a precision approach category I X X X X X X X
lighting system including information such as location and
characteristics.
Source:
ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.4.10;
Page 71 of 681
ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.4.14
(06) Describe the principle of a precision approach category II and X X X

III lighting system including information such as location and
characteristics, especially the inner 300 m of the system.
Source:
ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.4.31
(07) Describe the wing bars of the precision approach path X X X X X X X
indicator (PAPI) and the abbreviated precision approach path
indicator (APAPI). Interpret what the pilot will see during the
approach using PAPI.
5.3.5.24 to 5.3.5.27 PAPA and APAPI
(08) Interpret what the pilot will see during an approach using a X X X X
helicopter approach path indicator (HAPI).
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume II, Chapter 5,
5.3.6 Visual approach slope indicator
(09) Explain the application and characteristics (as applicable, but X X X X X X X
limited to colour, intensity, direction and whether fixed or
flashing) of:
— RWY-edge lights;
— RWY-THR and wing-bar lights;
— RWY-end lights;
— RWY-centre-line lights;
— RWY-lead-in lights;
— RWY-TDZ lights;
— SWY lights;
Page 72 of 681
— TWY-centre-line lights;
— TWY-edge lights;
— stop bars;
— intermediate holding position lights;
— RWY guard lights;
— road holding position lights.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5
(10) State the timescale within which aeronautical ground lights X X X X X X X
shall be made available to arriving aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Section 7.15 Aeronautical ground
lights
010 09 04 04 Signs
(01) Explain which signs are the only ones on the movement area X X X X X X X
utilising red.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
(02) List the provisions for illuminating signs. X X X X X X X
(03) Name the kinds of signs which shall be included in X X X X X X X
mandatory instruction signs.
(04) Name the colours used for mandatory instruction signs. X X X X X X X
(05) Describe by which sign a pattern ‘A’ RWY holding position X X X X X X X
(i.e. at an intersection of a TWY and a non-instrument, non-
precision approach or take-off RWY) marking shall be
supplemented.
Page 73 of 681
(06) Describe by which sign a pattern ‘B’ RWY holding position X X X X X X X

(i.e. at an intersection of a TWY and a precision approach
RWY) marking shall be supplemented.
(07) Describe the location of: X X X X X X X
— a RWY designation sign at a TWY/RWY intersection;
— a ‘NO ENTRY’ sign;
— a RWY holding position sign.
(08) State which sign indicates that a taxiing aircraft is about to X X X X X X X
infringe an obstacle limitation surface or interfere with the
operation of radio navigation aids (e.g. ILS/MLS
critical/sensitive area).
(09) Describe the various possible inscriptions on RWY X X X X X X X
designation signs and on holding position signs.
(10) Describe the colours used in connection with information X X X X X X X
signs.
(11) Describe the possible inscriptions on information signs. X X X X X X X
(12) Explain the application, location and characteristics of X X X X X X X
aircraft stand identification signs.
(13) Explain the application, location and characteristics of road X X X X X X X
holding position signs.
Page 74 of 681
010 09 04 05 Markers
(01) Explain why markers located near a RWY or TWY shall be X X X X X X X
HGT limited.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.5 Markers
(02) Explain the application and characteristics (excluding X X X X X X X
dimensions) of:
— unpaved RWY-edge markers;
— TWY-edge markers;
— TWY-centre-line markers;
— unpaved TWY-edge markers;
— boundary markers;
— SWY-edge markers.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.5 Markers
010 09 05 00 Visual aids for denoting obstacles
010 09 05 01 Marking of objects
(01) State how fixed or mobile objects shall be marked if X X X X X X
colouring is not practicable.
6.2.3.1 Marking
(02) Describe marking by colours (fixed or mobile objects). X X X X X X
Source:
ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2.2 Mobile
objects: 6.2.2.1, 6.2.2.2; 6.2.2.3; 6.2.2.4;
ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2.3 Fixed objects:
6.2.3.1; 6.2.3.2; 6.2.3.3
(03) Explain the use of markers for the marking of objects, X X X X X X
overhead wires, cables, etc.
Page 75 of 681

6.2.5 Overhead wires, cables, etc., and supporting towers
(04) Explain the use of flags for the marking of objects. X X X X X X
6.2.3 Fixed objects: 6.2.3.5; 6.2.3.6; 6.2.3.7
010 09 05 02 Lighting of objects
(01) Name the different types of lights to indicate the presence of X X X X X X
objects which must be lighted.
6.2 Marking and/or lighting of objects: 6.2.1.1
(02) Describe (in general terms) the location of obstacle lights. X X X X X X
6.2 Marking and/or lighting of objects: 6.2.1.3
(03) Describe (in general and for normal circumstances) the X X X X X X
colour and sequence of low-intensity obstacle lights,
medium-intensity obstacle lights and high-intensity
obstacle lights.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6: Table 6-1.
Characteristics of obstacle lights
(04) State that information about lights to be displayed by aircraft X X X X X X
is provided in both ICAO Annex 2 (Rules of the Air) and SERA.
010 09 06 00 Visual aids for denoting restricted use of areas
010 09 06 01 Visual aids for denoting restricted use of areas on RWYs and
TWYs
(01) Describe the colours and meaning of ‘closed markings’ on X X X X X X
RWYs and TWYs.
7.1 Closed runways and taxiways, or parts thereof
Page 76 of 681
(02) State how the pilot of an aircraft moving on the surface of X X X X X X

a TWY, holding bay or apron shall be warned that the
shoulders of these surfaces are ‘non-load-bearing’.
7.2 Non-load-bearing surfaces
(03) Describe the pre-THR marking (including colours) when X X X X X X
the surface before the THR is not suitable for normal use
by aircraft.
7.3 Pre-threshold area
010 09 07 00 Aerodrome (AD) operational services, equipment and
installations
010 09 07 01 Rescue and firefighting (RFF)
(01) State the principal objective of RFF services. X X X X X X
9.2 Rescue and firefighting
(02) Explain the basic information the AD category (for RFF) X X X X X X
depends upon.
(03) Describe what is meant by the term ‘response time’, and X X X X X X
state its normal and maximum limits.
010 09 07 02 Apron management service
(01) State who has a right-of-way against vehicles operating on X X X X X X
an apron.
Page 77 of 681
9.5 Apron management service
010 09 07 03 Ground-servicing of aircraft

(01) Describe the necessary actions during the ground- X X X X X X
servicing of an aircraft with regard to the possible event of
a fuel fire.
9.6 Ground servicing of aircraft
010 09 08 00 Attachment A to ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1 —
Supplementary Guidance Material
010 09 08 01 Declared distances
(01) List the four types of ‘declared distances’ on a RWY and also X X X X X X
the appropriate abbreviations.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Attachment A,
3. Calculation of declared distances: 3.1
(02) Explain the circumstances which lead to the situation that X X X X X X
the four declared distances on a RWY are equal to the length
of the RWY.
3. Calculation of declared distances: 3.2
(03) Describe the influence of a CWY, SWY or displaced THR upon X X X X X X
the four ‘declared distances’.
3. Calculation of declared distances: 3.3; 3.4; 3.5
010 09 08 03 Approach lighting systems
(01) Name the two main groups of approach lighting systems. X X X X X X X
Page 78 of 681
12.1 Types and characteristics
(02) Describe the two different versions of a simple approach X X X X X X X

lighting system.
(03) Describe the two different basic versions of precision X X X X X X X
approach lighting systems for CAT I.
(04) Describe the diagram of the inner 300 m of the precision X
approach lighting system in the case of CAT II and III.
(05) Describe how the arrangement of an approach lighting X X X X X X X
system and the location of the appropriate THR are
interrelated.
010 10 00 00 FACILITATION (ICAO Annex 9)
010 10 02 00 Entry and departure of aircraft
010 10 02 01 General declaration
(01) Describe the purpose and use of aircraft documents as X X X X X
regards a ‘general declaration’.
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 2 Entry and departure of
aircraft, Section B Documents — requirements and use and
Section D Disinsection of aircraft
010 10 02 02 Entry and departure of crew
(01) Explain entry requirements for crew. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3, K. Entry procedures and
responsibilities; N. Identification and entry of crew and
other aircraft operators’ personnel
(02) Explain the reasons for the use of crew member certificates X X X X X
(CMC) for crew members engaged in international air
Page 79 of 681
transport.
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3, N. Identification and entry
of crew and other aircraft operators’ personnel
(03) Explain in which cases Contracting States should accept the X X X X X
CMC as an identity document instead of a passport or visa.
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3, N. Identification and entry
of crew and other aircraft operators’ personnel
010 10 02 03 Entry and departure of passengers and baggage
(01) Explain the entry requirements for passengers and their X X X X X
baggage.
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3 Entry and departure of
persons and their baggage:
A. General;
B. Documents required for travel;
F. Entry/re-entry visas;
P. Emergency assistance/entry visas in cases of force
majeure
(02) Explain the requirements and documentation for X X X X X
unaccompanied baggage.
Source:
ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3, M. Disposition of baggage
separated from its owner;
ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 4, C. Release and clearance of
export and import cargo
(03) Identify the documentation required for the departure and X X X X X
entry of passengers and their baggage.
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3. Entry and departure of
persons and their baggage
(04) Explain the arrangements in the event of a passenger being X X X X X
declared an inadmissible person.
Page 80 of 681
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 5, INADMISSIBLE

PERSONS AND DEPORTEES: A. General; B. Inadmissible
persons
(05) Describe the pilot’s authority towards unruly passengers. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 6, E. Unruly passengers
010 10 02 04 Entry and departure of cargo
(01) Explain the entry requirements for cargo. X X X X X
010 11 00 00 SEARCH AND RESCUE (SAR)
010 11 01 00 Essential SAR definitions
010 11 01 01 Essential SAR definitions — ICAO Annex 12
(01) Recall the definitions of the following terms: X X X X X
alert phase, distress phase, emergency phase, operator, PIC,
rescue coordination centre, State of Registry, uncertainty
phase.
010 11 02 00 SAR — Organisation
010 11 02 01 SAR — Organisation — Establishment and provision
(01) Describe how ICAO Contracting States shall arrange for the X X X X X
establishment and prompt provision of SAR services.
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 2
(02) Explain the establishment of SAR by Contracting States. X X X X X
(03) Describe the areas within which SAR services shall be X X X X X
established by Contracting States.
Page 81 of 681
(04) State the period of time per day within which SAR services X X X X X
shall be available.
(05) Describe for which areas rescue coordination centres shall be X X X X X
established.
010 11 03 00 Operating procedures for non-SAR crews
010 11 03 01 Operating procedures for non-SAR crews — PIC
(01) Explain the SAR operating procedures for the PIC who arrives X X X X X
first at the scene of an accident.
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 5, 5.6 Procedures at the
scene of an accident
(02) Explain the SAR operating procedures for the PIC intercepting X X X X X
a distress transmission.
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 5, 5.7 Procedures for a
pilot-in-command intercepting a distress transmission
010 11 04 00 Search and rescue signals
010 11 04 01 Search and rescue signals — Survivors
(01) Explain the ‘ground–air visual signal code’ for use by X X X X X
survivors.
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 5.8 Search and rescue
signals and Appendix
(02) Recognise the SAR ‘air-to-ground signals’ for use by survivors. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 5.8 Search and rescue
signals and Appendix
010 12 00 00 SECURITY — Safeguarding International Civil Aviation
against Acts of Unlawful Interference (ICAO Annex 17)
Page 82 of 681
010 12 01 00 Essential definitions of ICAO Annex 17

airside, aircraft security check, screening, security, security
control, security-restricted area, unidentified baggage.
010 12 02 00 General principles
010 12 02 01 General principles — Objectives of security
(01) State the objectives of security. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 2, 2.1 Objectives
010 12 04 00 Preventive security measures
010 12 04 01 Preventive security measures
(01) Describe the objects not allowed (for reasons of aviation X X X X X
security) on board an aircraft that is engaged in international
civil aviation.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 4, 4.1 Objective
(02) State what each Contracting State is supposed to do if X X X X X
passengers subjected to security control have mixed after a
security screening point.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 4, 4.4 Measures relating to
passengers and their cabin baggage
(03) Explain what has to be done when passengers who are X X X X X
obliged to travel because of judicial or administrative
proceedings are supposed to board an aircraft.
Page 83 of 681
special categories of passengers
(04) Explain what has to be considered if law enforcement X X X X X

officers carry weapons on board.
special categories of passengers
010 12 05 00 Management of response to acts of unlawful interference
010 12 05 01 Management of response to acts of unlawful interference
(01) Describe the assistance each Contracting State shall provide X X X X X
to an aircraft subjected to an act of unlawful seizure.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 5, 5.2 Response
(02) State the circumstances which could prevent a Contracting X X X X X
State from detaining an aircraft on the ground after being
subjected to an act of unlawful seizure.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 5, 5.2 Response
010 12 06 00 Operators’ security programme
010 12 06 01 Operators’ security programme — Principles
(01) Describe the principles of the written operator’s security X X X X X
programme each Contracting State requires from operators.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 3, 3.3 Aircraft operators
010 12 07 00 Security procedures in other documents, i.e. ICAO Annexes
2, 6 and 14, ICAO Doc 4444, Regulation (EU) No 965/2012
and CS-ADR-DSN
010 12 07 01 ICAO Annex 2 — Rules of the Air, including Attachment B —
Unlawful interference
(01) Describe what the PIC should do, in a situation of unlawful X X X X X
interference, unless considerations aboard the aircraft
dictate otherwise.
Page 84 of 681
Source: ICAO Annex 2, Chapter 3, 3.7 Unlawful interference
(02) Describe what the PIC, of an aircraft subjected to unlawful X X X X X

interference, should do if:
— the aircraft must depart from its assigned track;
— the aircraft must depart from its assigned cruising
level;
— the aircraft is unable to notify an ATS unit of the
unlawful interference.
Source: ICAO Annex 2, Attachment B ‘Unlawful interference’
(03) Describe what the PIC should attempt to do with regard to X X X X X
broadcast warnings and the level at which to proceed, in a
situation of unlawful interference, if no applicable regional
procedures for in-flight contingencies have been established.
Source: ICAO Annex 2, Attachment B ‘Unlawful interference’
010 12 07 02 ICAO Annex 6 — Operation of Aircraft
Chapter 13 — Security
(01) Describe the special considerations referring to flight crew X X X X X
compartment doors with regard to aviation security.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Chapter 13, 13.2 Security of the flight
crew compartment
010 12 07 03 ICAO Annex 14 Volume I — Aerodromes
Chapter 3 — Physical characteristics
(01) Describe what minimum distance an isolated aircraft parking X X X X X
position (after the aircraft has been subjected to unlawful
interference) should have from other parking positions,
buildings or public areas.
Source: ICAO Annex 14 Volume I, Chapter 3, 3.14 Isolated
aircraft parking position
Page 85 of 681
010 12 07 04 ICAO Doc 4444 — Air Traffic Management

(01) Describe the considerations that must take place with regard X X X X X
to a taxi clearance in case an aircraft is known or believed to
have been subjected to unlawful interference.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.1.3 Unlawful
interference and aircraft bomb threat
010 13 00 00 AIRCRAFT ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT INVESTIGATION
010 13 01 01 Definitions and descriptions
accident, aircraft, flight recorder, incident, investigation,
maximum mass, operator, serious incident, serious injury,
State of Design, State of Manufacture, State of Occurrence,
State of the Operator, State of Registry.
(02) Explain the difference between ‘serious incident’ and X X X X X
‘accident’.
Source: ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 1 Definitions and
Attachment C ‘List of examples of serious incidents’
(03) Determine whether a certain occurrence has to be defined as X X X X X
a serious incident or as an accident.
Source: ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 1 Definitions and
Attachment C ‘List of examples of serious incidents’
(04) Recognise the description of an accident or incident. X X X X X
010 13 02 00 Accident and incident investigation in ICAO Annex 13
Page 86 of 681
010 13 02 01 Objectives and procedures

(01) State the objective(s) of the investigation of an accident or X X X X X
incident according to ICAO Annex 13.
Source: ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 3, 3.1 Objective of the
investigation
(02) Describe the general procedures for the investigation of an X X X X X
accident or incident according to ICAO Annex 13.
Source:
ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 4, 4.1;
ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 5, 5.1 to 5.4.1
010 13 03 00 Accident and incident investigation in EU regulations
010 13 03 01 Occurrences
(01) Identify an occurrence as being either an accident, incident X X X X X
or serious incident in Regulation (EU) No 996/2010 of the
European Parliament and of the Council of 20 October
2010 on the investigation and prevention of accidents and
incidents in civil aviation.
Source: Regulation (EU) No 996/2010, Article 2(1), (7) and
(16) and Annex ‘List of examples of serious incidents’
(02) Describe the relationship between Regulation (EU) X X X X X
No 996/2010 of the European Parliament and of the
Council of 20 October 2010 on the investigation and
prevention of accidents and incidents in civil aviation and
Regulation (EU) No 376/2014 of the European Parliament
and of the Council of 3 April 2014 on the reporting,
analysis and follow-up of occurrences in civil aviation.
Source:
Regulation (EU) No 376/2014, p. L122/18 (3) and
Page 87 of 681
p. L122/21 (28);
Regulation (EU) No 996/2010
(03) State the subject matter and scope of Regulation (EU) X X X X X
No 376/2014 (Article 3).
Source: Regulation (EU) No 376/2014, Article 3
(04) Identify occurrences that must be reported (Regulation X X X X X
(EU) No 376/2014, Article 4).
(05) Identify occurrences that should be voluntarily reported X X X X X
(Regulation (EU) No 376/2014, Article 5).
(06) Describe how information from occurrences is collected, X X X X X
stored and analysed (Regulation (EU) No 376/2014,
Articles 6, 8, 13 and 14).
Source: Regulation (EU) No 376/2014, Articles 6, 8, 13
and 14
Page 88 of 681

Amendment 4’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 021 — AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE — AIRFRAME,
SYSTEMS AND POWER PLANT’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 89 of 681
SUBJECT 021 — AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE — AIRFRAME, SYSTEMS AND POWER PLANT
reference and EIR
ATPL CPL ATPL/ ATPL CPL
IR
020 00 00 00 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE
021 00 00 00 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE — AIRFRAME, SYSTEMS AND
POWER PLANT
021 01 00 00 SYSTEM DESIGN, LOADS, STRESSES, MAINTENANCE
021 01 01 00 System design
021 01 01 01 Design concepts
(01) X Describe the following structural design philosophy: X X X X X
— safe life;
— fail-safe (multiple load paths);
— damage-tolerant.
(02) Explain the purpose of redundancy in aircraft design. X X X X X
021 01 01 02 Level of certification
(01) X Explain why some systems are duplicated or triplicated. X X X X X
(02) X Explain that all aircraft are certified according to specifications X X X X X

determined by the competent authority, and that these
certification specifications cover aspects such as design,
material quality and build quality.
(03) X State that the certification specifications for aeroplanes issued X X
by EASA are:
— CS-23 for Normal, Utility, Aerobatic and Commuter
Aeroplanes;
Page 90 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
— CS-25 for Large Aeroplanes.
(04) X State that the certification specifications for rotorcraft issued by X X X
EASA are:
— CS-27 for Small Rotorcraft;
— CS-29 for Large Rotorcraft.
021 01 02 00 Loads and stresses
021 01 02 01 Stress, strain and loads
(01) Explain how stress and strain are always present in an aircraft X X X X X
structure both when parked and during manoeuvring.
Remark: Stress is the internal force per unit area inside a
structural part as a result of external loads. Strain is the
deformation caused by the action of stress on a material.
(02) Describe the following types of loads that an aircraft may be X X X X X
subjected to, when they occur, and how a pilot may affect their
magnitude:
— static loads;
— dynamic loads;
— cyclic loads.
(03) Describe the areas typically prone to stress that should be given X X X X X
particular attention during a pre-flight inspection, and highlight
the limited visual cues of any deformation that may be evident.
021 01 03 00 Fatigue and corrosion
021 01 03 01 Describe and explain fatigue and corrosion
(01) Describe the effects of corrosion and how it can be visually X X X X X
identified by a pilot during the pre-flight inspection.
Page 91 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(02) Describe the operating environments where the risk of X X X X X
corrosion is increased and how to minimise the effects of the
environmental factors.
(03) Explain that aircraft have highly corrosive fluids on board as part X X X X X
of their systems and equipment.
(04) Explain fatigue, how it affects the useful life of an aircraft, and X X X X X
the effect of the following factors on the development of
fatigue:
— corrosion;
— number of cycles;
— type of flight manoeuvres;
— stress level;
— level and quality of maintenance.
021 01 05 00 Maintenance
021 01 05 01 Maintenance methods: hard-time and on-condition monitoring
(01) Explain the following terms: X X X X X
— hard-time or fixed-time maintenance;
— on-condition maintenance;
— condition monitoring.
021 02 00 00 AIRFRAME
021 02 01 00 Attachment methods
021 02 01 01 Attachment methods and detecting the development of faulty
attachments
Page 92 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(01) Describe the following attachment methods used for aircraft parts X X X X X
and components:
— riveting;
— welding;
— bolting;
— pinning;
— adhesives (bonding);
— screwing.
(02) Explain how the development of a faulty attachment between X X X X X
aircraft parts or components can be detected by a pilot during
the pre-flight inspection.
021 02 02 00 Materials
021 02 02 01 Composite and other materials
(01) X Explain the principle of a composite material, and give examples X X X X X
of typical non-metallic materials used on aircraft:
— carbon;
— glass;
— Kevlar aramid;
— resin or filler.
(02) X State the advantages and disadvantages of composite materials X X X X X
compared with metal alloys by considering the following:
— strength-to-weight ratio;
— capability to tailor the strength to the direction of the load;
— stiffness;
— electrical conductivity (lightning);
— resistance to fatigue and corrosion;
Page 93 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
— resistance to cost;
— discovering damage during a pre-flight inspection.
(03) State that several types of materials are used on aircraft and X X X X X
that they are chosen based on type of structure or component
and the required/desired material properties.
021 02 03 00 Aeroplane: wings, tail surfaces and control surfaces
021 02 03 01 Design
(01) Describe the following types of design and explain their X X
advantages and disadvantages:
— high-mounted wing;
— low-mounted wing;
— low- or mid-set tailplane;
— T-tail.
021 02 03 02 Structural components
(01) Describe the function of the following structural components: X X
— spar and its components (web and girder or cap);
— rib;
— stringer;
— skin;
— torsion box.
021 02 03 03 Loads, stresses and aeroelastic vibrations (flutter)
(01) Describe the vertical and horizontal loads on the ground and X X
during normal flight.
(02) Describe the vertical and horizontal loads during asymmetric X X
flight following an engine failure for a multi-engine aeroplane,
Page 94 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
and how a pilot may potentially overstress the structure during
the failure scenario.
(03) Explain the principle of flutter and resonance for the wing and X X
control surfaces.
(04) Explain the following countermeasures used to achieve stress X X
relief and reduce resonance:
— chord-wise and span-wise position of masses (e.g. engines,
fuel, balance masses for wing and control balance masses);
— torsional stiffness;
— bending flexibility;
— fuel-balancing procedures during flight (automatic or applied
by the pilot).
021 02 04 00 Fuselage, landing gear, doors, floor, windscreen and windows
021 02 04 01 Construction, functions, loads
(01) X Describe the following types of fuselage construction: X X X X X
— monocoque,
— semi-monocoque.
(01) Describe the construction and the function of the following X X X X X
structural components of a fuselage:
— frames;
— bulkhead;
— pressure bulkhead;
— stiffeners, stringers, longerons;
— skin, doublers;
— floor suspension (crossbeams);
— floor panels;
Page 95 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
— firewall.
(03) Describe the loads on the fuselage due to pressurisation. X X
(04) Describe the following loads on a main landing gear: X X
— touch-down loads (vertical and horizontal);
— taxi loads on bogie gear (turns).
(05) Describe the structural danger of a nose-wheel landing with X X
respect to:
— fuselage loads;
— nose-wheel strut loads.
(06) Describe the structural danger of a tail strike with respect to: X X
— fuselage and aft bulkhead damage (pressurisation).
(07) Describe the door and hatch construction for pressurised and X X
unpressurised aeroplanes including:
— door and frame (plug type);
— hinge location;
— locking mechanism.
(08) X Explain the advantages and disadvantages of the following X X
fuselage cross sections:
— circular;
— double bubble;
— oval;
— rectangular.
(09) Explain why flight-deck windows are constructed with different X X
layers.
(10) Explain the function of window heating for structural purposes. X X
Page 96 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(11) Explain the implication of a direct-vision window X X
(see CS 25.773(b)(3)).
(12) Explain the need for an eye-reference position. X X
(13) Explain the function of floor venting (blow-out panels). X X
(14) Describe the construction and fitting of sliding doors. X X X
021 02 05 00 Helicopter: structural aspects of flight controls
021 02 05 01 Design and construction
(01) List the functions of flight controls. X X X
(02) Explain why vertical and horizontal stabilisers may have different X X X
shapes and alignments.
021 02 05 02 Structural components and materials
(01) Describe the fatigue life and methods of checking for serviceability X X X
of the components and materials of flight and control surfaces.
021 02 05 03 Loads, stresses and aeroelastic vibrations
(01) Describe the dangers and stresses regarding safety and X X X
serviceability in flight when the manufacturer’s design envelope is
exceeded.
(02) Explain that blade tracking is important both to minimise X X X
vibration and to help ensure uniformity of flow through the disc.
(03) Describe the early indications and vibrations which are likely to be X X X
experienced when the main-rotor blades and tail rotor are out of
balance or tracking, including the possible early indications due to
possible fatigue and overload.
Page 97 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(04) Explain how a vibration harmonic can be set up in other X X X
components which can lead to their early failure.
(05) State the three planes of vibration measurement, i.e. vertical, X X X
lateral, fore and aft.
021 02 06 00 Structural limitations
021 02 06 01 Maximum structural masses
(01) Define and explain the following maximum structural masses: X X
— maximum ramp mass;
— maximum take-off mass;
— maximum zero fuel mass;
— maximum landing mass.
Remark: These limitations may also be found in the relevant part of
Subjects 031 ‘Mass and balance’, 032 ‘Performance (aeroplane)’
and 034 ‘Performance (helicopter)’.
(02) Explain that airframe life is limited by fatigue, created by X X
alternating stress and the number of load cycles.
(03) Explain the maximum structural masses: X X X
— maximum take-off mass.
(04) Explain that airframe life is limited by fatigue, created by load X X X
cycles.
021 03 00 00 HYDRAULICS
021 03 01 00 Hydromechanics: basic principles
021 03 01 01 Concepts and basic principles
(01) X Explain the concept and basic principles of hydromechanics X X X X X
Page 98 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
including:
— hydrostatic pressure;
— Pascal’s law;
— the relationship between pressure, force and area;
— transmission of power: multiplication of force, decrease of
displacement.
021 03 02 00 Hydraulic systems
021 03 02 01 Hydraulic fluids: types, characteristics, limitations
(01) X List and explain the desirable properties of a hydraulic fluid with X X X X X
regard to:
— thermal stability;
— corrosiveness;
— flashpoint and flammability;
— volatility;
— viscosity.
(02) X State that hydraulic fluids are irritating to skin and eyes. X X X X X
(03) List the two different types of hydraulic fluids: X X X X X
— synthetic;
— mineral.
(04) State that different types of hydraulic fluids cannot be mixed. X X X X X
(05) X State that at the pressures being considered, hydraulic fluid is X X X X X
considered incompressible.
021 03 02 02 System components: design, operation, degraded modes of
operation, indications and warnings
Page 99 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(01) Explain the working principle of a hydraulic system. X X X X X
(02) Describe the difference in the principle of operation between a X X X X X
constant pressure system and a system pressurised only on
specific demand.
(03) State the differences in the principle of operation between a X X X X X
passive hydraulic system (without a pressure pump) and an active
hydraulic system (with a pressure pump).
(04) X List the main advantages and disadvantages of system actuation by X X X X X
hydraulic or purely mechanical means with respect to:
— weight;
— size;
— force.
(05) List the main uses of hydraulic systems. X X X X X
(06) State that hydraulic systems can be classified as either high X X X X X
pressure (typically 3000 psi or higher) or low pressure (typically up
to 2000 psi).
(07) State that a high-pressure hydraulic system is typically operating at X X X X X
3000 psi but on some aircraft a hydraulic pressure of 4000 to
5000 psi may also be used.
(08) Explain the working principle of a low-pressure (0–2000 psi) X X X X X
system.
(09) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a high-pressure X X X X X
system over a low-pressure system.
(10) Describe the working principle and functions of pressure pumps X X X X X
including:
— constant pressure pump (swash plate or cam plate);
Page 100 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— pressure pump whose output is dependent on pump
revolutions per minute (rpm) (gear type).
(11) Explain the following different sources of hydraulic pressure, X X
their typical application and potential operational limitations:
— manual;
— engine gearbox;
— electrical;
— air (pneumatic and ram-air turbine);
— hydraulic (power transfer unit) or reversible motor pumps;
— accessory.
(12) Explain the following different sources of hydraulic pressure, X X X
their typical application and potential operational limitations:
— manual;
— engine;
— gearbox;
— electrical.
(13) Describe the working principle and functions of the following X X X X X
hydraulic system components:
— reservoir (pressurised and unpressurised);
— accumulators;
— case drain lines and fluid cooler return lines;
— piston actuators (single- and double-acting);
— hydraulic motors;
— filters;
— non-return (check) valves;
— relief valves;
Page 101 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— restrictor valves;
— elector valves (linear and basic rotary selectors, two and four
ports);
— bypass valves;
— shuttle valves;
— fire shut-off valves;
— priority valves;
— fuse valves;
— pressure and return pipes.
(14) Explain the function of the demand pump installed on many X X
transport aeroplanes.
(15) Explain how redundancy is obtained by giving examples. X X X X X
(16) Interpret a typical hydraulic system schematic to the level of X X X X X
detail as found in an aircraft flight crew operating manual
(FCOM).
(17) Explain the implication of a high system demand. X X X X X
(18) List and describe the instruments and alerts for monitoring a X X X X X
hydraulic system.
(19) State the indications and explain the implications of the following X X X X X
malfunctions:
— system leak or low level;
— low pressure;
— high temperature.
021 04 00 00 LANDING GEAR, WHEELS, TYRES, BRAKES
021 04 01 00 Landing gear
Page 102 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 04 01 01 Types
(01) X Name, for an aeroplane, the following different landing-gear X X
configurations:
— nose wheel;
— tail wheel.
(02) X Name, for a helicopter, the following different landing-gear X X X
configurations:
— nose wheel;
— tail wheel;
— skids.
021 04 01 02 System components, design, operation, indications and warnings,
on-ground/in-flight protections, emergency extension systems
(01) Explain the function of the following components of a landing gear: X X
— oleo leg/shock strut;
— axles;
— bogies and bogie beam;
— drag struts;
— side stays/struts;
— torsion links;
— locks (over centre);
— gear doors.
(02) Explain the function of the following components of a landing gear: X X X
— oleo leg/shock strut;
— axles;
— drag struts;
— side stays/struts;
Page 103 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
— torsion links;
— locks (over centre);
— gear doors.
(03) Name the different components of a landing gear, using the X X X X X
diagram appended to these LOs (021).
(04) Describe the sequence of events during normal operation of the X X X X X
landing gear.
(05) State how landing-gear position indication and alerting is X X X X X
implemented.
(06) Describe the various protection devices to avoid inadvertent gear X X X X X
retraction on the ground and explain the implications of taking off
with one or more protection devices in place:
— ground lock (pins);
— protection devices in the gear retraction mechanism.
(07) Explain the speed limitations for gear operation (VLO (maximum X X X X X
landing gear operating speed) and VLE (maximum landing gear
extended speed)).
(08) Describe the sequence for emergency gear extension: X X X X X
— unlocking;
— operating;
— down-locking.
(09) Describe some methods for emergency gear extension including: X X X X X
— gravity/free fall;
— air or nitrogen pressure;
— manually/mechanically.
021 04 02 00 Nose-wheel steering
Page 104 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 04 02 01 Design, operation
(01) Explain the operating principle of nose-wheel steering. X X X X X
(02) Explain, for a helicopter, the functioning of differential braking with X X X
free-castoring nose wheel.
(03) Describe, for an aeroplane, the functioning of the following X X
systems:
— differential braking with free-castoring nose wheel;
— tiller or hand wheel steering;
— rudder pedal nose-wheel steering.
(04) Explain the centring mechanism of the nose wheel. X X X X X
(05) Define the term ‘shimmy’ and the possible consequences of X X
shimmy for the nose- and the main-wheel system and explain the
purpose of a shimmy damper to reduce the severity of shimmy.
(06) Explain the purpose of main-wheel (body) steering. X X
021 04 03 00 Brakes
021 04 03 01 Types and materials
(01) Describe the basic operating principle of a disc brake. X X X X X
(02) State the different materials used in a disc brake (steel, carbon). X X X X X
(03) Describe the characteristics, advantages and disadvantages of X X X X X
steel and carbon brake discs with regard to:
— weight;
— temperature limits;
— internal-friction coefficient;
Page 105 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— wear.
021 04 03 02 System components, design, operation, indications and warnings
(01) Explain the limitation of brake energy and describe the operational X X
consequences.
(02) Explain how brakes are actuated: X X X X X
— hydraulically,
— electrically.
(03) Explain the purpose of an in-flight wheel brake system. X X
(04) Describe the function of a brake accumulator. X X X X X
(05) Describe the function of the parking brake. X X X X X
(06) Explain the function of brake-wear indicators. X X
(07) Explain the reason for the brake-temperature indicator. X X
021 04 03 03 Anti-skid
(01) Describe the operating principle of anti-skid where excessive brake X X
pressure applied is automatically reduced for optimum breaking
performance.
(02) Explain that the anti-skid computer compares wheel speed to X X
aeroplane reference speed to provide the following:
— slip ratio for maximum braking performance;
— locked-wheel prevention (protection against deep skid on one
wheel);
— touchdown protection (protection against brake-pressure
application during touchdown);
— hydroplane protection.
Page 106 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(03) Give examples of the impact of an anti-skid system on X X
performance, and explain the implications of anti-skid system
failure.
021 04 03 04 Autobrake
(01) Describe the operating principle of an autobrake system. X X
(02) Explain why the anti-skid system must be available when using X X
autobrakes.
(03) Explain the difference between the three modes of operation of an X X
autobrake system:
— OFF (system off or reset);
— Armed (the system is ready to operate under certain
conditions);
— Activated/Deactivated (application of pressure on brakes).
(04) Describe how an autobrake system setting will either apply X X
maximum braking (RTO or MAX) or result in a given rate of
deceleration, where the amount of braking applied may be
affected by:
— the use of reverse thrust;
— slippery runway.
021 04 04 00 Wheels, rims and tyres
021 04 04 01 Types, structural components and materials, operational
limitations, thermal plugs
(01) X Describe the different types of tyres such as: X X X X X
— tubeless;
— diagonal (cross ply);
Page 107 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— radial (circumferential bias).
(02) X Define the following terms: X X X X X
— ply rating;
— tyre tread;
— tyre creep;
— retread (cover).
(03) Explain the function of thermal/fusible plugs. X X
(04) Explain the implications of and how to identify tread separation X X
and wear or damage with associated increased risk of tyre burst.
(05) Explain why the ground speed of tyres is limited. X X
(06) Describe the following tyre checks a pilot will perform during X X
the pre-flight inspection and identify probable causes:
— cuts and damages;
— flat spots.
021 04 05 00 Helicopter equipment
021 04 05 01 Flotation devices
(01) Explain flotation devices, how they are operated, and their X X X
limitations.
(02) Explain why indicated airspeed (IAS) limitations before, during and X X X
after flotation-device deployment must be observed.
021 05 00 00 FLIGHT CONTROLS
021 05 01 00 Aeroplane: primary flight controls
021 05 01 01 Definition and control surfaces
Page 108 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Define a ‘primary flight control’. X X
(02) List the following primary flight control surfaces: X X
— elevator;
— aileron, roll spoilers, flaperon;
— rudder.
(03) List the various means of control surface actuation including: X X
— manual;
— fully powered (irreversible);
— partially powered (reversible).
021 05 01 02 Manual controls
(01) Explain the basic principle of a fully manual control system. X X
021 05 01 03 Fully powered controls (irreversible)
(01) Explain the basic principle of a fully powered control system. X X
(02) Explain the concept of irreversibility in a flight control system. X X
(03) Explain the need for a ‘feel system’ in a fully powered control X X
system.
(04) Explain the operating principle of a stabiliser trim system in a fully X X
powered control system.
(05) Explain the operating principle of rudder and aileron trim in a fully X X
powered control system.
021 05 01 04 Partially powered controls (reversible)
(01) Explain the basic principle of a partially powered control system. X X
Page 109 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) Explain why a ‘feel system’ is not necessary in a partially powered X X
control system.
021 05 01 05 System components, design, operation, indications and warnings,
degraded modes of operation, jamming
(01) List and describe the function of the following components of a X X
flight control system:
— actuators;
— control valves;
— cables;
— electrical wiring;
— control surface position sensors.
(02) Explain how redundancy is obtained in primary flight control X X
systems of large transport aeroplanes.
(03) Explain the danger of control jamming and the means of retaining X X
sufficient control capability.
(04) Explain the methods of locking the controls on the ground and X X
describe ‘gust or control lock’ warnings.
(05) Explain the concept of a rudder deflection limitation (rudder X X
limiter) system and the various means of implementation (rudder
ratio changer, variable stops, blow-back).
021 05 02 00 Aeroplane: secondary flight controls
021 05 02 01 System components, design, operation, degraded modes of
(01) Define a ‘secondary flight control’. X X
(02) List the following secondary flight control surfaces: X X
Page 110 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— lift-augmentation devices (flaps and slats);
— speed brakes;
— flight and ground spoilers;
— trimming devices such as trim tabs, trimmable horizontal
stabiliser.
(03) Describe secondary flight control actuation methods and sources X X
of actuating power.
(04) Explain the function of a mechanical lock when using hydraulic X X
motors driving a screw jack.
(05) Describe the requirement for limiting flight speeds for the various X X
secondary flight control surfaces.
(06) For lift-augmentation devices, explain the load-limiting (relief) X X
protection devices and the functioning of an auto-retraction
system.
(07) Explain how a flap/slat asymmetry protection device functions, X X
and describe the implications of a flap/slat asymmetry situation.
(08) Describe the function of an auto-slat system. X X
(09) Explain the concept of control surface blow-back (aerodynamic X X
forces overruling hydraulic forces).
021 05 03 00 Helicopter: flight controls
021 05 03 01 Droop stops, control systems, trim systems, control stops
(01) Explain the methods of locking the controls on the ground. X X X
(02) Describe main-rotor droop stops and how rotor flapping is X X X
restricted.
Page 111 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(03) Explain the principle of phase lag and advance angle. X X X
(04) Describe the following four axes of control operation, their X X X
operating principle and their associated cockpit controls:
— collective control;
— cyclic fore and aft (pitch axis);
— cyclic lateral (roll axis);
— yaw.
(05) Describe the swash plate or azimuth star control system including X X X
the following:
— swash plate inputs;
— the function of the non-rotating swash plate;
— the function of the rotating swash plate;
— how swash plate tilt is achieved;
— swash plate pitch axis;
— swash plate roll axis;
— balancing of pitch/roll/collective inputs to the swash plate to
equalise torsional loads on the blades.
(06) Describe the operation of the spider control system. X X X
(07) State the need for artificial feel in a hydraulically actuated flight X X X
control system.
(08) Describe and explain the purpose of a trim system using the X X X
following terms:
— force-trim switch;
— force gradient;
— parallel trim actuator;
— cyclic 4-way trim switch;
Page 112 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
— interaction of trim system with an SAS/SCAS/ASS stability
system;
— trim-motor indicators.
(09) Describe the different types of control runs. X X X
(10) Explain the use of control stops. X X X
021 05 04 00 Aeroplane: fly-by-wire (FBW) control systems
021 05 04 01 Composition, explanation of operation, modes of operation
(01) Explain that an FBW flight control system is composed of the X X
following:
— pilot’s input command (control column/sidestick/rudder
pedals);
— electrical signalling paths, including:
 pilot input to computer;
 computer to flight control surfaces;
 feedback from aircraft response to computer;
— flight control computers;
— actuators;
— flight control surfaces.
(02) State the advantages and disadvantages of an FBW system in X X
comparison with a conventional flight control system including:
— weight;
— pilot workload;
— flight-envelope protection.
(03) Explain why an FBW system is always irreversible. X X
Page 113 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(04) Explain the different modes of operation: X X
— normal operation (e.g. normal law or normal mode);
— downgraded operation (e.g. alternate law or secondary
mode);
— direct law.
(05) Describe the implications of mode degradation in relation to X X
pilot workload and flight-envelope protection.
(06) Describe the implications for pilot workload during flight in X X
normal operation (normal law/normal mode) during the
following scenarios:
— an undetected system error activates the envelope
protection;
— aircraft departs from intended flight path;
— aircraft does not respond as expected to control inputs.
(07) For aircraft using sidestick for manual control, describe the X X
implications of:
— dual control input made by the pilot;
— the control takeover facility available to the pilot.
(08) Describe solutions or actions to regain control. X X
021 05 05 00 Helicopter: fly-by-wire (FBW) control systems

To be introduced at a later date. X X X
021 06 00 00 PNEUMATICS — PRESSURISATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING
SYSTEMS
021 06 01 00 Pneumatic/bleed-air supply
Page 114 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 06 01 01 Piston-engine air supply
(01) Describe the following means of supplying air for the pneumatic X X X X X
systems for piston-engine aircraft:
— compressor;
— vacuum pump.
(02) State that an air supply is required for the following systems: X X X X X
— instrumentation;
— heating;
— de-icing.
021 06 01 02 Gas turbine engine: bleed-air supply
(01) State that the possible bleed-air sources for gas turbine engine X X X X X
aircraft are the following:
— engine;
— auxiliary power unit (APU);
— ground supply.
(02) State that for an aeroplane a bleed-air supply can be used for the X X
following systems or components:
— ice protection;
— engine air starter;
— pressurisation of a hydraulic reservoir;
— air-driven hydraulic pumps;
— pressurisation and air conditioning.
(03) State that for a helicopter a bleed-air supply can be used for the X X X
following systems or components:
— anti-icing;
Page 115 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— engine air starter;
— pressurisation of a hydraulic reservoir.
(04) State that the bleed-air supply system can comprise the following: X X X X X
— pneumatic ducts;
— isolation valve;
— pressure-regulating valve;
— engine bleed valve (HP/IP valves);
— fan-air pre-cooler;
— temperature and pressure sensors.
(05) Interpret a basic pneumatic system schematic to the level of detail X X X X X
as found in an FCOM.
(06) Describe the cockpit indications for bleed-air systems. X X X X X
(07) Explain how the bleed-air supply system is controlled and X X X X X
monitored.
(08) State the following bleed-air malfunctions: X X X X X
— over-temperature;
— over-pressure;
— low pressure;
— overheat/duct leak;
and describe the potential consequences.
021 06 02 00 Helicopter: air-conditioning systems
021 06 02 01 Types, system components, design, operation, degraded modes
of operation, indications and warnings
(01) Describe the purpose of an air-conditioning system. X X X
Page 116 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) Explain how an air-conditioning system is controlled. X X X
(03) Describe the vapour cycle air-conditioning system including system X X X
components, design, operation, degraded modes of operation and
system malfunction indications.
(04) Identify the following components from a diagram of an air- X X X
conditioning system and describe the operating principle and
function:
— air-cycle machine (pack, bootstrap system);
— pack-cooling fan;
— water separator;
— mixing valves;
— flow-control valves;
— isolation valves;
— recirculation fans;
— filters for recirculation;
— temperature sensors.
(05) List and describe the controls, indications and warnings related to X X X
an air-conditioning system.
021 06 03 00 Aeroplane: pressurisation and air-conditioning system
021 06 03 01 System components, design, operation, degraded modes of
(01) Explain that a pressurisation and an air-conditioning system of an X X
aeroplane controls:
— ventilation;
— temperature;
— pressure.
Page 117 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) Explain how humidity is controlled. X X
(03) Explain that the following components constitute a pressurisation X X
system:
— pneumatic system as the power source;
— outflow valve;
— outflow valve actuator;
— pressure controller;
— excessive differential pressure-relief valve;
— negative differential pressure-relief valve.
(04) Explain that the following components constitute an X X
air-conditioning system and describe their operating principles and
function:
— air-cycle machine (pack, bootstrap system);
— pack-cooling fan;
— water separator;
— mixing valves;
— flow-control valves (outflow valve);
— isolation valves;
— ram-air valve;
— recirculation fans;
— filters for recirculated air;
— temperature sensors.
Remark: The bootstrap system is the only air-conditioning system
considered for Part-FCL aeroplane examinations.
(05) Describe the use of hot trim air. X X
Page 118 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(06) Define the following terms: X X
— cabin altitude;
— cabin vertical speed;
— differential pressure;
— ground pressurisation.
(07) Describe the operating principle of a pressurisation system. X X
(08) Describe the emergency operation by manual setting of the X X
outflow valve position.
(09) Describe the working principle of an electronic cabin-pressure X X
controller.
(10) State how the maximum operating altitude is determined. X X
(11) Explain: X X
— why the maximum allowed value of cabin altitude is limited;
— a typical value of maximum differential pressure for large
transport aeroplanes;
— the relation between cabin altitude, the maximum differential
pressure and maximum aeroplane operating altitude.
(12) Explain the typical warning on a transport category aircraft when X X
cabin altitude exceeds 10 000 ft.
(13) List and interpret typical indications of the pressurisation system. X X
(14) Describe the main operational differences between a bleed-air- X X
driven air-conditioning system and an electrically driven air-
conditioning system as found on aircraft without engine bleed-air
system.
021 07 00 00 ANTI-ICING AND DE-ICING SYSTEMS
Page 119 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 07 01 00 Types, operation, indications
021 07 01 01 Types, design, operation, indications and warnings, operational
limitations
(01) Explain the concepts of anti-icing and de-icing. X X X X X
(02) Name the components of an aircraft which can be protected from X X X X X
ice accretion.
(03) State that on some aeroplanes the tail does not have an ice- X X
protection system.
(04) State the different types of anti-icing/de-icing systems and X X X X X
describe their operating principle:
— hot air;
— electrical;
— fluid.
(05) Describe the operating principle of the inflatable boot de-icing X X
system.
021 07 02 00 Ice warning systems
021 07 02 01 Types, operation, and indications
(01) Describe the different operating principles of the following ice X X
detectors:
— mechanical systems using air pressure;
— electromechanical systems using resonance frequencies.
(02) Describe the principle of operation of ice warning systems. X X
021 07 03 00 Helicopter blade heating systems
Page 120 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 07 03 01 Limitations
(01) Explain the limitations on blade heating and the fact that on some X X X
helicopters the heating does not heat all the main-rotor blades at
the same time.
021 08 00 00 FUEL SYSTEM
021 08 01 00 Piston engine
021 08 01 01 Fuel: types, characteristics, limitations
(01) State the types of fuel used by a piston engine and their associated X X X X X
limitations:
— diesel;
— JET-A1 (for high-compression engines);
— AVGAS;
— MOGAS.
(02) State the main characteristics of these fuels and give typical values X X X X X
regarding their flash points, freezing points and density.
021 08 01 02 Design, operation, system components, indications
(01) State the tasks of the fuel system. X X X X X
(02) Name the following main components of a fuel system, and state X X X X X
their location and their function:
— lines;
— boost pump;
— pressure valves;
— filter, strainer;
— tanks (wing, tip, fuselage);
Page 121 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— vent system;
— sump;
— drain;
— fuel-quantity sensor;
— fuel-temperature sensor.
(03) Describe a gravity fuel feed system and a pressure feed fuel X X X X X
system.
(04) Describe the construction of the different types of fuel tanks and X X X X X
state their advantages and disadvantages:
— drum tank;
— bladder tank;
— integral tank.
(05) Explain the function of cross-feed. X X X X X
(06) Define the term ‘unusable fuel’. X X X X X
(07) List the following parameters that are monitored for the fuel X X X X X
system:
— fuel quantity (low-level warning);
— fuel temperature.
021 08 02 00 Turbine engine
021 08 02 01 Fuel: types, characteristics, limitations
(01) State the types of fuel used by a gas turbine engine: X X X X X
— JET-A;
— JET-A1;
— JET-B.
Page 122 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) State the main characteristics of these fuels and give typical values X X X X X
regarding their flash points, freezing points and density.
(03) State the existence of additives for freezing. X X X X X
021 08 02 02 Design, operation, system components, indications
(01) Explain the function of the fuel system: X X X X X
— lines;
— centrifugal boost pump;
— pressure valves;
— fuel shut-off valve;
— filter, strainer;
— tanks (wing, tip, fuselage, tail);
— bafflers/baffles;
— sump;
— vent system;
— drain;
— fuel-quantity sensor;
— fuel-temperature sensor;
— refuelling/defueling system;
— fuel dump/jettison system.
(02) Name the main components of the fuel system and state their X X X X X
location and their function:
— trim fuel tanks;
— bafflers;
— refuelling/defueling system;
— fuel dump/jettison system.
Page 123 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Remark: For completion of list, please see 021 08 01 02 (02).
(03) Interpret a typical fuel system schematic to the level of detail as X X X X X
found in an aircraft FCOM.
(04) Explain the limitations in the event of loss of booster pump fuel X X X X X
pressure.
(05) Describe the use and purpose of drip sticks (manual magnetic X X
indicators) (may also be known as dip stick or drop stick).
(06) Explain the considerations for fitting a fuel dump/jettison system X X X X X
and, if fitted, its function.
021 09 00 00 ELECTRICS
Remark: For any reference to the direction of current flow, the
conventional current flow shall be used, i.e. from positive to
negative.
021 09 01 00 General, definitions, basic applications: circuit breakers, logic
circuits
021 09 01 01 Static electricity
(01) Explain static electricity and describe the flying conditions where X X X X X
aircraft are most susceptible to build-up of static electricity.
(02) Describe a static discharger and explain the following: X X X X X
— its purpose;
— typical locations;
— pilot’s role of observing it during pre-flight inspection.
(03) Explain why an aircraft must first be grounded before X X X X X
refuelling/defueling.
(04) Explain the reason for electrical bonding. X X X X X
Page 124 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 09 01 02 Direct current (DC)
(01) Explain the term ‘direct current’ (DC), and state that current can X X X X X
only flow in a closed circuit.
(02) X Explain the basic principles of conductivity and give examples of X X X X X
conductors, semiconductors and insulators.
(03) Describe the difference in use of the following mechanical X X X X X
switches and explain the difference in observing their state (e.g.
ON/OFF), and why some switches are guarded:
— toggle switch;
— rocker switch;
— pushbutton switch;
— rotary switch.
Explain the difference in observing their state (e.g. ON/OFF) and
why some switches are guarded.
(04) Define voltage and current, and state their unit of measurement. X X X X X
(05) X Explain Ohm’s law in qualitative terms. X X X X X
(06) X Explain the effect on total resistance when resistors are connected X X X X X
in series or in parallel.
(07) X State that resistances can have a positive or a negative X X X X X
temperature coefficient (PTC/NTC) and state their use.
(08) Define electrical power and state the unit of measurement. X X X X X
021 09 01 03 Alternating current (AC)
(01) X Explain the term ‘alternating current’ (AC), and compare its use to X X X X X
DC with regard to complexity.
Page 125 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) Define the term ‘phase’, and explain the basic principle of single- X X X X X
phase and three-phase AC.
(03) State that aircraft can use single-phase or three-phase AC. X X X X X
(04) Define frequency and state the unit of measurement. X X X X X
(05) X Define ‘phase shift’ in qualitative terms. X X X X X
021 09 01 06 Electromagnetism
(01) State that an electrical current produces a magnetic field. X X X X X
(02) Describe how the strength of the magnetic field changes with the X X X X X
magnitude of the current.
(03) Explain the purpose and the working principle of a solenoid. X X X X X
(04) Explain the purpose and the working principle of a relay. X X X X X
(05) Explain the principle of electromagnetic induction and how two X X X X X
electrical components or systems may affect each other through
this principle.
021 09 01 07 Circuit protection
(01) Explain the working principle of a fuse and a circuit breaker. X X X X X
(02) Explain how a fuse is rated. X X X X X
(03) Describe the principal difference between the following types of X X X X X
circuit breakers:
Page 126 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— thermal circuit breaker sensing magnitude of current;
— magnetic circuit breaker sensing direction of current.
(04) Describe how circuit breakers may be used to reset aircraft X X X X X
systems/computers in the event of system failure (when part of
a described procedure).
(05) Explain a short circuit in practical terms using Ohm’s Law, power X X X X X
and energy expressions highlighting the risk of fire due to power
transfer and extreme energy dissipation.
(06) Explain the risk of fire resulting from excessive heat in a circuit X X X X X
subjected to overcurrent.
(07) Explain that overcurrent situations may be transient. X X X X X
(08) Explain the hazards of multiple resets of a circuit breaker or the X X X X X

use of incorrect fuse rating when replacing blown fuses.
021 09 01 08 Semiconductors and logic circuits
(01) Describe the effect of temperature on semiconductors with regard X X X X X
to function and longevity of the component.
(02) Describe the following five basic logic functions, as used in aircraft X X X X X
FCOM documentation, and recognise their schematic symbols
according to the ANSI/MIL standard:
— AND;
— OR;
— NOT;
— NOR;
— NAND.
(03) Interpret a typical logic circuit schematic to the level of detail as X X X X X
found in an aircraft FCOM.
Page 127 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 09 02 00 Batteries
021 09 02 01 Types, characteristics and limitations
(01) State the function of an aircraft battery. X X X X X
(02) Name the types of rechargeable batteries used in aircraft: X X X X X
— lead-acid;
— nickel-cadmium;
— lithium-ion;
— lithium-polymer.
(03) Compare the different battery types with respect to: X X X X X
— load behaviour;
— charging characteristics;
— risk of thermal runaway.
(04) Explain the term ‘cell voltage’ and describe how a battery may X X X X X
consist of several cells that combined provide the desirable voltage
and capacity.
(05) Explain the difference between battery voltage and charging X X X X X
voltage.
(06) Define the term ‘capacity of batteries’ and state the unit of X X X X X
measurement used.
(07) State the effect of temperature on battery capacity and X X X X X
performance.
(08) State that in the case of loss of all generated power (battery power X X X X X
only) the remaining electrical power is time-limited.
(09) Explain how lithium-type batteries pose a threat to aircraft X X X X X
safety and what affects this risk:
Page 128 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— numbers of batteries on board an aircraft including those
brought on board by passengers;
— temperature, of both battery and environment;
— physical condition of the battery;
— battery charging.
(10) Describe how to contain a battery thermal runaway highlighting X X X X X
the following:
— how one cell can affect the neighbouring cells;
— challenges if it happens in an aircraft during flight.
021 09 03 00 Generation
Remark: For standardisation purposes, the following standard X X X X X
expressions are used:
— DC generator: produces DC output;
— DC alternator: produces AC, rectified by integrated rectifying
unit, the output is DC;
— DC alternator: producing a DC output by using a rectifier;
— AC generator: produces AC output;
— starter generator: integrated combination of a generator and
a starter motor;
— permanent magnet alternator/ generator: self-exciting AC
generator.
021 09 03 01 DC generation
(01) Describe the basic working principle of a simple DC generator or X X X X X
DC alternator.
(02) Explain the principle of voltage control and why it is required. X X X X X
Page 129 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(03) Explain the purpose of reverse current protection from the X X X X X
battery/busbar to the alternator.
(04) Describe the basic operating principle of a starter generator and X X X X X
state its purpose.
021 09 03 02 AC generation
(01) Describe the working principle of a brushless three-phase AC X X X X X
generator.
(02) State that the generator field current is used to control voltage. X X X X X
(03) State the relationship between output frequency and the rpm of a X X X X X
three-phase AC generator.
(04) Explain the term ‘frequency wild generator’. X X X X X
(05) List the following different power sources that can be used for an X X
aeroplane to drive an AC generator:
— engine;
— APU;
— RAT;
— hydraulic.
(06) List the following different power sources that can be used for a X X X
helicopter to drive an AC generator:
— engine;
— APU;
— gearbox.
021 09 03 03 Constant speed drive (CSD) and integrated drive generator (IDG)
systems
(01) Describe the function of a CSD. X X
Page 130 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) Explain the parameters of a CSD that are monitored. X X
(03) Describe the function of an IDG. X X
(04) Explain the consequences of a mechanical disconnection during X X
flight for a CSD and an IDG.
(05) Explain that a CSD/IDG has its own, independent oil system and X X
how a leak from this may appear as an engine oil leak.
021 09 03 04 Transformers, transformer rectifier units (TRUs), static inverters
(01) State the function of a transformer. X X X X X
(02) State the function of a TRU and its purpose, including type of X X X X X
output.
(03) State the function of a static inverter and its purpose, including X X X X X
type of output.
021 09 04 00 Distribution
021 09 04 01 General
(01) Explain the function of a busbar. X X X X X
(02) Describe the function of the following buses: X X X X X
— AC bus;
— DC bus;
— emergency AC or DC bus;
— essential AC or DC bus;
— battery bus;
— hot bus, ground servicing or maintenance bus.
(03) State that the aircraft structure can be used as a part of the X X X X X
Page 131 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
electrical circuit (common earth) and explain the implications for
electrical bonding.
(04) Explain the function of external power. X X X X X
(05) State that a priority sequence exists between the different sources X X X X X
of electrical power on ground and in flight.
(06) Explain the term ‘load sharing’. X X X X X
(07) Explain the term ‘load shedding’. X X X X X
(08) Describe typical systems that can be shed in the event of a X X X X X
supply failure, such as passenger entertainment system and
galley power.
(09) Interpret a typical electrical system schematic to the level of X X X X X
detail as found in an aircraft FCOM.
(10) Explain the difference between a supply (e.g. generator) failure X X X X X
and a bus failure, and the operating consequences of either.
021 09 04 02 DC distribution
(01) Describe a simple DC electrical system of a single-engine aircraft. X X X X X
(02) Describe a DC electrical system of a multi-engine aircraft X X X X X
(CS-23/CS-27) including the distribution consequences of loss of
generator(s) or bus failure.
(03) Describe the DC part of an electrical system of a transport aircraft X X X X X
(CS-25/CS-29) including the distribution consequences of loss of
DC supply or bus failure.
(04) Give examples of DC consumers. X X X X X
021 09 04 03 AC distribution
Page 132 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Explain the difference in the principle of operation for a split AC X X X X X
electrical system and a parallel AC electrical system.
(02) Describe the following distribution consequences: X X X X X
— power transfer between different power supplies;
— power transfer in the event of a supply failure;
— loss of all normal AC supplies.
(03) Give examples of AC consumers. X X X X X
(04) Explain the conditions to be met for paralleling AC generators. X X X X X
(05) State that volt-ampere (VA) is the unit for total power consumed in X X X X X
an AC system.
021 09 04 04 Electrical load management and monitoring systems: automatic
generators and bus switching during normal and failure
(01) Give examples of system control, monitoring and annunciators X X X X X
using the following terms:
— generator control unit (GCU) for monitoring generator output
and providing network protection;
— exciter contactor/breaker/relay for control of generator
exciter field;
— generator contactor/breaker/relay for connecting the
generator to the network;
— bus-tie contactor/breaker/relay for connecting busbars
together;
— generator switch on the flight deck for manual control of
exciter contactor;
— IDG/CSD disconnect switch on the flight deck for mechanical
Page 133 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
disconnection of the generator;
— bus-tie switch on the flight deck with AUTO and OFF positions
only.
(02) Describe, for normal and degraded modes of operation, the X X X X X
following functions of an electrical load management system on
ground and in flight using the terms in 021 09 04 04 (01):
— distribution;
— monitoring;
— protection in the event of incorrect voltage;
— protection in the event of incorrect frequency;
— protection in the event of a differential fault.
(03) Describe the requirement for monitoring the aircraft batteries. X X X X X
(04) Explain the importance of monitoring the temperature of nickel- X X X X X
cadmium and lithium-type batteries.
(05) Interpret various different ammeter indications of an ammeter X X X X X
which monitors the charge current of the battery.
021 09 05 00 Electrical motors
021 09 05 01 General
(01) X State that the purpose of an electrical motor is to convert electrical X X X X X
energy into mechanical energy.
(02) State that because of the similarity in design, a generator and an X X X X X
electrical motor may be combined into a starter generator.
(03) Explain that the size of the engine determines how much energy is
required for starting, and state the following:
— small turbine engines may be able to use the battery for a
Page 134 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
very limited number of start attempts;
— large turbine engines require one or more power sources,
either external or on-board.
021 09 05 02 Operating principle
(01) Describe how the torque of an electrical motor is determined by X X X X X
the supplied voltage and current, and the resulting magnetic
fields within the engine.
(02) X State that electrical motors can be either AC or DC. X X X X X
(03) Explain the consequences of the following: X X X X X
— rotor seizure;
— rotor runaway.
021 09 05 03 Components
(01) X Name the following components of an electrical motor: X X X X X
— rotor (rotating part of an electrical motor);
— stator (stationary part of an electrical motor).
021 10 00 00 PISTON ENGINES
Remark: This topic includes diesel and petrol engines.
021 10 01 00 General
021 10 01 01 Types of internal-combustion engines: basic principles, definitions
(01) Define the following terms and expressions: X X X X X
— rpm;
— torque;
— manifold absolute pressure (MAP);
Page 135 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— power output;
— specific fuel consumption;
— compression ratio, clearance volume, swept (displaced)
volume, total volume.
021 10 01 02 Engine: design, operation, components
(01) Describe the basic operating principle of a piston engine: X X X X X
— crankcase;
— crankshaft;
— connecting rod;
— piston;
— piston pin;
— piston rings;
— cylinder;
— cylinder head;
— valves;
— valve springs;
— push rod;
— camshaft;
— rocker arm;
— camshaft gear;
— bearings.
(02) Name and identify the various types of engine design with regard X X X X X
to cylinder arrangement and their advantages/disadvantages:
— horizontally opposed;
— in line;
— radial;
Page 136 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— and working cycle (four stroke: petrol and diesel).
(03) Describe the differences between petrol and diesel engines with X X X X X
respect to:
— means of ignition;
— maximum compression ratio;
— regulating air or mixture supply to the cylinder;
— pollution from the exhaust.
021 10 02 00 Fuel
021 10 02 01 Types, grades, characteristics, limitations
(01) Name the type of fuel used for petrol engines including its colour X X X X X
(AVGAS);
— 100 (green);
— 100LL (blue).
(02) Name the type of fuel normally used for aviation diesel engines X X X X X
(JET-A1).
(03) X Define the term ‘octane rating’. X X X X X
(04) Define the term ‘detonation’ and describe the causes and effects of X X X X X
detonation for both petrol and diesel engines.
(05) Define the term ‘pre-ignition’ and describe the causes and effects X X X X X
of pre-ignition for both petrol and diesel engines.
(06) Identify the conditions and power settings that promote X X X X X
detonation for petrol engines.
(07) Describe how detonation in petrol engines is recognised. X X X X X
(08) Describe the method and occasions for checking the fuel for water X X X X X
content.
Page 137 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(09) State the typical value of fuel density for aviation gasoline and X X X X X
diesel fuel.
(10) Explain volatility, viscosity and vapour locking for petrol and diesel X X X X X
fuels.
021 10 03 00 Engine fuel pumps
021 10 03 01 Engine-driven fuel pump
(01) Explain the need for a separate engine-driven fuel pump. X X X X X
021 10 04 00 Carburettor/injection system
021 10 04 01 Carburettor: design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
indications and warnings
(01) State the purpose of a carburettor. X X X X X
(02) Describe the operating principle of the simple float chamber X X X X X
carburettor.
(03) Describe the methods of obtaining mixture control over the whole X X X X X
operating engine power setting range (compensation jet, diffuser).
(04) Describe the methods of obtaining mixture control over the whole X X X X X
operating altitude range.
(05) Explain the purpose and the operating principle of an accelerator X X X X X
pump.
(06) Explain the purpose of power enrichment. X X X X X
(07) Describe the function of the carburettor heat system. X X X X X
(08) Explain the effect of carburettor heat on mixture ratio and power X X X X X
output.
Page 138 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(09) Explain the purpose and the operating principle of a primer pump. X X X X X
(10) Discuss other methods for priming an engine (acceleration pumps). X X X X X
(11) Explain the danger of carburettor fire, including corrective X X X X X
measures.
021 10 04 02 Injection: design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
indications and warnings
(01) Explain the advantages and difference in operation of an injection X X X X X
system compared with a carburettor system.
021 10 04 03 Icing
(01) Describe the causes and effects of carburettor icing and the action X X X X X
to be taken if carburettor icing is suspected.
(02) Name the meteorological conditions under which carburettor icing X X X X X
may occur.
(03) Describe the indications of the presence of carburettor icing for X X
both a fixed pitch and a constant speed propeller.
(04) Describe the indications of the presence of carburettor icing for a X X X
helicopter.
(05) Describe the indications that will occur upon selection of X X X X X
carburettor heat depending on whether ice is present or not.
(06) Explain the reason for the use of alternate air on fuel injection X X X X X
systems and describe its operating principle.
(07) State the meteorological conditions under which induction system X X X X X
icing may occur.
021 10 05 00 Cooling systems
Page 139 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 10 05 01 Design, operation, indications and warnings
(01) Specify the reasons for cooling a piston engine. X X X X X
(02) Describe the design features to enhance cylinder air cooling for X X
aeroplanes.
(03) Describe the design features to enhance cylinder air cooling for X X X
helicopters (e.g. engine-driven impeller and scroll assembly,
baffles).
(04) Compare the differences between liquid- and air-cooling systems. X X X X X
(05) Identify the cylinder head temperature indication to monitor X X X X X
engine cooling.
(06) Describe the function and the operation of cowl flaps. X X
021 10 06 00 Lubrication systems
021 10 06 01 Lubricants: characteristics, limitations
(01) Describe the term ‘viscosity’ including the effect of temperature. X X X X X
(02) Describe the viscosity grade numbering system used in aviation. X X X X X
021 10 06 02 Design, operation, indications and warnings
(01) State the functions of a piston-engine lubrication system. X X X X X
(02) Describe the working principle of a dry-sump lubrication system X X X X X
and describe the functions of the following components:
— oil tank (reservoir) and its internal components: hot well, de-
aerator, vent, expansion space;
— check valve (non-return valve);
Page 140 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— pressure pump and pressure-relief valve;
— scavenge pump;
— filters (suction, pressure and scavenge);
— oil cooler;
— oil cooler bypass valve (anti-surge and thermostatic);
— pressure and temperature sensors;
— lines.
(03) Describe a wet-sump lubrication system. X X X X X
(04) State the differences between a wet- and a dry-sump lubrication X X X X X
system and their advantages and disadvantages.
(05) List the following factors that influence oil consumption: X X X X X
— oil grade;
— cylinder and piston wear;
— condition of piston rings.
(06) Describe the interaction between oil pressure, oil temperature and X X X X X
oil quantity.
021 10 07 00 Ignition circuits
(01) Describe the working principle of a magneto-ignition system and X X X X X
the functions of the following components:
— magneto;
— contact-breaker points;
— capacitor (condenser);
— coils or windings;
— ignition switches;
Page 141 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— distributor;
— spark plug;
— high-tension (HT) cable.
(02) State why piston engines are equipped with two electrically X X X X X
independent ignition systems.
(03) State the function and operating principle of the following X X
methods of spark augmentation:
— starter vibrator (booster coil);
— impulse-start coupling.
(04) State the function and operating principle of the following X X X
methods of spark augmentation:
— starter vibrator (booster coil);
— both magnetos live.
(05) Explain the function of the magneto check. X X X X X
(06) Explain how combustion is initiated in diesel engines. X X X X X
021 10 08 00 Mixture
021 10 08 01 Definition, characteristic mixtures, control instruments,
associated control levers, indications
(01) Define the following terms: X X X X X
— mixture;
— chemically correct ratio (stoichiometric);
— best power ratio;
— lean (weak) mixture (lean or rich side of the exhaust gas
temperature (EGT) top);
— rich mixture.
Page 142 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) State the typical fuel-to-air ratio values or range of values for the X X X X X
above mixtures.
(03) Describe the advantages and disadvantages of weak and rich X X X X X
mixtures.
(04) Describe the relation between engine-specific fuel consumption X X X X X
and mixture ratio.
(05) Describe the use of the exhaust gas temperature as an aid to X X X X X
mixture-setting.
(06) Explain the relation between mixture ratio, cylinder head X X X X X
temperature, detonation and pre-ignition.
(07) Explain the absence of mixture control in diesel engines. X X X X X
021 10 09 00 Aeroplane: propellers
021 10 09 01 Definitions, general
Remark: Definitions and aerodynamic concepts are detailed in X X
Subject 081 ‘Principles of flight (aeroplane)’, Topic 07 (Propellers),
but need to be appreciated for this Subject as well.
021 10 09 02 Constant-speed propeller: design, operation, system components
(01) Describe the operating principle of a constant-speed propeller X X
system under normal flight operations with the aid of a schematic.
(02) Explain the need for a MAP indicator to control the power setting X X
with a constant-speed propeller.
(03) State the purpose of a torque-meter. X X
(04) State the purpose and describe the operation of a low-pitch stop X X
(centrifugal latch).
Page 143 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(05) Describe the operating principle of a single-acting and a double- X X
acting variable pitch propeller for single- and multi-engine
aeroplanes.
(06) Describe the function and the basic operating principle of X X
synchronising and synchro-phasing systems.
(07) Explain the purpose and the basic operating principle of an auto- X X
feathering system and unfeathering.
021 10 09 03 Reduction gearing: design
(01) State the purpose of reduction gearing. X X
021 10 09 04 Propeller handling: associated control levers, degraded modes of
(01) Describe the checks to be carried out on a constant-speed X X
propeller system after engine start.
(02) Describe the operation of a constant-speed propeller system X X
during flight at different true airspeeds (TAS) and rpm including an
overspeeding propeller.
(03) Describe the operating principle of a variable pitch propeller when X X
feathering and unfeathering, including the operation of cockpit
controls.
(04) Describe the operating principle of a variable pitch propeller when X X
reverse pitch is selected, including the operation of cockpit
controls.
(05) Describe the operation of the propeller levers during different X X
phases of flight.
021 10 10 00 Performance and engine handling
Page 144 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 10 10 01 Performance
(01) Describe the effect on power output of a petrol and diesel engine X X X X X
taking into consideration the following parameters:
— ambient pressure, exhaust back pressure;
— temperature;
— density altitude;
— humidity.
(02) Explain the term ‘normally aspirated engine’. X X X X X
(03) Power-augmentation devices: explain the requirement for power X X X X X
augmentation (turbocharging) of a piston engine.
(04) Describe the function and the principle of operation of the X X X X X
following main components of a turbocharger:
— turbine;
— compressor;
— waste gate;
— waste-gate actuator.
(05) Explain the difference between an altitude-boosted turbocharger X X X X X
and a ground-boosted turbocharger.
(06) Explain turbo lag. X X X X X
(07) Define the term ‘critical altitude’. X X X X X
(08) Explain the function of an intercooler. X X X X X
(09) Define the terms ‘full-throttle height’ and ‘rated altitude’. X X X X X
021 10 10 02 Engine handling
Page 145 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) State the correct procedures for setting the engine controls when X X X X X
increasing or decreasing power.
— take-off power;
— maximum continuous power.
(03) Describe the start problems associated with extreme cold weather. X X X X X
(04) Describe the principal difference between a full-authority digital X X X X X
engine control (FADEC) system-controlled engine and traditional
manual engine controls.
(05) Describe the engine controls available on the flight deck for a X X X X X
FADEC-controlled engine.
(06) Explain that the FADEC has full authority of the control of all X X X X X
engine parameters ensuring efficient and correct running of the
engine, including protection in the event of failure.
(07) Explain the need for FADEC redundancy with regard to power X X X X X
supply and data input and output.
021 11 00 00 TURBINE ENGINES
021 11 01 00 Basic principles
021 11 01 01 Basic generation of thrust and the thrust formula
(01) Describe how thrust is produced by a basic gas turbine engine. X X
(02) Describe the simple form of the thrust formula for a basic, straight X X
jet engine and perform simple calculations (including pressure
thrust).
(03) State that thrust can be considered to remain approximately X X
Page 146 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
constant over the whole aeroplane subsonic speed range.
021 11 01 02 Design, types and components of turbine engines
(01) List the main components of a basic gas turbine engine: X X X X X
— inlet;
— compressor;
— combustion chamber;
— turbine;
— outlet.
(02) Describe the variation of static pressure, temperature and axial X X X X X
velocity in a gas turbine engine under normal operating conditions
and with the aid of a working cycle diagram.
(03) Describe the differences between absolute, circumferential X X X X X
(tangential) and axial velocity.
(04) List the different types of gas turbine engines: X X
— straight jet;
— turbofan;
— turboprop.
(05) State that a gas turbine engine can have one or more spools. X X X X X
(06) Describe how thrust is produced by turbojet and turbofan engines. X X
(07) Describe how power is produced by turboprop engines. X X
(08) Describe the term ‘equivalent horsepower’ (= thrust horsepower + X X
shaft horsepower).
(09) Explain the principle of a free turbine or free-power turbine. X X X X X
(10) Define the term ‘bypass ratio’ and perform simple calculations to X X
Page 147 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
determine it.
(11) Define the terms ‘propulsive power’, ‘propulsive efficiency’, X X
‘thermal efficiency’ and ‘total efficiency’.
(12) Describe the influence of compressor-pressure ratio on thermal X X X X X
efficiency.
(13) Explain the variations of propulsive efficiency with forward speed X X
for turbojet, turbofan and turboprop engines.
(14) Define the term ‘specific fuel consumption’ for turbojets and X X
turboprops.
021 11 01 03 Coupled turbine engine: design, operation, components and
materials
(01) Name the main assembly parts of a coupled turbine engine and X X X
explain its operation.
(02) Explain the limitations of the materials used with regard to X X X
maximum turbine temperature, engine and drive train torque
limits.
(03) Describe the possible effects on engine components when limits X X X
are exceeded.
(04) Explain that when engine limits are exceeded, this event must be X X X
reported.
021 11 01 04 Free-turbine engine: design, components and materials
(01) Describe the design methods to keep the engine’s size small for X X X
installation in helicopters.
(02) List the main components of a free-turbine engine. X X X
(03) Describe how the power is developed by a turboshaft/free-turbine X X X
Page 148 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
engine.
(04) Explain how the exhaust gas temperature is used to monitor X X X
turbine stress.
021 11 02 00 Main-engine components
021 11 02 01 Aeroplane: air intake
(01) State the functions of the engine air inlet/air intake. X X
(02) Describe the geometry of a subsonic (pitot-type) air inlet. X X
(03) Explain the gas-parameter changes in a subsonic air inlet at X X
different flight speeds.
(04) Describe the reasons for, and the dangers of, the following X X
operational problems concerning the engine air inlet:
— airflow separation;
— inlet icing;
— inlet damage;
— foreign object damage (FOD);
— heavy in-flight turbulence.
021 11 02 02 Compressor and diffuser
(01) State the purpose of the compressor. X X X X X
(02) Describe the working principle of a centrifugal and an axial flow X X X X X
compressor.
(03) Name the following main components of a single stage and X X X X X
describe their function for a centrifugal compressor:
— impeller;
— diffuser.
Page 149 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(04) Name the following main components of a single stage and X X X X X
describe their function for an axial compressor:
— rotor vanes;
— stator vanes.
(05) Describe the gas-parameter changes in a compressor stage. X X X X X
(06) Define the term ‘pressure ratio’ and state a typical value for one X X X X X
stage of a centrifugal and an axial flow compressor and for the
complete compressor.
(07) State the advantages and disadvantages of increasing the number X X X X X
of stages in a centrifugal compressor.
(08) Explain the difference in sensitivity for FOD of a centrifugal X X X X X
compressor compared with an axial flow type.
(09) Explain the convergent air annulus through an axial flow X X X X X
compressor.
(10) Describe the reason for twisting the compressor blades. X X X X X
(11) State the tasks of inlet guide vanes (IGVs). X X X X X
(12) State the reason for the clicking noise whilst the compressor slowly X X X X X
rotates on the ground.
(13) State the advantages of increasing the number of spools. X X X X X
(14) Explain the implications of tip losses and describe the design X X X X X
features to minimise the problem.
(15) Explain the problems of blade bending and flapping and describe X X X X X
the design features to minimise the problem.
(16) Explain the following terms: X X X X X
— compressor stall;
Page 150 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
— engine surge.
(17) State the conditions that are possible causes of stall and surge. X X X X X
(18) Describe the indications of stall and surge. X X X X X
(19) Describe the design features used to minimise the occurrence of X X X X X
stall and surge.
(20) Describe a compressor map (surge envelope) with rpm lines, stall X X X X X
limit, steady state line and acceleration line.
(21) Describe the function of the diffuser. X X X X X
021 11 02 03 Combustion chamber
(01) Define the purpose of the combustion chamber. X X X X X
(02) List the requirements for combustion. X X X X X
(03) Describe the working principle of a combustion chamber. X X X X X
(04) Explain the reason for reducing the airflow axial velocity at the X X X X X
combustion chamber inlet (snout).
(05) State the function of the swirl vanes (swirler). X X X X X
(06) State the function of the drain valves. X X X X X
(07) Define the terms ‘primary airflow’ and ‘secondary airflow’, and X X X X X
explain their purpose.
(08) Explain the following two mixture ratios: X X X X X
— primary airflow to fuel;
— total airflow (within the combustion chamber) to fuel.
(09) Describe the gas-parameter changes in the combustion chamber. X X X X X
Page 151 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(10) State a typical maximum value of the outlet temperature of the X X X X X
combustion chamber.
(11) Describe the following types of combustion chambers and state X X X X X
the differences between them:
— can type;
— can-annular, cannular or turbo-annular;
— annular;
— reverse-flow annular.
021 11 02 04 Turbine
(01) Explain the purpose of a turbine in different types of gas turbine X X X X X
engines.
(02) Describe the principles of operation of impulse, reaction and X X X X X
impulse-reaction axial flow turbines.
(03) Name the main components of a turbine stage and their function. X X X X X
(04) Describe the working principle of a turbine. X X X X X
(05) Describe the gas-parameter changes in a turbine stage. X X X X X
(06) Describe the function and the working principle of active clearance X X
control.
(07) Describe the implications of tip losses and the means to minimise X X X X X
them.
(08) Explain why the available engine thrust is limited by the turbine X X
inlet temperature.
(09) Explain the divergent gas-flow annulus through an axial-flow X X X X X
turbine.
Page 152 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(10) Explain the high mechanical thermal stress in the turbine blades X X X X X
and wheels/discs.
021 11 02 05 Aeroplane: exhaust
(01) Name the following main components of the exhaust unit and X X
their function:
— jet pipe;
— propelling nozzle;
— exhaust cone.
(02) Describe the working principle of the exhaust unit. X X
(03) Describe the gas-parameter changes in the exhaust unit. X X
(04) Define the term ‘choked exhaust nozzle’ (not applicable to X
turboprops).
(05) Explain how jet exhaust noise can be reduced. X X
021 11 02 06 Helicopter: air intake
(01) Name and explain the main task of the engine air intake. X X X
(02) Describe the use of a convergent air-intake ducting on helicopters. X X X
(03) Describe the reasons for and the dangers of the following X X X
operational problems concerning engine air intake:
— airflow separations;
— intake icing;
— intake damage;
— FOD;
— heavy in-flight turbulence.
Page 153 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(04) Describe the conditions and circumstances during ground X X X
operations when FOD is most likely to occur.
(05) Describe and explain the principles of air intake filter systems that X X X
can be fitted to some helicopters for operations in icing and sand
conditions.
(06) Describe the function of the heated pads on some helicopter air X X X
intakes.
021 11 02 07 Helicopter: exhaust
(01) Describe the working principle of the exhaust unit. X X X
(02) Describe the gas-parameter changes in the exhaust unit. X X X
021 11 03 00 Additional components and systems
021 11 03 01 Engine fuel system
(01) Name the main components of the engine fuel system and state X X X X X
their function:
— filters;
— low-pressure (LP) pump;
— high-pressure (HP) pump;
— fuel manifold;
— fuel nozzles;
— HP fuel cock;
— fuel control; or
— hydromechanical unit.
(02) Name the two types of engine-driven high-pressure pumps, such X X X X X
as:
Page 154 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— gear-type;
— swash plate-type.
(03) State the tasks of the fuel control unit. X X X X X
(04) List the possible input parameters to a fuel control unit to achieve X X X X X
a given thrust/power setting.
021 11 03 02 Engine control system
(01) State the tasks of the engine control system. X X X X X
(02) List the following different types of engine control systems: X X X X X
— hydromechanical;
— hydromechanical with a limited authority electronic
supervisor;
— single-channel FADEC with hydromechanical backup;
— dual-channel FADEC with no backup or any other
combination.
(03) Describe a FADEC as a full-authority dual-channel system including X X X
functions such as an electronic engine control unit, wiring, sensors,
variable vanes, active clearance control, bleed configuration,
electrical signalling of thrust lever angle (TLA) (see also AMC to
CS-E-50), and an EGT protection function and engine overspeed.
(04) Explain how redundancy is achieved by using more than one X X X
channel in a FADEC system.
(05) State the consequences of a FADEC single input data failure. X X X
(06) State that all input and output data is checked by both channels in X X X
a FADEC system.
(07) State that a FADEC system uses its own sensors and that, in some X X X
Page 155 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
cases, also data from aircraft systems is used.
(08) State that a FADEC must have its own source of electrical power. X X X
021 11 03 03 Engine lubrication
(01) State the tasks of an engine lubrication system. X X
(02) Name the following main components of a lubrication system and X X
state their function:
— oil tank and centrifugal breather;
— oil pumps (pressure and scavenge pumps);
— oil filters (including the bypass);
— oil sumps;
— chip detectors;
— coolers.
(03) Explain that each spool is fitted with at least one ball bearing and X X
two or more roller bearings.
(04) Explain the use of compressor air in oil-sealing systems (e.g. X X
labyrinth seals).
021 11 03 04 Engine auxiliary gearbox
(01) State the tasks of the auxiliary gearbox. X X
(02) Describe how the gearbox is driven and lubricated. X X
021 11 03 05 Engine ignition
(01) State the task of the ignition system. X X
(02) Name the following main components of the ignition system and X X
state their function:
Page 156 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— power sources;
— igniters.
(03) State why jet turbine engines are equipped with two electrically X X
independent ignition systems.
(04) Explain the different modes of operation of the ignition system. X X
021 11 03 06 Engine starter
(01) Name the main components of the starting system and state their X X
function.
(02) Explain the principle of a turbine engine start. X X
(03) Describe the following two types of starters: X X
— electric;
— pneumatic.
(04) Describe a typical start sequence (on ground/in flight) for a X X
turbofan.
(05) Define ‘self-sustaining rpm’. X X
021 11 03 07 Reverse thrust
(01) Name the following main components of a reverse-thrust system X X
and state their function:
— reverse-thrust select lever;
— power source (pneumatic or hydraulic);
— actuators;
— doors;
— annunciations.
(02) Explain the principle of a reverse-thrust system. X X
Page 157 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(03) Identify the advantages and disadvantages of using reverse thrust. X X
(04) Describe and explain the following different types of thrust- X X
reverser systems:
— hot-stream reverser;
— clamshell or bucket-door system;
— cold-stream reverser (only turbofan engines);
— blocker doors;
— cascade vanes.
(05) Explain the implications of reversing the cold stream (fan reverser) X X
only on a high bypass ratio engine.
(06) Describe the protection features against inadvertent thrust- X X
reverse deployment in flight as present on most transport
aeroplanes.
(07) Describe the controls and indications provided for the thrust- X X
reverser system.
021 11 03 08 Helicopter specifics on design, operation and components for
additional components and systems such as lubrication system,
ignition circuit, starter, accessory gearbox
(01) State the task of the lubrication system. X X X
(02) List and describe the common helicopter lubrication systems. X X X
(03) Name the following main components of a helicopter lubrication X X X
system:
— reservoir;
— pump assembly;
— external oil filter;
Page 158 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— magnetic chip detectors, electronic chip detectors;
— thermostatic oil coolers;
— breather.
(04) Identify and name the components of a helicopter lubrication X X X
system from a diagram.
(05) Identify the indications used to monitor a lubrication system X X X
including warning systems.
(06) Explain the differences and appropriate use of straight oil and X X X
compound oil, and describe the oil numbering system for aviation
use.
(07) Explain and describe the ignition circuit for engine start and engine X X X
relight facility when the selection is set for both automatic and
manual functions.
(08) Explain and describe the starter motor and the sequence of events X X X
when starting, and that for most helicopters the starter becomes
the generator after the starting sequence is over.
(09) Explain and describe why the engine drives the accessory gearbox. X X X
021 11 04 00 Engine operation and monitoring
021 11 04 01 General
(01) Explain the following aeroplane engine ratings: X X
— take-off;
— go-around;
— maximum continuous thrust/power;
— maximum climb thrust/power.
(02) Explain spool-up time. X X X X X
Page 159 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(03) Explain the reason for the difference between ground and X X
approach flight idle values (rpm).
(04) State the parameters that can be used for setting and monitoring X X X X X
the thrust/power.
(05) Describe the terms ‘alpha range’, ‘beta range’ and ‘reverse thrust’ X X
as applied to a turboprop power lever.
(06) Explain the dangers of inadvertent beta-range selection in flight for X X
a turboprop.
(07) Explain the purpose of engine trending. X X
(08) Explain how the exhaust gas temperature is used to monitor X X X X X
turbine stress.
(09) Describe the effect of engine acceleration and deceleration on the X X X X
EGT.
(10) Describe the possible effects on engine components when EGT X X X X X
limits are exceeded.
(11) Explain why engine-limit exceedances must be reported. X X X X X
(12) Explain the limitations on the use of the thrust-reverser system at X X X
low forward speed.
(13) Explain the term ‘engine seizure’. X X X X X
(14) State the possible causes of engine seizure and explain their X X X X X
preventative measures.
(15) Describe the potential consequences of a leak in the following X X X X X
two designs of fuel and oil heat exchanger:
— oil pressure higher than fuel pressure with oil leaking into the
fuel system, potentially affecting the combustion and running
Page 160 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
of the engine;
— fuel pressure higher than oil pressure with fuel leaking into
the oil system, potentially increasing the risk of a fire due to
fuel entering warm parts of the engine that should be free
from fuel.
(16) Explain oil-filter clogging (blockage) and the implications for the X X X X X
lubrication system.
(17) Give examples of monitoring instruments of an engine. X X X X X
(18) Describe how to identify and assess engine damage based on X X X X X
instrument indications.
021 11 04 02 Starting malfunctions
(01) Describe the indications and the possible causes of the following X X
aeroplane starting malfunctions:
— false (dry or wet) start;
— tailpipe fire (torching);
— hot start;
— abortive (hung) start;
— no N1 rotation;
— no FADEC indications.
(02) Describe the indications and the possible causes of the following X X X
helicopter starting malfunctions:
— false (dry or wet) start;
— tailpipe fire (torching);
— hot start;
— abortive (hung) start;
— no N1 rotation;
Page 161 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— freewheel failure;
— no FADEC indications.
021 11 04 03 Relight envelope
(01) Explain the relight envelope. X X
021 11 05 00 Performance aspects
021 11 05 01 Thrust, performance aspects, and limitations
(01) Describe the variation of thrust and specific fuel consumption with X X
altitude at constant TAS.
(02) Describe the variation of thrust and specific fuel consumption with X X
TAS at constant altitude.
(03) Explain the term ‘flat-rated engine’ by describing the change of X X
take-off thrust, turbine inlet temperature and engine rpm with
outside air temperature (OAT).
(04) Define the term ‘engine pressure ratio’ (EPR). X X
(05) Explain the use of reduced (flexible) and derated thrust for take- X X
off, and explain the advantages and disadvantages when
compared with a full-rated take-off.
(06) Describe the effects of use of bleed air on rpm, EGT, thrust, and X X
specific fuel consumption.
021 11 05 02 Helicopter engine ratings, engine performance and limitations,
engine handling: torque, performance aspects and limitations
(01) Describe engine rating torque limits for take-off, transient and X X X
maximum continuous.
(02) Describe turbine outlet temperature (TOT) limits for take-off. X X X
Page 162 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(03) Explain why TOT is a limiting factor for helicopter performance. X X X
(04) Describe and explain the relationship between maximum torque X X X
available and density altitude, which leads to decreasing torque
available with the increase of density altitude.
(05) Explain that hovering downwind, on some helicopters, will X X X
noticeably increase the engine TOT.
(06) Explain the reason why the engine performance is less when X X X
aircraft accessories (i.e. anti-ice, heating, hoist, filters) are
switched on.
(07) Describe the effects of use of bleed air on engine parameters. X X X
(08) Explain that, on some helicopters, exceeding the TOT limit may X X X
cause the main rotor to droop (slow down).
(09) Describe overtorquing and explain the consequences. X X X
021 11 06 00 Auxiliary power unit (APU)
021 11 06 01 Design, operation, functions, operational limitations
(01) State that an APU is a gas turbine engine and list its tasks. X X X
(02) State the difference between the two types of APU inlets. X X X
(03) Define ‘maximum operating and maximum starting altitude’. X X X
(04) Name the typical APU control and monitoring instruments. X X X
(05) Describe the APU’s automatic shutdown protection. X X X
021 12 00 00 PROTECTION AND DETECTION SYSTEMS
021 12 01 00 Smoke detection
Page 163 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 12 01 01 Types, design, operation, indications and warnings
(01) Explain the operating principle of the following types of smoke X X X X X
detection sensors:
— optical;
— ionising.
(02) Give an example of warnings, indications and function tests. X X X X X
021 12 02 00 Fire-protection systems
021 12 02 01 Fire extinguishing (engine and cargo compartments)
(01) Explain the operating principle of a built-in fire-extinguishing X X X X X
system and describe its components.
(02) State that two discharges must be provided for each engine X X
(see CS 25.1195(c) Fire-extinguisher systems).
021 12 02 02 Fire detection
(01) Explain the following principles of fire detection: X X X X X
— resistance and capacitance;
— gas pressure.
(02) Explain fire-detection applications such as: X X X X X
— bimetallic;
— continuous loop;
— gaseous loop (gas-filled detectors).
(03) Explain why generally double-loop systems are used. X X X X X
(04) Give an example of warnings, indications and function tests of a X X X X X
fire-protection system.
Page 164 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 12 03 00 Rain-protection system
021 12 03 01 Principle and method of operation
(01) Explain the principle and method of operation of the following X X
windshield rain-protection systems for an aeroplane:
— wipers;
— liquids (rain-repellent);
— coating.
(02) Explain the principle and method of operation of wipers for a X X X
helicopter.
021 13 00 00 OXYGEN SYSTEMS
021 13 01 00 Cockpit, portable and chemical oxygen systems
021 13 01 01 Operating principles, actuation methods, comparison
(01) Describe the basic operating principle of a cockpit oxygen system X X
and describe the following different modes of operation:
— normal (diluter demand);
— 100 %;
— emergency.
(02) Describe the operating principle and the purposes of the following X X
two portable oxygen systems:
— smoke hood;
— portable bottle.
(03) Describe the following two oxygen systems that can be used to X X
supply oxygen to passengers:
— fixed system (chemical oxygen generator or gaseous system);
Page 165 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— portable.
(04) Describe the actuation methods (automatic and manual) and the X X
functioning of a passenger oxygen mask.
(05) Compare chemical oxygen generators to gaseous systems with X X
respect to:
— capacity;
— flow regulation.
(06) State the dangers of grease or oil related to the use of oxygen X X
systems.
021 14 00 00 HELICOPTER: MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS
021 14 01 00 Variable rotor speed, active vibration suppression, night-vision
goggles (NVG)
021 14 01 01 Variable rotor speed
(01) Explain the system for ‘beeping’ the NR to its upper limit. X X X
021 14 01 02 Active vibration suppression
(01) Explain and describe how the active vibration suppression system X X X
works through high-speed actuators and accelerometer inputs.
021 14 01 03 NVG
To be introduced at a later date. X X X
021 15 00 00 HELICOPTER: ROTOR HEADS
021 15 01 00 Main rotor
021 15 01 01 Types
Page 166 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Describe the following rotor-head systems: X X X
— teetering (semi-articulated);
— articulated;
— hingeless (rigid);
— bearingless (semi-articulated).
(02) Describe in basic terms the following configuration of rotor X X X
systems and their advantages and disadvantages:
— tandem;
— coaxial;
— side by side.
(03) Explain how flapping, dragging and feathering is achieved in each X X X
rotor-head system.
021 15 01 02 Structural components and materials, stresses, structural
limitations
(01) Identify from a diagram the main structural components of the X X X
main types of rotor-head systems.
(02) List and describe the methods used to detect damage and cracks. X X X
(03) Explain and describe the structural limitations to respective rotor X X X
systems, including the dangers of negative G inputs to certain
rotor-head systems.
(04) Describe the various rotor-head lubrication methods. X X X
(01) Describe the material technology used in rotor-head design, X X X
including construction, using the following materials or mixture of
materials:
Page 167 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— composites;
— fibreglass;
— alloys;
— elastomers.
021 15 01 04 Adjustment
(01) Describe and explain the methods of adjustment which are X X X
possible on various helicopter rotor-head assemblies.
021 15 02 00 Tail rotor
021 15 02 01 Types
(01) Describe the following tail-rotor systems: X X X
— delta-3 hinge effect;
— multi-bladed delta-3 effect;
— Fenestron or ducted fan tail rotor;
— no tail rotor (NOTAR) low-velocity air jet flows from
tangential slots (the Coandă effect);
— NOTAR high-velocity air jet flows from adjustable nozzles
(the Coandă effect).
(02) Identify from a diagram the main structural components of the X X X
four main types of tail-rotor systems.
(03) Explain and describe the methods to detect damage and cracks on X X X
the tail rotor and assembly.
(04) Explain and describe the structural limitations to the respective X X X
tail-rotor systems and possible limitations regarding the turning
rate of the helicopter.
(05) Explain and describe the following methods that helicopter X X X
Page 168 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
designers use to minimise tail-rotor drift and roll:
— reducing the couple arm (tail rotor on a pylon);
— offsetting the rotor mast;
— use of ‘bias’ in cyclic control mechanism.
(06) Explain pitch-input mechanisms. X X X
(07) Explain the relationship between tail-rotor thrust and engine X X X
power.
(08) Describe how the vertical fin on some types reduces the power X X X
demand of the tail rotor.
(01) List and describe the various tail-rotor designs and construction X X X
methods used on helicopters currently in service.
021 16 00 00 HELICOPTER: TRANSMISSION
021 16 01 00 Main gearbox
021 16 01 01 Different types, design, operation, limitations
(01) Describe the following main principles of helicopter transmission X X X
systems for single- and twin-engine helicopters:
— drive for the main and tail rotor;
— accessory drive for the generator(s), alternator(s), hydraulic
and oil pumps, oil cooler(s) and tachometers.
(02) Describe the reason for limitations on multi-engine helicopter X X X
transmissions in various engine-out situations.
(03) Describe how the passive vibration control works with gearbox X X X
mountings.
Page 169 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 16 02 00 Rotor brake
021 16 02 01 Types, operational considerations
(01) Describe the main function of the disc type of rotor brake. X X X
(02) Describe both hydraulic- and cable-operated rotor-brake systems. X X X
(03) Describe the different options for the location of the rotor brake. X X X
(04) List the following operational considerations for the use of rotor X X X
brakes:
— rotor speed at engagement of rotor brake;
— risk of blade sailing in windy conditions;
— risk of rotor-brake overheating and possible fire when brake
is applied above the maximum limit, particularly when spilled
hydraulic fluid is present;
— avoid stopping blades over jet-pipe exhaust with engine
running;
— cockpit annunciation of rotor-brake operation.
021 16 03 00 Auxiliary systems
021 16 03 01 Powering the air-conditioning system
(01) Explain how power for the air-conditioning system is taken from X X X
the auxiliary gearbox.
021 16 04 00 Driveshaft and associated installation
021 16 04 01 Power, construction, materials, speed and torque
(01) Describe how power is transmitted from the engine to the main- X X X
rotor gearbox.
Page 170 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) Describe the material and construction of the driveshaft. X X X
(03) Explain the need for alignment between the engine and the main- X X X
rotor gearbox.
(04) Identify how temporary misalignment occurs between driving and X X X
driven components.
(05) Explain the relationship between driveshaft speed and torque. X X X
(06) Describe the methods with which power is delivered to the tail X X X
rotor.
(07) Describe and identify the construction and materials of tail- X X X
rotor/Fenestron driveshafts.
021 16 05 00 Intermediate and tail gearbox
021 16 05 01 Lubrication, gearing
(01) Explain and describe the various arrangements when the drive X X X
changes direction and the need for an intermediate or tail
gearbox.
(02) Explain the lubrication requirements for intermediate and tail- X X X
rotor gearboxes and methods of checking levels.
(03) Explain how on most helicopters the tail-rotor gearbox contains X X X
gearing, etc., for the tail-rotor pitch-change mechanism.
021 16 06 00 Clutches
021 16 06 01 Purpose, operation, components, serviceability
(01) Explain the purpose of a clutch. X X X
(02) Describe and explain the operation of a: X X X
Page 171 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— centrifugal clutch;
— actuated clutch.
(03) List the typical components of the various clutches. X X X
(04) Identify the following methods by which clutch serviceability can X X X
be ascertained:
— brake-shoe dust;
— vibration;
— main-rotor run-down time;
— engine speed at time of main-rotor engagement;
— belt tensioning;
— start protection in a belt-drive clutch system.
021 16 07 00 Freewheels
021 16 07 01 Purpose, operation, components, location
(01) Explain the purpose of a freewheel. X X X
(02) Describe and explain the operation of a: X X X
— cam- and roller-type freewheel;
— sprag-clutch-type freewheel.
(03) List the typical components of the various freewheels. X X X
(04) Identify the various locations of freewheels in power plant and X X X
transmission systems.
(05) Explain the implications regarding the engagement and X X X
disengagement of the freewheel.
021 17 00 00 HELICOPTER: BLADES
Page 172 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
021 17 01 00 Main-rotor design and blade design
021 17 01 01 Design, construction
(01) Describe the different types of blade construction and the need for X X X
torsional stiffness.
(02) Describe the principles of heating systems/pads on some blades X X X
for anti-icing/de-icing.
(03) Describe the fully articulated rotor with hinges and feathering X X X
hinges.
021 17 01 02 Structural components and materials
(01) List the materials used in the construction of main-rotor blades. X X X
(02) List the main structural components of a main-rotor blade and X X X
their function.
(03) Describe the drag hinge of the fully articulated rotor and the lag X X X
flexure in the hingeless rotor.
(04) Explain the necessity for drag dampers. X X X
021 17 01 03 Forces and stresses
(01) Describe main-rotor blade-loading on the ground and in flight. X X X
(02) Describe where the most common stress areas are on rotor X X X
blades.
(03) Show how the centrifugal forces depend on rotor rpm and blade X X X
mass and how they pull on the blade’s attachment to the hub.
Justify the upper limit of the rotor rpm.
(04) Assume a rigid attachment and show how thrust may cause huge X X X
Page 173 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
oscillating bending moments which stress the attachment.
(05) Explain why flapping hinges do not transfer such moments. Show X X X
the small flapping hinge offset on fully articulated rotors and zero
offset in the case of teetering rotors.
(06) Describe the working principle of the flexible element in the X X X
hingeless rotor and describe the equivalent flapping hinge offset
compared to that of the articulated rotor.
(01) Explain the structural limitations in terms of bending and rotor X X X
rpm.
(01) X Explain the use of trim tabs. X X X
021 17 01 06 Tip shape
(01) Describe the various blade-tip shapes used by different X X X
manufacturers and compare their advantages and disadvantages.
021 17 01 07 Origins of the vertical vibrations
(01) Explain the lift (thrust) variations per revolution of a blade and the X X X
resulting vertical total rotor thrust (TRT) variation in the case of
perfectly identical blades.
(02) Show the resulting frequencies and amplitudes as a function of the X X X
number of blades.
(03) Explain the thrust variation in the case of an out-of-track blade, X X X
causes, and frequencies (one-per-revolution).
021 17 01 08 Lateral vibrations
Page 174 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Explain blade imbalances, causes, and effects. X X X
021 17 02 00 Tail-rotor design and blade design
021 17 02 01 Design, construction
(01) Describe the most common design of tail-rotor blade construction, X X X
consisting of stainless steel shell reinforced by a honeycomb filler
and stainless steel leading abrasive strip.
(02) Explain that ballast weights are located at the inboard trailing edge X X X
and tip of blades, and that the weights used are determined when
the blades are manufactured.
(03) Describe how, for some helicopters, anti-icing/de-icing systems are X X X
designed into the blade construction.
(04) Describe the two-bladed rotor with a teetering hinge, and rotors X X X
with more than two blades.
(05) Describe the dangers to ground personnel and to the rotor blades, X X X
and how to minimise these dangers.
021 17 02 03 Stresses, vibrations and balancing
(01) Describe the tail-rotor blade-loading on the ground and in flight. X X X
(02) Explain the sources of vibration of the tail rotor and the resulting X X X
high frequencies.
(03) Explain balancing and tracking of the tail rotor. X X X
(01) Describe the structural limitations of the tail-rotor blades. X X X
Page 175 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) Describe the method of checking the strike indicators placed on X X X
the tip of some tail-rotor blades.
(01) Describe the adjustment of yaw pedals in the cockpit to obtain full- X X X
control authority of the tail rotor.
021 17 02 06 The Fenestron
(01) Describe the technical layout of a Fenestron tail rotor. X X X
(02) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a Fenestron tail rotor. X X X
021 17 02 07 No tail rotor (NOTAR)
(01) Describe the technical layout of a NOTAR design. X X X
(02) Explain the control concepts of a NOTAR. X X X
(03) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a NOTAR design. X X X
Page 176 of 681


Amendment 4’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 022 — AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE —
INSTRUMENTATION’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 177 of 681

SUBJECT 022 — AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE — INSTRUMENTATION
reference
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL CPL and EIR
/IR
020 00 00 00 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE
022 00 00 00 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE — INSTRUMENTATION
022 01 00 00 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTS

022 01 01 00 Pressure gauge
022 01 01 01 Units for pressure, sensor types, measurements
(01) X Define ‘pressure’, ‘absolute pressure’ and ‘differential X X X X X
pressure’.
(02) X List the following units used for pressure measurement: X X X X X
— Pascal;
— bar;
— inches of mercury (in Hg);
— pounds per square inch (psi).
(03) X State the relationship between the different units. X X X X X
(04) List and describe the following different types of sensors X X X X X
used according to the pressure to be measured:
— aneroid capsules;
— bellows;
— diaphragms;
— bourdon tube.
(05) Identify pressure measurements that are applicable to an X X X X X
aircraft:
Page 178 of 681

reference
/IR
— liquid-pressure measurement (fuel, oil, hydraulic);
— air-pressure measurement (bleed-air systems, air-
conditioning systems);
— engine-pressure measurement manifold pressure
(MAP), engine pressure ratio (EPR)).
(06) Identify and read pressure measurement indications both X X X X X
for engine indications and other systems.
(07) Explain the implications of the following pressure X X X X X
measurement errors both for engine indications and other
systems:
— loss of pressure sensing;
— incorrect pressure indications.
022 01 02 00 Temperature sensing
022 01 02 01 Units for temperature, measurements
(01) X Explain temperature. X X X X X
(02) X List the following units that can be used for temperature X X X X X
measurement:
— Kelvin;
— Celsius;
— Fahrenheit.
(03) X State the relationship between these units and convert X X X X X
between them.
(04) Identify temperature measurements that are applicable to X X X X X
an aircraft:
— gas temperature measurement (ambient air, bleed-
Page 179 of 681

reference
/IR
air systems, air-conditioning systems, air inlet,
exhaust gas, gas turbine outlets);
— liquid-temperature measurement (fuel, oil,
hydraulic);
— component-temperature measurement (generator,
transformer rectifier unit (TRU), pumps (fuel,
hydraulic), power transfer unit (PTU).
(05) Identify and read temperature measurement indications X X X X X
for both engine indications and other systems.
022 01 03 00 Fuel gauge
022 01 03 01 Units for fuel, measurements, fuel gauges
(01) State that the quantity of fuel can be measured by volume X X X X X
or mass.
(02) List the following units used for fuel quantity: X X X X X
— kilogramme;
— pound;
— litres;
— gallons (US and imperial).
(03) Convert between the various units. X X X X X
(04) Explain the parameters that can affect the measurement X X X X X
of the volume or mass of the fuel in a fuel tank:
— temperature;
— aircraft accelerations and attitudes;
— and explain how the fuel-gauge system design
compensates for these changes.
Page 180 of 681

reference
/IR
(05) Describe and explain the operating principles of the X X X X X
following types of fuel gauges:
— float system;
— capacitance-type of fuel-gauge system.
— ultrasound-type of fuel-gauge system: to be
introduced at a later date.
(06) Describe and complete a typical post-refuelling procedure X X X X X
for a pilot:
— recording the volume that was filled;
— converting to the appropriate unit used by the
aircraft fuel gauge(s) to compare the actual indicated
fuel content to the calculated fuel content;
— assess appropriate action if the numbers does not
compare.
022 01 04 00 Fuel flowmeters
022 01 04 01 Fuel flow, units for fuel flow, total fuel consumption
(01) Define ‘fuel flow’ and where it is measured. X X X X X
(02) State that fuel flow may be measured by volume or mass X X X X X
per unit of time.
(03) List the following units used for fuel flow when measured X X X X X
by mass per hour:
— kilogrammes/hour;
— pounds/hour.
(04) List the following units used for fuel flow when measured X X X X X
by volume per hour:
Page 181 of 681

reference
/IR
— litres/hour;
— imperial gallons/hour;
— US gallons/hour.
(05) Explain how total fuel consumption is obtained. X X X X X
022 01 05 00 Tachometer
022 01 05 01 Types, operating principles, units for engine speed
(01) X List the following types of tachometers, describe their X X X X X
basic operating principle and give examples of use:
— mechanical (rotating magnet);
— electrical (three-phase tacho-generator);
— electronic (impulse measurement with speed probe
and phonic wheel);
— and describe the operating principle of each type.
(02) Explain the typical units for engine speed: X X X X X
— rpm for piston-engine aircraft;
— percentage for turbine-engine aircraft.
(03) Explain that some types of rpm indicators require X X X X X
electrical power to provide an indication.
022 01 06 00 Thrust measurement
022 01 06 01 Parameters, operating principle
(01) List and describe the following two parameters used to X X
represent thrust:
— N1;
Page 182 of 681

reference
/IR
— EPR.
(02) Explain the operating principle of using an engine with X X
EPR indication and explain the consequences of incorrect
or missing EPR to the operation of the engine, including
reverting to N1 mode.
(03) Give examples of display for N1 and EPR. X X
022 01 07 00 Engine torquemeter
022 01 07 01 Torque, torquemeters
(01) Define ‘torque’. X X X X X
(02) Explain the relationship between power, torque and rpm. X X X X X
(03) List the following units used for torque: X X X X X
— Newton meters;
— inch or foot pounds.
(04) State that engine torque can be displayed as a X X X X X
percentage.
(05) X List and describe the following different types of X X X X X
torquemeters, and explain their operating principles:
— mechanical;
— electronic.
(06) X Compare the two systems with regard to design and X X X X X
weight.
(07) Give examples of display. X X X X X
022 01 08 00 Synchroscope
Page 183 of 681

reference
/IR
022 01 08 01 Purpose, operating principle, display
(01) State the purpose of a synchroscope. X X
(02) X Explain the operating principle of a synchroscope. X X
(03) Give examples of display. X X
022 01 09 00 Engine-vibration monitoring
022 01 09 01 Purpose, operating principle of a vibration-monitoring
system, display
(01) State the purpose of a vibration-monitoring system for a X X
jet engine.
(02) X Describe the operating principle of a vibration-monitoring X X
system using the following two types of sensors:
— piezoelectric crystal;
— magnet.
(03) Explain that there is no specific unit for vibration X X
monitoring, i.e. it is determined by specified numeric
threshold values.
(04) Give examples of display. X X
022 01 10 00 Time measurement
022 01 10 01 On-board clock
(01) Explain that the on-board aircraft clock provides a time X X X X X
reference for several of the on-board systems including
aircraft communications addressing and reporting system
(ACARS) and engine and systems maintenance.
Page 184 of 681
reference
/IR
022 02 00 00 MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS
022 02 01 00 Pressure measurement
(01) Define the following pressure measurements and state X X X X X X
the relationship between them:
— static pressure;
— dynamic pressure;
— total pressure.
022 02 01 02 Pitot/static system: design and errors
(01) Describe the design and the operating principle of a: X X X X X X X
— static port/source;
— pitot tube;
— combined pitot/static probe.
(02) For each of these indicate the various locations and X X X X X X X
describe the following associated errors and how to
correct, minimise the effect of or compensate for them:
— position errors;
— instrument errors;
— errors due to a non-longitudinal axial flow (including
manoeuvre-induced errors).
(03) Describe a typical pitot/static system and list the possible X X X X X X
outputs.
(04) Explain the redundancy and the interconnections that X X X X X X
typically exist in complex pitot/static systems found in
Page 185 of 681

reference
/IR
large aircraft.
(05) Explain the purpose of pitot/static system heating. X X X X X X X
(06) Describe alternate static sources and their effects when X X X X X X X
used, particularly in unpressurised aircraft.
(07) Describe a modern pitot static system using solid-state X X X X X X
sensors near the pitot probe or static port converting the
air data to numerical data (electrical signals) before being
sent to the air-data computer(s).
022 02 02 00 Temperature measurement
(01) Define the following and explain the relationship between X X X X X X X
them:
— outside air temperature (OAT);
— total air temperature (TAT);
— static air temperature (SAT).
(02) Explain the term ‘ram rise’ and convert TAT to SAT. X X
(03) Explain why TAT is often displayed and that TAT is the X X X X X X X
temperature input to the air-data computer.
022 02 02 02 Design and operation
(01) Indicate typical locations for both direct-reading and X X X X X X
remote-reading temperature probes, and describe the
following errors:
— position error;
— instrument error.
Page 186 of 681

reference
/IR
(02) Explain the purpose of temperature probe heating and X X X X X X
interpret the effect of heating on sensed temperature
unless automatically compensated for.
022 02 03 00 Angle-of-attack (AoA) measurement
022 02 03 01 Sensor types, operating principles, ice protection,
displays, incorrect indications
(01) Describe the following two types of AoA sensors: X X
— null-seeking (slotted) probe;
— vane detector.
(02) For each type, explain the operating principles. X X
(03) Explain how both types are protected against ice. X X
(04) Give examples of systems that use the AoA as an input, X X
such as:
— air-data computer;
— stall warning systems;
— flight-envelope protection systems.
(05) Give examples of and interpret different types of AoA X X
displays:
— simple light arrays of green, amber and red lights;
— gauges showing a numerical scale.
(06) Explain the implications for the pilot if the AoA indication X X
becomes incorrect but still provides data, e.g. if the sensor
is frozen in a fixed position.
(07) Explain how an incorrect AoA measurement can affect the X X
Page 187 of 681

reference
/IR
controllability of an aircraft with flight-envelope
protection.
022 02 04 00 Altimeter
022 02 04 01 Units, terms, types, operating principles, displays, errors,
corrections
(01) List the following two units used for altimeters and state X X X X X X
— feet;
— metres.
(02) X Define the following terms: X X X X X X X
— height, altitude;
— indicated altitude, true altitude;
— pressure altitude, density altitude.
(03) X Define the following barometric references: ‘QNH’, ‘QFE’, X X X X X X X
‘1013,25’.
(04) Explain the operating principles of an altimeter. X X X X X X X
(05) X Describe and compare the following three types of X X X X X X X
altimeters and reason(s) why particular designs may be
required in certain airspace:
— simple altimeter (single capsule);
— sensitive altimeter (multi-capsule);
— servo-assisted altimeter.
(06) X Give examples of associated displays: pointer, multi- X X X X X X X
pointer, drum, vertical straight scale.
Page 188 of 681

reference
/IR
(07) Describe the following errors: X X X X X X X
— static system error;
— instrument error;
— barometric error;
— temperature error (air column not at ISA conditions);
— lag (altimeter response to change of height).
(08) Demonstrate the use of an altimeter correction table for X X X X X X X
the following errors:
— temperature corrections;
— aircraft position errors.
(09) Describe the effects of a blockage or a leakage on the X X X X X X X
static pressure line.
(10) Describe the use of GPS altitude as an alternative means X X X X X X X
of checking erroneous altimeter indications, and highlight
the limitations of the GPS altitude indication.
022 02 05 00 Vertical speed indicator (VSI)
022 02 05 01 VSI and instantaneous vertical speed indicator (IVSI)
(01) List the two units used for VSIs and state the relationship X X X X X X
between them:
— metres per second;
— feet per minute.
(02) Explain the operating principles of a VSI and an IVSI. X X X X X X X
(03) Describe and compare the following types of VSIs: X X X X X X X
— barometric type (VSI);
Page 189 of 681

reference
/IR
— instantaneous barometric type (IVSI);
— inertial type (inertial information provided by an
inertial reference unit).
(04) Describe the following VSI errors: X X X X X X X
— static system errors;
— time lag.
(05) Describe the effects on a VSI of a blockage or a leakage on X X X X X X X
the static pressure line.
(06) Give examples of a VSI display. X X X X X X
(07) Compare the indications of a VSI and an IVSI during flight X X X X X X
in turbulence and appropriate pilot technique during
manoeuvring using either type.
022 02 06 00 Airspeed indicator (ASI)
022 02 06 01 Units, errors, operating principles, displays, position
errors, unreliable airspeed indications
(01) List the following three units used for airspeed and state X X X X X X
— nautical miles/hour (kt);
— statute miles/hour (mph);
— kilometres/hour (km/h).
(02) Describe the following ASI errors and state when they X X X X X X X
must be considered:
— pitot/static system errors;
Page 190 of 681

reference
/IR
— position errors;
— compressibility errors;
— density errors.
(03) Explain the operating principles of an ASI (as appropriate X X X X X X X
to aeroplanes or helicopters).
(04) Give examples of an ASI display: pointer, vertical straight X X X X X X
scale, and digital (HUD display).
(05) Demonstrate the use of an ASI correction table for X X X X X X
position error.
(06) Define and explain the following colour codes that can be X X
used on an ASI:
— white arc (flap operating speed range);
— green arc (normal operating speed range);
— yellow arc (caution speed range);
— red line (VNE) or barber’s pole (VMO);
— blue line (best rate of climb speed, one-engine-out
for multi-engine piston light aeroplanes).
(07) Define and explain the following colour codes that can be X X X
used on an ASI:
— green arc (normal operating speed range);
— red line (VNE);
— blue line (maximum airspeed during autorotation).
(08) Describe the effects on an ASI of a blockage or a leakage X X X X X X X
in the static or total pressure line(s).
(09) Define the term ‘unreliable airspeed’ and describe the X X X X X X X
means by which it can be recognised such as:
Page 191 of 681
reference
/IR
— different airspeed indications between ASIs;
— unexpected aircraft behaviour;
— buffeting;
— aircraft systems warning;
— aircraft attitude.
(10) Describe the appropriate procedures available to the pilot X X X X X X X
in the event of unreliable airspeed indications:
— combination of a pitch attitude and power setting;
— ambient wind noise inside the aircraft;
— use of GPS speed indications and the associated
limitations.
022 02 07 00 Machmeter
022 02 07 01 Operating principle, display, CAS, TAS and Mach number
(01) Define ‘Mach number’ and ‘local speed sound’ (LSS). X
Calculate between LSS, TAS and Mach number.
(02) X Describe the operating principle of a Machmeter. X
(03) X Explain why a Machmeter does not suffer from X
compressibility error.
(04) Give examples of a Machmeter display: pointer, drum, X
vertical straight scale, digital.
(05) Describe the effects on a Machmeter of a blockage or a X
leakage in the static or total pressure line(s).
(06) Explain the relationship between CAS, TAS and Mach X
number.
Page 192 of 681

reference
/IR
Explain how CAS, TAS and Mach number vary in relation
to each other during a climb, a descent, or in level flight in
different temperature conditions.
(07) State the existence of maximum operating limit speed X
(VMO) and maximum operating Mach number (MMO).
(08) Describe typical indications of MMO and VMO on analogue X
and digital instruments.
(09) Describe the relationship between MMO and VMO with X
change in altitude and the implications of climbing at
constant IAS and descending at constant Mach number
with respect to the margin to MMO and VMO.
(10) Describe the implications of climbing or descending at X
constant Mach number or constant IAS with respect to
the margin to the stall speed or maximum speed.
022 02 08 00 Air-data computer (ADC)
022 02 08 01 Operating principle, data, errors, air-data inertial
reference unit
(01) Explain the operating principle of an ADC. X X X X X X
(02) X List the following possible input data: X X X X X X
— TAT;
— static pressure;
— total pressure;
— measured temperature;
— AoA;
— flaps position;
Page 193 of 681

reference
/IR
— landing gear position;
— stored aircraft data.
(03) X List the following possible output data, as applicable to X X X X X X
aeroplanes or helicopters:
— IAS;
— TAS;
— SAT;
— TAT;
— Mach number;
— AoA;
— altitude;
— vertical speed;
— VMO/MMO pointer.
(04) Explain how position, instrument, compressibility and X X X X X X
density errors can be compensated/corrected to achieve a
TAS calculation.
(05) Give examples of instruments or systems which may use X X X X X X
ADC output data.
(06) Explain that an air-data inertial reference unit (ADIRU) is X X X X X X
an ADC integrated with an inertial reference unit (IRU),
that there will be separate controls for the ADC part and
inertial reference (IR) part, and that incorrect selection
during failure scenarios may lead to unintended and
potentially irreversible consequences.
(07) X Explain the ADC architecture for air-data measurement X X X X X X
including sensors, processing units and displays, as
Page 194 of 681

reference
/IR
opposed to stand-alone air-data measurement
instruments.
(08) Describe the consequences of the loss of an ADC X X X X X X
compared to the failure of individual instruments.
022 03 00 00 MAGNETISM — DIRECT-READING COMPASS AND FLUX
VALVE
022 03 01 00 Earth’s magnetic field
022 03 01 01 Magnetic field, variation, dip
(01) Describe the magnetic field of the Earth. X X X X X X
(02) X Explain the properties of a magnet. X X X X X X
(03) Define the following terms: X X X X X X
— magnetic variation;
— magnetic dip (inclination).
(04) Describe that a magnetic compass will align itself to both X X X X X X
the horizontal (azimuth) and vertical (dip) components of
the Earth’s magnetic field, thus will not function in the
vicinity of the magnetic poles.
(05) Demonstrate the use of variation values (given as X X X X X X
East/West (E/W) or +/–) to calculate:
— true heading to magnetic heading;
— magnetic heading to true heading.
022 03 02 00 Aircraft magnetic field
022 03 02 01 Permanent magnetism, electromagnetism, deviation
Page 195 of 681

reference
/IR
(01) X Explain the following differences between permanent X X X X X X
magnetism and electromagnetism:
— when they are present;
— what affects their magnitude.
(02) X Explain the principles of and the reasons for: X X X X X X
— compass swinging (determination of initial
deviations);
— compass compensation (correction of deviations
found);
— compass calibration (determination of residual
deviations).
(03) Explain how permanent magnetism within the aircraft X X X X X X
structure and electromagnetism from the aircraft systems
affect the accuracy of a compass.
(04) Describe the purpose and the use of a deviation X X X X X X
correction card.
(05) Demonstrate the use of deviation values (either given as X X X X X X X
E/W or +/–) from a compass deviation card to calculate:
— compass heading to magnetic heading;
— magnetic heading to compass heading.
022 03 03 00 Direct-reading magnetic compass
022 03 03 01 Purpose, errors, timed turns, serviceability
(01) Explain the purpose of a direct-reading magnetic X X X X X X
compass.
(02) — Describe how the direct-reading magnetic compass will X X X X X X
Page 196 of 681

reference
/IR
only show correct indications during straight, level and
unaccelerated flight, and that an error will occur during
the following flight manoeuvres (no numerical examples):
— — acceleration and deceleration;
— — turning;
— during pitch-up or pitch-down manoeuvres.
(03) Explain how the use of timed turns eliminates the X X X X X X
problem of the turning errors of a direct-reading magnetic
compass, and calculate the duration of a rate-1 turn for a
given change of heading.
(04) Describe the serviceability check for a direct-reading X X X X X X X
magnetic compass prior to flight, such as:
— the physical appearance of the device;
— comparing the indication to another known direction
such as a different compass or runway direction.
022 03 04 00 Flux valve
022 03 04 01 Purpose, operating principle, location, errors
(01) Explain the purpose of a flux valve. X X X X X X
(02) X Explain its operating principle. X X X X X X
(03) Indicate typical locations of the flux valve(s). X X X X X X
(04) Give the remote-reading compass system as example of X X X X X X
application for a flux valve.
(05) Explain that deviation is compensated for and, X X X X X X
therefore, eliminates the need for a deviation
Page 197 of 681

reference
/IR
correction card.
(06) Explain that a flux valve does not suffer from the same X X X X X X
magnitude of errors as a direct-reading magnetic
compass when turning, accelerating or decelerating and
during pitch-up or pitch-down manoeuvres.
022 04 00 00 GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS
022 04 01 00 Gyroscope: basic principles
022 04 01 01 Gyroscopic forces, degrees of freedom, gyro wander,
driving gyroscopes
(01) X Define a ‘gyro’. X X X X X X X
(02) X Explain the fundamentals of the theory of gyroscopic X X X X X X X
forces.
(03) X Define the ‘degrees of freedom’ of a gyro. X X X X X X X
Remark: As a convention, the degrees of freedom of a
gyroscope do not include its own axis of rotation (the spin
axis).
(04) X Explain the following terms: X X X X X X
— rigidity;
— precession;
— wander (drift/topple).
(05) Explain the three types of gyro wander: X X X X X X
— real wander;
— apparent wander;
— transport wander.
Page 198 of 681

reference
/IR
(06) Describe the two ways of driving gyroscopes and any X X X X X X X
associated indications:
— air/vacuum;
— electrically.
022 04 02 00 Rate-of-turn indicator — Turn coordinator — Balance
(slip) indicator
022 04 02 01 Indications, relation between bank angle, rate of turn
and TAS
(01) Explain the purpose of a rate-of-turn and balance (slip) X X X X X X X
indicator.
(02) Define a ‘rate-1 turn’. X X X X X X X
(03) Describe the indications given by a rate-of-turn X X X X X X X

indicator.
(04) Explain the relation between bank angle, rate of turn X X X X X X X
and TAS, and how bank angle becomes the limiting
factor at high speed (no calculations).
(05) Explain the purpose of a balance (slip) indicator and its X X X X X X X
principle of operation.
(06) Describe the indications of a rate-of-turn and balance X X X X X X X
(slip) indicator during a balanced, slip or skid turn.
(07) Describe the indications given by a turn coordinator (or X X X X X X X
turn-and-bank indicator).
(08) Compare the indications on the rate-of-turn indicator X X X X X X X
and the turn coordinator.
022 04 03 00 Attitude indicator (artificial horizon)
Page 199 of 681

reference
/IR
022 04 03 01 Purpose, types, effect of aircraft acceleration, display
(01) Explain the purpose of the attitude indicator. X X X X X X X
(02) Identify the two types of attitude indicators: X X X X X X X
— attitude indicator;
— attitude and director indicator (ADI).
(03) X State the degrees of freedom. X X X X X X
(04) Describe the effects of the aircraft’s acceleration and X X X X X X

turns on instrument indications.
(05) Describe a typical attitude display and instrument X X X X X X X
markings.
022 04 04 00 Directional gyroscope
022 04 04 01 Purpose, types, drift, alignment to compass heading
(01) Explain the purpose of the directional gyroscope. X X X X X X X
(02) Identify the two types of gyro-driven direction X X X X X X X

indicators:
— direction indicator;
— horizontal situation indicator (HSI).
(03) Explain how the directional gyroscope will drift over X X X X X X
time due to the following:
— rotation of the Earth;
— aircraft manoeuvring;
— aircraft movement over the Earth’s surface/direction
of travel.
Page 200 of 681

reference
/IR
(04) Describe the procedure for the pilot to align the X X X X X X
directional gyroscope to the correct compass heading.
022 04 05 00 Remote-reading compass systems
022 04 05 01 Operating principles, components, comparison with a
direct-reading magnetic compass
(01) Describe the principles of operation of a remote-reading X X X X X X X
compass system.
(02) Using a block diagram, list and explain the function of the X X X X X X X
following components of a remote-reading compass
system:
— flux detection unit;
— gyro unit;
— transducers, precession amplifiers, annunciator;
— display unit (compass card, synchronising and set-
heading knob, DG/compass/slave/free switch).
(03) State the advantages and disadvantages of a remote- X X X X X X
reading compass system compared to a direct-reading
magnetic compass with regard to:
— design (power source, weight and volume);
— deviation due to aircraft magnetism;
— turning and acceleration errors;
— attitude errors;
— accuracy and stability of the information displayed;
— availability of the information for several systems
(compass card, RMI, automatic flight control system
(AFCS)).
Page 201 of 681

reference
/IR
022 04 06 00 Solid-state systems — attitude and heading reference X X X X X X
system (AHRS)
022 04 06 01 Components, indications
(01) Explain that the AHRS is a replacement for traditional X X X X X X X
gyros using solid-state technology with no moving parts
and is a single unit consisting of:
— solid-state accelerometers;
— solid-state rate sensor gyroscopes;
— solid-state magnetometers (measurement of the
Earth’s magnetic field).
(02) Explain that the AHRS senses rotation and acceleration X X X X X X X
for all three axes and senses the direction of the Earth’s
magnetic field where the indications are normally
provided on electronic screens (electronic flight
instrument system (EFIS)).
022 05 00 00 INERTIAL NAVIGATION
022 05 01 01 Systems
(01) State that inertial navigation/reference systems are the X X X
main source of attitude and one of the main sources of
navigational data in commercial air transport
aeroplanes.
(02) State that inertial systems require no external input, X X X
except TAS, to determine aircraft attitude and
navigational data.
Page 202 of 681

reference
/IR
(03) State that earlier gyro mechanically stabilised platforms X X X
are (technically incorrectly but conventionally) referred
to as inertial navigation systems (INSs) and more
modern fixed (strap down) platforms are conventionally
referred to as inertial reference systems (IRSs). INSs can
be considered to be stand-alone, whereas IRSs are
integrated with the FMS.
(04) Explain the basic principles of inertial navigation X X X
(including double integration of measured acceleration
and the necessity for north–south, east–west and
vertical components to be measured/extracted).
(05) Explain the necessity of applying correction for X X X
transport precession, and Earth rate precession, coriolis
and gravity.
(06) State that in modern aircraft fitted with inertial X X X
reference system (IRS) and flight management system
(FMS), the flight management computer (FMC) position
is normally derived from a mathematical analysis of IRS,
global positioning system (GPS), and distance
measuring equipment (DME) data, VHF omnidirectional
radio range (VOR) and LOC.
(07) List all navigational data that can be determined by a X X X
stand-alone inertial navigation system.
(08) State that a strap-down system is fixed to the structure X X X
of the aircraft and normally consists of three laser ring
gyros and three accelerometers.
(09) State the differences between a laser ring gyro and a X X X
Page 203 of 681

reference
/IR
conventional mechanical gyro.
022 05 02 00 Alignment and operation
022 05 02 01 Alignment process, incorrect data entry, and control
panels
(01) State that during the alignment process, the inertial X X X
platform is levelled (INS) or the local vertical is
determined (IRS), and true north/aircraft heading is
established.
(02) Explain that the aircraft must be stationary during X X X
alignment, the aircraft position is entered during the
alignment phase, and that the alignment process takes
around 10 to 20 minutes at mid latitudes (longer at high
latitudes).
(03) State that in-flight realignment is not possible and loss of X X X
alignment leads to loss of navigational data although
attitude information may still be available.
(04) Explain that the inertial navigation system (INS) platform X X X
is maintained level and north-aligned after alignment is
complete and the aircraft is in motion.
(05) State that an incorrect entry of latitude may lead to a loss X X X
of alignment and is more critical than the incorrect entry
of longitude.
(06) State that the positional error of a stand-alone INS X X X
varies (a typical value can be quoted as 1–2 NM/h) and
is dependent on the gyro drift rate, accelerometer bias,
misalignment of the platform, and computational errors.
Page 204 of 681

reference
/IR
(07) Explain that, on a modern aircraft, there is likely to be an X X X
air-data inertial reference unit (ADIRU), which is an
inertial reference unit (IRU) integrated with an air-data
computer (ADC).
(08) Identify examples of IRS control panels. X X X
(09) Explain the following selections on the IRU mode X X X
selector:
— NAV (normal operation);
— ATT (attitude only).
(10) State that the majority of the IRS data can be accessed X X X
through the FMS control and display unit (CDU)/flight
management and guidance system (FMGS)
multifunctional control and display unit (MCDU).
(11) Describe the procedure available to the pilot for X X X
assessing the performance of individual IRUs after a
flight:
— reviewing the residual indicated ground speed
when the aircraft has parked;
— reviewing the drift given as NM/h.
022 06 00 00 AEROPLANE: AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEMS
022 06 01 00 General
022 06 01 01 Definitions and control loops
(01) Describe the following purposes of an automatic flight X X X
control system (AFCS):
— enhancement of flight controls;
Page 205 of 681
reference
/IR
— reduction of pilot workload.
(02) Define and explain the following two functions of an AFCS: X X X
— aircraft control: stabilise the aircraft around its
centre of gravity (CG);
— aircraft guidance: guidance of the aircraft’s flight
path.
(03) Describe the following two automatic control principles: X X
— closed loop, where a feedback from an action or
state is compared to the desired action or state;
— open loop, where there is no feedback loop.
(04) List the following elements of a closed-loop control X X
system and explain their basic function:
— input signal;
— error detector;
— signal processor providing a measured output signal
according to set criteria or laws;
— control element such as an actuator;
— feedback signal to error detector for comparison
with input signal.
(05) Describe how a closed-loop system may enter a state of X X
self-induced oscillation if the system overcompensates
for deviations from the desired state.
(06) Explain how a state of self-induced oscillations may be X X
detected and describe the effects of self-induced
oscillations:
— aircraft controllability;
Page 206 of 681

reference
/IR
— aircraft safety;
— timely manual intervention as a way of mitigating
loss of control;
— techniques that may be used to maintain positive
control of the aircraft.
022 06 02 00 Autopilot system
(01) Define the three basic control channels. X X
(02) Define the three different types of autopilots: X X
— single or 1 axis (roll);
— 2 axes (pith and roll);
— 3 axes (pitch, roll and yaw);
(03) Describe the purpose of the following components of X X
an autopilot system:
— flight control unit (FCU), mode control panel (MCP)
or equivalent;
— flight mode annunciator (FMA)
(see Subject 022 06 04 00);
— autopilot computer;
— actuator.
(04) Explain the following lateral modes: X X
— heading (HDG)/track (TRK);
— VOR (VOR)/localiser (LOC);
— lateral navigation/managed navigation (LNAV or
NAV).
Page 207 of 681

reference
/IR
(05) Describe the purpose of control laws for pitch and roll X X
modes.
(06) Explain the following vertical modes: X X
— vertical speed (V/S);
— flight path angle (FPA);
— level change (LVL CHG)/open climb (OP CLB) or open
descent (OP DES);
— speed reference system (SRS);
— altitude (ALT) hold;
— vertical navigation (VNAV)/managed climb (CLB) or
descent (DES);
— glideslope (G/S).
(07) Describe how the autopilot uses speed, aircraft X X
configuration or flight phase as a measure for the
magnitude of control inputs and how this may affect
precision and stability.
(08) Explain the following mixed modes: X X
— take-off;
— go-around;
— approach (APP).
(09) Describe the two types of autopilot configurations and X X
explain the implications to the pilot for either and when
comparing the two principles:
— flight-deck controls move with the control surface
when the autopilot is engaged;
— flight-deck controls remain static when the autopilot
Page 208 of 681

reference
/IR
is engaged.
(10) Describe the purpose of the following inputs and X X
outputs for an autopilot system:
— attitude information;
— flight path/trajectory information;
— control surface position information;
— airspeed information;
— aircraft configuration information;
— FCU/MCP selections;
— FMAs.
(11) Describe the purpose of the synchronisation function X X
when engaging the autopilot and explain why the
autopilot should be engaged when the aircraft is in trim.
(12) Define the control wheel steering (CWS) mode as X X
manual manoeuvring of the aircraft through the
autopilot computer and autopilot servos/actuators
using the control column/control wheel.
(13) Describe the following elements of CWS: X X
— CWS as an autopilot mode;
— flight phases where CWS cannot be used;
— whether the pilot or the autopilot is controlling the
flight path;
— the availability of flight path/performance
protections;
— potential different feel and control response
compared to manual flight.
Page 209 of 681

reference
/IR
(14) Describe touch control steering (TCS) and highlight the X X X
differences when compared to CWS:
— autopilot remains engaged but autopilot
servos/actuators are disconnected from the control
surfaces;
— manual control of the aircraft as long as TCS button
is depressed;
— autopilot servos/actuators reconnect when TCS
button is released and the autopilot returns to
previously engaged mode(s).
(15) Explain that only one autopilot may be engaged at any X X X
time except for when APP is armed in order to facilitate
a fail-operational autoland.
(16) Explain the difference between an armed and an X X X
engaged mode:
— not all modes have an armed state available;
— a mode will only become armed if certain criteria are
met;
— an armed mode will become engaged (replacing the
previously engaged mode, if any) when certain
criteria are met.
(17) Describe the sequence of events when a mode is X X X
engaged and the different phases:
— initial phase where attitude is changed to obtain a
new trajectory in order to achieve the new
parameter;
— the trajectory will be based on rate of closure which
Page 210 of 681

reference
/IR
is again based on the difference between the original
parameter and the new parameter;
— capture phase where the aircraft will follow a
predefined rate of change of trajectory to achieve
the new parameter without overshooting/
undershooting;
— tracking or hold phase where the aircraft will
maintain the set parameter until a new change has
been initiated.
(18) Explain automatic mode reversion and typical situations X X X
where it may occur:
— no suitable data for the current mode such as flight
plan discontinuity when in LNAV/managed NAV;
— change of parameter during capture phase for
original parameter such as change of altitude target
during ALT ACQ/ALT*;
— mismanagement of a mode resulting in engagement
of the autopilot envelope protection, e.g. selecting
excessive V/S resulting in a loss of speed control.
(19) Explain the dangers of mismanagement of the following X X X
modes:
— use of V/S and lack of speed protection, i.e. excessive
V/S or FPA may be selected with subsequent
uncontrolled loss or gain of airspeed;
— arming VOR/LOC or APP outside the protected area
of the localiser or ILS.
(20) Describe how failure of other systems may influence X X X
the availability of the autopilot and how incorrect data
Page 211 of 681
reference
/IR
from other systems may result in an undesirable aircraft
state, potentially without any failure indications.
Explain the importance of prompt and appropriate pilot
intervention during such events.
(21) Explain an appropriate procedure for disengaging the X X X
autopilot and why both aural and visual warnings are
used to indicate that the autopilot is being disengaged:
— temporary warning for intended disengagement
using the design method;
— continuous warning for unintended disengagement
or using a method other than the design method.
(22) Explain the following regarding autopilot and aircraft X X X
with manual trim:
— the autopilot may not engage unless the aircraft
controls are in trim;
— the aircraft will normally be in trim when the
autopilot is disconnected;
— use of manual trim when the autopilot is engaged
will normally lead to autopilot disconnection and a
risk of an out-of-trim situation.
022 06 03 00 Flight director: design and operation
022 06 03 01 Purpose, use, indications, modes, data
(01) Explain the purpose of a flight director system. X X X
(02) Describe the different types of display: X X X
— pitch and roll crossbars;
Page 212 of 681

reference
/IR
— V-bar.
(03) Explain the differences between a flight director and an X X X
autopilot and how the flight director provides a means of
cross-checking the control/guidance commands sent to
the autopilot.
(04) Explain why the flight director must be followed when X X X
engaged/shown, and describe the appropriate use of
the flight director:
— flight director only;
— autopilot only;
— flight director and autopilot;
— typical job-share between pilots (pilot flying
(PF)/pilot monitoring (PM)) for selecting the
parameters when autopilot is engaged versus
disengaged.
(05) Give examples of different scenarios and the resulting X X X
flight director indications.
(06) Explain that the flight director computes and indicates X X X
the direction and magnitude of control inputs required
in order to achieve an attitude to follow a trajectory.
(07) Explain how the modes available for the flight director X X X
are the same as those available for the autopilot, and
that the same panel (FCU/MCP) is normally used for
selection.
(08) Explain the importance of checking the FMC data or X X X
selected autopilot modes through the FMA when using
the flight directors. If the flight directors are showing
Page 213 of 681

reference
/IR
incorrect guidance, they should not be followed and
should be turned off.
022 06 04 00 Aeroplane: flight mode annunciator (FMA)
022 06 04 01 Purpose, modes, display scenarios
(01) Explain the purpose of FMAs and their importance X X X
being the only indication of the state of a system rather
than a switch position.
(02) Describe where the FMAs are normally shown and how X X X
the FMAs will be divided into sections (as applicable to
aircraft complexity):
— vertical modes;
— lateral modes;
— autothrust modes;
— autopilot and flight director annunciators;
— landing capability.
(03) Explain why FMAs for engaged or armed modes have X X X
different colour or different font size.
(04) Describe the following FMA display scenarios: X X X
— engagement of a mode;
— mode change from armed to becoming engaged;
— mode reversion.
(05) Explain the importance of monitoring the FMAs and X X X
announcing mode changes at all times (including when
selecting a new mode) and why only certain mode
changes will be accompanied by an aural notification or
Page 214 of 681

reference
/IR
additional visual cues.
(06) Describe the consequences of not understanding what X X X
the FMAs imply or missing mode changes, and how it
may lead to an undesirable aircraft state.
022 06 05 00 Autoland
(01) Explain the purpose of an autoland system. X X
(02) Explain the significance of the following components X X
required for an autoland:
— autopilot;
— autothrust;
— radio altimeter;
— ILS receivers.
(03) Explain the following terms (reference to CS-AWO ‘All X
Weather Operations’):
— fail-passive automatic landing system;
— fail-operational automatic landing system;
— fail-operational hybrid landing system;
— alert height.
(04) Describe the autoland sequence including the X
following:
— FMAs regarding the landing capability of the aircraft;
— the significance of monitoring the FMAs to ensure
the automatic arming/engagement of modes
triggered by defined radio altitudes or other
Page 215 of 681

reference
/IR
thresholds;
— in the event of a go-around, that the aircraft
performs the go-around manoeuvre both by reading
the FMAs and supporting those readings by raw
data;
— during the landing phase, that ‘FLARE’ mode engages
at the appropriate radio altitude, including typical
time frame and actions if ‘FLARE’ does not engage;
— after landing, that ‘ROLL-OUT’ mode engages and the
significance of disconnecting the autopilot prior to
vacating the runway.
(05) Explain that there are operational limitations in order to X
legally perform an autoland beyond the technical
capability of the aircraft.
(06) Explain the purpose and significance of alert height, X
describe the indications and implications, and consider
typical pilot actions for a failure situation:
— above the alert height;
— below the alert height.
(07) Describe typical failures that, if occurring below the X
alert height, will trigger a warning:
— all autopilots disengage;
— loss of ILS signal or components thereof;
— excessive ILS deviations;
— radio-altimeter failure.
(08) Describe how the failure of various systems, including X
systems not directly involved in the autoland process,
Page 216 of 681

reference
/IR
can influence the ability to perform an autoland or
affect the minima down to which the approach may be
conducted.
(09) Describe the fail-operational hybrid landing system as a X
primary fail-passive automatic landing system with a
secondary independent guidance system such as a
head-up display (HUD) to enable the pilot to complete a
manual landing if the primary system fails.
022 07 00 00 HELICOPTER: AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEMS
022 07 01 01 Stabilisation
(01) Explain the similarities and differences between SAS and X X X
AFCS (the latter can actually fly the helicopter to perform
certain functions selected by the pilot). Some AFCSs just
have altitude and heading hold whilst others include a
vertical speed or IAS hold mode, where a constant rate of
climb/decent or IAS is maintained by the AFCS.
022 07 01 02 Reduction of pilot workload
(01) Appreciate how effective the AFCS is in reducing pilot X X X

workload by improving basic aircraft control harmony and
decreasing disturbances.
022 07 01 03 Enhancement of helicopter capability
(01) Explain how an AFCS improves helicopter flight safety X X X
during:
— search and rescue (SAR) because of increased
Page 217 of 681

reference
/IR
capabilities;
— flight by sole reference to instruments;
— underslung load operations;
— white-out conditions in snow-covered landscapes;
— an approach to land with lack of visual cues.
(02) Explain that the SAR modes of AFCS include the following X X X
functions:
— ability to autohover;
— facility for mark on target (MOT) approach to hover;
— automatically transition from cruise down to a
predetermined point or over-flown point;
— ability for the rear crew to move the helicopter
around in the hover;
— the ability to automatically transition from the hover
back to cruise flight;
— the ability to fly various search patterns.
(03) Explain that earlier autohover systems use Doppler X X X
velocity sensors and modern systems use inertial sensors
plus GPS, and normally include a two-dimensional hover-
velocity indicator for the pilots.
(04) Explain why some SAR helicopters have both radio- X X X
altimeter height hold and barometric altitude hold.
022 07 01 04 Failures
(01) Explain the various redundancies and independent X X X
systems that are built into the AFCSs.
Page 218 of 681

reference
/IR
(02) Appreciate that the pilot can override the system in the X X X
event of a failure.
(03) Explain a series actuator ‘hard over’ which equals aircraft X X X
attitude runaway.
(04) Explain the consequences of a saturation of the series X X X
actuators.
022 07 02 00 Components: operation
022 07 02 01 Basic sensors
(01) Explain the basic sensors in the system and their X X X
functions.
(02) Explain that the number of sensors will be dependent on X X X
the number of coupled modes of the system.
022 07 02 02 Specific sensors
(01) Explain the function of the microswitches and strain X X X
gauges in the system which sense pilot input to prevent
excessive feedback forces from the system.
022 07 02 03 Actuators
(01) Explain the principles of operation of the series and X X X
parallel actuators, spring-box clutches and the autotrim
system.
(02) Explain the principle of operation of the electronic X X X
hydraulic actuators in the system.
022 07 02 04 Pilot–system interface: control panels, system
indications, warnings
Page 219 of 681

reference
/IR
(01) Describe the typical layout of the AFCS control panel. X X X
(02) Describe the system indications and warnings. X X X
022 07 02 05 Operation
(01) Explain the functions of the redundant sensors’ simplex X X X
and duplex channels (single/dual channel).
022 07 03 00 Stability augmentation system (SAS)
022 07 03 01 General principles and operation
(01) Explain the general principles and operation of an SAS X X X
with regard to:
— rate damping;
— short-term attitude hold;
— effect on static stability;
— effect on dynamic stability;
— aerodynamic cross-coupling;
— effect on manoeuvrability;
— control response;
— engagement/disengagement;
— authority.
(02) Explain and describe the general working principles and X X X
primary use of an SAS by damping pitch, roll and yaw
motions.
(03) Describe a simple SAS with force trim system which uses X X X
magnetic clutch and springs to hold cyclic control in the
position where it was last released.
Page 220 of 681

reference
/IR
(04) Explain the interaction of trim with SAS/stability and X X X
control augmentation system (SCAS).
(05) Appreciate that the system can be overridden by the pilot X X X
and that individual channels can be deselected.
(06) Describe the operational limits of the system. X X X
(07) Explain why the system should be turned off in severe X X X
turbulence or when extreme flight attitudes are reached.
(08) Explain the safety design features built into some SASs to X X X
limit the authority of the actuators to 10–20 % of the full-
control throw in order to allow the pilot to override if
actuators demand an unsafe control input.
(09) Explain how cross-coupling produces an adverse effect on X X X
roll-to-yaw coupling when the helicopter is subjected to
gusts.
(10) Explain the collective-to-pitch coupling, side-slip-to-pitch X X X
coupling and inter-axis coupling.
022 07 04 00 Autopilot — automatic stability equipment
(01) Explain the general autopilot principles with regard to: X X X
— long-term attitude hold;
— fly-through;
— changing the reference (beep trim, trim release).
022 07 04 02 Basic modes (3/4 axes)
(01) Explain the AFCS operation on cyclic axes (pitch/roll), yaw X X X
Page 221 of 681

reference
/IR
axis, and on collective (fourth axis).
022 07 04 03 Automatic guidance (upper modes of AFCS)
(01) Explain the function of the attitude-hold system in an X X X
AFCS.
(02) Explain the function of the heading-hold system in an X X X
AFCS.
(03) Explain the function of the vertical-speed hold system in X X X
an AFCS.
(04) Explain the function of the navigation-coupling system in X X X
an AFCS.
(05) Explain the function of the VOR-/ILS-coupling system in an X X X
AFCS.
(06) Explain the function of the hover-mode system in an AFCS X X X
(including Doppler and radio-altimeter systems).
(07) Explain the function of the SAR mode (automatic X X X
transition to hover and back to cruise) in an AFCS.
022 07 04 04 Flight director: design and operation
(01) Explain the purpose of a flight director system. X X X
(02) Describe the different types of display: X X X
— pitch and roll crossbars;
— V-bar.
(03) State the difference between the flight director system X X X
and the autopilot system. Explain how each can be used
independently.
Page 222 of 681

reference
/IR
(04) List and describe the main components of the flight X X X
director system.
(05) Give examples of different situations with the respective X X X
indications of the command bars.
(06) Explain the architecture of the different flight directors X X X
fitted to helicopters and the importance to monitor other
instruments as well as the flight director.
(07) Explain how some helicopter types have the collective X X X
setting as a flight director command; however, the
command does not provide protection against a
transmission overtorque.
(08) Describe the collective setting and yaw depiction on flight X X X
director for some helicopters.
022 07 04 05 Automatic flight control panel (AFCP)
(01) Explain the purpose and the importance of the AFCP. X X X
(02) State that the AFCP provides: X X X

— AFCS basic and upper modes;
— flight director selection, SAS and AP engagement;
— failure and alert messages.
022 08 00 00 TRIMS — YAW DAMPER — FLIGHT-ENVELOPE
PROTECTION
022 08 01 00 Trim systems
Page 223 of 681

reference
/IR
(01) Explain the purpose of the trim system and describe the X X
layout with one trim system for each control axis,
depending on the complexity of the aircraft.
(02) Give examples of trim indicators and their function, and X X
explain the significance of a ‘green band/area’ for the
pitch trim.
(03) Describe and explain an automatic pitch-trim system for a X X
conventional aeroplane.
(04) Describe and explain an automatic pitch-trim system for X X
an FBW aeroplane and that it is also operating during
manual flight; however, during certain phases it may be
automatically disabled to alter the handling characteristics
of the aircraft.
(05) Describe the consequences of manual operation on the X X
trim wheel when the automatic pitch-trim system is
engaged.
(06) Describe and explain the engagement and disengagement X X
conditions of the autopilot according to trim controls.
(07) Define ‘Mach trim’ and state that the Mach-trim system X X
can be independent.
(08) Describe the implications for the pilot in the event of a X X
runaway trim or significant out-of-trim state.
022 08 02 00 Yaw damper
(01) Explain the purpose of the yaw-damper system. X X
Page 224 of 681

reference
/IR
(02) Explain the purpose of the Dutch-roll filter (filtering of the X X
yaw input signal).
(03) Explain the operation of a yaw-damper system and state X X
the difference between a yaw-damper system and a 3-axis
autopilot operation on the rudder channel.
022 08 03 00 Flight-envelope protection (FEP)
022 08 03 01 Purpose, input parameters, functions
(01) Explain the purpose of the FEP. X X X
(02) Explain typical input parameters to the FEP: X X X
— AoA;
— aircraft configuration;
— airspeed information.
(03) Explain the following functions of the FEP: X X X
— stall protection;
— overspeed protection.
(04) Explain how the stall-protection function and the X X X
overspeed-protection function apply to both
mechanical/conventional and FBW control systems, but
other functions (e.g. pitch or bank limitation) can only
apply to FBW control systems.
022 09 00 00 AUTOTHRUST — AUTOMATIC THRUST CONTROL
SYSTEM
022 09 01 00 Autothrust system
022 09 01 01 Purpose, operation, overcompensation, speed control
Page 225 of 681

reference
/IR
(01) Describe the purpose of the autothrust system and X
explain how the FMAs will be the only indication on
active autothrust modes.
(02) Explain the operation of an autothrust system with X
regard to the following modes:
— take-off/go-around (TOGA);
— climb or maximum continuous thrust (MCT), N1 or
EPR targeted (THR CLB, THR MCT, N1, THR HOLD,
EPR);
— speed (SPEED, MCP SPD);
— idle thrust (THR IDLE, RETARD/ARM);
— landing (RETARD, THR IDLE).
(03) Describe the two main variants of autothrust systems: X
— mode selections available on the FCU/MCP and
thrust levers move with autothrust commands;
— mode selections made using the thrust levers which
remain static during autothrust operation.
(04) Explain how flight in turbulence/wind shear giving X
fluctuating airspeed indications may lead to the
autothrust overcompensating in an oscillating manner
and that manual thrust may be required to settle the
airspeed. Airspeed indications/trend vectors may give
an indication of appropriate thrust adjustments but any
reaction should not be too aggressive.
(05) Explain the threats associated with the use of X
autothrust resulting in the pilot losing the sense of
energy awareness (e.g. speed, thrust).
Page 226 of 681

reference
/IR
(06) Explain the relationship between autopilot pitch modes X
and autothrust modes, and how the autopilot and
autothrust will interact upon selecting modes for one of
the systems.
(07) Explain the principles of speed control and how speed X
can be controlled:
— by varying the engine thrust;
— by varying the aircraft pitch.
(08) Explain the potential implications on speed control X
when the autothrust controls speed and the autopilot
pitch channel has a fixed pitch target for the following
mode combinations:
— MCP SPD/SPEED and ALT HOLD/ALT;
— MCP SPD/SPEED and VSP (climb);
— MCP SPD/SPEED and VSP (descent).
(09) Explain the potential implications on speed control X
when the autothrust has a fixed thrust target and the
autopilot pitch channel controls speed for the following
mode combinations:
— N1/THR CLB and LVL CHG/OP CLB;
— ARM/THR IDLE and LVL CHG/OP DES.
022 10 00 00 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
022 10 01 00 Voice communication, data-link transmission
022 10 01 01 Definitions and transmission modes
(01) Describe the purpose of a data-link transmission X X X
Page 227 of 681

reference
/IR
system.
(02) Compare voice communication versus data-link X X X
transmission systems.
(03) Describe the communication links that are used in X X X
aircraft:
— high-frequency (HF) communications;
— very high-frequency (VHF) communications;
— satellite communications (SATCOM).
(04) Consider the properties of the communication links X X X
with regard to:
— signal quality;
— range/area coverage;
— range;
— line-of-sight limitations;
— quality of the signal received;
— interference due to ionospheric conditions;
— data transmission speed.
(05) Define and explain the following terms in relation to X X X
aircraft data-link communications:
— message/data uplink;
— message/data downlink.
022 10 01 02 Systems: architecture, design and operation
(01) Describe the purpose of the ACARS network. X
(02) Describe the systems using the ACARS network through X
the air traffic service unit (ATSU) suite:
Page 228 of 681
reference
/IR
— aeronautical/airline operational control (AOC);
— air traffic control (ATC).
(03) Explain the purpose of the following parts of the on- X
board equipment:
— ATSU communications computer;
— control display unit (CDU)/multifunction control
display unit (MCDU);
— data communication display unit (DCDU);
— ATC message visual annunciator;
— printer.
(04) Give examples of airline operations communications X
(AOC) data-link messages such as:
— out of the gate, off the ground, on the ground, into
the gate (OOOI);
— load sheet;
— passenger information (connecting flights);
— weather reports (METAR, TAF);
— maintenance reports (engine exceedances);
— aircraft technical data;
— free-text messages.
(05) Give examples of ATC data-link messages such as: X
— departure clearance;
— oceanic clearance;
— digital ATIS (D-ATIS);
— controller–pilot data-link communications (CPDLC).
Page 229 of 681

reference
/IR
022 10 02 00 Future air navigation systems (FANSs)
022 10 02 01 Versions, applications, CPDLC messages, ADS contracts
(01) Describe the existence of the ICAO communication, X
navigation, surveillance/air traffic management
(CNS/ATM) concept.
(02) Explain the two versions of FANSs: X
— FANS A/FANS 1 using the ACARS network;
— FANS B/FANS 2 using the ACARS network and the
aeronautical telecommunication network (ATN).
(03) List and explain the following FANS A/FANS 1 X
applications:
— ATS facility notification (AFN);
— automatic dependent surveillance (ADS);
— CPDLC.
(04) Compare the ADS application with the secondary X
surveillance radar function, and the CPDLC application
with VHF communication systems.
(05) State that an ATCU can use the ADS application only, or X
the CPDLC application only, or both of them (not
including AFN).
(06) Describe the AFN process for logging on with an ATCU X
and typical data that will be included in the message.
(07) Describe typical types of CPDLC messages and the X
typical pilot work practices when requesting or
accepting a CPDLC clearance.
Page 230 of 681

reference
/IR
(08) List and describe the different types of ADS contracts X
that are controlled by the ATCU and beyond the control
of the pilot:
— periodic: data sent at set time intervals;
— on demand: data sent when requested;
— on event: data sent when an event occurs (e.g.
heading change, climb initiated, etc.);
— emergency mode.
(09) Describe the purpose of the ADS emergency mode X
contract and highlight the difference to the ATCU
controlled contracts.
022 11 00 00 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (FMS)/
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT AND GUIDANCE SYSTEM (FMGS)
022 11 01 00 Design
022 11 01 01 Purpose, architecture, failures, functions
(01) Explain the purpose of an FMS. X X X X
(02) Describe a typical dual FMS architecture including the X X X
following components:
— flight management computer (FMC);
— CDU/MCDU;
— cross-talk bus.
(03) Describe the following failures of a dual FMS X X X
architecture and explain the potential implications to
the pilots:
— failure of one FMC;
Page 231 of 681

reference
/IR
— failure of one CDU/MCDU;
— failure of the cross-talk bus.
(04) Describe how the FMS integrates with other systems X X X X
and gathers data in order to provide outputs depending
on its level of complexity.
(05) Explain how the FMS may provide the following X X X X X
functions:
— navigation;
— lateral and vertical flight planning;
— performance parameters.
022 11 02 00 FMC databases
022 11 02 01 Navigation database
(01) Explain the purpose of, and describe typical content of, X X X X
the navigation database.
(02) Describe the 28-day aeronautical information regulation X X X X
and control (AIRAC) update cycle of the navigation
database and explain the reason for having two
navigation databases (one active, one standby) and the
implication this has to the pilot.
(03) Explain the purpose of typical user-defined waypoints X X X X
such as:
— latitude/longitude coordinates;
— place/bearing/distance (PBD);
— place/bearing place/bearing (PBX);
— place/distance (PD).
Page 232 of 681

reference
/IR
(04) Explain that the pilot cannot change or overwrite any of X X X X
the data in the navigation database and that any user-
defined waypoints, routes and inputted data will be
erased when a different database is activated.
(05) Explain the threats and implications to the pilot of X X X X
changing the database by error either on the ground or
while flying.
022 11 02 02 Aircraft performance database
(01) Explain the purpose of, and describe the typical content X X X X
of, the aircraft performance database.
(02) Explain the importance of verifying that the aircraft X X X X
performance database is based on the correct data,
such as engine type and aircraft variant.
(03) Explain that the contents of the aircraft performance X X X X
database cannot be modified by the pilot.
(04) Explain the purpose of performance factor and how it X X X X
influences the calculations.
(05) Explain the purpose of cost index (CI) and how it X
influences the calculations.
022 11 03 00 Operations, limitations
022 11 03 01 Data, calculations, position inputs, raw data
(01) Describe typical data that may be provided by the FMS: X X X X
— lateral and vertical navigation guidance;
— present position;
— time predictions;
Page 233 of 681
reference
/IR
— fuel predictions;
— altitude/flight level predictions.
(02) Explain how the FMS will use a combination of X X X X
inputted/database and measured data in order to
calculate projections and provide output data.
(03) Explain the issues and threats using inputted/database X X X X
data and give examples of consequences of inputting
data incorrectly/using incorrect data.
(04) Describe fuel consumption calculations during standard X X X
operations and explain typical data that will have an
influence on the accuracy of the calculations.
(05) Explain the implications on the accuracy of the X X X
calculations during flight in abnormal configurations
(such as engine out, gear down, flaps extended, spoilers
extended, etc.) if the FMS is unable to detect the
failure.
(06) Describe and explain the purpose of an FMS having X X X
dedicated radio-navigation receivers that it will tune
automatically.
(07) Explain typical position inputs to an FMS: X X X
— GPS;
— IRS;
— DME;
— VOR;
— LOC;
— runway threshold (RWY THR).
Page 234 of 681

reference
/IR
(08) Explain how the FMS will create its own FMS position X X X
fix and that the FMS calculations will be based on the
FMS position. Depending on the type of system, the
FMS position may be calculated from:
— a single source of position data where the most
accurate data available at a given time will be used;
— multiple sources from which a position will be
derived using the combined inputs.
(09) Explain the implications of a reduction in available X X X
position inputs to the FMS, especially GPS in relation to
the capability of performing RNP/PBN approaches.
(10) Explain the difference between following the FMS data X X X X
compared to following raw data from radio-navigation
receivers and describe how there may be limitations for
using FMS data as primary source to follow an
instrument approach procedure (IAP) such as LOC, VOR
or NDB.
022 11 04 00 Human–machine interface (control display unit (CDU)/
multipurpose control display unit (MCDU))
022 11 04 01 Purpose, scratchpad, data input, set-up process
(01) Describe the purpose of a CDU/MCDU. X X X X
(02) Describe the typical layout of a CDU/MCDU and the X X X X
general purpose of the following:
— screen;
— line select keys;
— menu select keys;
Page 235 of 681

reference
/IR
— alphanumerical keys.
(03) Explain the function of the ‘scratchpad’ part of the X X X X
screen.
(04) Describe how input of some data is compulsory for the X X X X
function of the FMS and other data is optional, and that
different symbology is used to highlight this:
— rectangular boxes = compulsory information;
— dashed line = optional information.
(05) Describe a typical FMS pre-flight set-up process through X
the CDU/MCDU to cover the most basic information
(with the aim to create awareness of required
information as this is irrespective of aircraft type and
FMS/FMGS make):
— ident page (who am I = aircraft type/variant, engine
type/rating and appropriate navigation database);
— position initialisation (where am I = position for
aligning the IRS and FMS position);
— route initialisation (where am I going to = place of
departure/destination and alternate(s));
— route programming (how will I get there = SIDs,
STARS, route (company or otherwise));
— performance initialisation (when will I arrive =
weights, flap setting, FLEX/assumed
temperature/derate, take-off speeds).
022 12 00 00 ALERTING SYSTEMS, PROXIMITY SYSTEMS
022 12 01 00 General
Page 236 of 681

reference
/IR
022 12 01 01 Alerting systems according to CS-25 and CS-29
(01) State definitions, category, criteria and characteristics X X X X X
of alerting systems according to CS-25/AMC 25.1322 for
aeroplanes and CS-29 for helicopters as appropriate.
022 12 02 00 Flight warning systems (FWSs)
022 12 02 01 Annunciations, master warning, master caution,

advisory
(01) State the annunciations given by the FWS and typical X X X X X X
location for the annunciator(s):
— master warning;
— master caution;
— advisory.
(02) Explain master warning: X X X X X X
— colour of annunciator: red;
— nature of aural alerts: continuous;
— typical failure scenarios triggering the alert.
(03) Explain master caution: X X X X X X
— colour of the annunciator: amber or yellow;
— nature of aural alerts: attention-getter;
— typical failure scenarios triggering the alert.
(04) Describe a typical procedure following a master warning X X X X X X
or master caution alert:
— acknowledging the failure;
— silencing the aural warning;
Page 237 of 681

reference
/IR
— initiating the appropriate response/procedure.
(05) Explain advisory: X X X X X X
— colour of the annunciator: any other than red,
amber, yellow or green;
— absence of aural alert;
— typical scenarios triggering the advisory.
022 12 03 00 Stall warning systems (SWSs)
022 12 03 01 Function, types, components
(01) Describe the function of an SWS and explain why the X X
warning must be unique.
(02) Describe the different types of SWSs. X X
(03) List the main components of an SWS. X X
(04) Explain the difference between the stall warning speed X X

and the actual stalling speed of the aeroplane.
022 12 04 00 Stall protection
022 12 04 01 Function, types
(01) Describe the function of a stall protection system. X
(02) Describe the different types of stall protection systems X
including the difference between mechanical and FBW
controls.
(03) Explain the difference between an SWS and a stall X
protection system.
Page 238 of 681

reference
/IR
022 12 05 00 Overspeed warning
022 12 05 01 Purpose, aural warning, VMO/MMO pointer
(01) Explain the purpose of an overspeed warning system X X
(VMO/MMO pointer).
(02) State that for large aeroplanes, an aural warning must X X
be associated to the overspeed warning if an electronic
display is used (see AMC 25.11, paragraph 10.b(2),
p. 2-GEN-22).
(03) Describe and give examples of VMO/MMO pointer: X X
barber’s/barber pole pointer, barber’s/barber pole
vertical scale.
022 12 06 00 Take-off warning
022 12 06 01 Purpose
(01) Explain the purpose of a take-off warning system and X
list the typical abnormal situations which generate a
warning (see AMC 25.703, paragraphs 4 and 5).
022 12 07 00 Altitude alert system
022 12 07 01 Function, displays, alerts
(01) Describe the function of an altitude alert system. X X X X X X

(02) Describe different types of displays and possible alerts. X X X X X X
022 12 08 00 Radio altimeter
022 12 08 01 Purpose, range, displays, incorrect indications
Page 239 of 681

reference
/IR
(01) Explain the purpose of a low-altitude radio altimeter. X X X X X X
(02) Describe the principle of the distance (height) X X X X X X

measurement.
(03) Describe the different types of radio-altimeter displays. X X X X X X
(04) Describe how the radio altimeter provides input to X X X X X X

other systems and how a radio-altimeter failure may
impact on the functioning of these systems.
(05) State the range of a radio altimeter. X X X X X X
(06) Explain the potential implications of an incorrect radio- X X X
altimeter indication and how this in particular may
affect the following systems:
— autothrust;
— ground-proximity warning systems (GPWSs).
022 12 09 00 Ground-proximity warning systems (GPWSs)
022 12 09 01 GPWSs: design, operation, indications
(01) Explain the purpose of GPWSs. X X X
(02) Explain inputs and outputs of a GPWS and describe its X X X

operating principle.
(03) List and describe the different modes of operation of a X X X
GPWS.
022 12 09 02 Terrain-avoidance warning system (TAWS);
other name: enhanced GPWS (EGPWS)
Page 240 of 681

reference
/IR
(01) Explain the purpose of a TAWS for aeroplanes and of a X X X
HTAWS for helicopters, and explain the difference from
a GPWS.
(02) Explain inputs and outputs of a TAWS/HTAWS and X X X
describe its working principle.
(03) Give examples of terrain displays and list the different X X X
possible alerts.
(04) Give examples of time response left to the pilot X X X
according to look-ahead distance, speed and aircraft
performances.
(05) Explain why the TAWS/HTAWS must be coupled to a X X X
precise-position sensor.
(06) Explain the possibility of triggering spurious X X X
TAWS/HTAWS warnings as a result of mismanaging the
flight path in the proximity to obstacles:
— high rate of descent;
— high airspeed;
— a combination of high rate of descent and high
airspeed.
022 12 10 00 ACAS/TCAS X X X X X X
022 12 10 01 Principles and operations
(01) State that ACAS II is an ICAO standard for anti-collision X X X X X X
purposes.
Page 241 of 681

reference
/IR
(02) Explain that ACAS II is an anti-collision system and does X X X X X X
not guarantee any specific separation.
(03) Describe the purpose of an ACAS II system as an anti- X X X X X X
collision system.
(04) Describe the following outputs from a TCAS: X X X X X X
— other intruders;
— proximate intruders;
— traffic advisory (TA);
— resolution advisory (RA).
(05) State that ACAS II will issue commands in the vertical X X X X X X
plane only (climb, descent or maintain), and that the
commands are complied with as a manual manoeuvre.
(06) Explain that an RA may or may not require any active X X X X X X
control input and the implications of reacting
instinctively without awareness of actual control inputs
required to comply with the RA.
(07) Explain that if two aircraft are fitted with ACAS II, the X X X X X X
RA will be coordinated.
(08) State that ACAS II equipment can take into account X X X X X X
several threats simultaneously.
(09) State that a detected aircraft without altitude-reporting X X X X X X
can only generate a TA; describe typical type of traffic
and how this can create distractions during flight in
certain areas of significant air traffic activity.
(10) Describe the interaction between the TCAS II system X X X X X X
and the transponder, radio altimeter and the air-data
Page 242 of 681

reference
/IR
computer:
— antenna used;
— computer and links with radio altimeter, air-data
computer and mode-S transponder.
(11) Explain the principle of TCAS II interrogations. X X X X X X
(12) State the typical standard detection range for TCAS II: X X X X X X
— 35–40 NM horizontally;
— approximately 2 000 ft above and below (any
setting);
— extension to approximately 10 000 ft above (ABV
selected) or approximately 10 000 ft below (BLW
selected).
(13) Explain the principle of ‘reduced surveillance’. X X X X X X
(14) Explain that in high-density traffic areas the range may X X X X X X
automatically be decreased in order to enable detection
of the threats in the proximity of the aircraft due to a
limitation of the maximum number of possible
intruders the system is able to process.
(15) Identify the equipment which an intruder must be fitted X X X X X X
with in order to be detected by TCAS II.
(16) Explain in the anti-collision process: X X X X X X
— the criteria used to trigger an alarm (TA or RA) are
the time to reach the closest point of approach (CPA)
(called TAU) and the difference of altitude;
— an intruder will be classified as ‘proximate’ when
being less than 6 NM and 1 200 ft from the TCAS-
Page 243 of 681
reference
/IR
equipped aircraft;
— the time limit to CPA is different depending on
aircraft altitude, is linked to a sensitivity level (SL),
and state that the value to trigger an RA is from
15 to 35 seconds;
— in case of an RA, the intended vertical separation
varies from 300 to 600 ft (700 ft above FL420),
depending on the SL;
— below 1 000 ft above ground, no RA can be
generated;
— below 1 450 ft (radio-altimeter value) ‘increase
descent’ RA is inhibited;
— at high altitude, performances of the type of aircraft
are taken into account to inhibit ‘climb’ and ‘increase
climb’ RA.
(17) List and interpret the following information available X X X X X X
from TCAS:
— the different possible statuses of a detected aircraft:
‘other’, ‘proximate’, ‘intruder’;
— the appropriate graphic symbols and their position
on the horizontal display;
— different aural warnings.
(18) Explain the indications of a TA and an RA and how an RA X X X X X X
will generate a red area on the VSI. Some variants will
also include a green area. To manoeuvre the aircraft to
comply with the RA, the pilot should ‘avoid the red’ or
‘fly the green’.
Page 244 of 681

reference
/IR
(19) Explain that the pilot must not interpret the horizontal X X X X X X
track of an intruder upon the display.
022 12 11 00 Rotor/engine overspeed alert system
022 12 11 01 Design, operation, displays, alarms
(01) Describe the basic design principles, operation, displays X X X
and warning/alarm systems fitted to different helicopters.
022 13 00 00 INTEGRATED INSTRUMENTS — ELECTRONIC DISPLAYS
022 13 01 00 Electronic display units
022 13 01 01 Design, limitations
(01) List the different technologies used, e.g. CRT and LCD, and X X X X X X X
the associated limitations:
— cockpit temperature;
— glare;
— resolution.
022 13 02 00 Mechanical integrated instruments
022 13 02 01 Attitude and director indicator (ADI)/
horizontal situation indicator (HSI)
(01) Describe an ADI and an HSI. X X X X X X X
(02) List all the information that can be displayed on either X X X X X X X
instrument.
022 13 03 00 Electronic flight instrument systems (EFISs)
Page 245 of 681

reference
/IR
(01) List the following parts of an EFIS: X X X X X X
— control panel;
— display units;
— symbol generator;
— remote light sensor.
(02) Describe the typical layout of the EFIS display units and X X X X X X
how there may be a facility to transfer the information
from one display unit on to another if a display unit
fails.
(03) Explain the need for standby instruments to X X X X X X
supplement the EFIS in the event of all the display units
failing and the challenge of using these standby
instruments, namely their size and position on the flight
deck.
(04) Explain the difference between a symbol generator X X X X X X
failing and a display unit failing, and the implications if
there are redundant symbol generators available.
(05) Describe the purpose of an EFIS control panel and X X X X X X
typical selections that may be available:
— altimeter pressure setting;
— navigation display (ND) mode selector;
— ND range selector;
— ND data selector (waypoints, facilities, constraints,
data, etc.);
— radio-navigation aids selector (VOR 1/2 or ADF 1/2);
— decision altitude (DA)/decision height (DH) selection.
Page 246 of 681

reference
/IR
022 13 03 02 Primary flight display (PFD), electronic attitude director
indicator (EADI)
(01) Describe that a PFD (or an EADI) presents a dynamic X X X X X X X
colour display of all the parameters necessary to control
the aircraft, and that the main layout conforms with the
‘basic T’ principle:
— attitude information in the centre;
— airspeed information on the left;
— altitude information on the right;
— heading/track indication lower centre;
— flight mode annunciation;
— basic T;
— take-off and landing reference speeds;
— minimum airspeed;
— lower selectable airspeed;
— Mach number.
(02) Describe the typical design of the attitude information: X X X X X X X
— artificial horizon with aircraft symbol;
— superimposed flight director command bars.
(03) Describe the typical design of the speed tape: X X X X X X X
— rolling speed scale with numerical read-out of
current speed;
— limiting airspeeds according to configuration;
— speed trend vector;
— bug/indication for selected airspeed.
Page 247 of 681

reference
/IR
(04) Explain the Mach number indications and how a X
selected Mach number is presented with the speed bug
on a corresponding IAS on the speed tape with the
Mach number shown as a numerical indication outside
the speed tape.
(05) Describe the typical design of the altitude information: X X X X X X X
— rolling altitude scale with numerical read-out of
current altitude;
— altimeter pressure setting;
— bug/indication for selected altitude;
— means of highlighting the altitude if certain criteria
are met.
(06) Describe the typical design of the heading/track X X X X X X X
information:
— rolling compass scale/rose with numerical read-out
of current heading/track;
— bug/indication for selected heading/track.
(07) Describe the typical design and location of the following X X X X X X X
information:
— flight mode annunciators (FMAs);
— vertical speed indicator including TCAS RA command
indications;
— radio altitude;
— ILS localiser/glideslope and RNP/PBN, GBAS or SBAS
horizontal/vertical flight path deviation indicator;
— decision altitude/height (DA/H).
Page 248 of 681

reference
/IR
022 13 03 03 Navigation display (ND), electronic horizontal situation
indicator (EHSI)
(01) Describe that an ND (or an EHSI) provides a mode- X X X X X X X
selectable colour flight ND.
(02) List the following four modes typically available to be X X X X X X
displayed on an ND unit:
— MAP (or ARC);
— VOR (or ROSE VOR);
— APP (or ROSE LS);
— PLAN.
(03) List and explain the following information that can be X X X X X X
displayed with the MAP (or ARC) mode selected on an
ND unit:
— aircraft symbol, compass scale and range markers;
— current heading and track (either one may be ‘up’
depending on selection), true or magnetic;
— selected heading and track;
— TAS/GS;
— wind direction and speed (W/V);
— raw data radio magnetic indicator (RMI)
needles/pointers for VOR/automatic direction-
finding equipment (ADF), if selected, including the
frequency or ident of the selected navigation facility;
— route/flight plan data from the FMS;
— TO/next waypoint data from the FMS;
— data from the navigation database such as airports,
Page 249 of 681

reference
/IR
waypoints or navigation facilities as selected;
— weather radar information;
— TCAS traffic information (no TCAS commands);
— TAWS (EGPWS) terrain information;
— failure flags and messages.
displayed with the VOR or APP (or ROSE VOR or ROSE
LS) mode selected on an ND unit:
— aircraft symbol and compass scale;
— current heading and track (either one may be ‘up’
depending on selection), true or magnetic;
— selected heading and track;
— TAS/ground speed (GS);
— VOR or ILS frequency and identification of the
selected navigation aid;
— VOR selected course, deviation indicator and a
TO/FROM indicator in a HSI-type display format
when in VOR mode;
— localiser selected course, deviation indicator and
glideslope indicator in a HSI-type display format
when in APP mode.
— weather radar information;
— TCAS traffic information (no TCAS commands);
— TAWS (EGPWS) terrain information;
Page 250 of 681

reference
/IR
displayed with the PLAN mode selected on an ND unit:
— north-up compass rose and range markers;
— aircraft symbol oriented according to aircraft
heading;
— TAS/GS;
— route/flight plan data from the FMS;
— TO/next waypoint data from the FMS;
— data from the navigation database such as airports,
waypoints or navigation facilities as selected;
(06) Explain the purpose of PLAN mode and its X X X X X X
characteristics such as:
— no compass information;
— north is up on the display unit at all times;
— the centre waypoint is the selected waypoint on the
FMS CDU;
— scrolling through the flight plan on the FMS CDU will
shift the map view along the flight path;
— the aircraft symbol will be positioned in the
appropriate place along the flight path;
— using PLAN mode as the primary mode during flight
may lead to disorientation and loss of situational
awareness.
(07) Distinguish the difference between the appearance of X X X X X X
an EXPANDED or FULL/ROSE mode and how the
Page 251 of 681
reference
/IR
displayed range differs between them.
(08) Explain the combination of mode and range selection X X X X X X
including how selecting the appropriate range and
displayed data can improve situational awareness for a
given phase of flight.
022 13 04 00 Engine parameters, crew warnings, aircraft systems,
procedure and mission display systems
022 13 04 01 Purposes of systems, display systems, checklists
(01) State the purpose of the following systems: X X X
— engine instruments centralised display unit;
— crew alerting system/aircraft display unit;
— facility for appropriate on-screen checklists;
— that the aircraft systems display unit enables the
display of normal and degraded modes of operation
of the aircraft systems;
— that the systems/aircraft display unit is able to show
pictorial systems diagrams/schematics and
associated parameters.
(02) Describe the similarities to EFIS with regard to basic X X X
system architecture.
(03) Give the following different names by which engine X
parameters, crew warnings, aircraft systems and
procedures display systems are known:
— multifunction display unit (MFDU);
— engine indication and crew alerting systems (EICASs);
— engine and warning display (EWD);
Page 252 of 681

reference
/IR
— electronic centralised aircraft monitor (ECAM);
— systems display (S/D).
(04) Give the names of the following different display X X
systems and describe their main functions:
— vehicle engine monitoring display (VEMD);
— integrated instruments display system (IIDS).
(05) State the purpose of a mission display unit. X X
(06) Describe the architecture of each system and give X X
examples of display.
(07) Explain why awareness of the consequences of the X X X
actions commanded by the automatic checklist is
required.
(08) Explain the limited ability of the computer to assess a X X X
situation other than using the exceedance of certain
thresholds to trigger the main and subsequent events
and programmed actions.
(09) Describe an appropriate procedure for following an on- X X X
screen checklist associated with a failure scenario
including the following:
— confirm the failure with the other flight crew
member prior to performing any of the actions;
— seek confirmation prior to manipulating any guarded
switches or thrust levers;
— follow the checklist slowly and methodically;
— assess the possible implications of making certain
selections, such as opening the fuel cross-feed if
Page 253 of 681

reference
/IR
there is a fuel leak even though the electronic
checklist may ask for the action.
022 13 05 00 Engine first limit indicator
022 13 05 01 Design, operation, information on display
(01) Describe the principles of design and operation, and X X X
compare the different indications and displays
available.
(02) Describe what information can be displayed on the X X X
screen, when the screen is in the limited composite
mode.
022 13 06 00 Electronic flight bag (EFB)
022 13 06 01 Purpose, certification, malfunctions
(01) Explain the purpose of the EFB and list typical X X X X X X

equipment:
— computer laptop;
— tablet device;
— integrated avionics suite in the aircraft.
(02) Describe the ‘class’ hardware certification: X X X
— portable: portable electronic device (PED) that can
be used inside or outside the aircraft, is not part of
the certified aircraft configuration and does not
require tools to remove it from the flight-deck
cradle, if one exists;
— installed: an electronic device that is considered an
aircraft part covered by the aircraft airworthiness
Page 254 of 681
reference
/IR
approval, thus is a minimum equipment list (MEL)
item in the event of failure.
(03) Describe the ‘type’ software certification: X X X
— type A: applications whose misuse or malfunctions
have no adverse effect on flight safety;
— type B: applications for which evaluation of the
hazards presented by misuse or malfunctions is
required.
(04) Explain implications of malfunctions with the EFB X X X
installation in a fully electronic flight-deck environment:
— mass and balance calculations;
— performance calculations;
— access to charts;
— access to manuals.
022 13 07 00 Head-up display (HUD), synthetic vision system (SVS) X X X
and enhanced visual system (EVS)
022 13 07 01 Components, benefits, modes of operation
(01) State the components of a typical HUD installation: X X X
— HUD projector and stowable combiner;
— HUD controls such as declutter and dimmer;
— HUD computer.
(02) Explain the reasons and benefits of having an HUD: X X X
— increased situational awareness due to reduced need
to look inside to view primary flight information;
— lower minima for both departure and landing;
— improved accuracy of flying thus reduced
Page 255 of 681
reference
/IR
susceptibility to enter a state of aircraft upset.
(03) Describe how the HUD replicates the information on X X X
the primary flight display (PFD) by showing the
following data:
— altitude;
— speed, including speed trend;
— heading;
— flight path vector (track and vertical flight path);
— flight mode annunciator (FMA);
— CAS, TAWS and wind shear command annunciations.
(04) Describe the following modes of operation of an HUD: X X X
— normal display mode that may automatically adapt
the information based on the phase of flight;
— declutter function.
(05) Describe the principle of SVS: X X X
— an enhanced database used as reference to provide
terrain and ground features to be shown on the PFD;
— limitations due to being a synthetic image not based
on actual sensory information thus not lowering
landing minima;
— implications if aircraft position accuracy becomes
reduced.
(06) Describe the principle of EVS: X X X
— includes external sensors such as infrared cameras to
generate a real-time image on the PFD or on the
HUD;
Page 256 of 681

reference
/IR
— limitation of the fact that an infrared camera uses
temperature and temperature difference in order to
produce an image;
— enables lower minima because of the real-time
image, thus enhancing the visibility as experienced
by the pilot.
022 14 00 00 MAINTENANCE, MONITORING AND RECORDING
SYSTEMS
022 14 01 00 Cockpit voice recorder (CVR)
022 14 01 01 Purpose, components, parameters
(01) Describe the purpose of a CVR, its typical location, and X X X X X
explain the implications of knowingly erasing or
tampering with any information or equipment.
(02) List the main components of a CVR: X X X X X
— a shock-resistant tape recorder or digital storage
associated with an underwater locating beacon
(ULB);
— a cockpit area microphone (CAM);
— a control unit with the following controls: auto/on,
test and erase, and a headset jack;
— limited flight-deck controls such as erase and test
switches.
(023 List the following main parameters recorded on the CVR: X X X X X
— voice communications transmitted from or received
on the flight deck;
— the aural environment of the flight deck;
Page 257 of 681

reference
/IR
— voice communication of flight crew members using
the aeroplane’s interphone system;
— voice or audio signals introduced into a headset or
speaker;
— voice communication of flight crew members using
the public address system, if installed.
022 14 02 00 Flight data recorder (FDR)
022 14 02 01 Purpose, components, parameters
(02) Describe the purpose of an FDR and its typical location. X X
(02) List the main components of an FDR: X X
— a shock-resistant data recorder associated with a
ULB;
— a data interface and acquisition unit;
— a recording system (digital flight data recorder);
— two control units (start sequence, event mark
setting);
— limited flight-deck controls, but includes an event
switch.
(02) List the following main parameters recorded on the FDR: X X
— time or relative time count;
— attitude (pitch and roll);
— airspeed;
— pressure altitude;
— heading;
— normal acceleration;
Page 258 of 681

reference
/IR
— propulsive/thrust power on each engine and flight-
deck thrust/power lever position, if applicable;
— flaps/slats configuration or flight-deck selection;
— ground spoilers or speed brake selection.
(02) State that additional parameters can be recorded X
according to FDR capacity and applicable operational
requirements.
022 14 03 00 Maintenance and monitoring systems
022 14 03 01 Helicopter operations monitoring program (HOMP):
design, operation, performance
(01) Describe the HOMP as a helicopter version of the X X
aeroplane flight data monitoring (FDM) program.
(02) State that the HOMP software consists of three integrated X X
modules:
— flight data events (FDEs);
— flight data measurements (FDMs);
— flight data traces (FDTs).
(03) Describe and explain the information flow of an HOMP. X X
(04) Describe HOMP operation and management processes. X X
022 14 03 02 Integrated health and usage monitoring system
(IHUMS): design, operation, performance
(01) Describe the main features of an IHUMS: X X
— rotor system health;
— cockpit voice recorder (CVR)/flight data recorder
Page 259 of 681

reference
/IR
(FDR);
— gearbox system health;
— engine health;
— exceedance monitoring;
— usage monitoring;
— transparent operation;
— ground station features;
— monitoring;
— rotor track and balance;
— engine performance trending;
— quality controlled to level 2.
(02) Describe the ground station features of an IHUMS. X X
(03) Summarise the benefits of an IHUMS including: X X
— reduced risk of catastrophic failure of rotor or
gearbox;
— improved rotor track and balance giving lower
vibration levels;
— accurate recording of flight exceedances;
— CVR/FDR allows accurate accident/incident
investigation and HOMP;
— maintenance cost savings.
(04) State the benefits of an IHUMS and an HOMP. X X
022 14 03 03 Aeroplane condition monitoring system (ACMS): general,
design, operation
(01) State the purpose of an ACMS. X
Page 260 of 681

reference
/IR
(02) Describe the structure of an ACMS including: X
— inputs: aircraft systems (such as air conditioning,
autoflight, flight controls, fuel, landing gear,
navigation, pneumatic, APU, engine), MCDU;
— data management unit;
— recording unit: digital recorder;
— outputs: printer, ACARS or ATSU.
(03) State that maintenance messages sent by an ACMS can be X
transmitted without crew notification.
(05) Explain that data from the ACMS can be used as part of an X
FDM and safety programme.
(05) Explain that the FDM program collects data X
anonymously; however, grave exceedance of
parameters may warrant a further investigation of the
event by the operator.
(06) Explain the purpose of FDM as a system for identifying X
adverse safety trends and tailoring training programmes
in order to enhance the overall safety of the operation.
022 15 00 00 DIGITAL CIRCUITS AND COMPUTERS
022 15 01 00 Digital circuits and computers
022 15 01 01 General, definitions and design
(01) Define a ‘computer’ as a machine for manipulating data X X X X X
according to a list of instructions.
(02) Explain the term ‘bus’ being used as a term for a facility X X X X X
(wiring, optical fibre, etc.) transferring data between
Page 261 of 681

reference
/IR
different parts of a computer, both internally and
externally.
(03) Define the terms ‘hardware’ and ‘software’. X X X X X
(04) X With the help of the relevant 022 references, give X X X X X
examples of airborne computers and list the possible
peripheral equipment for each system, such as:
— ADC with pitot probe(s), static port(s) and indicators;
— FMS with GPS, CDU/MCDU and ND;
— GPWS with radio altimeter, ADC and ND.
Page 262 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 031 — FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING:

MASS AND BALANCE — AEROPLANES/HELICOPTERS’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 263 of 681

SUBJECT 031 — FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING: MASS AND BALANCE — AEROPLANES/HELICOPTERS
(1) DEFINITIONS OF MASSES, LOADS AND INDEXES
Allowed take-off mass

The mass taking into consideration all possible limitations for take-off including restrictions caused by regulated take-off mass and regulated landing mass.
Area load or floor load

The load (or mass) distributed over a defined area. Example units:
— SI: N/m2, kg/m2;
— Non-SI: psi, lb/ft2.
Basic empty mass (BEM)

The mass of an aircraft plus standard items such as: unusable fuel; full operating fluids; fire extinguishers; emergency oxygen equipment. (The lowest mass
that is used in FCL exams.)
Dry operating mass (DOM)

The total mass of an aircraft ready for a specific type of operation excluding all usable fuel and traffic load. This mass includes items such as:
— crew and crew baggage;
— catering and removable passenger service equipment (food, beverages, potable water, lavatory chemicals, etc.);
— special operational equipment (e.g. stretchers, rescue hoist, cargo sling).
Page 264 of 681

Dry operating index (DOI)

The aircraft index at dry operating mass.
Index
An index is a moment reduced in a numerical value by an index formula.
In-flight mass/gross mass

The mass of an aircraft in flight at a specified time.
Landing mass
The mass of an aircraft at landing.
Maximum structural in-flight mass with external loads (applicable to helicopters only)
The maximum permissible total mass of the helicopter with external loads.
Maximum structural landing mass

The maximum permissible total mass of an aircraft at landing under normal circumstances.
Maximum structural mass

The maximum permissible total mass of an aircraft at any time. It will be given only if there is no difference between maximum structural taxi mass,
maximum structural take-off mass and maximum structural landing mass.
Maximum structural take-off mass

The maximum permissible total mass of an aircraft at commencement of take-off.
Page 265 of 681

Maximum (structural) taxi mass or maximum (structural) ramp mass

The maximum permissible total mass of an aircraft at commencement of taxiing.
Maximum zero fuel mass

The maximum permissible mass of an aircraft with no usable fuel.
Minimum mass (applicable to helicopters only)

The minimum permissible total mass for specific helicopter operations.
Operating mass
The dry operating mass plus take-off fuel.
Payload
The total mass of passengers, baggage and cargo but excluding any non-revenue load.
Performance-limited landing mass

The mass subject to the destination airfield limitations.
Page 266 of 681

Performance-limited take-off mass

The take-off mass subject to departure airfield limitations.
Ramp mass
See ‘taxi mass’.
Regulated landing mass

The lower of performance-limited landing mass and maximum structural landing mass.
Regulated take-off mass

The lower of performance-limited take-off mass and maximum structural take-off mass.
Running (or linear) load

The load (or mass) distributed over a defined length of a cargo compartment irrespective of load width. Example units:
— SI: N/m, kg/m;
— Non-SI: lb/in, lb/ft.
Take-off fuel
The total amount of usable fuel at take-off.
Take-off mass
The mass of an aircraft including everything and everyone carried at the commencement of the take-off for helicopters and take-off run for aeroplanes.
Page 267 of 681

Taxi mass or ramp mass

The mass of an aircraft at the commencement of taxiing.
Traffic load
The total mass of passengers, baggage and cargo, including any non-revenue load.
Zero fuel mass

The dry operating mass plus traffic load.
Page 268 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
030 00 00 00 FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING
031 00 00 00 MASS AND BALANCE — AEROPLANES/HELICOPTERS
031 01 00 00 PURPOSE OF MASS-AND-BALANCE CONSIDERATIONS
031 01 01 00 Mass limitations
031 01 01 01 Importance with regard to structural limitations
(01) X Describe the relationship between aircraft mass and structural X X X X X
stress.
Remark: See also Subject 021 01 01 00.
(02) X Describe why mass must be limited to ensure adequate margins X X X X X
of strength.
031 01 01 02 Importance with regard to performance
Remark: See also Subjects 032/034 and 081/082.
(01) Describe the relationship between aircraft mass and aircraft X X X X X
performance.
(02) X Describe why aircraft mass must be limited to ensure adequate X X X X X
aircraft performance.
031 01 02 00 Centre-of-gravity (CG) limitations
031 01 02 01 Importance with regard to stability and controllability
Remark: See also Subjects 081/082.
(01) X Describe the relationship between CG position and X X X X X
stability/controllability of the aircraft.
Page 269 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
(02) Describe the consequences if CG is in front of the forward limit. X X X X X
(03) Describe the consequences if CG is behind the aft limit. X X X X X
031 01 02 02 Importance with regard to performance
Remark: See also Subjects 032/034 and 081/082.
(01) X Describe the relationship between CG position and aircraft X X X X X
performance.
(02) Describe the effects of CG position on performance parameters X X X X X
(speeds, altitude, endurance and range).
031 02 00 00 LOADING
031 02 01 00 Terminology
031 02 01 01 Mass terms
(01) X Define the following mass terms: X X X X X
— basic empty mass;
— dry operating mass;
— operating mass;
— take-off mass;
— landing mass;
— ramp/taxi mass;
— in-flight mass (gross mass);
— zero fuel mass.
031 02 01 02 Load terms (including fuel terms)
Remark: See also Subject 033.
Page 270 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
(01) X Define the following load terms: X X X X X
— payload/traffic load;
— block fuel;
— taxi fuel;
— take-off fuel;
— trip fuel;
— reserve fuel (contingency, alternate, final reserve and
additional fuel);
— extra fuel.
(02) Explain the relationship between the various load-and-mass X X X X X
components listed in 031 02 01 01 and 031 02 01 02.
(03) Calculate the mass of particular components from other given X X X X X
components.
(04) Convert fuel mass, fuel volume and fuel density given in different X X X X X
units used in aviation.
031 02 02 00 Mass limits
(01) X Define the maximum zero fuel mass. X X
(02) X Define the maximum ramp/taxi mass. X
(03) X Define the maximum take-off mass. X X X X X
(04) X Define the maximum in-flight (gross) mass with external load. X X X
(05) X Define the maximum landing mass. X X X X X
Page 271 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
031 02 02 02 Performance and regulated limitations
(01) Describe the following performance and regulated mass X X X X X
limitations:
— performance-limited take-off mass;
— performance-limited landing mass;
— regulated take-off mass;
— regulated landing mass.
031 02 02 03 Cargo compartment limitations
(01) X Describe the maximum floor load (maximum load per unit of X X X X X
area).
(02) X Describe the maximum running load (maximum load per unit of X X X X X
fuselage length).
031 02 03 00 Mass calculations
031 02 03 01 Maximum masses for take-off and landing
(01) Calculate the maximum mass for take-off (regulated take-off X X X X X
mass) given mass-and-load components and structural/
performance limits.
(02) Calculate the maximum mass for landing (regulated landing X X X X X
mass) given mass-and-load components and structural/
performance limits.
(03) Calculate the allowed mass for take-off. X X X X X
031 02 03 02 Allowed traffic load and fuel load
Page 272 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
(01) Calculate the maximum allowed traffic load and fuel load in X X X X X
order not to exceed the given allowed take-off mass.
(02) Calculate ‘under load’/‘over load’ given the allowed mass for X X X X X
take-off, operating mass and actual traffic load.
031 02 03 03 Use of standard masses for passengers, baggage and crew
(01) X Extract the appropriate standard masses for passengers, baggage X X X X X
and crew from relevant documents or operator requirements.
(02) Calculate the traffic load by using standard masses. X X X X X
031 03 00 00 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
031 04 00 00 MASS-AND-BALANCE DETAILS OF AIRCRAFT
031 04 01 00 Contents of mass-and-balance documentation
031 04 01 01 Datum, moment arm
(01) X State where the datum and moment arms for aircraft can be X X X X X
found.
(02) X Extract the appropriate data from given documents. X X X X X
(03) X Define ‘datum’ (reference point), ‘moment arm’ and ‘moment’. X X X X X
031 04 01 02 CG position as distance from datum
(01) X State where the CG position for an aircraft at basic empty mass X X X X X
can be found.
(02) X State where the CG limits for an aircraft can be found. X X X X X
Page 273 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
(03) Describe the different forms in presenting CG position as X X X X X
distance from datum or other references.
(04) Explain the meaning of centre of gravity (CG). X X X X X
031 04 01 03 CG position as percentage of mean aerodynamic chord (% MAC)
Remark: Knowledge of the definition of MAC is covered under
Subject 081 01 01 05.
(01) Extract MAC information from aircraft documents. X X
(02) Explain the principle of using % MAC for the description of the X X
CG position.
(03) Calculate the CG position as % MAC. X X
031 04 01 04 Longitudinal CG limits
(01) Extract the appropriate data from given sample documents. X X X X X
031 04 01 05 Lateral CG limits
(01) Extract the appropriate data from given sample documents. X X X
031 04 01 06 Details of passenger and cargo compartments
(01) Extract the appropriate data (e.g. seating schemes, compartment X X X X X
dimensions and limitations) from given sample documents.
031 04 01 07 Details of fuel system relevant to mass-and-balance
considerations
(01) X Extract the appropriate data (e.g. fuel-tank capacities and fuel- X X X X X
tank positions) from given sample documents.
Page 274 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
(02) Explain and calculate aircraft CG movement as flight progresses X
given location of fuel tank (inner wing, outer wing, central,
additional aft central, horizontal stabiliser) and mass of fuel
consumed from that tank and aeroplane’s previous CG.
(03) Explain advantages and risks associated with fuel tanks in the X
aeroplane’s fin or horizontal stabiliser.
031 04 02 00 Determination of aircraft empty mass and CG position by
weighing
031 04 02 01 Weighing of aircraft (general aspects)
(01) Describe the general procedure and regulations relating to when X X X X X
an aircraft should be reweighed or data recalculated.
Remark: See the applicable operational requirements.
(02) X Extract and interpret entries from/in ‘mass (weight) report’ of an X X X X X
aircraft.
031 04 02 02 Calculation of mass and CG position of an aircraft using
weighing data
(01) Calculate the mass and CG position of an aircraft from given X X X X X
reaction forces on jacking points.
031 04 03 00 Extraction of basic empty mass (BEM) and CG data from aircraft
documentation
031 04 03 01 BEM or dry operating mass (DOM)
(01) X Extract values for BEM or DOM from given documents. X X X X X
031 04 03 02 CG position or moment at BEM/DOM
Page 275 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
(01) Extract values for CG position and moment at BEM or DOM from X X X X X
given documents.
031 04 03 03 Deviations from standard configuration
(01) Extract values from given documents for deviation from standard X X X X X
configuration as a result of varying crew, optional equipment,
optional fuel tanks, etc.
031 05 00 00 DETERMINATION OF CG POSITION
031 05 01 00 Methods
031 05 01 01 Arithmetic method
(01) Calculate the CG position of an aircraft by using the formula: X X X X X
CG position = sum of moments / total mass.
031 05 01 02 Graphic method
(01) Determine the CG position of an aircraft by using the loading X X X X X
graphs given in sample documents.
031 05 01 03 Index method
(01) X Explain the principle of the index method. X X X X X
(02) Define the terms ‘index’ and ‘dry operating index’ (DOI), and X X X X X
calculate the DOI given the relevant formula and data.
(03) Explain the advantage(s) of the index method. X X X X X
031 05 02 00 Load and trim sheet
031 05 02 01 General considerations
Page 276 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
(01) X Explain the principle and the purpose of load sheets. X X
(02) X Explain the principle and the purpose of trim sheets. X
031 05 02 02 Load sheet/balance schedule and CG envelope for light
aeroplanes and for helicopters
(01) Add loading data and calculate masses in a sample load X X X X X
sheet/balance schedule.
(02) Calculate moments and CG positions. X X X X X
(03) Check CG position at zero fuel mass and take-off mass to be X X X X X
within the CG envelope including last-minute changes, if
applicable.
031 05 02 03 Load sheet for large aeroplanes
(01) Complete a sample load sheet to determine the ‘allowed mass X
for take-off’, ‘allowed traffic load’ and ‘under load’.
(02) Explain the purpose of each load sheet section. X
(03) Explain that the purpose of boxed maximum figures in load sheet X
sections is to cross-check the actual and limiting mass values.
(04) Complete and cross-check a sample load sheet. X
031 05 02 04 Trim sheet for large aeroplanes
(01) Explain the purpose of the trim sheet and the methods to X
determine the CG position.
(02) Check if the zero fuel mass CG or index is within the limits. X
Page 277 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
(03) Determine the fuel index by using the ‘fuel index correction X
table’ and determine the CG position as % MAC.
(04) Check that the take-off mass CG or index are within the limits. X
(05) Determine ‘stabiliser trim units’ for take-off. X
(06) Explain the difference between certified and operational CG X
limits.
(07) Determine the zero fuel mass CG or index. X
(08) Explain the relationship between pitch and CG position and the X
operational significance.
031 05 02 06 Other methods to present load and trim information
(01) X Describe and extract information from other methods of X
presenting load and balance information, e.g. aircraft
communications addressing and reporting system (ACARS),
electronic flight bags (EFBs), and the ‘less paper in the cockpit’
(LPC) software.
031 05 03 00 Repositioning of CG
031 05 03 01 Repositioning of CG by shifting the load
(01) Calculate the mass to be moved over a given distance, or to/from X X X X X
given compartments, to establish a defined CG position.
(02) Calculate the distance to move a given mass to establish a X X X X X
defined CG position.
Page 278 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
(03) X Describe the methods to check that cargo has been loaded in X X
correct position in relation to the loading manifest, including
identifying hazard of cargo loaded in reverse order (visual
inspection of one or more unit load devices (ULDs).
(04) Determine whether CG remains within limits if cargo has been X X
loaded in incorrect order or at incorrect location.
031 05 03 02 Repositioning of CG by additional load or ballast or by load or
ballast removal
(01) Calculate the amount of additional load or ballast to be loaded at X X X X X
or removed from a given position or compartment to establish a
defined CG position.
(02) Calculate the loading position or compartment for a given X X X X X
amount of additional load or ballast to establish a defined CG
position.
031 06 00 00 CARGO HANDLING
031 06 01 00 Types of cargo
031 06 01 01 Types of cargo (general aspects)
(01) Describe the typical types of cargo, e.g. containerised cargo, X X X X X
palletised cargo, bulk cargo, and the advantages of containerised
and palletised cargo.
031 06 02 00 Floor-area load and running-load limitations
031 06 02 01 Floor-area load and running-load limitations in cargo
compartments
Page 279 of 681

reference and EIR
/IR
(01) Calculate the required floor-contact area for a given load to avoid X X X X X
exceeding the maximum permissible floor load of a cargo
compartment.
(02) Calculate the maximum mass of a container with given floor- X X X X X
contact area to avoid exceeding the maximum permissible floor
load of a cargo compartment.
(03) Calculate the linear load distribution of a container to avoid X X X X X
exceeding the maximum permissible running load.
031 06 03 00 Securement of load
031 06 03 01 Securement of load (reasons and methods)
(01) Explain the reasons to restrain or secure cargo and baggage. X X X X X
(02) Describe the basic methods to restrain or secure loads X X X X X
(unit load devices secured by latches on roller tracks or to tie
down points by straps; bulk cargo restrained by restraining nets
attached to attachment points and tie-down points).
Page 280 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 032 — FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING —

PERFORMANCE — AEROPLANES’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 281 of 681

SUBJECT 032 — FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING — PERFORMANCE — AEROPLANES

For theoretical knowledge examination purposes:

— ‘climb angle’ is assumed to be air-mass-related;
— ‘flight-path angle’ is assumed to be ground-related;
— ‘screen height for take-off’ is the vertical distance between the take-off surface and the take-off flight path at the end of the take-off distance;
— ‘screen height for landing’ is the vertical distance between the landing surface and the landing flight path from which the landing distance begins.
Page 282 of 681

and EIR
IR
032 00 00 00 PERFORMANCE — AEROPLANES
032 01 00 00 GENERAL
032 01 01 00 Performance legislation
032 01 01 01 Applicability of airworthiness requirements of CS-23 and CS-25
(01) X Describe the application of certification specification (CSs) with X X
regard to the different kinds of aeroplanes.
(02) X Describe the general differences between aeroplanes certified X
according to CS-23 (CS 23.1, CS 23.3) and CS-25 (CS 25.1, CS 25.20).
032 01 01 02 Operational regulations and safety
(01) X Describe the basic concept that the applicable operational X X
requirements differ depending on aeroplane performance.
(02) Describe the performance classes for commercial air transport X X
according to the applicable operational requirements.
032 01 01 03 Performance and safety
(01) X State that aeroplane performance required for commercial air X X
transport may limit the weight of a dispatched aeroplane in order to
achieve a sufficient level of safety.
Page 283 of 681

and EIR
IR
(02) X Describe that the minimum level of safety required for commercial X X
air transport is ensured through the combination of airworthiness
requirements and operational limitations, i.e. the more stringent
airworthiness requirements of CS-25 enable a wider range of
operating conditions for these aeroplanes.
032 01 01 04 Performance definitions and safety factors
(01) X Describe measured performance and explain how it is determined. X X
(02) Describe gross performance. X X
(03) Describe net performance and safety factors. X X
(04) X Describe that the size of a safety factor depends on the likelihood of X X
the event and the range of the measured performance data.
(05) Describe the relationship between net and gross take-off and X X
landing distances, and net and gross climb and descent gradients.
032 01 02 00 General performance theory
032 01 02 02 Definitions and terms
(01) X Define the terms ‘climb angle’ and ‘climb gradient’. X X

(02) X Define the terms ‘flight-path angle’ and ‘flight-path gradient’. X X
(03) X Define the terms ‘descent angle’ and ‘descent gradient’. X X
(04) X Explain the difference between climb/descent angle and flight-path X X
angle.
Page 284 of 681

and EIR
IR
(05) X Define ‘absolute ceiling’. X X
(06) Describe ‘clearway’ and ‘stopway’ according to CS-Definitions. X X
(07) Describe: X X
— take-off run available (TORA);
— take-off distance available (TODA);
— accelerate-stop distance available (ASDA);
and determine each from given data or appropriate aerodrome
charts.
(08) Describe ‘screen height’ including its various values. X X
(09) X Define the terms ‘range’ and ‘endurance’. X X
(10) Define an aeroplane’s ‘specific range’ (SR) in terms of nautical air X X
miles (NAM) per unit of fuel, and ‘specific range over the ground’
(SRG) in terms of nautical ground miles (NGM) per unit of fuel.
(11) Define the power available and power required. X X
032 01 02 03 Variables influencing performance
(01) X Name the following factors that affect aeroplane performance: X X
pressure altitude and temperature, wind, aeroplane weight,
aeroplane configuration, aeroplane anti-skid status, aeroplane
centre of gravity (CG), aerodrome runway surface, and aerodrome
runway slope.
(02) X Describe how, for different density altitudes, the thrust and power X X
available vary with speed for a propeller-driven aeroplane.
Page 285 of 681

and EIR
IR
(03) X Describe how, for different density altitudes, the thrust and power X
available vary with speed for a turbojet aeroplane.
(04) Describe how, for different density altitudes, the drag and power X X
required vary with indicated airspeeds (IAS) and true airspeeds (TAS).
(05) Describe how, for different aeroplane weights and configurations, X X
the drag and power required vary with IAS and TAS.
032 01 03 00 Level flight, range and endurance
032 01 03 01 Steady level flight
(01) X Explain how drag (thrust) and power required vary with speed in X X
straight and level flight.
(02) X Explain the effect of excess thrust and power on speed in level flight. X X
(03) Interpret the ‘thrust/power required’ and ‘thrust/power available’ X X
curves in straight and level flight.
(04) Describe how the maximum achievable straight and level flight IAS X X
and TAS vary with altitude.
(05) Describe situations in which a pilot may elect to fly for ‘maximum X X
endurance’ or ‘maximum range’.
032 01 03 02 Range
(01) Define a turbojet aeroplane’s specific fuel consumption (SFC) and X
describe how it affects fuel flow and specific range.
(02) Define a propeller-driven aeroplane’s SFC and describe how it affects X X
fuel flow and specific range.
Page 286 of 681

and EIR
IR
(03) Explain the optimum speed for maximum SR for a turbojet X
aeroplane in relation to the drag curve.
(04) Explain the optimum speed to achieve maximum SR for a propeller- X X
driven aeroplane in relation to the power required and drag graphs.
(05) Explain the effect of aeroplane weight and CG position on fuel X X
consumption, range and the optimum speed for maximum SR.
(06) State how a turbojet engine’s SFC varies with temperature and X
thrust setting.
(07) Explain how SR for a turbojet aeroplane varies with altitude and X
under different meteorological conditions.
(08) Explain how SRG for a propeller-driven aeroplane varies with altitude X X
and under different meteorological conditions.
(09) Explain the effect of weight on the optimum altitude for maximum X X
range.
(10) Describe the effect of wind on SRG and the optimum speed for SRG , X X
when compared to SR, and the optimum speed for SR.
032 01 03 03 Maximum endurance
(01) Explain fuel flow in relation to TAS and thrust for a turbojet X
aeroplane.
(02) State the speed for maximum endurance for a turbojet aeroplane. X
(03) Explain fuel flow in relation to TAS and thrust for a propeller-driven X X
aeroplane.
Page 287 of 681

and EIR
IR
(04) State the speed for maximum endurance for a propeller-driven X X
aeroplane and the disadvantages of holding at this speed (e.g. high
angle of attack (AoA) and lack of speed stability).
(05) Explain the effect of wind and altitude on endurance, and the X
maximum endurance speed for a turbojet aeroplane.
(06) Explain the effect of wind and altitude on endurance, and the X X
maximum endurance speed for a propeller-driven aeroplane.
(07) Describe the benefits of managing your en-route airspeed to reduce X X
or avoid holding time, and the operational situations when it could
be used (commanded by the pilot or air traffic control (ATC), when
delays at arrival airport occur).
032 01 04 00 Climbing
032 01 04 01 Climbing (climb performance)
(01) Resolve the forces during a steady climb. X X
(02) Define and explain the following terms: X X
— critical engine;
— speed for best angle of climb (VX);
— speed for best rate of climb (VY).
(03) Explain climb performance in relation to the thrust available and X X
thrust required (angle of climb), and power available and power
required (rate of climb).
(04) Explain the meaning and effect of ‘excess thrust’ and ‘excess power’ X X
in a steady climb.
Page 288 of 681

and EIR
IR
curves in a steady climb.
(06) State the difference between climb angle and gradient. X X
(07) Explain the effect of weight on the climb angle and rate of climb, and X X
the speed for best angle and best rate of climb.
(08) Explain the effects of pressure altitude and temperature, including X X
an inversion on climb performance (angle and rate of climb).
(09) Explain the effect of configuration on climb performance (angle and X X
rate of climb, and VX and VY).
(10) Describe the effect of engine failure on climb performance (angle X X
and rate of climb, and VX and VY).
(11) Calculate the all-engine-out and one-engine-out climb gradient from X X
given values of engine thrust and aeroplane drag and weight.
032 01 05 00 Descending
032 01 05 01 Descending (descent performance)
(01) Resolve the forces during steady descent and in the glide. X X
(02) Explain descent performance in relation to thrust available and X X
thrust required (drag), and power available and power required.
(03) Explain the meaning of ‘excess thrust required’ (excess drag) and X X
‘excess power required’ in a steady descent.
curves in a steady descent.
Page 289 of 681

and EIR
IR
(05) Explain the effect of mass, altitude, wind, speed and configuration X X
on the glide descent.
(06) Explain the effect of mass, altitude, wind, speed and configuration X X
on the powered descent.
032 02 00 00 CS-23/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS B — THEORY
032 02 01 00 Airworthiness requirements
032 02 01 01 Airworthiness requirements and definitions
(01) X Define the following speeds: X X
— stall speeds VS, VS0 and VS1;
— rotation speed VR;
— speed at 50 ft above the take-off surface level;
— reference landing speed VREF.
(02) Describe the limitations on VR, on the speed at 50 ft above the take- X X
off surface and on VREF, and given the appropriate stall speed,
estimate the values based on these limitations for a single-engine,
class B aeroplane.
(03) Describe the limitations on VR, on the speed at 50 ft above the take- X X
off surface and on VREF, and given the appropriate stall speed,
estimate the values based on these limitations for a multi-engine,
class B aeroplane.
(04) X Describe the European Union airworthiness requirements according X X
to CS-23 relating to aeroplane performance (CS-23 SUBPART A —
GENERAL, PERFORMANCE, CS 23.45 to CS 23.78 inclusive).
Page 290 of 681

and EIR
IR
(05) Define and identify the critical engine of a multi-engine propeller X X
aeroplane.
(06) Explain the effect of an engine failure on the power required, the X X
total drag (thrust required) and climb performance of a multi-engine
aeroplane.
(07) Explain the effect of engine failure on the minimum control speed of X X
a multi-engine aeroplane under given conditions (temperature and
pressure altitude).
032 02 03 00 Take-off and landing
032 02 03 01 Take-off and landing (definitions and effects)
(01) X Define the following distances and masses: X X
— take-off distance;
— landing distance;
— ground-roll distance;
— maximum allowed take-off mass;
— maximum allowed landing mass.
(02) Explain the effect of flap-setting on the take-off, landing and ground- X X
roll distances.
(03) Explain the effects of the following runway (RWY) variables on take- X X
off distances:
— RWY slope;
— RWY surface conditions: dry, wet and contaminated;
— RWY elevation.
Page 291 of 681

and EIR
IR
(04) For both fixed-pitch and constant-speed propeller aeroplanes, X X
explain the effect of airspeed on thrust during the take-off run.
(05) Describe the effects of brake release before take-off power is set on X X
the TOD and ASD.
(06) Explain the effect of wind on take-off and landing distances, and X X
determine the actual headwind/tailwind component given the
runway direction, wind speed and direction, by use of wind
component graphs, mathematical calculations, and rule of thumb.
(07) Explain why an aeroplane has maximum crosswind limit(s) and X X
determine the crosswind component given the runway direction,
wind speed and direction, by use of wind component graphs,
mathematical calculations, and rule of thumb.
(08) Explain the percentage of accountability for headwind and tailwind X X
components during take-off and landing calculations.
(09) Explain the effect of runway conditions on the landing distance. X X
(10) Explain the effects of pressure altitude and temperature on the take- X X
off distance, take-off climb, landing distance and approach climb.
(11) Describe the landing airborne distance and ground-roll distance and X X
estimate the effect on the landing distance when the aeroplane is
too fast or too high at the screen.
(12) Describe the net take-off flight path (NTOFP) for a multi-engine, X X
class B aeroplane.
(13) Describe the dimensions of the NTOFP accountability area (domain). X X
032 02 04 00 Climb, cruise and descent
Page 292 of 681

and EIR
IR
032 02 04 01 Climb, cruise and descent (requirements and calculations)
(01) Describe the climb and en-route requirements according to the X X
applicable operational requirements.
(02) For a single-engine aeroplane, calculate the expected obstacle X X
clearance (in visual meteorological conditions (VMC)) given gross
climb performance, obstacle height and distance from reference
zero.
(03) For a single-engine aeroplane, calculate the net glide gradient and X X
net glide distance, given aeroplane altitude, terrain elevation, gross
gradient or lift/drag ratio (L/D ratio), and headwind or tailwind
component.
032 03 00 00 CS-23/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS B — USE OF AEROPLANE
PERFORMANCE DATA FOR SINGLE- AND MULTI-ENGINE
AEROPLANES
032 03 03 00 Use of aeroplane performance data
032 03 03 01 Take-off
(01) Determine the field-length-limited take-off mass and take-off speeds X X
given defactored distance, configuration, pressure altitude,
temperature and headwind/tailwind component.
(02) Determine the accelerate-go distance and accelerate-stop distance X X
data.
Page 293 of 681

and EIR
IR
(03) Determine the ground-roll distance and take-off distance from X X
graphs.
(04) Determine the all-engine-out and critical-engine-out take-off climb X X
data.
(05) Determine NTOFP for a MEP aeroplane of given mass and given X X
airfield conditions, and calculate the obstacle clearance based on the
NTOFP.
(06) Determine the minimum headwind or maximum tailwind X X
component required for take-off for a given mass and given airfield
conditions.
(07) Given take-off run available (TORA), TODA and ASDA, slope and X X
surface conditions, calculate the defactored distance to be used for
commercial air transport using the appropriate take-off graphs.
(08) Calculate the minimum TORA or TODA for commercial air transport X X
given the defactored take-off distance or run, runway surface and
slope.
032 03 03 02 Climb
(01) Determine rate of climb. X X
(02) Calculate obstacle clearance climb data. X X
(03) Determine the still-air and flight-path gradients for given IAS, X X
altitude, temperature, aeroplane weight and, if relevant, wind
component.
032 03 03 04 Landing
Page 294 of 681

and EIR
IR
(01) Determine the field-length-limited landing mass and landing X X
speeds given defactored distance, configuration, pressure
altitude, temperature and headwind or tailwind component.
(02) Determine landing climb data in the event of balked landing. X X
(03) Determine landing distance and ground-roll distance for given flap X X
position, aeroplane weight and airfield data.
(04) Calculate, given the landing distance available (LDA), slope and X X
surface type and condition, the defactored distance to be used for
commercial air transport using the appropriate landing graphs.
(05) Calculate the minimum landing distance (LD) that must be available X X
for commercial air transport given the defactored landing distance,
runway surface and slope.
032 04 00 00 CS-25/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS A — THEORY
032 04 01 00 Take-off
032 04 01 01 Take-off performance, definitions of and relationships between
terms
(01) X Explain the forces affecting the aeroplane during the take-off run. X
(02) X State the effects of thrust-to-weight ratio and flap-setting on X
ground roll.
(03) Describe the European Union airworthiness requirements according X
to CS-25 relating to large aeroplane performance (General and Take-
off) (SUBPART B — FLIGHT PERFORMANCE: CS 25.101 to CS 25.109
inclusive, and CS 25.113).
Page 295 of 681

and EIR
IR
(04) Describe the terms ‘aircraft classification number’ (ACN) and X
‘pavement classification number’ (PCN), and the requirements and
hazards of operating on aerodrome surfaces with PCNs smaller than
the ACNs.
(05) Define and explain the following speeds in accordance with CS-25 or X
CS-Definitions:
— reference stall speed (VSR);
— reference stall speed in a specific configuration (VSR1);
— 1-g stall speed at which the aeroplane can develop a lift force
(normal to the flight path) equal to its weight (VS1g);
— minimum control speed with critical engine inoperative (VMC);
— minimum control speed on or near the ground (VMCG);
— minimum control speed at take-off climb (VMCA);
— engine failure speed (VEF);
— take-off decision speed (V1);
— rotation speed (VR);
— minimum take-off safety speed (V2MIN);
— minimum unstick speed (VMU);
— lift-off speed (VLOF);
— maximum brake energy speed (VMBE);
— maximum tyre speed (VMax Tyre).
(06) Explain the interdependence between the above-mentioned speeds X
where relevant.
Page 296 of 681

and EIR
IR
(07) Define the following distances in accordance with CS-25: X
— take-off run with all engines operating and one-engine-
inoperative;
— take-off distance with all engines operating and one-engine-
inoperative;
— accelerate-stop distance with all engines operating and one-
engine-inoperative.
(08) Explain how loss of TORA due to alignment is accounted for. X
(09) Explain the effect of the interdependency of relevant speeds in X
032 04 01 01 (05) and the situations in which these
interdependencies can cause speed and performance restrictions.
032 04 01 02 Take-off distances
(01) Explain the effects of the following runway (RWY) variables on take- X
off distances:
— RWY slope;
— RWY surface conditions: dry, wet and contaminated;
— RWY elevation.
(02) Explain the effects of the following aeroplane variables on take-off X
distance:
— aeroplane mass;
— take-off configuration;
— bleed-air configurations.
Page 297 of 681

and EIR
IR
(03) Explain the effects of the following meteorological variables on take- X
off distances:
— wind;
— temperature;
— pressure altitude.
(04) Explain the consequence of errors in rotation technique on take-off X
distance:
— early and late rotation;
— too high and too low rotation angle;
— too high and too low rotation rate.
(05) Compare the take-off distance for specified conditions and X
configuration for all engines operating and one-engine-inoperative.
(06) Explain the effect of using clearway on the field-length-limited take- X
off mass.
(07) Explain the influence of aeroplane mass, air density and flap settings X
on V1 and V2MIN and thereby on take-off distance.
(08) Explain the effect of an error in V1 on the resulting one-engine-out X
take-off distance.
032 04 01 03 Accelerate-stop distance
(01) Explain how the accelerate-stop distance is affected by given X
conditions and configuration for all engines operating and one-
engine-inoperative.
(02) Explain the effect of using a stopway on the field-length-limited X
take-off mass.
Page 298 of 681

and EIR
IR
(03) Explain the effect of an error in V1 on the resulting accelerate-stop X
distance.
(04) Explain the effect of runway slope or wind component on the X
accelerate-stop distance.
(05) Explain how the accelerate-stop distance is determined and discuss X
the deceleration procedure.
(06) Explain how the accelerate-stop distance is affected by the use of X
brakes, anti-skid, reverse thrust, ground spoilers (lift dumpers) and
by brake energy absorption limits, delayed temperature rise and
brake temperature indication.
(07) X Explain the hazards of rejecting a take-off from high ground speed or X
high take-off mass, and how to manage these hazards.
032 04 01 04 Balanced field length concept
(01) X Define the term ‘balanced field length’. X
(02) Describe the relationship between take-off distance and accelerate- X
stop distance, and identify on a diagram the balanced field length
and balanced V1.
(03) X Describe the applicability of a balanced field length. X
032 04 01 05 Unbalanced field length concept
(01) X Describe the applicability of an unbalanced field length. X
(02) Explain the effect of additional stopway on the allowed take-off mass X
and appropriate V1 when using an unbalanced field.
Page 299 of 681

and EIR
IR
(03) Explain the effect of additional clearway on the allowed take-off X
mass and appropriate V1 when using an unbalanced field.
032 04 01 06 Field-length-limited take-off mass (FLLTOM)
(01) Explain the factors that affect the FLLTOM. X
(02) Explain the concept of a ‘range of V1’ and explain reasons for the X
placement of the designated V1 towards the faster or slower end of
the range.
032 04 01 07 Contaminated runways
(01) Define a ‘contaminated runway’, ‘wet runway’, and a ‘dry runway’. X X
(02) Describe the different types of contamination: wet or water patches, X X
rime- or frost-covered, dry snow, wet snow, slush, ice, compacted or
rolled snow, frozen ruts or ridges.
(03) X Identify the difference between friction coefficient and estimated X X
surface friction.
(04) State that when friction coefficient is 0.40 or higher, the expected X X
braking action is good.
(05) Define the different types of hydroplaning. X X
Source: NASA TM-85652, Tire Friction Performance, pp. 6 to 9
Page 300 of 681

and EIR
IR
(06) Explain the difference between the two dynamic hydroplaning X X
speeds and state which of them is the most limiting for an aircraft
operating on a wet runway.
Source: NASA TM-85652, Tire Friction Performance, p. 8
(07) State that some wind limitations may apply in case of contaminated X X
runways. Those limitations are to be found in Part B of the
Operations Manual — Limitations.
(08) State that the procedures associated with take-off and landing on X X
contaminated runways are to be found in Part B of the Operations
Manual — Normal procedures.
(09) State that the performance associated with contaminated runways is X X
to be found in Part B of the Operations Manual — Performance.
032 04 01 08 Take-off climb
(01) Explain the difference between the flat-rated and non-flat-rated part X
in performance charts.
(02) State the differences in climb-gradient requirements for two-, three- X
and four-engined aeroplanes.
(03) Explain the effects of aeroplane configuration and meteorological X
conditions on the take-off climb.
(04) Determine the climb-limited take-off mass. X
032 04 01 09 Obstacle-limited take-off
(01) Describe the operational regulations for obstacle clearance in the X
net take-off flight path (NTOFP).
Page 301 of 681

and EIR
IR
(02) Define the actual and NTOFP with one-engine-inoperative in X
accordance with CS-25.
(03) Explain the effects of aeroplane configuration and meteorological X
conditions on the obstacle-limited take-off mass.
(04) Describe the segments of the actual take-off flight path. X
(05) Describe the changes in the configuration, power, thrust and speed X
in the NTOFP climb segments.
(06) State the standard maximum bank angle(s) in the first and second X
segment, and determine the effect on the stall speed and
implication on V2.
(07) Explain the influence of airspeed selection, acceleration and turns on X
the climb gradient.
(08) Describe the European Union airworthiness requirements according X
to CS-25 relating to aeroplane performance take-off climb and flight
path (SUBPART B — FLIGHT PERFORMANCE: CS 25.111, CS 25.115,
CS 25.117 and CS 25.121)
032 04 01 10 Performance-limited take-off mass (PLTOM) and regulated take-off
mass (RTOM) tables
(01) Define PLTOM and RTOM. X
(02) X Describe the use of RTOM tables or similar to find PLTOM and how X
this can also be done using an EFB.
(03) Interpret what take-off limitation (field length, obstacle, climb, X
structural, etc.) is restricting a particular RTOM as it is presented in
RTOM tables or similar.
Page 302 of 681

and EIR
IR
(04) Describe why data from an EFB can differ from data derived from X
RTOM tables or similar.
032 04 01 11 Take-off performance on wet and contaminated runways
(01) Explain the differences between the take-off performance X
determination on a wet or contaminated runway and on a dry
runway.
(02) Describe a wet V1 and explain the consequences of using a wet V1. X
(03) Describe the hazards, effects and management of operating from a X
contaminated runway.
(04) Describe displacement drag, impingement drag, and the methods to X
monitor acceleration.
(05) Explain the benefits and implications of using a derated take-off on a X
contaminated runway.
032 04 01 12 Use of reduced (flexible or flex) and derated thrust
(01) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of using reduced (flex) X
and derated thrust.
(02) Explain the difference between and principles behind reduced (flex) X
and derated thrust.
(03) Explain when reduced (flex) and derated thrust may and may not be X
used.
(04) Explain the effect of using reduced (flex) and derated thrust on take- X
off performance including take-off speeds, take-off distance, climb
performance and obstacle clearance.
Page 303 of 681

and EIR
IR
(05) Explain the assumed temperature method for determining reduced X
(flex) thrust performance.
032 04 01 13 Take-off performance using different take-off flap settings
(01) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of using different take-off X
flap settings to optimise the performance-limited take-off mass
(PLTOM).
(02) Determine the optimum flap position and PLTOM from given figures. X
032 04 01 14 Take-off performance using increased V2 speeds (‘improved climb
performance’)
(01) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of the increased V2 X
procedure.
(02) Explain under what circumstances this procedure can be used. X
(03) Explain the hazards of the fast V1 and VLOF speeds associated with the X
increased V2 procedure and how they can be managed.
032 04 01 15 Brake-energy and tyre-speed limit
(01) Explain the effects on take-off performance of brake-energy and X
tyre-speed limits.
(02) Explain under what conditions they are more likely to become X
limiting.
032 04 02 00 Climb
032 04 02 01 Climb techniques
Page 304 of 681

and EIR
IR
(01) Explain the effect of climbing at constant IAS on: X
— TAS;
— Mach number;
— climb gradient;
— rate of climb.
(02) Explain the effect of climbing at constant Mach number on: X
— TAS;
— IAS;
— climb gradient;
— rate of climb.
(03) Explain the correct sequence of climb speeds for turbojet transport X
aeroplanes.
(04) Determine the effect on TAS when climbing in and above the X
troposphere at constant Mach number.
032 04 02 02 Influence of variables on climb performance
(01) Explain the effect on the operational speed limit when climbing at X
constant IAS and at constant Mach number.
(02) Explain the term ‘crossover altitude’ which occurs during the climb X
speed schedule (IAS–Mach number).
032 04 03 00 Cruise
Page 305 of 681

and EIR
IR
032 04 03 04 Long-range cruise
(01) Define the term ‘long-range cruise’. X
(02) Explain the differences between flying at long-range speed and X
maximum-range speed with regard to fuel-flow and speed stability.
032 04 03 06 Cruise altitudes
(01) X Define the term ‘optimum cruise altitude’. X
(02) Explain the factors that affect optimum cruise altitude. X
(03) Explain the factors that can affect or limit the maximum operating X
cruise altitude.
(04) Explain the purpose of, and operational reasons for, a step climb and X
when such a climb would be initiated for optimum range.
(05) Describe the buffet onset boundary (BOB) and determine the high- X
and low-speed buffet (speed/Mach number only).
(06) Analyse the influence of bank angle, mass and the 1.3g buffet X
margin on a step climb.
(07) Describe that the high-speed buffet can occur at speeds slower or X
faster than MMO.
(08) Explain the reasons why a step climb may not be used (e.g. for short X
sectors, advantageous winds, avoiding turbulence, and due to air
traffic restrictions).
032 04 03 07 Cost index (CI)
Page 306 of 681

and EIR
IR
(01) Describe ‘cost index’. X
(02) Describe the reason for economical cruise speed. X
(03) Describe the effect of cost index on climb, cruise and descent X
speeds.
032 04 04 00 En-route one-engine-inoperative
032 04 04 01 Drift-down
(01) Describe the determination of en-route flight-path data with one- X
engine-inoperative in accordance with CS 25.123.
(02) Describe the minimum obstacle-clearance height prescribed in the X
applicable operational requirements.
(03) Describe the optimum speed that the pilot should select during X
drift-down.
(04) Explain the influence of deceleration on the drift-down profiles. X
032 04 04 02 Influence of variables on the en-route one-engine-inoperative
performance
(01) Describe and explain the factors which affect the en-route net drift- X
down flight path.
032 04 05 00 Descent
032 04 05 01 Descent techniques
(01) Explain the effect of descending at constant Mach number. X
(02) Explain the effect of descending at constant IAS. X
Page 307 of 681

and EIR
IR
(03) Explain the correct sequence of descent speeds for turbojet X
transport aeroplanes.
(04) Determine the effect on TAS when descending in and above the X
troposphere at constant Mach number.
(05) Describe the following limiting speeds for descent: X
— maximum operating speed (VMO);
— maximum Mach number (MMO).
(06) Explain the effect of a descent at constant Mach number on the X
margin to low- and high-speed buffet.
032 04 05 02 Energy management in the descent
(01) Explain the advantages and principle of a continuous descent. X
(02) X Describe energy management in terms of chemical, potential and X
kinetic energy.
(03) Describe the effect of increasing/decreasing headwind and tailwind X
on profile management.
(04) Describe the effect of the Mach number to IAS transition (speed X
conversion) on profile management.
(05) Describe situations during the descent and approach in which a pilot X
could find that an aeroplane flies high or fast, and explain how the
pilot can manage descent angle/excess energy.
032 04 06 00 Approach and landing
032 04 06 01 Approach requirements
Page 308 of 681

and EIR
IR
(01) Describe the CS-25 requirements for the approach climb X
(CS 25.121).
(02) Describe the CS-25 requirements for the landing climb. X
(03) Explain the effect of temperature and pressure altitude on approach X
and landing-climb performance.
032 04 06 02 Landing-field-length and landing-speed requirements
(01) X Describe the landing distance determined according to CS 25.125 X
(‘demonstrated’ landing distance).
(02) Describe the landing-field-length requirements for dry, wet and X
contaminated runways and the applicable operational requirements.
(03) X Define the ‘landing distance available’ (LDA). X
(04) Define and explain the following speeds in accordance with CS-25 or X
CS-Definitions:
— reference stall speed in the landing configuration (VSR0);
— reference landing speed (VREF);
— minimum control speed, approach and landing (VMCL).
032 04 06 03 Influence of variables on landing performance
(01) Explain the effect of runway slope, surface conditions and wind on X
the maximum landing mass for a given landing distance available in
accordance with the applicable operational requirements.
Page 309 of 681

and EIR
IR
(02) Explain the effect on landing distance and maximum allowable X
landing mass of the following devices affecting deceleration:
— reverse;
— anti-skid;
— ground spoilers or lift dumpers;
— autobrakes.
(03) Explain the effect of temperature and pressure altitude on the X
maximum landing mass for a given landing distance available.
(04) Explain the effect of hydroplaning on landing distance required and X
methods of managing landing on contaminated or wet runways.
032 04 06 04 Quick turnaround limit
(01) Describe how break temperature limits the turnaround times. X
032 05 00 00 CS-25/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS A — USE OF AEROPLANE X
PERFORMANCE DATA
032 05 01 00 Take-off
032 05 01 01 Take-off (performance data)
(01) Determine from given graphs the field-lenght-limited take-off mass X
(FLLTOM) and describe situations in which this limitation could be
most restrictive for take-off.
(02) Determine from given graphs the climb-limited take-off mass and X
describe situations in which this limitation could be most restrictive
for take-off.
Page 310 of 681

and EIR
IR
(03) Determine from given graphs the obstacle-limited mass and describe X
situations in which this limitation could be most restrictive for
take-off.
(04) Determine from given graphs the tyre-speed-limited take-off mass. X
(05) Determine from given graphs the maximum brake-energy-limited X
take-off mass.
(06) Determine the take-off V speeds for the actual take-off mass. X
(07) Determine the maximum take-off mass using given RTOM tables. X
(08) Using RTOM tables, determine the take-off V speeds for the actual X
take-off weight using appropriate corrections.
(09) Determine the assumed/flex temperature and take-off V speeds X
using the RTOM tables.
(10) Calculate the break cooling time following a rejected take-off given X
appropriate data.
032 05 02 00 Drift-down and stabilising altitude
032 05 02 01 Drift-down and stabilising altitude (performance data)
(01) Determine the one-engine-out net stabilising altitude (level-off X
altitude) from given graphs/tables.
(02) Determine the maximum mass at which the net stabilising altitude X
with one-engine-out clears the highest relevant obstacle by the
required clearance margin.
(03) Determine, using drift-down graphs, fuel used, time and distance X
travelled in a descent from a cruise flight level to a given altitude.
Page 311 of 681

and EIR
IR
032 05 03 00 Landing
032 05 03 01 Landing (performance data)
(01) Determine the field length required for landing with a given landing X
mass from the aeroplane performance data sheets.
(02) Determine the landing and approach climb-limited landing mass X
from the aeroplane performance data sheets.
(03) Calculate the maximum allowable landing mass as the lowest of: X
— approach-climb- and landing-climb-limited landing mass;
— landing-field-length-limited landing mass;
— structural-limited landing mass.
(04) Determine the brake cooling time for different landing masses using X
the aeroplane performance data sheets.
Page 312 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix

FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 313 of 681

SUBJECT 033 — FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING — FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
General Student Pilot Route Manual (GSPRM)
This document shall be referred to as the General Student Pilot Route Manual (GSPRM) and should contain as a minimum:
1. a table of contents and a list of effective pages;
2. introduction with the instrument flight rules (IFR) charts’ legends;
3. 1:500 000 visual flight rule (VFR) aeronautical chart of Germany;
4. en-route low- and high-altitude IFR charts to cover the airspace above all EU Member States plus Norway, Switzerland, Liechtenstein and the Balkans;
5. en-route high-altitude chart of the North Pole (a polar stereographic projection) to illustrate current polar routes;
6. a plotting chart of the North Atlantic (with information on extended range operations with two-engined aeroplanes (ETOPS));
7. area, aerodrome/heliport, aerodrome ground movement, standard instrument departure (SID), standard instrument arrival (STAR) and instrument
approach charts (IACs) for Alicante Elche, Amsterdam Schiphol, Dubrovnik Čilipi, London Heathrow, Nantes/Atlantique, Santorini and Stuttgart for
aeroplane operations, and Aberdeen, De Kooy and Tromso for helicopter operations;
8. microwave landing system (MLS) approach chart for Galbraith Lake Alaska;
9. an example of a completed air traffic service (ATS) flight plan (with instructions on how to complete it), including the ICAO model flight plan form;
10. introduction with the VFR charts’ legends, aerodrome directories for Croatia, France, Germany, Spain and United Kingdom, and area,
aerodrome/heliport and visual approach charts (VACs) for Aberdeen Dyce, Alicante Elche, Dubrovnik Čilipi, Friedrichshafen, Gloucestershire and
Nantes/Atlantique.
The charts should have a frozen date (e.g. 01.01.2017), and be reissued on a regular basis (e.g. every 4–5 years).
The charts listed above will form the basis for the questions in licensing examinations.
There will be no obligation for any student or approved training organisation (ATO) to buy, use or issue the GSPRM (nor will it have any other subject-matter
material in it), but the content will be the basis for charts which may appear in Part-FCL exams. Any chart provider (Lido, Jeppesen, Navtech, etc.) may
provide the GSPRM, but the students will not be expected to learn non-ICAO standard symbology or chart requirements.
Page 314 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
033 00 00 00 FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
033 01 00 00 FLIGHT PLANNING FOR VFR FLIGHTS
Remark: Using the GSPRM VFR charts.
033 01 01 00 VFR navigation plan
033 01 01 01 Airspace, communication, visual and radio-navigation data
from VFR charts
(01) Select routes taking the following criteria into account: X X X X X
— classification of airspace;
— restricted areas;
— VFR semicircular rules;
— visually conspicuous points;
— radio-navigation aids.
(02) Find the frequencies or identifiers of radio-navigation aids X X X X X
from charts.
(03) Find the communication frequencies and call signs for the X X X X X
following:
Page 315 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— control agencies and service facilities;
— flight information service (FIS);
— weather information stations;
— automatic terminal information service (ATIS).
033 01 01 02 Planning courses, distances and cruising levels with VFR
charts
(01) Choose visual waypoints in accordance with specified X X X X X
criteria (large, unique, contrast, vertical extent, etc.).
(02) Measure courses and distances from a VFR chart. X X X X X
(03) Find the highest obstacle within a given distance on either X X X X X
side of the course.
(04) Find the following data from a VFR chart and transfer them X X X X X
to a navigation plan:
— waypoints or turning points;
— distances;
— true/magnetic courses.
(05) Calculate the minimum pressure altitude with a given X X X X X
obstacle clearance or true altitude from a given altitude or
pressure altitude from minimum grid-area altitude using
outside air temperature (OAT) and QNH.
(06) Calculate the vertical or horizontal distance and time to X X X X X
climb or descend to/from a given level or altitude with given
data.
(07) Explain how to determine the position of a significant X X X X X
VFR point for insertion into a global navigation satellite
system (GNSS) flight plan, using the distance and bearing
Page 316 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
from an existing significant point and using coordinates.
033 01 01 03 Aerodrome charts and aerodrome directory
(01) X Explain the reasons for studying the visual departure X X X X X
procedures and the available approach procedures.
(02) Find all visual procedures which can be expected at the X X X X X
departure, destination and alternate aerodromes.
(03) Find all relevant aeronautical and regulatory information X X X X X
required for VFR flight planning from the aerodrome charts
or aerodrome directory.
033 01 01 05 Completion of navigation plan
(01) Calculate the true airspeed (TAS) from given aircraft X X X X X
performance data, altitude and OAT.
(02) Calculate wind correction angles (WCAs), drift and ground X X X X X
speeds (GS).
(03) Calculate individual and accumulated times for each leg to X X X X X
destination and alternate aerodromes.
033 02 00 00 FLIGHT PLANNING FOR IFR FLIGHTS
Remark: Using the GSPRM IFR charts.
033 02 01 00 IFR navigation plan
033 02 01 01 Air traffic service (ATS) routes
(01) Identify suitable routings by identifying all relevant X X X X
aeronautical and regulatory information (including
information published in the national aeronautical
Page 317 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
information publication (AIP)) required for IFR flight
planning.
(02) Identify and describe ATS routes (conventional, area X X X X
navigation (RNAV), required navigation performance (RNP),
conditional routes (CDRs), and direct routes).
033 02 01 02 Courses and distances from en-route charts
(01) Determine courses and distances. X X X X
(02) Determine bearings and distances of waypoints from radio- X X X X
navigation aids.
033 02 01 03 Altitudes
(01) Define the following altitudes: X X X X
— minimum en-route altitude (MEA);
— minimum obstacle clearance altitude (MOCA);
— minimum sector altitude (MSA);
— minimum off-route altitude (MORA);
— grid minimum off-route altitude (Grid MORA);
— maximum authorised altitude (MAA);
— minimum crossing altitude (MCA);
— minimum holding altitude (MHA).
(02) Extract the following altitudes from the chart(s): X X X X
— MEA;
— MOCA;
— MSA;
— MORA;
— Grid MORA;
Page 318 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— MAA;
— MCA;
— MHA.
(03) State who is responsible for terrain separation during IFR X X X X
flight inside and outside controlled airspace.
(04) State the minimum obstacle clearance requirements for en- X X X X
route IFR flight inside and outside controlled airspace.
(05) State when a temperature error correction must be applied X X X X
by either the pilot or ATC.
(06) Identify and explain the use of minimum radar vectoring X X X X
altitudes.
(07) Calculate the minimum pressure altitude required with a X X X X
given obstacle clearance, magnetic track, OAT, QNH and
reduced vertical separation minimum (RVSM)/non-RVSM
information.
(08) Calculate true altitude from a given pressure altitude and X X X X
obstacle elevation using OAT and QNH.
033 02 01 04 Standard instrument departure (SID) and standard
instrument arrival (STAR) routes
(01) X State the reasons for studying SID and STAR charts. X X X X
(02) X State that SID and STAR charts show procedures only in a X X X X
pictorial presentation style which may not be true to scale.
(03) Interpret all data and information represented on SID and X X X X
STAR charts, particularly:
— routings;
Page 319 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— distances;
— courses;
— radials;
— altitudes/levels;
— frequencies;
— restrictions;
— RNAV waypoints and non-RNAV intersection;
— fly-over and fly-by waypoints.
(04) Identify SID and STAR charts which might be relevant for a X X X X
planned flight.
(05) Define SID and STAR for RNAV only. X X X X
(06) Describe the difference between SID/STAR, RNAV SID/STAR X X X X
and RNAV SID/STAR overlay.
033 02 01 05 Instrument-approach charts
(01) X State the reasons for being familiar with instrument- X X X X
approach procedures (IAPs) and appropriate data for
departure, destination and alternate aerodromes.
(02) Select IAPs appropriate for departure, destination and X X X X
alternate aerodromes.
(03) Interpret all procedures, data and information represented X X X X
on instrument-approach charts, particularly:
— courses and radials;
— distances;
— altitudes/levels/heights;
— restrictions;
Page 320 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— obstructions;
— frequencies;
— speeds and times;
— decision altitudes/heights (DAs/Hs);
— (DA/H) and minimum descent altitudes/heights
(MDAs/Hs);
— visibility and runway visual ranges (RVRs);
— approach-light systems.
(04) Explain the following IAP terms: X X X X
— type A and B;
— 2D and 3D;
— CAT I, II and III;
— precision approach (conventional and ground-based
augmentation system (GBAS));
— non-precision approach (conventional and required
navigation performance approach (RNP APCH)
(lateral navigation (LNAV), LNAV/vertical navigation
(VNAV), localiser performance (LP), localiser
performance with vertical guidance (LPV), and
required navigation performance authorisation
required approach (RNP AR APCH));
— approach procedure with vertical guidance (APV)
(APV Baro and APV satellite-based augmentation
system (SBAS)).
033 02 01 06 Communications and radio-navigation planning data
(01) Find the communication frequencies and call signs for X X X X
Page 321 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
aeronautical services for IFR flights from en-route charts.
(02) Find the frequency or identifiers of radio-navigation aids for X X X X
IFR flights from en-route charts.
033 02 01 07 Completion of a manual navigation plan
(01) Complete a navigation plan with the courses, distances and X X X X
frequencies taken from charts.
(02) Find the SID and STAR routes to be flown or to be expected. X X X X
(03) Determine the position of top of climb (TOC) and top of X X X X
descent (TOD) from given appropriate data.
(04) Determine variation and calculate magnetic/true courses. X X X X
(05) Calculate TAS from given aircraft performance data, altitude X X X X
and OAT.
(06) Calculate wind correction angles (WCAs)/drift and ground X X X X
speeds (GSs).
(07) Calculate individual and accumulated times for each leg to X X X X
destination and alternate aerodromes.
(08) Describe the advantages of global navigation satellite X X X X
system/flight management computer (GNSS/FMC)
equipment regarding:
— automatic calculation and display of tracks and leg
distances;
— additional route information in the database
(minimum altitudes, approach procedures);
— time and fuel estimates over waypoints;
— ability to adjust speed to arrive over a waypoint at
Page 322 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
a defined time;
— time and fuel revisions based on predicted and
actual wind.
(09) Describe the limitations of using GNSS/FMC equipment: X X X X
— pilot-inputted errors (flight levels, wind,
temperature, fuel);
— the effect of other than predicted wind on fuel and
time estimates;
— the effect of aircraftʼs non-standard configuration
on flight management system (FMS) predictions.
033 03 00 00 FUEL PLANNING — CAT.OP.MPA.106 and CAT.OP.MPA.150
plus AMC1, 2 and 3
033 03 01 00 General
033 03 01 01 Fuel planning (general)
(01) Convert to volume, mass and density given in different units X X X X X X X
which are commonly used in aviation.
(02) Determine relevant data, such as fuel capacity, fuel flow/ X X X X X X X
consumption at different power/thrust settings, altitudes
and atmospheric conditions, from the flight manual.
(03) Calculate the attainable flight time/range from given X X X X X X X
average fuel flow/consumption and available amount of
fuel.
(04) Calculate the required fuel from given average fuel flow/ X X X X X X X
consumption and required time/range to be flown.
(05) Calculate the required fuel for a VFR or IFR flight from given X X X X X X X
Page 323 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
forecast meteorological conditions.
(06) State the minimum amount of remaining fuel required on X X X X X X X
arrival at the destination and alternate aerodromes/
heliports.
(07) Explain and describe how to calculate nautical air miles X X X X X X X
(NAM) from nautical ground miles (NGM).
033 03 02 00 Pre-flight fuel planning for commercial flights
033 03 02 01 Taxi fuel
(01) Determine the fuel required for engine start and taxiing by X X X X X
consulting the fuel-usage tables or graphs from the flight
manual taking into account all the relevant conditions.
033 03 02 02 Trip fuel
(01) Define trip fuel and name the segments of flight for which X X X X X
the trip fuel is relevant.
(02) Determine the trip fuel for the flight by using data from the X X X X X
fuel tables or graphs from the flight manual.
033 03 02 03 Reserve fuel and its components
Contingency fuel
(01) Explain the reasons for having contingency fuel. X X X X X
(02) Calculate the contingency fuel according to the applicable X X X X X
operational requirements.
Alternate fuel
(03) Explain the reasons and regulations for having alternate fuel X X X X X
Page 324 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
and name the segments of flight for which the alternate fuel
is relevant.
(04) Calculate the alternate fuel in accordance with the X X X X X
applicable operational requirements and relevant data from
the navigation plan and the flight manual.
Final reserve fuel
(05) Explain the reasons and regulations for having final reserve X X X X X
fuel.
(06) Calculate the final reserve fuel for an aircraft in accordance X X X X X
with the applicable operational requirements and by using
relevant data from the flight manual.
Additional fuel
(07) Explain the reasons and regulations for having additional X X X X X
fuel.
(08) Calculate the additional fuel for a flight in accordance with X X X X X
the applicable operational requirements.
033 03 02 04 Extra fuel
(01) Explain the reasons and regulations for having extra fuel in X X X X X
accordance with the applicable operational requirements.
(02) Calculate the possible extra fuel under given conditions. X X X X X
(03) Explain the fuel penalty incurred when loading extra fuel X X X X X
(i.e. the additional fuel consumption due to increased
mass).
033 03 02 05 Calculation of total fuel and completion of the fuel section
of the navigation plan (fuel plan)
Page 325 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Calculate the total fuel required for a given flight. X X X X X
(02) Complete the fuel plan. X X X X X
033 03 03 00 Specific fuel-calculation procedures
033 03 03 01 Reduced contingency fuel procedure
(01) X Explain the reasons and regulations for reduced contingency X
fuel as stated in the applicable operational requirements.
(02) Calculate the contingency fuel and trip fuel required in X
accordance with the reduced contingency fuel procedure.
033 03 03 02 Isolated aerodrome or heliport procedure
(01) X Explain the basic procedures for an isolated aerodrome or X X X
heliport as stated in the applicable operational
requirements.
(02) Calculate the additional fuel for aeroplanes or helicopters X X X
according to the isolated aerodrome or heliport procedures.
033 03 03 03 Predetermined-point procedure
(01) X Explain the basic idea of the predetermined-point X
procedure as stated in the applicable operational
requirements.
033 03 03 04 Fuel-tankering
(01) Explain the basic idea of fuel-tankering procedures. X
(02) Calculate how much fuel to tank by using given appropriate X
graphs, tables or data.
Page 326 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
033 04 00 00 PRE-FLIGHT PREPARATION
033 04 01 00 Notice to airmen (NOTAM) briefing
033 04 01 01 Ground- and satellite-based facilities and services
(01) Check that the ground- and satellite-based facilities and X X X X X X X
services required for the planned flight are available and
adequate.
033 04 01 02 Departure, destination and alternate aerodromes
(01) Find and analyse the latest state at the departure, X X X X X X X
destination and alternate aerodromes, in particular for:
— opening hours;
— work in progress (WIP);
— special procedures due to WIP;
— obstructions;
— changes of frequencies for communications,
navigation aids and facilities.
(02) Check that satellite-based facilities are available during X X X X X X X
the expected time of use.
(03) Check that GBAS/SBAS augmentation is available during X X X X X X X
the expected time of use.
033 04 01 03 Airway routings and airspace structure
(01) Find and analyse the latest en-route state for: X X X X X X X
— airway(s) or route(s);
— restricted, danger and prohibited areas;
— changes of frequencies for communications,
Page 327 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
navigation aids and facilities.
033 04 01 04 Pre-flight preparation of GNSS achievability
(01) Define why it is important to check GNSS achievability. X
(02) Define receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM), X
NOTAM and notice advisory to NavStar users (NANU)
messages.
(03) Explain the difference in use of augmented and non- X
augmented GNSS in connection with the achievability
check.
(04) Explain the difference in planned and unplanned outage X
of GNSS or SBAS.
033 04 02 00 Meteorological briefing
033 04 02 02 Update of navigation plan using the latest meteorological
information
(01) Confirm the most fuel-efficient altitude from given wind, X X X X X X X
temperature and aircraft data.
(02) Confirm true altitudes from given atmospheric data to X X X X X X
ensure that statutory minimum clearance is attained.
(03) Confirm magnetic headings and GSs. X X X X X X X
(04) Confirm the individual leg times and the total time en route. X X X X X X X
(05) Confirm the total time en route for the trip to the X X X X X X X
destination.
Page 328 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(06) Confirm the total time from destination to the alternate X X X X X X X
aerodrome.
033 04 02 05 Update of fuel plan
(01) Calculate the revised fuel data in accordance with the X X X X X X
changed conditions.
033 04 03 00 Point of equal time (PET) and point of safe return (PSR)
033 04 03 01 Point of equal time (PET)
(01) Define ‘PETʼ. X X X X X
(02) Calculate the position of a PET and the estimated time of X X X X X
arrival (ETA) at the PET from given relevant data.
033 04 03 02 Point of safe return (PSR)
(01) Define ‘PSRʼ. X X X X X
(02) Calculate the position of a PSR and the ETA at the PSR from X X X X X
given relevant data.
033 05 00 00 ICAO FLIGHT PLAN (ATS flight plan (FPL))
033 05 01 00 Individual FPL
033 05 01 01 Format of FPL
(01) X State the reasons for a fixed format of an ICAO ATS FPL. X X X X X X X
(02) Determine the correct entries to complete an ATS FPL plus X X X X X X X
decode and interpret the entries in a completed ATS FPL,
Page 329 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
particularly for the following:
— aircraft identification (Item 7);
— flight rules and type of flight (Item 8);
— number and type of aircraft and wake-turbulence
category (Item 9);
— equipment (Item 10);
— departure aerodrome and time (Item 13);
— route (Item 15);
— destination aerodrome, total estimated elapsed time
and alternate aerodrome (Item 16);
— other information (Item 18);
— supplementary information (Item 19).
033 05 02 00 Repetitive flight plan (RPL)
033 05 02 01 Repetitive flight plan (RPL)
(01) X Explain the difference between an individual FPL and an X X X
RPL.
033 06 00 00 FLIGHT MONITORING AND IN-FLIGHT REPLANNING
033 06 01 00 Flight monitoring
033 06 01 01 Monitoring of track and time
(01) State the reasons for possible deviations from the planned X X X X X X
track and planned timings.
(02) Calculate GS by using actual in-flight parameters. X X X X X X
Page 330 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(03) Calculate the expected leg times by using actual in-flight X X X X X X
parameters.
(04) Enter, in the progress of flight, at the checkpoint or turning X X X X X
point, the ‘actual time-over’ and the ‘estimated time-over’
for the next checkpoint into the flight plan.
(05) State that it is necessary to determine the position of the X X X X X
aircraft accurately before commencing descent in order to
ensure safe ground clearance.
(06) Calculate revised ETA based on changes to the pre-flight X X X X X
plan, including changes of W/V, cruise level, OAT, distances,
Mach number and calibrated airspeed (CAS).
033 06 01 02 In-flight fuel management
(01) Explain why fuel checks must be carried out in flight at X X X X X X
regular intervals and why relevant fuel data must be
recorded.
(02) Assess deviations of actual fuel consumption from planned X X X X X X
consumption.
(03) Calculate fuel quantity used, fuel consumption, and fuel X X X X X X
remaining at navigation checkpoints/waypoints.
(04) Compare the actual with the planned fuel consumption by X X X X X X
means of calculation.
(05) Determine the remaining range and endurance by means of X X X X X X
calculation.
(06) Calculate the revised fuel consumption based on changes to X X X X X X
the pre-flight plan, including changes of W/V, cruise level,
OAT, distances, Mach number and CAS.
Page 331 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
033 06 02 00 In-flight replanning
033 06 02 01 Deviation from planned data
(01) State that the commander is responsible for ensuring that, X X X X X
even in case of diversion, the remaining fuel is not less than
the fuel required to proceed to an aerodrome where a safe
landing can be made, with final reserve fuel remaining.
(02) Explain that, in the case of an in-flight update, the X X X X X
commander has to check the following:
— the suitability of the new destination or alternate
aerodrome;
— meteorological conditions on revised routing and at
revised destination or alternate aerodrome;
— the aircraft must be able to land with the prescribed
final reserve fuel.
(03) Calculate the revised destination/alternate aerodrome X X X X X
landing mass from given latest data.
Page 332 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix

PERFORMANCE — HELICOPTERS’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 333 of 681

SUBJECT 034 — FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING — PERFORMANCE — HELICOPTERS
reference and EIR
IR
034 00 00 00 PERFORMANCE — HELICOPTERS
034 01 00 00 GENERAL
034 01 01 00 Performance legislation
034 01 01 01 Airworthiness requirements
(01) Interpret the airworthiness requirements of CS-27 and X X X
CS-29.
(02) Name the general differences between helicopters X X X
certified according to CS-27 and CS-29.
034 01 01 02 Operational regulations
(01) State that the person responsible for complying with X X X
operational procedures is the commander.
(02) Use and interpret diagrams and tables associated with X X
CAT A and CAT B procedures in order to select and
develop Class 1, 2 and 3 performance profiles according
to available heliport size and location (surface or
elevated).
(03) Interpret the charts showing minimum clearances X X
Page 334 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
associated with CAT A and CAT B procedures.
034 01 02 00 General performance theory
034 01 02 01 Phases of flight
(01) Explain the following phases of flight: X X X
— take-off;
— climb;
— level flight;
— descent;
— approach and landing.
(02) Describe the necessity for different take-off and landing X X X
procedures.
034 01 02 02 Definitions and terms
(01) Define the following terms: X X X
— CAT A;
— CAT B;
— Performance Class 1, 2 and 3;
— congested area;
— elevated heliport;
— helideck;
— heliport;
— hostile environment;
— maximum operational passenger seating
configuration (MOPSC);
— non-hostile environment;
— obstacle;
Page 335 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— rotor radius (R);
— take-off mass;
— touchdown and lift-off area (TLOF);
— safe forced landing;
— speed for best rate of climb (Vy);
— never exceed speed (VNE);
— velocity landing gear extended (VLE);
— velocity landing gear operation (VLO);
— cruising speed and maximum cruising speed.
— reported headwind component;
— take-off decision point (TDP);
— defined point after take-off (DPATO);
— take-off distance required helicopter (TODRH);
— take-off distance available helicopter (TODAH);
— distance required (DR);
— rejected take-off distance required helicopter
(RTODRH);
— rotation point (RP);
— committal point (CP);
— defined point before landing (DPBL);
— landing decision point (LDP);
— landing distance available helicopter (LDAH);
— landing distance required helicopter (LDRH);
— ditching (see operations).
Page 336 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(03) Understand the meaning and significance of the X X
acronyms AEO and OEI.
(04) Define the terms ‘climb angle’ and ‘climb gradient’. X X
(05) Define the terms ‘flight-path angle’ and ‘flight-path X X
gradient’.
(06) Define ‘VmaxRange’ (speed for maximum range) and VmaxEnd X X X
(speed for maximum endurance).
(07) Define and calculate the gradient by using power, wind, X X
and helicopter mass.
(08) Explain the terms ‘operational ceiling’ and ‘absolute X X X
ceiling’.
(09) Explain the term ‘service ceiling OEI’. X X X
(10) Explain the difference between hovering in ground X X X
effect (HIGE) and hovering out of ground effect (HOGE).
034 01 02 03 Power required/power available curves
(01) Understand and interpret the power required/power X X X
available versus TAS graphs.
034 01 02 04 Height–velocity graphs
(01) Understand and interpret height–velocity graphs. X X X
034 01 02 05 Influencing variables on performance
(01) Explain how the following factors affect helicopter X X X
performance:
Page 337 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— humidity;
— temperature;
— wind;
— helicopter mass;
— helicopter configuration;
— helicopter centre of gravity (CG).
034 02 00 00 PERFORMANCE CLASS 3 — SINGLE-ENGINE
HELICOPTERS
034 02 01 00 Effect of variables on single-engine (SE) helicopter
performance
034 02 01 01 Effect of variables on SE helicopter performance
(01) Determine the wind component, altitude and X X X
temperature for hovering, take-off and landing.
(02) Explain that operations are to be conducted only X X X
from/to heliports and over such routes, areas and
diversions contained in a non-hostile environment
where a safe forced landing can be carried out (point
CAT.OP.MPA.137 of the EU Regulation on air
operations, except when the helicopter is approved to
operate in accordance with point CAT.POL.H.420).
(Consider the exception: Operations may be conducted
in a hostile environment. Ground level exposure — and
exposure for elevated final approach and take-off areas
(FATOs) or helidecks in non-hostile environments — is
allowed for operations approved under CAT.POL.H.305,
during the take-off and landing phases.)
Page 338 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(03) Explain the effect of temperature, wind and altitude on X X X
climb, cruise and descent performance.
034 02 02 00 Take-off and landing
034 02 02 01 Take-off and landing (including hover)
(01) Explain the take-off and landing requirements. X X X
(02) Explain the maximum allowed take-off and landing X X X
mass.
(03) Explain that mass has to be restricted to HIGE. X X X
(04) Explain that if HIGE is unlikely to be achieved (for X X X
example, blocked by an obstruction), then mass must be
restricted to HOGE.
034 02 03 00 Climb, cruise and descent
034 02 03 01 Climb, cruise and descent (capabilities)
(01) State that the helicopter must be capable of flying its X X X
intended track without flying below the appropriate
minimum flight altitude and be able to perform a safe
forced landing.
(02) Explain the effect of altitude on the maximum X X X
endurance speed.
034 02 04 00 Use of helicopter performance data
034 02 04 01 Take-off (including hover)
(01) Find the maximum wind component. X X X
(02) Find the maximum allowed take-off mass for certain X X X
Page 339 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
conditions.
(03) Find the height–velocity parameters. X X X
034 02 04 02 Climb
(01) Find the time, distance and fuel required to climb for X X X
certain conditions.
(02) Find the rate of climb under given conditions and the X X X
best rate-of-climb speed VY.
034 02 04 03 Cruise
(01) Find the cruising speed and fuel consumption for certain X X X
conditions.
(02) Calculate the range and endurance under given X X X
conditions.
034 02 04 04 Landing (including hover)
(01) Find the maximum wind component. X X X
(02) Find the maximum allowed landing mass for certain X X X
conditions.
(03) Find the height–velocity parameters. X X X
034 03 00 00 PERFORMANCE CLASS 2
General remark: The Learning Objectives for
Performance Class 2 are principally identical with those
for Performance Class 1. (See 034 04 00 00)
Additional Learning Objectives are shown below.
034 03 01 00 Operations without an assured safe forced landing
Page 340 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
capability
034 03 01 01 Responsibility for operations without an assured safe
forced landing capability
(01) State the responsibility of the operator for assuring safe X X
forced landings (point CAT.POL.H.305 of the EU
Regulation on air operations).
034 03 02 00 Take-off
034 03 02 01 Take-off requirements
(01) State the climb and other requirements for take-off. X X
034 03 03 00 Take-off flight path
034 03 03 01 Take-off flight path requirements
(01) State the height above the take-off surface at which at X X
least the requirements for the take-off flight path for
Performance Class 1 are to be met.
034 03 04 00 Landing
034 03 04 01 Landing requirements
(01) State the requirements for the climb capability when X X
OEI.
(02) State the options for a Performance Class 2 operation in X X
the case of a critical power-unit failure at any point in
the approach path.
(03) State the limitations for operations to/from a helideck. X X
034 04 00 00 PERFORMANCE CLASS 1 — HELICOPTERS CERTIFIED
Page 341 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
ACCORDING TO CS-29 ONLY
034 04 01 00 Take-off
034 04 01 01 Take-off distances
(01) Explain the effects of the following variables on the X X
flight-path and take-off distances:
— take-off with HIGE or HOGE;
— take-off procedure;
— obstacle clearances both laterally and vertically;
— take-off from non-elevated heliports;
— take-off from elevated heliports or helidecks;
— take-off from a TLOF.
(02) Explain the effects of the following variables on take-off X X
distances:
— mass;
— take-off configuration;
— bleed-air configurations.
(03) Explain the effects of the following meteorological X X
conditions on take-off distances:
— wind;
— temperature;
— pressure altitude.
(04) Explain the take-off distances for specified conditions X X
and configuration for AEO and OEI.
(05) Explain the effect of obstacles on the take-off distance X X
required.
Page 342 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(06) State the assumed reaction time between engine failure X X
and recognition.
(07) Explain that the flight must be carried out visually up to X X
TDP.
034 04 01 02 Rejected take-off distance required (helicopter)
(RTODR(H))
(01) Explain RTODR(H) for specified conditions and X X
configuration for AEO and OEI.
(02) Explain the time-to-decide allowance (decision time) X X
and deceleration procedure.
034 04 01 04 Take-off climb
(01) Define the segments of the take-off flight path. X X
(02) Explain the effect of changes in the configuration on X X
power and speed in the segments.
(03) Explain the climb-gradient requirements for OEI. X X
(04) State the minimum altitude over the take-off path when X X
flying at the take-off safety speed in a Category A
helicopter (VTOSS).
(05) Describe the influence of airspeed selection, X X
acceleration and turns on the climb gradient and best
rate-of-climb speed.
034 04 01 05 Obstacle-limited take-off
(01) Describe the operational regulations for obstacle X X
Page 343 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
clearance of the take-off flight path in the departure
sector with OEI.
(01) Determine from helicopter performance data sheets the X X
maximum mass that satisfies the operational
regulations for take-off in terms of regulated take-off
mass, TODRH and minimum gradients for climb and
obstacle clearance.
034 04 02 00 Climb
034 04 02 01 Climb techniques
(01) Explain the effect of climbing with best rate-of-climb X X
speed (VY).
(02) Explain the influence of altitude on VY. X X
034 04 02 02 Use of helicopter flight data
(01) Find the rate of climb and calculate the time to climb to X X
a given altitude.
034 04 03 00 Cruise
034 04 03 01 Cruise techniques
(01) Explain the cruise procedures for ‘maximum endurance’ X X
and ‘maximum range’.
034 04 03 02 Maximum endurance
(01) Explain fuel flow in relation to true airspeed (TAS). X X
(02) Explain the speed for maximum endurance. X X
Page 344 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
034 04 03 03 Maximum range
(01) Explain the speed for maximum range. X X
034 04 03 04 Maximum cruise
(01) Explain the speed for maximum cruise. X X
034 04 03 05 Cruise altitudes
(01) Explain the factors which might affect or limit the X X
operating altitude.
(02) Understand the relation between power setting, fuel X X
consumption, cruising speed and altitude.
(01) Determine the fuel consumption from the helicopter X X
performance data sheets in accordance with altitude
and helicopter mass.
034 04 04 00 En-route one-engine-inoperative (OEI)
034 04 04 01 Requirements for en-route flights with OEI
(01) State the flight-path clearance requirements. X X
(02) Explain drift-down techniques. X X
(03) State the reduction in the flight-path width when X X
navigational accuracy can be achieved.
(01) Find the single-engine service ceiling, range and X X
endurance from given engine-inoperative charts.
Page 345 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) Find OEI operating data from suitable charts. X X
(03) Find the amount of fuel to be jettisoned in order to X X
reduce helicopter mass.
(04) Calculate the relevant parameters for drift-down X X
procedures.
034 04 05 00 Descent
(01) Find the rate of descent and calculate the time to X X
descend to a given altitude.
034 04 06 00 Landing
034 04 06 01 Landing requirements
(01) State the requirements for landing. X X
034 04 06 02 Landing procedures
(01) Explain the procedure for critical power-unit failure X X
before and after the landing decision point.
(02) Explain that the portion of flight after the landing X X
decision point must be carried out visually.
(03) Explain the procedures and required obstacle X X
clearances for landings on different heliports/helidecks.
(01) Determine from helicopter performance data sheets the X X
maximum mass that satisfies the operational
regulations for landing in terms of regulated landing
Page 346 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
mass, LDRH and minimum gradients for climb and
obstacle clearance.
Page 347 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 040 — HUMAN PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 348 of 681

SUBJECT 040 — HUMAN PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS
reference
ATPL CPL ATPL/ ATPL CPL and EIR
IR
040 00 00 00 HUMAN PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS
040 01 00 00 HUMAN FACTORS: BASIC CONCEPTS
040 01 01 00 Human factors in aviation
040 01 01 01 Becoming a competent pilot
(01) State that competence is based on knowledge, skills X X X X X X

and attitudes of the individual pilot, and list the ICAO
eight core competencies:
— application of procedures;
— communication;
— aircraft flight path management, automation;
— aircraft flight path management, manual
control;
— leadership and teamwork;
— problem-solving and decision-making;
— situation awareness;
— workload management.
040 01 03 00 Flight safety concepts
040 01 03 01 Threat and error management (TEM) model and SHELL

model
(01) Explain the three components of the TEM model. X X X X X X X
Page 349 of 681

reference
IR
(02) Explain and give examples of latent threats. X X X X X X X
(03) Explain and give examples of environmental threats. X X X X X X X
(04) Explain and give examples of organisational threats. X X X X X X X
(05) Explain and give a definition of ‘error’ according to X X X X X X X
the TEM model of ICAO Doc 9683 (Part II,
Chapter 2).
(06) Give examples of different countermeasures which may X X X X X X X
be used in order to manage threats, errors, and
undesired aircraft states.
(07) Explain and give examples of procedural error, X X X X X X X
communication errors, and aircraft handling errors.
(08) Explain and give examples of ‘undesired aircraft states’. X X X X X X
(09) State the components of the SHELL model. X X X X X X
(10) State the relevance of the SHELL model to the work in X X X X X X
the cockpit.
040 01 04 00 Safety culture
040 01 04 01 Safety culture and safety management
(01) Distinguish between ‘open cultures’ and ‘closed X X X X X X X

cultures’.
(02) Illustrate how safety culture is reflected in national X X X X X X X
culture.
(03) Discuss the established expression ‘safety first’ in a X X X X X X
commercial entity.
Page 350 of 681

reference
IR
(04) Explain James Reason’s ‘Swiss Cheese Model’. X X X X X X X
(05) State the important factors that promote a good safety X X X X X X X
culture.
(06) Distinguish between ‘just culture’ and ‘non-punitive X X X X X X X
culture’.
(07) Name the five components which form safety culture X X X X X X X
(according to James Reason: informed culture,
reporting culture, learning culture, just culture, flexible
culture).
(08) Name the basic concepts of safety management system X X X X X X X
(SMS) (including hazard identification and risk
management) and its relationship with safety culture in
order to:
— define how the organisation is set up to
manage risks;
— identify workplace risk and implement suitable
controls;
— implement effective communication across all
levels of the organisation.
040 02 00 00 Basics of aviation physiology and health maintenance
040 02 01 00 Basics of flight physiology

040 02 01 01 The atmosphere
(01) State that the volume percentage of the gases in X X X X X X
ambient air will remain constant at all altitudes at
which conventional aircraft operate.
Page 351 of 681

reference
IR
040 02 01 02 Respiratory and circulatory system
(01) List the main components of the respiratory system and X X X X X X
their function.
(02) Identify the different volumes of air in the lungs and X X X X X X
state the normal respiratory rate.
(03) Explain the role of carbon dioxide in the control and X X X X X X
regulation of respiration.
(04) Describe the basic processes of external respiration and X X X X X X
internal respiration.
(05) List the factors that determine pulse rate. X X X X X X
(06) Name the major components of the circulatory system X X X X X X
and describe their function.
(07) State the values for a normal pulse rate and the X X X X X X
average cardiac output (heart rate × stroke volume) of
an adult at rest.
(08) Define ‘systolic’ and ‘diastolic’ blood pressure. X X X X X X
(09) State the normal blood pressure ranges and units of X X X X X X
measurement.
(10) List the main constituents of blood and describe their X X X X X X
functions.
(11) Stress the function of haemoglobin in the circulatory X X X X X X
system.
(12) Define ‘anaemia’ and state its common causes. X X X X X X
(13) Indicate the effect of increasing altitude on X X X X X X
haemoglobin oxygen saturation.
Page 352 of 681
reference
IR
Hypertension and hypotension
(14) Define ‘hypertension’ and ‘hypotension’. X X X X X X

(15) List the effects that high and low blood pressure will X X X X X X
have on some normal functions of the human body.
(16) State that both hypotension and hypertension may X X X X X X
disqualify a pilot from obtaining medical clearance to
fly.
(17) List the factors which can lead to hypertension for an X X X X X X
individual.
(18) State the corrective actions that may be taken to X X X X X X
reduce high blood pressure.
(19) Stress that hypertension is the major factor of strokes X X X X X X
in the general population.
Coronary artery disease
(20) Differentiate between ‘angina’ and ‘heart attack’. X X X X X X
(21) Explain the major risk factors for coronary disease. X X X X X X
(22) State the role physical exercise plays in reducing the X X X X X X
chances of developing coronary disease.
Hypoxia
(23) Define the two major forms of hypoxia (hypoxic and X X X X X X
anaemic), and the common causes of both.
(24) State the symptoms of hypoxia. X X X X X X
(25) State that healthy people are able to compensate for X X X X X X
Page 353 of 681

reference
IR
altitudes up to approximately 10 000–12 000 ft.
(26) Name the three physiological thresholds and allocate X X X X X X
the corresponding altitudes for each of them:
— reaction threshold (7 000 ft);
— disturbance threshold (10–12 000 ft); and
— critical threshold (22 000 ft).
(27) State the altitude at which short-term memory begins X X X X X X
to be affected by hypoxia.
(28) Define the terms ‘time of useful consciousness’ (TUC) X X X X X X
and ‘effective performance time’ (EPT).
(29) State that TUC varies among individuals, but the X X X X X X
approximate values for a person seated (at rest) are:
20 000 ft 30 min
30 000 ft 1–2 min
35 000 ft 30–90 s
40 000 ft 15–20 s
(30) List the factors that determine the severity of hypoxia. X X X X X X
(31) State the equivalent altitudes when breathing ambient X X X X X X
air and 100 % oxygen at mean sea level (MSL) and at
approximately 10 000, 30 000 and 40 000 ft.
Hyperventilation
(32) Describe the role of carbon dioxide in hyperventilation. X X X X X X

(33) Define the term ‘hyperventilation’. X X X X X X
(34) List the factors that cause hyperventilation. X X X X X X
Page 354 of 681

reference
IR
(35) State that hyperventilation may be caused by X X X X X X
psychological or physiological reasons.
(36) List the signs and symptoms of hyperventilation. X X X X X X
(37) List the measures which may be taken to counteract X X X X X X
hyperventilation: breath slowly, close one opening of
the nose, speak loudly, place a paper bag over nose and
mouth.
Decompression sickness/illness
(38) State the normal range of cabin pressure altitude in X X X X X X

pressurised commercial air transport aircraft and
describe its protective function for aircrew and
passengers.
(39) List the vital actions the crew has to perform when X X X X X X
cabin pressurisation is lost (oxygen mask on,
emergency descent, land as soon as possible, and no
further flight for the next minimum 24 hours). State
that decompression sickness symptoms can occur up to
24 hours later.
(40) Identify the causes of decompression sickness in flight X X X X X X
operation.
(41) State how decompression sickness can be prevented. X X X X X X
(42) List the symptoms of decompression sickness (bends, X X X X X X
creeps, chokes, staggers).
(43) Indicate how decompression sickness may be treated. X X X X X X
(44) Define the hazards of diving and flying, and give the X X X X X X
recommendations associated with these activities.
Page 355 of 681
reference
IR
Acceleration
(45) Define ‘linear acceleration’ and ‘angular acceleration’. X X X X X X X

(46) Describe the effects of z-acceleration on the circulation X X X X X X
and blood volume distribution.
(47) List magnitude, duration and onset as factors that X X X X X X X
determine the effects of acceleration on the human
body.
(48) List the effects of positive acceleration with respect to X X X X X X
type, sequence and corresponding G-load.
Carbon monoxide
(49) State how carbon monoxide is produced. X X X X X X

(50) State how the presence of carbon monoxide in the X X X X X X
blood affects the distribution of oxygen.
(51) List the signs and symptoms of carbon-monoxide X X X X X X
poisoning.
(52) Explain immediate countermeasures on suspicion of X X X X X X
carbon-monoxide poisoning and how poisoning can be
treated later on the ground.
040 02 01 03 High-altitude environment
(01) State how an increase in altitude may change the X

proportion of ozone in the atmosphere and that aircraft
can be equipped with special ozone removers.
Radiation
(02) State the sources of radiation at high altitude. X
Page 356 of 681

reference
IR
(03) List the effects of excessive exposure to radiation. X
Humidity
(04) List the factors that affect the relative humidity of both X
the atmosphere and cabin air.
(05) List the effects of low humidity on human body to be X
spurious thirst, dry eyes, skin and mucous
membranes, and indicate measures that can be
taken: drinking water, using eye drops and aqueous
creams.
040 02 02 00 People and the environment: the sensory system
040 02 02 01 The different senses
(01) List the different senses. X X X X X X X

040 02 02 02 Central, peripheral and autonomic nervous system
(01) Define the term ‘sensory threshold’. X X X X X X

(02) Define the term ‘sensitivity’, especially in the context of X X X X X X
vision.
(03) Give examples of sensory adaptation. X X X X X X
(04) Define the term ‘habituation’ and state its implication X X X X X X
for flight safety.
040 02 02 03 Vision
Functional anatomy
(01) Name the most important parts of the eye and the X X X X X
Page 357 of 681

reference
IR
pathway to the visual cortex.
(02) State the basic functions of the parts of the eye. X X X X X X
(03) Define ‘accommodation’. X X X X X X
(04) Distinguish between the functions of the rod and cone X X X X X X
cells.
(05) Describe the distribution of rod and cone cells in the X X X X X X
retina and explain their relevance to vision.
The fovea (fovea centralis) and peripheral vision
(06) Explain the terms ‘visual acuity’, ‘visual field’, ‘central X X X X X X
vision’, ‘peripheral vision’ and ‘the fovea’, and explain
their function in the process of vision.
(07) List the factors that may degrade visual acuity and the X X X X X X
importance of ‘lookout’.
(08) State the limitations of night vision and the different X X X X X X
scanning techniques at both night and day.
(09) State the time necessary for the eye to adapt both to X X X X X X
dark and bright light.
(10) State the effect of hypoxia, smoking and altitude in X X X X X X
excess of 5 000 ft on night vision.
(11) Explain the nature of colour blindness. X X X X X X
Binocular and monocular vision
(12) Distinguish between monocular and binocular vision. X X X X X X
(13) Explain the basis of depth perception and its relevance X X X X X X
to flight performance.
Page 358 of 681

reference
IR
(14) List the possible monocular cues for depth perception. X X X X X X
(15) State that for high-energy blue light and UV rays, X X X X X X
sunglasses can prevent damage to the retina.
Defective vision
(16) Explain long-sightedness, short-sightedness and X X X X X X
astigmatism.
(17) List the causes of and the precautions that may be X X X X X X
taken to reduce the probability of vision loss due to:
— presbyopia;
— cataract;
— glaucoma.
(18) List the types of sunglasses that could cause X X X X X X
perceptional problems in flight.
(19) List the measures that may be taken to protect oneself X X X X X X
from flash blindness.
(20) State the possible problems associated with contact X X X X X X
lenses.
(21) State the current rules/regulations governing the X X X X X X
wearing of corrective spectacles and contact lenses
when operating as a pilot.
(22) Explain the significance of the ‘blind spot’ on the retina X X X X X X
in detecting other traffic in flight.
040 02 02 04 Hearing
Descriptive and functional anatomy
Page 359 of 681

reference
IR
(01) State the basic parts and functions of the outer, the X X X X X X
middle and the inner ear.
(02) Differentiate between the functions of the vestibular X X X X X X
apparatus and the cochlea in the inner ear.
Hearing loss
(03) Define the main causes of the following hearing X X X X X X
defects/loss:
— ‘conductive deafness’;
— ‘noise-induced hearing loss’ (NIHL);
— ‘presbycusis’.
(04) Summarise the effects of environmental noise on X X X X X X
hearing.
(05) State the decibel level of received noise that will cause X X X X X X
NIHL.
(06) Identify the potential occupational risks that may cause X X X X X X
hearing loss.
(07) List the main sources of hearing loss in the flying X X X X X X
environment.
(08) List the precautions that may be taken to reduce the X X X X X X
probability of onset of hearing loss.
040 02 02 05 Equilibrium
Functional anatomy
(01) List the main elements of the vestibular apparatus. X X X X X X

(02) State the functions of the vestibular apparatus on the X X X X X X
ground and in flight.
Page 360 of 681
reference
IR
(03) Distinguish between the component parts of the X X X X X X
vestibular apparatus in the detection of linear and
angular acceleration as well as on gravity.
(04) Explain how the semicircular canals are stimulated. X X X X X X
Motion sickness
(05) Describe air sickness and its accompanying symptoms. X X X X X X X

(06) List the causes of air sickness. X X X X X X X
(08) Describe the necessary actions to be taken to X X X X X X
counteract the symptoms of air sickness.
040 02 02 06 Integration of sensory inputs
(01) State the interaction between vision, equilibrium, X X X X X X X

proprioception and hearing to obtain spatial
orientation in flight.
(02) Define the term ‘illusion’. X X X X X X X
(03) Give examples of visual illusions based on shape X X X X X X X
constancy, size constancy, aerial perspective,
atmospheric perspective, the absence of focal or
ambient cues, autokinesis, vectional false horizons,
field myopia, and surface planes.
(04) Relate these illusions to problems that may be X X X X X X X
experienced in flight and identify the danger attached
to them.
(05) List approach and landing illusions for slope of the X X X X X X X
runway, black-hole approach, and terrain around
runway, and state the danger involved with
Page 361 of 681

reference
IR
recommendations to avoid or counteract the problems
with high or low approach or flare at the wrong time.
(06) State the problems associated with flickering lights X X X X X X X
(strobe lights, anti-collision lights, propellers and rotors
under certain light conditions, etc.).
(07) Describe vestibular illusions caused by the angular X X X X X X X
accelerations (the Leans, Coriolis) and linear
accelerations (somatogravic, G-effect).
(08) Relate the above-mentioned vestibular illusions to X X X X X X X
problems encountered in flight and state the dangers
involved.
(09) State that the ‘seat-of-the-pants’ sense is completely X X X X X X X
unreliable when visual contact with the ground is lost
or when flying in instrument meteorological conditions
(IMC) or with a poor visual horizon.
(10) Differentiate between vertigo, Coriolis effect, and X X X X X X X
spatial disorientation.
(11) List the measures to prevent or overcome spatial X X X X X X X
disorientation.
040 02 03 00 Health and hygiene
040 02 03 02 Body rhythm and sleep

(01) Name some internal body rhythms and their relevance X X X X
to sleep. Explain that the most important of which is
body temperature.
Page 362 of 681

reference
IR
(02) Explain the term ‘circadian rhythm’. X X X X X
(03) State the approximate duration of a ‘free-running’ X X X X X
rhythm.
(04) Explain the significance of the ‘internal clock’ in X X X X X
regulating the normal circadian rhythm.
(05) State the effect of the circadian rhythm of body X X X X X
temperature on an individual’s performance standard
and on an individual’s sleep patterns.
(06) List and describe the stages of a sleep cycle. X X X X X
(07) Differentiate between rapid eye movement (REM) and X X X X X
non-REM sleep.
(08) Explain the function of sleep and describe the effects of X X X X X
insufficient sleep on performance.
(09) Explain the simple calculations for the sleep/wake X X X X X
credit/debit situation.
(10) Explain how sleep debit can become cumulative. X X X X X
(11) State the time formula for the adjustment of body X X X X X
rhythms to the new local time scale after crossing time
zones.
(12) State the problems caused by circadian disrhythmia (jet X X X X X
lag) with regard to an individual’s performance and
sleep.
(13) Differentiate between the effects of westbound and X X X X X
eastbound travel.
(14) Explain the interactive effects of circadian rhythm and X X X X X
Page 363 of 681

reference
IR
vigilance on a pilot’s performance during flight as the
duty day elapses.
(15) Describe the main effects of lack of sleep on an X X X X X
individual’s performance.
(16) List the possible strategies to cope with jet lag. X X X X X
040 02 03 03 Problem areas for pilots
Common minor ailments
(01) State the role of the Eustachian tube in equalising X X X X X X

pressure between the middle ear and the environment.
(02) State that the in-flight environment may increase the X X X X X X
severity of symptoms which may be minor while on the
ground.
(03) List the negative effects of suffering from colds or flu X X X X X X
on flight operations especially with regard to the
middle ear, the sinuses, and the teeth.
(04) State when a pilot should seek medical advice from an X X X X X X
aeromedical examiner (AME) or aeromedical centre
(AeMC).
(05) Describe the measures to prevent or clear problems X X X X X X
due to pressure changes during flight.
Entrapped gases and barotrauma
(06) Define ‘barotrauma’. X X X X X X

(07) Differentiate between otic, sinus, gastrointestinal and X X X X X X
aerodontalgia (of the teeth) barotraumas and explain
avoidance strategies.
Page 364 of 681

reference
IR
(08) Explain why the effects of otic barotrauma can be X X X X X X
worse in the descent.
Gastrointestinal upsets
(09) State the effects of gastrointestinal upsets that may X X X X X X

occur during flight.
(10) List the precautions that should be observed to reduce X X X X X X
the occurrence of gastrointestinal upsets.
(11) Indicate the major sources of gastrointestinal upsets. X X X X X X
Obesity
(12) Define ‘obesity’. X X X X X X

(13) State the following harmful effects obesity can cause: X X X X X X
— possibility of developing coronary problems;
— increased chances of developing diabetes;
— reduced ability to withstand G-forces;
— development of problems with the joints of the
limbs;
— general circulatory problems;
— reduced ability to cope with hypoxia or
decompression sickness;
— sleep apnoea.
(14) Describe the problems associated with Type 2 (mostly X X X X X X
adult) diabetes:
— risk factors;
— insulin resistance;
— complications (vascular, neurological) and the
Page 365 of 681

reference
IR
consequences for the medical licence;
— pilots are not protected from Type 2 diabetes
more than other people.
(15) Describe the typical back problems (unspecific back X X X X X X
pain, slipped disc) that pilots have. Explain also the
ways of preventing and treating these problems:
— good sitting posture;
— lumbar support;
— good physical condition;
— in-flight exercise, if possible;
— physiotherapy.
Food hygiene
(16) Stress the importance of and methods to be adopted X X X X X X
by aircrew, especially when travelling abroad, to avoid
contaminated food and liquids.
(17) List the major contaminating sources in foodstuffs. X X X X X X
(18) State the major constituents of a healthy diet. X X X X X X
(19) State the measure to avoid hypoglycaemia. X X X X X X
(20) State the importance of adequate hydration. X X X X X X
Tropical climates
(21) List the problems associated with operating in tropical X X X X X
climates.
(22) State the possible causes/sources of incapacitation in X X X X X
tropical countries with reference to:
Page 366 of 681

reference
IR
— standards of hygiene;
— quality of water supply;
— insectborne diseases;
— parasitic worms;
— rabies or other diseases that may be spread
through contact with animals;
— sexually transmitted diseases.
(23) State the precautions to be taken to reduce the risks of X X X X X
developing problems in tropical areas.
Infectious diseases
(24) State the major infectious diseases that may severely X X X X X X

incapacitate or kill individuals.
(25) State the precautions that must be taken to ensure that X X X X X X
disease-carrying insects are not transported between
areas.
040 02 03 04 Intoxication
Tobacco
(01) State the harmful effects of tobacco on: X X X X X X

— the respiratory system;
— the cardiovascular system;
— the ability to resist hypoxia;
— the ability to withstand G-forces;
— night vision.
Caffeine
Page 367 of 681

reference
IR
(02) Indicate the level of caffeine dosage at which X X X X X X
performance is degraded.
(03) Besides coffee, indicate other beverages containing X X X X X X
caffeine.
Alcohol
(04) State the maximum acceptable limit of alcohol for flight X X X X X X

crew according to the applicable regulations.
(05) State the effects of alcohol consumption on: X X X X X X
— the ability to reason;
— inhibitions and self-control;
— vision;
— the sense of balance and sensory illusions;
— sleep patterns;
— hypoxia.
(06) State the effects alcohol may have if consumed X X X X X X
together with other drugs.
(07) List the signs and symptoms of alcoholism. X X X X X X
(08) List the factors that may be associated with the X X X X X X
development of alcoholism.
(09) Define the ‘unit’ of alcohol and state the approximate X X X X X X
elimination rate from the blood.
(10) State the maximum daily and weekly intake of units of X X X X X X
alcohol which may be consumed without causing
damage to the organs and systems of the human body.
(11) Discuss the actions that might be taken if a crew X X X
Page 368 of 681

reference
IR
member is suspected of being an alcoholic.
Prescription and non-prescription drugs and self-
medication
(12) State the dangers associated with the use of non- X X X X X X
prescription drugs.
(13) State the side effects of common non-prescription X X X X X X
drugs used to treat colds, flu, hay fever and other
allergies, especially medicines containing antihistamine
preparations.
(14) Interpret the rules relevant to using (prescription or X X X X X X
non-prescription) drugs that the pilot has not used
before.
(15) Interpret the general rule that ‘if a pilot is so unwell X X X X X X
that they require any medication, then they should
consider themselves unfit to fly’.
Toxic materials
(16) List those materials present in an aircraft which may, X X X X X X
when uncontained, cause severe health problems.
(17) List those aircraft-component parts which if burnt may X X X X X X
give off toxic fumes.
(18) Describe a fume event and the possible X X X X X X
incapacitating effects on those exposed to it.
040 02 03 05 Incapacitation in flight
(01) State that incapacitation is most dangerous when its X X X X X X

onset is insidious.
Page 369 of 681

reference
IR
(02) List the major causes of in-flight incapacitation. X X X X X X
(03) State the importance of crew to be able to recognise X X X
and promptly react upon incapacitation of other crew
members, should it occur in flight.
(04) Explain methods and procedures to cope with X X X X X X
incapacitation in flight.
040 03 00 00 BASIC AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY
040 03 01 00 Human information processing

040 03 01 01 Attention and vigilance
(01) Differentiate between ‘attention’ and ‘vigilance’. X X X X X X
(02) Differentiate between ‘selected’ and ‘divided’ X X X X X X
attention.
(03) Define ‘hypovigilance’. X X X X X X
(04) Identify the factors that may affect the state of X X X X X X
vigilance.
(05) List the factors that may forestall hypovigilance during X X X X X X
flight.
(06) Indicate the signs of reduced vigilance. X X X X X X
(07) List the factors that affect a person’s level of attention. X X X X X X
040 03 01 02 Perception
(01) Name the basis of the perceptual process. X X X X X X
(02) Describe the mechanism of perception (‘bottom- X X X X X X
Page 370 of 681

reference
IR
up’/‘top-down’ process).
(03) Illustrate why perception is subjective and state the X X X X X X
relevant factors that influence interpretation of
perceived information.
(04) Describe some basic perceptual illusions. X X X X X X
(05) Illustrate some basic perceptual concepts. X X X X X X
(06) Give examples where perception plays a decisive role in X X X X X X
flight safety.
(07) Stress how persuasive and believable mistaken X X X X X X
perception can manifest itself both for an individual
and a group.
040 03 01 03 Memory
(01) Explain the link between the types of memory (to X X X X X X
include sensory, working/short-term and long-term
memory).
(02) Describe the differences between the types of memory X X X X X X
in terms of capacity and retention time.
(03) Justify the importance of sensory-store memories in X X X X X X
processing information.
(04) State the average maximum number of separate items X X X X X X
that may be held in working memory (5 ± 2).
(05) Stress how interruption can affect short-term/working X X X X X X
memory.
(06) Give examples of items that are important for pilots to X X X X X X
hold in working memory during flight.
Page 371 of 681

reference
IR
(07) Describe how the capacity of the working-memory X X X X X X
store may be increased.
(08) State the subdivisions of long-term memory and give X X X X X X
examples of their content.
(09) Explain that skills are kept primarily in the long-term X X X X X X
memory.
(10) Describe amnesia and how it affects memory. X X X X X X
(11) Name the common problems with both the long- and X X X X X X
short-term memories and the best methods to try to
counteract them.
040 03 01 04 Response selection
Learning principles and techniques
(01) Explain and distinguish between the following basic X X X X X X
forms of learning:
— classic and operant conditioning (behaviouristic
approach);
— learning by insight (cognitive approach);
— learning by imitating (modelling).
(02) Recognise pilot-related examples as behaviouristic, X X X X X X
cognitive or modelling forms of learning.
(03) State the factors that are necessary for and promote X X X X X X
the quality of learning:
— intrinsic motivation;
— good mental health;
— rehearsals for improvement of memory;
Page 372 of 681

reference
IR
— consciousness;
— vigilance;
— application in practical exercises.
(04) Explain ways to facilitate the memorisation of X X X X X X
information with the following learning techniques:
— mnemonics;
— mental training.
(05) Describe the advantage of planning and anticipation of X X X X X X
future actions:
— define the term ‘skills’;
— state the three phases of learning a skill
(Anderson: cognitive, associative and
autonomous phase).
(06) Explain the term ‘motor programme’ or ‘mental X X X X X X
schema’.
(07) Describe the advantages and disadvantages of mental X X X X X X
schemas.
(08) Explain the Rasmussen model which describes the X X X X X X
guidance of a pilot’s behaviour in different situations.
(09) State the possible problems or risks associated with X X X X X X
skill-, rule- and knowledge-based behaviour.
Motivation
(10) Define ‘motivation’. X X X X X X

(11) Explain the relationship between motivation and X X X X X X
learning.
Page 373 of 681

reference
IR
(12) Explain the problems of over-motivation, especially in X X X X X X
the context of the extreme need to achieve.
040 03 02 00 Human error and reliability
040 03 02 01 Reliability of human behaviour
(01) Name and explain the factors that influence human X X X X X X

reliability.
040 03 02 02 Mental models and situation awareness
(01) Define the term ‘situation awareness’. X X X X X X X

(02) List the cues that indicate loss of situation awareness X X X X X X X
and name the steps to regain it.
(03) List the factors that influence one’s situation awareness X X X X X X X
both positively and negatively, and stress the
importance of situation awareness in the context of
flight safety.
(04) Define the term ‘mental model’ in relation to a X X X X X X X
surrounding complex situation.
(05) Describe the advantages/disadvantages of mental X X X X X X X
models.
(06) Explain the relationship between personal ‘mental X X X X X X X
models’ and the creation of cognitive illusions.
040 03 02 03 Theory and model of human error
(01) Explain the concept of the ‘error chain’. X X X X X X X

(02) Differentiate between an isolated error and an error X X X X X X X
chain.
Page 374 of 681

reference
IR
(03) Distinguish between the main forms/types of errors X X X X X X X
(i.e. slips, faults, omissions and violations).
(04) Discuss the above errors and their relevance in flight. X X X X X X X
(05) Distinguish between an active and a latent error, and X X X X X X X
give examples.
040 03 02 04 Error generation
(01) Distinguish between internal and external factors in X X X X X X X
error generation.
(02) Identify possible sources of internal error generation. X X X X X X X
(03) Define and discuss the two errors associated with X X X X X X X
motor programmes (action slip and environmental
capture).
(04) List the three main sources of external error generation X X X X X X X
in the flight crew compartment.
(05) Give examples to illustrate the following factors in X X X X X X X
external error generation in the flight crew
compartment:
— ergonomics;
— economics;
— social environment.
(06) Name the major goals in the design of human-centred X X X X X X X
human–machine interfaces.
(07) Define the term ‘error tolerance’. X X X X X X X
(08) List and describe the strategies that are used to reduce X X X X X X X
human error.
Page 375 of 681

reference
IR
(09) Describe the advantage of planning and the X X X X X X X
anticipation of future actions.
040 03 03 00 Decision-making
040 03 03 01 Decision-making concepts
(01) Define the terms ‘deciding’ and ‘decision-making’. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe the major factors on which decision-making X X X X X X X
should be based during the course of a flight.
(03) Describe the main human attributes with regard to X X X X X X X
decision-making.
(04) Discuss the nature of bias and its influence on the X X X X X X X
decision-making process.
(05) Describe the main error sources and limits in an X X X X X X X
individual’s decision-making mechanism.
(06) State the factors upon which an individual’s risk X X X X X X X
assessment is based.
(07) Explain the relationship between risk assessment, X X X X X X X
commitment and pressure of time in decision-making
strategies.
(08) Explain the risks associated with dispersion or X X X X X X
channelised attention during the application of
procedures requiring a high workload within a short
time frame (e.g. a go-around).
(09) Describe the positive and negative influences exerted X X X X X X X
by other group members on an individual’s decision-
making process (risky shift).
Page 376 of 681

reference
IR
(10) Explain the general idea behind the creation of a model X X X X X X X
for decision-making based upon:
— definition of the aim;
— collection of information;
— risk assessment;
— development of options;
— evaluation of options;
— decision;
— implementation;
— consequences;
— review and feedback.
040 03 04 00 Avoiding and managing errors: cockpit management
040 03 04 01 Safety awareness

(01) Justify the need for being aware of not only one’s own X X X X X X X
performance but that of others before and during a
flight and the possible consequences or risks.
040 03 04 02 Coordination (multi-crew concepts)
(01) Name the objectives of the multi-crew concept. X X X
(02) State and explain the elements of multi-crew concepts. X X X
(03) Describe the concepts of ‘standard operating X X X X X
procedures’ (SOPs), checklists and crew briefings.
(04) Describe the purpose of and procedure for crew X X X
briefings.
(05) Describe the purpose of and procedure for checklists. X X X X X
Page 377 of 681

reference
IR
(06) Describe the function of communication in a X X X
coordinated team.
(07) Explain the advantages of SOPs. X X X X X
(08) Explain how SOPs contribute to avoiding, reducing and X X X X X
managing threats and errors.
(09) Explain potential threats of SOPs, for example during X X X X X
company or type conversion (e.g. motor programmes,
company culture, hazardous attitudes, developed
habits).
040 03 04 03 Cooperation
(01) Distinguish between cooperation and coaction. X X X X X
(02) Define the term ‘group’. X X X X X
(03) Illustrate the influence of interdependence in a group. X X X X X
(04) List the advantages and disadvantages of teamwork. X X X X X
(05) Explain the term ‘synergy’. X X X X X
(06) Define the term ‘cohesion’. X X X X X
(07) Define the term ‘groupthink’. X X X X X
(08) State the essential conditions for good teamwork. X X X X X
(09) Explain the function of role and norm in a group. X X X X X
(10) Name the different role patterns which occur in a group X X X X X
situation.
Page 378 of 681

reference
IR
(11) Explain how behaviour can be affected by the following X X X X X
factors:
— persuasion;
— conformity;
— compliance;
— obedience.
(12) Distinguish between status and role. X X X X X
(13) Stress the inherent dangers of a situation where there X X X X X
is a mix of role and status within the flight crew
compartment.
(14) Explain the terms ‘leadership’ and ‘followership’. X X X X X
(15) Describe the trans-cockpit authority gradient and its X X X X X
affiliated leadership styles (i.e. autocratic, laissez-faire
and synergistic).
(16) Name the most important attributes of a positive X X X X X
leadership style.
040 03 04 04 Communication
(01) Define the term ‘communication’. X X X X X X

(02) List the most basic components of interpersonal X X X X X X
communication.
(03) Explain the advantages of in-person two-way X X X X X X
communication as opposed to one-way communication.
(04) Explain the four elements of a great speech: X X X X X X
— a great person;
— a noteworthy event;
Page 379 of 681

reference
IR
— a compelling message;
— a masterful delivery.
(05) Name the importance of non-verbal communication. X X X X X X
(06) Describe the general aspects of non-verbal X X X X X X
communication.
(07) Describe the advantages/disadvantages of implicit and X X X X X X
explicit communication.
(08) Describe the advantages and possible problems of X X X X X X
using ‘social’ and ‘professional’ language in high- and
low-workload situations.
(09) Name and explain the major obstacles to effective X X X X X X
communication.
(10) Explain the difference between intrapersonal and X X X X X X
interpersonal conflict.
(11) Describe the escalation process in human conflict. X X X X X X
(12) List the typical consequences of conflicts between crew X X X X X X
members.
(13) Explain the following terms as part of the X X X X X X
communication practice with regard to preventing or
resolving conflicts:
— inquiry;
— active listening;
— advocacy;
— feedback;
— metacommunication;
— negotiation.
Page 380 of 681

reference
IR
(14) Describe the limitations of communication in situations X X X X X X
of high workload in the flight crew compartment in
view of listening, verbal, non-verbal and visual effects.
040 03 05 00 Human behaviour
040 03 05 01 Personality, attitude and behaviour
(01) Describe the factors that determine an individual’s X X X X X X
behaviour.
(02) Define and distinguish between ‘personality’, ‘attitude’ X X X X X X
and ‘behaviour’.
(03) State the origin of personality and attitude. X X X X X X
(04) State that with behaviour good and bad habits can be X X X X X X
formed.
(05) Explain how behaviour is generally a product of X X X X X X
personality, attitude and the environment to which
one was exposed at significant moments (childhood,
schooling and training).
(06) State that personality differences and selfish attitude X X X X X X
may have effects on flight crew performance.
040 03 05 02 Individual differences in personality and motivation
(01) Describe the individual differences in personality by X X X X X X
means of a common trait model (e.g. Eysenck’s
personality factors) and use it to describe today’s ideal
pilot.
Self-concept
Page 381 of 681

reference
IR
(02) Define the term ‘self-concept’ and the role it plays in X X X X X X
any change of personality.
(03) Explain how a self-concept of underconfidence may X X X X X X
lead to an outward show of aggression and self-
assertiveness.
Self-discipline
(04) Define ‘self-discipline’ and justify its importance for X X X X X X
flight safety.
040 03 05 03 Identification of hazardous attitudes (error proneness)
(01) Explain dangerous attitudes in aviation: X X X X X

— anti-authority;
— macho;
— impulsivity;
— invulnerability;
— complacency;
— resignation.
(02) Describe the personality, attitude and behaviour X X X X X
patterns of an ideal crew member.
(03) Summarise how a person’s attitude influences their X X X X X
work in the flight crew compartment.
040 03 06 00 Human overload and underload
040 03 06 01 Arousal
(01) Explain the term ‘arousal’. X X X X X X

(02) Describe the relationship between arousal and X X X X X X
Page 382 of 681

reference
IR
performance.
(03) Explain the circumstances under which underload may X X X X X X
occur and its possible dangers.
040 03 06 02 Stress
(01) Explain the term ‘stress’ and why stress is a natural X X X X X X
human reaction.
(02) State that the physiological response to stress is X X X X X X
generated by the ‘fight or flight’ response.
(03) Describe the function of the autonomic nervous system X X X X X X
(ANS) in stress response.
(04) Explain the relationship between arousal and stress. X X X X X X
(05) State the relationship between stress and performance. X X X X X X X
(06) State the basic categories of stressors. X X X X X X X
(07) List and discuss the major environmental sources of X X X X X X X
stress in the flight crew compartment.
(08) Discuss the concept of ‘break point’ with regard to X X X X X X X
stress, overload and performance.
(09) Name the principal causes of domestic stress. X X X X X X
(10) State that the stress experienced as a result of X X X X X X
particular demands varies among individuals.
(11) Explain the factors that lead to differences in the levels X X X X X X X
of stress experienced by individuals.
(12) List the factors that influence the tolerance of stressors. X X X X X X
Page 383 of 681

reference
IR
(13) State that stress is a result of perceived demands X X X X X X
and perceived ability.
(14) Explain the relationship between stress and anxiety. X X X X X X X
(15) Describe the effects of anxiety on human performance. X X X X X X X
(16) State the general effect of acute stress on people. X X X X X X X
(17) Describe the relationship between stress, arousal and X X X X X X
vigilance.
(18) State the general effect of chronic stress and the X X X X X X
biological reaction by means of the three stages of the
general adaptation syndrome (Selye): alarm, resistance,
and exhaustion.
(19) Explain the differences between psychological, X X X X X X
psychosomatic and somatic stress reactions.
(20) Name the typical common physiological and X X X X X X
psychological symptoms of human overload.
(21) Describe the effects of stress on human behaviour. X X X X X X
(22) Explain how stress is cumulative and how stress from X X X X X X X
one situation can be transferred to a different
situation.
(23) Explain how successful completion of a stressful task X X X X X X X
will reduce the amount of stress experienced when a
similar situation arises in the future.
(24) Describe the effect of human underload/overload on X X X X X X X
effectiveness in the flight crew compartment.
(25) List sources and symptoms of human underload. X X X X X X X
Page 384 of 681

reference
IR
040 03 06 05 Fatigue and stress management
(01) Explain the term ‘fatigue’ and differentiate between X X X X X X
the two types of fatigue (short-term and chronic
fatigue).
(02) Name the causes of short-term and chronic fatigue. X X X X X X
(03) Identify the symptoms and describe the effects of X X X X X X
fatigue.
(04) List the strategies that prevent or delay the onset of X X X X X X
fatigue and hypovigilance.
(05) List and describe strategies for coping with stress X X X X X X
factors and stress reactions.
(06) Distinguish between short-term and long-term X X X X X X
methods of stress management.
(07) Give examples of short-term methods of stress X X X X X X
management.
(08) Give examples of long-term methods of coping with X X X X X X
stress.
(09) Describe the fatique risk management system X X X X X X
(FRMS) as follows: a data-driven means of
continuously monitoring and managing fatigue-
related safety risks, based upon scientific principles
and knowledge as well as operational experience
that aims to ensure relevant personnel are
Page 385 of 681

reference
IR
performing at adequate levels of alertness.
040 03 07 00 Advanced cockpit automation
040 03 07 01 Advantages and disadvantages
(01) Compare the two basic concepts of automation: X X X X X X X
— as per Boeing, where the pilot remains the last
operator;
— and as per Airbus, where automated systems
can correct erroneous pilot action.
(02) Explain the fundamental restrictions of autoflight X X X X X X X
systems to be lack of creativity in unknown
situations, and lack of personal motivation with
regard to safety.
(03) List the principal strengths and weaknesses of pilot X X X X X X X
versus autopilot systems to be creativity, decision-
making, prioritisation of tasks, safety attitude versus
precision, reliability.
(04) Explain the ‘ironies of automation’: designers’ errors X X X X X X X
due to wrong interpretation of the data, leaving
tasks to the pilot that are too complex to automate,
loss of manual and cognitive skills of the pilot.
State the necessity for regular training flights as one
possible countermeasure.
(05) Describe methods to overcome the drawbacks of X X X X X X X
autoflight systems to be loss of manual flying
capabilities, additional workload through
programming, risk of slips during programming,
and hypovigilance during cruise.
Page 386 of 681

reference
IR
040 03 07 02 Automation complacency
(01) State the main weaknesses in the monitoring of X X X X X X X
automatic systems to be hypovigilance during flight,
and loss of flying skills.
(02) Explain some basic flight crew errors and terms that X X X X X X X
arise with the introduction of automation:
— passive monitoring;
— blinkered concentration;
— confusion;
— mode awareness.
(03) Explain how the method of call-outs counteracts X X X X X X X
ineffective monitoring of automatic systems.
(04) Define ‘complacency’. X X X X X X X
040 03 07 03 Working concepts
(01) Explain that the potential disadvantages of X X X
automation on crew communication are loss of
awareness of input errors, flight modes, failure
detection, failure comprehension, status of the
aircraft and aircraft position.
(02) Explain how the negative effects of automation on X X X X X X X
pilots may be alleviated by degrading to a lower
level of automation to recover comprehension of
the flight status from VNAV/LNAV to ALT/HDG or
even to manual flying.
(03) Interpret the role of automation with respect to flight X X X X X X X
safety regarding the basic principle of the use of
Page 387 of 681

reference
IR
manual versus autoflight in normal operations,
frequent changes in the flight profile, and in
abnormal situations.
Page 388 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 050 — METEOROLOGY’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 389 of 681

SUBJECT 050 — METEOROLOGY

The operation of an aircraft is affected by the weather conditions within the atmosphere. The pilot should prove that they fulfil the following objectives in
order to complete a flight safely in given meteorological conditions.
(1) Training aims
(i) Knowledge. After completion of the training, the pilot should be able to:
— understand the physical processes in the atmosphere;
— interpret the actual and forecast weather conditions in the atmosphere; and
— demonstrate understanding of the meteorological hazards and their effects on aircraft.
(ii) Skills. After completion of the training, the pilot should be able to:
— collect all the weather information which may affect a given flight;
— analyse and evaluate available weather information before flight as well as that collected in flight; and
— resolve any problems presented by the given weather conditions.
Page 390 of 681

reference
IR
050 00 00 00 METEOROLOGY
050 01 00 00 THE ATMOSPHERE
050 01 01 00 Composition, extent, vertical division
050 01 01 01 Structure of the atmosphere
(01) Describe the vertical division of the atmosphere up to X X X X X X X

flight level (FL) 650, based on the temperature variations
with height.
(02) List the different layers and their main qualitative X X X X X X X
characteristics up to FL 650.
050 01 01 02 Troposphere
(01) Describe the troposphere. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe the main characteristics of the tropopause. X X X X X X X
(03) Describe the proportions of the most important gases in X X X X X X X
the air in the troposphere.
(04) Describe the variations of the FL and temperature of the X X X X X X X
tropopause from the poles to the equator.
(05) Describe the breaks in the tropopause along the X X X X X X X
boundaries of the main air masses.
(06) Indicate the variations of the FL of the tropopause with the X X X
seasons and the variations of atmospheric pressure.
050 01 01 03 Stratosphere
Page 391 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Describe the stratosphere up to FL 650. X
(02) Describe that ozone can occur at jet cruise altitudes and X X X
that it constitutes a hazard.
050 01 02 00 Air temperature
050 01 02 01 Definition and units
(01) Define ‘air temperature’. X X X X X X X

(02) X List the units of measurement of air temperature used in X X X X X X X
aviation meteorology (Celsius, Fahrenheit, Kelvin).
(Refer to Subject 050 10 01 01)
050 01 02 02 Vertical distribution of temperature
(01) Describe the mean vertical distribution of temperature up X X X X X X X

to FL 650.
(02) Mention the general causes of the cooling of the air in the X X X X X X X
troposphere with increasing altitude.
(03) Calculate the temperature and temperature deviations X X X X X X X
(in relation to International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)) at
specified levels.
050 01 02 03 Transfer of heat
(01) Explain how local cooling or warming processes result in X X X X X X X

transfer of heat.
(02) Describe radiation. X X X X X X X
(03) Describe solar radiation reaching the Earth. X X X X X X X
(04) Describe the filtering effect of the atmosphere on solar X X X X X X X
Page 392 of 681

reference
IR
radiation.
(05) Describe terrestrial radiation. X X X X X X X
(06) Explain how terrestrial radiation is absorbed by some X X X X X X X
components of the atmosphere.
(07) Explain the effect of absorption and radiation in X X X X X X X
connection with clouds.
(08) Explain the process of conduction. X X X X X X X
(09) Explain the role of conduction in the cooling and warming X X X X X X X
of the atmosphere.
(10) Explain the process of convection. X X X X X X X
(11) Name the situations in which convection occurs. X X X X X X X
(12) Explain the process of advection. X X X X X X X
(13) Name the situations in which advection occurs. X X X X X X X
(14) Describe the transfer of heat by turbulence. X X X X X X X
(15) Describe the transfer of latent heat. X X X X X X X
050 01 02 04 Lapse rates
(01) Describe qualitatively and quantitatively the temperature X X X X X X X

lapse rates of the troposphere (mean value 0.65 °C/100 m
or 2 °C/1 000 ft and actual values).
050 01 02 05 Development of inversions, types of inversions
(01) Describe the development and types of inversions. X X X X X X X
Page 393 of 681

reference
IR
(02) Explain the characteristics of inversions and of an X X X X X X X
isothermal layer concerning stability and vertical motions.
(03) Explain the reasons for the formation of the following X X X X X X X
inversions:
— ground inversion (nocturnal radiation/advection),
subsidence inversion, frontal inversion, inversion
above friction layer, valley inversion.
050 01 02 06 Temperature near the Earth’s surface, insolation, surface
effects, effect of clouds, effect of wind
(01) Explain the cooling/warming of the surface of the Earth by X X X X X X X
radiation.
(02) Explain the cooling/warming of the air by molecular or X X X X X X X
turbulent heat transfer to/from the earth or sea surfaces.
(03) Describe qualitatively the influence of the clouds on the X X X X X X X
cooling and warming of the surface and the air near the
surface.
(04) Explain the influence of the wind on the cooling and X X X X X X X
warming of the air near the surfaces.
050 01 03 00 Atmospheric pressure
050 01 03 01 Barometric pressure, isobars
(01) Define ‘atmospheric pressure’. X X X X X X X

(02) X List the units of measurement of the atmospheric pressure X X X X X X X
used in aviation (hPa, inches of mercury).
(03) X Describe the principle of the barometers (mercury X X X X X X
Page 394 of 681

reference
IR
barometer, aneroid barometer).
(04) Define isobars and identify them on surface weather X X X X X X X
charts.
(05) Define ‘high’, ‘low’, ‘trough’, ‘ridge’, ‘col’. X X X X X X X
050 01 03 02 Pressure variation with height, contours (isohypses)
(01) Explain the pressure variation with height. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe quantitatively the variation of the barometric X X X X X X X
lapse rate.
Remark: An approximation of the average value for the
barometric lapse rate near mean sea level (MSL) is
30 ft (9 m) per 1 hPa.
(03) State that (under conditions of ISA) pressure is X X X X X X X
approximately 50 % of MSL at 18 000 ft and density is
approximately 50 % of MSL at 22 000 ft and 25 % of MSL
at 40 000 ft.
050 01 03 03 Reduction of pressure to QFF (MSL)
(01) Define ‘QFF’. X X X X X X X

(02) Explain the reduction of measured pressure (QFE) to QFF X X X X X X X
(MSL).
(03) Mention the use of QFF for surface weather charts. X X X X X X X
050 01 03 04 Relationship between surface pressure centres and
pressure centres aloft
(01) Illustrate with a vertical cross section of isobaric surfaces X X X X X X X
the relationship between surface pressure systems and
Page 395 of 681

reference
IR
upper-air pressure systems.
050 01 04 00 Air density
050 01 04 01 Relationship between pressure, temperature and density
(01) Describe the relationship between pressure, temperature X X X X X X X

and density.
(02) Describe the vertical variation of the air density in the X X X X X X X
atmosphere.
050 01 05 00 International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
050 01 05 01 International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
(01) Explain the use of standardised values for the atmosphere. X X X X X X X

(02) List the main values of the ISA MSL pressure, MSL X X X X X X X
temperature, the vertical temperature lapse rate up to
FL 650, height and temperature of the tropopause.
050 01 06 00 Altimetry
050 01 06 01 Terminology and definitions
(01) Define the following terms and explain how they are X X X X X X X
related to each other: height, altitude, pressure altitude,
FL, pressure level, true altitude, true height, elevation,
QNH, QFE, and standard altimeter setting.
(02) Describe the terms ‘transition altitude’, ‘transition level’, X X X X X X X
‘transition layer’, ‘terrain clearance’, ‘lowest usable flight
level’.
050 01 06 02 Altimeter settings
Page 396 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Name the altimeter settings associated to height, altitude, X X X X X X X
pressure altitude and FL.
(02) Describe the altimeter-setting procedures. X X X X X X X
050 01 06 03 Calculations
(01) Calculate the different readings on the altimeter when the X X X X X X X

pilot uses different settings (QNH, 1013.25, QFE).
(02) Illustrate with a numbered example the changes of X X X X X X X
altimeter setting and the associated changes in reading
when the pilot climbs through the transition altitude or
descends through the transition level.
(03) Derive the reading of the altimeter of an aircraft on the X X X X X X X
ground when the pilot uses the different settings.
(04) Explain the influence of the air temperature on the X X X X X X X
distance between the ground and the level read on the
altimeter and between two FLs.
(05) Explain the influence of pressure areas on true altitude. X X X X X X X
(06) Determine the true altitude/height for a given X X X X X X X
altitude/height and a given ISA temperature deviation.
(07) Calculate the terrain clearance and the lowest usable FL for X X X X X X X
given atmospheric temperature and pressure conditions.
(08) State that the 4 %-rule can be used to calculate true X X X X X X X
altitude from indicated altitude, and also indicated altitude
from true altitude (not precise but sufficient due to the
approximation of the 4%-rule.)
Page 397 of 681

reference
IR
Remark: The following rules should be considered for
altimetry calculations:
a) All calculations are based on rounded pressure
values to the nearest lower hPa.
b) The value for the barometric lapse rate between
MSL and 700 hPa to be used is 30 ft/hPa as an
acceptable approximation of the barometric lapse
rate.
c) To determine the true altitude/height, the following
rule of thumb, called the ‘4 %-rule’, shall be used: the
altitude/height changes by 4 % for each 10 °C
temperature deviation from ISA.
d) If no further information is given, the deviation of the
outside-air temperature from ISA is considered to be
constantly the same given value in the whole layer.
e) The elevation of the aerodrome has to be taken into
account. The temperature correction has to be
considered for the layer between the ground and the
position of the aircraft.
050 01 06 04 Effect of accelerated airflow due to topography
(01) Describe qualitatively how the effect of accelerated airflow X X X X X X X

due to topography (the Bernoulli effect) affects altimetry.
050 02 00 00 WIND
050 02 01 00 Definition and measurement of wind
050 02 01 01 Definition and measurement
Page 398 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Define ‘wind’ and ‘surface wind’. X X X X X X X
(02) State the units of wind directions (degrees true in X X X X X X X
reports; degrees magnetic from tower) and speed (kt,
m/s).
(03) Describe that the reported wind is an average wind derived X X X X X X X
from measurements with an anemometer at a height of
10 m over 2 min for local routine and special reports and
ATS units, and over 10 min for aerodrome routine
meteorological reports (METARs) and aerodrome special
meteorological reports (SPECIs).
050 02 02 00 Primary cause of wind
050 02 02 01 Primary cause of wind, pressure gradient, Coriolis force,

gradient wind
(01) Define the term ‘horizontal pressure gradient’. X X X X X X X
(02) Explain how the pressure gradient force acts in relation to X X X X X X X
the pressure gradient.
(03) Explain how the Coriolis force acts in relation to the wind. X X X X X X X
(04) Explain the development of the geostrophic wind. X X X X X X X
(05) Indicate how the geostrophic wind flows in relation to the X X X X X X X
isobars/isohypses in the northern and in the southern
hemisphere.
(06) Analyse the effect of changing latitude on the geostrophic X X X X
wind speed.
(07) Explain the gradient wind effect and indicate how the X X X X X X
gradient wind differs from the geostrophic wind in cyclonic
Page 399 of 681

reference
IR
and anticyclonic circulation.
050 02 02 02 Variation of wind in the friction layer
(01) Describe why and how the wind changes direction and X X X X X X X
speed with height in the friction layer in the northern and
in the southern hemisphere (rule of thumb).
(02) State the surface and air-mass conditions that influence X X X X X X X
the wind in the friction layer (diurnal variation).
(03) Name terrain, wind speed and stability as the main X X X X X X X
factors that influence the vertical extent of the friction
layer.
(04) Explain the relationship between isobars and wind X X X X X X X
(direction and speed).
Remark: Approximate value for variation of wind in the
friction layer (values to be used in examinations):
Type of landscape Wind speed in The wind in the
friction layer in % of friction layer
the geostrophic blows across the
wind isobars towards
the low pressure.
Angle between
wind direction
and isobars.
over water ca 70 % ca 10°
over land ca 50 % ca 30°

WMO - No. 266
Page 400 of 681

reference
IR
050 02 02 03 Effects of convergence and divergence
(01) Describe atmospheric convergence and divergence. X X X X X X X

(02) Explain the relationship between convergence and X X X X X X X
divergence on the following: pressure systems at the
surface and aloft; wind speed; vertical motion and cloud
formation (relationship between upper-air conditions and
surface pressure systems).
050 02 03 00 General global circulation
050 02 03 01 General circulation around the globe
(01) Describe the general global circulation. X X X X X X X

(02) Name and sketch or indicate on a map the global X X X
distribution of the surface pressure and the resulting wind
pattern for all latitudes at low level in January and July.
(03) Sketch or indicate on a map the westerly and easterly X X X
tropospheric winds at high level in January and July.
050 02 04 00 Local winds
050 02 04 01 Anabatic and katabatic winds, mountain and valley

winds, Venturi effects, land and sea breezes
(01) Describe and explain anabatic and katabatic winds. X X X X X X X
(02) Describe mountain and valley winds. X X X X X X X
(03) Describe the Venturi effect, convergence in valleys and X X X X X X X
mountain areas.
Page 401 of 681

reference
IR
(04) Describe land and sea breezes, and sea-breeze front. X X X X X X X
(05) Describe that local, low-level jet streams can develop in X X X X X X X
the evening.
050 02 05 00 Mountain waves (standing waves, lee waves)
050 02 05 01 Origin and characteristics
(01) Explain the origin and formation of mountain waves. X X X X X X X

(02) State the conditions necessary for the formation of X X X X X X X
mountain waves.
(03) Describe the structure and properties of mountain waves. X X X X X X X
(04) Explain how mountain waves may be identified by their X X X X X X X
associated meteorological phenomena.
(05) Describe that mountain wave effects can exceed the X X X X X X X
performance or structural capability of aircraft.
(06) Describe that mountain wave effects can propagate X X X X X X X
from low to high level, e.g. over Greenland and
elsewhere.
050 02 06 00 Turbulence
050 02 06 01 Description and types of turbulence
(01) Describe turbulence and gustiness. X X X X X X X

(02) List the common types of turbulence (convective, X X X X X X X
mechanical, orographic, frontal, clear-air turbulence).
050 02 06 02 Formation and location of turbulence
Page 402 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Explain the formation of convective turbulence, X X X X X X X
mechanical and orographic turbulence, and frontal
turbulence.
(02) State where turbulence will normally be found (rough- X X X X X X X
ground surfaces, relief, inversion layers, cumulonimbus
(CB), thunderstorm (TS) zones, unstable layers).
050 02 06 03 Clear-air turbulence (CAT) — description, cause and
location
(01) Describe CAT. X X X X
(02) Describe the formation of CAT. X X X X X X X
(03) State where CAT is found in association with jet streams, in X
high-level troughs and in other disturbed high-level air
flows.
(04) State that remote sensing of CAT from satellites is not X X X X
possible and that forecasting is limited.
(05) State that pilot reports of turbulence are a very X X X X X X X
valuable source of information as remote
measurements are not available.
050 02 07 00 Jet streams
050 02 07 01 Description
(01) Describe jet streams. X X X X

(02) State the defined minimum speed of a jet stream (60 kt). X X X X
(03) State the typical figures for the dimensions of jet streams. X X X X
Page 403 of 681

reference
IR
050 02 07 02 Formation and properties of jet streams
(01) Explain the formation and state the heights, the speeds, X X
the seasonal variations of speeds, the geographical
positions, the seasonal occurrence and the seasonal
movements of the arctic (front) jet stream, the polar
(front) jet stream, the subtropical jet stream, and the
tropical (easterly/equatorial) jet stream.
050 02 07 03 Location of jet streams and associated CAT areas
(01) Sketch or describe where polar front and arctic jet streams X X
are found in the troposphere in relation to the tropopause
and to fronts.
(02) Describe and indicate the areas of worst wind shear and X X
CAT.
050 03 00 00 THERMODYNAMICS
050 03 01 00 Humidity
050 03 01 01 Water vapour in the atmosphere
(01) State that the density of moist air is less than the density of X X X X X X X
dry air.
(02) Describe the significance for meteorology of water vapour X X X X X X X
in the atmosphere.
(03) Indicate the sources of atmospheric humidity. X X X X X X X
(04) Define ‘saturation of air by water vapour’. X X X X X X
Page 404 of 681

reference
IR
050 03 01 03 Temperature/dew point, relative humidity
(01) Define ‘dew point’. X X X X X X X

(02) Define ‘relative humidity’. X X X X X X X
(03) Explain the factors that influence the relative humidity at X X X X X X X
constant pressure.
(04) Explain the diurnal variation of the relative humidity. X X X X X X X
(05) Describe the relationship between temperature and dew X X X X X X X
point.
(06) Estimate the relative humidity of the air from the X X X X X X X
difference between dew point and temperature.
050 03 02 00 Change of state of water
050 03 02 01 Condensation, evaporation, sublimation, freezing and

melting, latent heat
(01) Define ‘condensation’, ‘evaporation’, ‘sublimation’, X X X X X X X
‘freezing and melting’ and ‘latent heat’.
(02) List the conditions for condensation/evaporation. X X X X X X X
(03) Explain the condensation process. X X X X X X X
(04) Explain the nature of and the need for condensation X X X X X X X
nuclei.
(05) Explain the effects of condensation on the weather. X X X X X X X
(06) List the conditions for freezing/melting. X X X X X X X
Page 405 of 681

reference
IR
(07) Explain the process of freezing. X X X X X X X
(08) Explain the nature of and the need for freezing nuclei. X X X X X X X
(09) Define ‘supercooled water’. X X X X X X X
(10) List the conditions for sublimation. X X X X X X X
(11) Explain the sublimation process. X X X X X X X
(12) Explain the nature of and the need for sublimation nuclei. X X X X X X X
(13) Describe the absorption or release of latent heat in each X X X X X X X
change of state of water.
(14) Illustrate all the changes of state of water with practical X X X X X X X
examples.
050 03 03 00 Adiabatic processes
050 03 03 01 Adiabatic processes, stability of the atmosphere
(01) Describe the adiabatic process in an unsaturated rising or X X X X X X X

descending air particle.
(02) Explain the variation of temperature of an unsaturated X X X X X X X
rising or descending air particle.
(03) Explain the variation of humidity of an unsaturated rising X X X X X X X
or descending air particle.
(04) Describe the adiabatic process in a saturated rising or X X X X X X X
descending air particle.
(05) Explain the variation of temperature of a saturated air X X X X X X X
particle with changing altitude.
Page 406 of 681

reference
IR
(06) Explain the static stability of the atmosphere using the X X X X X X X
actual temperature curve with reference to the adiabatic
lapse rates.
(07) Define qualitatively and quantitatively the terms ‘stable’, X X X X X X X
‘conditionally unstable’, ‘unstable’ and ‘indifferent’.
(08) Illustrate with a schematic sketch the formation of Foehn. X X X X X X X
(09) Explain the effect of the advection of air (warm or cold) X X X X X X X
on the stability of the air.
Remark: Dry adiabatic lapse rate = 1 °C/100 m or
3 °C/1 000 ft; average value at lower levels for saturated
adiabatic lapse rate = 0.6 °C/100 m or 1.8 °C/1 000 ft
(values to be used in examinations).
050 04 00 00 CLOUDS AND FOG
050 04 01 00 Cloud formation and description
050 04 01 01 Cloud formation
(01) Explain cloud formation by adiabatic cooling, conduction, X X X X X X X

advection and radiation.
(02) Describe cloud formation based on the following lifting X X X X X X X
processes: unorganised lifting in thin layers and turbulent
mixing; forced lifting at fronts or over mountains; free
convection.
(03) List cloud types typical for stable and unstable air X X X X X X X
conditions.
(04) Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of clouds. X X X X X X X
Page 407 of 681

reference
IR
050 04 01 02 Cloud types and cloud classification
(01) Describe the different cloud types and their classification. X X X X X X X

(02) Identify by shape cirriform, cumuliform and stratiform X X X X X X X
clouds.
(03) Identify by shape and typical level the 10 cloud types X X X X X X X
(general).
(04) Describe and identify by shape the following species and X X X X X X X
supplementary features:
castellanus, lenticularis, congestus, calvus, capillatus and
virga.
(05) Distinguish between low-, medium- and high-level clouds X X X X X X X
according to the World Meteorological Organization’s
(WMO) ‘cloud etage’.
(06) Distinguish between ice clouds, mixed clouds and pure- X X X X X X X
water clouds.
050 04 01 03 Influence of inversions on cloud development
(01) Explain the influence of inversions on vertical movements X X X X X X X

in the atmosphere.
(02) Explain the influence of an inversion on the formation of X X X X X X X
stratus clouds.
(03) Explain the influence of ground inversion on the formation X X X X X X X
of fog.
(04) Describe the role of the tropopause inversion with regard X X X X X
to the vertical development of clouds.
050 04 01 04 Flying conditions in each cloud type
Page 408 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Assess the 10 cloud types for icing and turbulence. X X X X X X X
050 04 02 00 Fog, mist, haze
050 04 02 01 General aspects
(01) Define ‘fog’, ‘mist’ and ‘haze’ with reference to the WMO X X X X X X X
standards of visibility range.
(02) Explain briefly the formation of fog, mist and haze. X X X X X X X
(03) Name the factors that generally contribute to the X X X X X X X
formation of fog and mist.
(04) Name the factors that contribute to the formation of haze. X X X X X X X
(05) Describe freezing fog and ice fog. X X X X X X X
050 04 02 02 Radiation fog
(01) Explain the formation of radiation fog. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe the significant characteristics of radiation fog, and X X X X X X X
its vertical extent.
(03) Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of radiation X X X X X X X
fog.
050 04 02 03 Advection fog
(01) Explain the formation of advection fog. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe the different possibilities of advection-fog X X X X X X X
formation (over land, sea and coastal regions).
(04) Describe the significant characteristics of advection fog. X X X X X X X
Page 409 of 681

reference
IR
(05) Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of advection X X X X X X X
fog.
050 04 02 04 Sea smoke
(01) Explain the formation of sea smoke. X X X X X X X

(02) Explain the conditions for the development of sea smoke. X X X X X X X
(03) Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of sea smoke. X X X X X X X
050 04 02 05 Frontal fog
(01) Explain the formation of frontal fog. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe the significant characteristics of frontal fog. X X X X X X X
(03) Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of frontal fog. X X X X X X X
050 04 02 06 Orographic fog (hill fog)
(01) Summarise the features of orographic fog. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe the significant characteristics of orographic fog. X X X X X X X
(03) Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of orographic X X X X X X X
fog.
050 05 00 00 PRECIPITATION
050 05 01 00 Development of precipitation
050 05 01 01 Process of development of precipitation
(01) Describe the two basic processes of forming precipitation X X X X X X X

(The Wegener–Bergeron–Findeisen process, Coalescence).
Page 410 of 681

reference
IR
(02) Summarise the outlines of the ice-crystal process (The X X X X X X X
Wegener–Bergeron–Findeisen process).
(03) Summarise the outlines of the coalescence process. X X X X X X X
(04) Explain the development of snow, rain, drizzle and hail. X X X X X X X
050 05 02 00 Types of precipitation
050 05 02 01 Types of precipitation, relationship with cloud types
(01) List and describe the types of precipitation given in the X X X X X X X

aerodrome forecast (TAF) and METAR codes (drizzle, rain,
snow, snow grains, ice pellets, hail, small hail, snow pellets,
ice crystals, freezing drizzle, freezing rain).
(02) State the ICAO/WMO approximate diameters for cloud, X X X X X X X
drizzle and rain drops.
(03) State that, because of their size, hail stones can cause X X X X X X X
significant damage to aircraft.
(04) X Explain the mechanism for the formation of freezing X X X X X X X
precipitation.
(05) Describe the weather conditions that give rise to freezing X X X X X X X
precipitation.
(06) Distinguish between the types of precipitation generated X X X X X X X
in convective and stratiform clouds.
(07) Assign typical precipitation types and intensities to X X X X X X X
different cloud types.
(08) Explain the relationship between moisture content and X X X X X X X
visibility during different types of winter precipitation
(e.g. large vs small snowflakes).
Page 411 of 681

reference
IR
050 06 00 00 AIR MASSES AND FRONTS
050 06 01 00 Air masses
050 06 01 01 Description, classification and source regions of air

masses
(01) Define the term ‘air mass’. X X X X X X X
(02) Describe the properties of the source regions. X X X X X X X
(03) Summarise the classification of air masses by source X X X X X X X
regions.
(04) State the classifications of air masses by temperature and X X X X X X X
humidity at source.
(05) State the characteristic weather in each of the air masses. X X X X X X X
(06) Name the three main air masses that affect Europe. X X X X X X X
(07) Classify air masses on a surface weather chart. X X X X X X X
Remark: Names and abbreviations of air masses used in
examinations:
— first letter: humidity
 continental (c)
 maritime (m)
— second letter: type of air mass
 arctic (A)
 polar (P)
 tropical (T)
 equatorial (E)
Page 412 of 681

reference
IR
— third letter: temperature
 cold (c)
 warm (w)
050 06 01 02 Modifications of air masses
(01) List the environmental factors that affect the final X X X X X X X
properties of an air mass.
(02) Explain how maritime and continental tracks modify air X X X X X X X
masses.
(03) Explain the effect of passage over cold or warm surfaces. X X X X X X X
(04) Explain how air-mass weather is affected by the season, X X X X X X X
the air-mass track and by orographic and thermal effects
over land.
(05) Assess the tendencies of the stability of an air mass and X X X X X X X
describe the typical resulting air-mass weather including
the hazards for aviation.
050 06 02 00 Fronts
050 06 02 01 General aspects
(01) Describe the boundaries between air masses (fronts). X X X X X X X

(02) Define ‘front’ and ‘frontal zone’. X X X X X X X
(03) Name the global frontal systems (polar front, arctic front). X X X X X X
(04) State the approximate seasonal latitudes and geographic X X X X X X
positions of the polar front and the arctic front.
050 06 02 02 Warm front, associated clouds and weather
Page 413 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Define a ‘warm front’. X X X X X X X
(02) Describe the cloud, weather, ground visibility and aviation X X X X X X X
hazards at a warm front depending on the stability of the
warm air.
(03) Explain the seasonal differences in the weather at warm X X X X X X X
fronts.
(04) Describe the structure, slope and dimensions of a warm X X X X X X X
front.
(05) Sketch a cross section of a warm front showing weather, X X X X X X X
cloud and aviation hazards.
050 06 02 03 Cold front, associated clouds and weather
(01) Define a ‘cold front’. X X X X X X X

hazards at a cold front depending on the stability of the
warm air.
(03) Explain the seasonal differences in the weather at cold X X X X X X X
fronts.
(04) Describe the structure, slope and dimensions of a cold X X X X X X X
front.
(05) Sketch a cross section of a cold front showing weather, X X X X X X X
050 06 02 04 Warm sector, associated clouds and weather
(01) Describe fronts and air masses associated with the warm X X X X X X X
sector.
Page 414 of 681

reference
IR
hazards in a warm sector.
(03) Explain the seasonal differences in the weather in the X X X X X X X
warm sector.
(04) Sketch a cross section of a warm sector showing weather, X X X X X X X
050 06 02 05 Weather behind the cold front

hazards behind the cold front.
(02) Explain the seasonal differences in the weather behind the X X X X X X X
cold front.
050 06 02 06 Occlusions, associated clouds and weather
(01) X Define the term ‘occlusion’ and ‘occluded front’. X X X X X X X

hazards in a cold occlusion.
hazards in a warm occlusion.
(04) Explain the seasonal differences in the weather at X X X X X X X
occlusions.
(05) Sketch a cross section of occlusions showing weather, X X X X X X X
(06) On a sketch illustrate the development of an occlusion and X X X X X X X
the movement of the occlusion point.
050 06 02 07 Stationary front, associated clouds and weather
Page 415 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Define a ‘stationary front’. X X X X X X X
hazards in a stationary front.
050 06 02 08 Movement of fronts and pressure systems, life cycle
(01) Describe the movements of fronts and pressure systems X X X X X X X

and the life cycle of a mid-latitude depression.
(02) State the rules for predicting the direction and the speed X X X X X X X
of movement of fronts.
(03) State the difference in the speed of movement between X X X X X X X
cold and warm fronts.
(04) State the rules for predicting the direction and the speed X X X X X X X
of movement of frontal depressions.
(05) Describe, with a sketch if required, the genesis, X X X X X X X
development and life cycle of a frontal depression with
associated cloud and rain belts.
050 06 02 09 Changes of meteorological elements at a frontal wave
(01) Sketch a plan and a cross section of a frontal wave (warm X X X X X X X

front, warm sector, and cold front) and illustrate the
changes of pressure, temperature, surface wind and wind
in the vertical axis.
050 07 00 00 PRESSURE SYSTEMS
050 07 01 00 The principal pressure areas
050 07 01 01 Location of the principal pressure areas
(01) Identify or indicate on a map the principal global high- X X X
Page 416 of 681

reference
IR
pressure and low-pressure areas in January and July.
(02) Explain how these pressure areas are formed. X X X
(03) Explain how the pressure areas move with the seasons. X X X
050 07 02 00 Anticyclone
050 07 02 01 Anticyclones, types, general properties, cold and warm
anticyclones, ridges and subsidence
(01) List the different types of anticyclones. X X X X X X X
(02) Describe the effect of high-level convergence in producing X X X X X X X
areas of high pressure at ground level.
(03) Describe air-mass subsidence, its effect on the X X X X X X X
environmental lapse rate, and the associated weather.
(04) Describe the formation of warm and cold anticyclones. X X X X X X X
(05) Describe the formation of ridges. X X X X X X X
(06) Describe the properties of and the weather associated with X X X X X X X
warm and cold anticyclones.
(07) Describe the properties of and the weather associated with X X X X X X X
ridges.
(08) Describe the blocking anticyclone and its effects. X X X X X X X
050 07 03 00 Non-frontal depressions
050 07 03 01 Thermal, orographic, polar and secondary depressions;

troughs
(01) Describe the effect of high-level divergence in producing X X X X X X X
areas of low pressure at ground level.
Page 417 of 681

reference
IR
(02) Describe the formation and properties of thermal, X X X X X X X
orographic (lee lows), polar and secondary depressions.
(03) Describe the formation, the properties and the associated X X X X X X X
weather at troughs.
050 07 04 00 Tropical revolving storms
050 07 04 01 Characteristics of tropical revolving storms

(01) State the conditions necessary for the formation of tropical X X X X X
revolving storms.
(02) State how a tropical revolving storm generally moves in its X X X X X
area of occurrence.
(03) Name the stages of the development of tropical revolving X X X X X
storms (tropical disturbance, tropical depression, tropical
storm, severe tropical storm, tropical revolving storm).
(04) Describe the meteorological conditions in and near a X X X X X
tropical revolving storm.
(05) State the approximate dimensions of a tropical revolving X X X X X
storm.
(06) State that the movement of a tropical revolving storm can X X X X X
only rarely be forecast exactly, and that utmost care is
necessary near a tropical revolving storm.
050 07 04 02 Origin and local names, location and period of occurrence
(01) List the areas of origin and occurrence of tropical revolving X X X X X

storms, and their specified names (hurricane, typhoon,
tropical cyclone).
(02) State the expected times of occurrence of tropical X X X X X
Page 418 of 681

reference
IR
revolving storms in each of the source areas, and their
approximate frequency.
050 08 00 00 CLIMATOLOGY
050 08 01 00 Climatic zones

050 08 01 01 General circulation in the troposphere and lower
stratosphere
(01) X Describe the general tropospheric and low stratospheric X X X X X
circulation.
050 08 01 02 Climatic classification
(01) Describe the characteristics of the tropical rain climate, the X X X X X

dry climate, the mid-latitude climate (warm temperate rain
climate), the subarctic climate (cold snow forest climate)
and the snow climate (polar climate).
(02) Explain how the seasonal movement of the sun generates X X X X X
the transitional climate zones.
(03) State the typical locations of each major climatic zone. X X X
050 08 02 00 Tropical climatology
050 08 02 01 Cause and development of tropical showers and

thunderstorms: humidity, temperature, tropopause
(01) State the conditions necessary for the formation of tropical X X X X X
showers and thunderstorms (mesoscale convective
complex, cloud clusters).
(02) Describe the characteristics of tropical squall lines. X X X X X
Page 419 of 681

reference
IR
(03) Explain the formation of convective cloud structures X X X X X
caused by convergence at the boundary of the NE and SE
trade winds (Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ)).
(04) State the typical figures for tropical surface air X X X X X
temperatures and humidities, and for heights of the zero-
degree isotherm.
050 08 02 02 Seasonal variations of weather and wind, typical synoptic
situations
(01) Indicate on a map the trade winds (tropical easterlies) and X X X X X
describe the associated weather.
(02) Indicate on a map the doldrums and describe the X X X X X
associated weather.
(03) Indicate on a sketch the latitudes of subtropical high (horse X X
latitudes) and describe the associated weather.
(04) Indicate on a map the major monsoon winds. X X X X X
050 08 02 03 Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ), weather in the
ITCZ, general seasonal movement
(01) Identify or indicate on a map the positions of the ITCZ in X X
January and July.
(02) Explain the seasonal movement of the ITCZ. X X
(03) Describe the weather and winds at the ITCZ. X X
(04) Explain the flight hazards associated with the ITCZ. X X
050 08 02 04 Monsoon, sandstorms, cold-air outbreaks
(01) Define in general the term ‘monsoon’ and give a general X X X X X
Page 420 of 681

reference
IR
overview of regions of occurrence.
(02) Describe the major monsoon conditions. X X
(03) Explain how trade winds change character after a long X X X X X
track and become monsoon winds.
(04) Explain the weather and the flight hazards associated with X X X X X
a monsoon.
(05) Explain the formation of the SW/NE monsoon over West X X X X X
Africa and describe the weather, stressing the seasonal
differences.
(06) Explain the formation of the SW/NE monsoon over India X X X X X
and describe the weather, stressing the seasonal
differences.
(07) Explain the formation of the monsoon over the Far East X X X X X
and northern Australia and describe the weather, stressing
the seasonal differences.
(08) Describe the formation and properties of sandstorms. X X X X X
(09) Indicate when and where outbreaks of cold polar air can X X X X X
enter subtropical weather systems.
(10) Name well-known examples of polar-air outbreaks X X X X X
(Blizzard, Pampero).
050 08 02 05 Easterly waves
(01) Explain the effect of easterly waves on tropical weather X X X

systems.
050 08 03 00 Typical weather situations in the mid-latitudes
Page 421 of 681

reference
IR
050 08 03 01 Westerly situation (westerlies)
(01) Identify on a weather chart the typical westerly situation X X X X

with travelling polar front waves.
050 08 03 02 High-pressure area
(01) Describe the high-pressure zones with the associated X X X X X X X

weather.
(02) Identify on a weather chart the high-pressure regions. X X X X X X X
050 08 03 04 Cold-air drop
(01) Define ‘cold-air drop’. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe the formation of a cold-air drop. X X X X X X X
(03) Identify cold-air drops on weather charts. X X X X X X X
(04) Explain the problems and dangers of cold-air drops for X X X X X X X
aviation.
050 08 04 00 Local winds and associated weather
050 08 04 01 Foehn, Mistral, Bora

(01) Describe the mechanism for the development of Foehn X X X X X X
winds (including Chinook).
(02) Describe the weather associated with Foehn winds. X X X X X X
(03) Describe the formation of, the characteristics of, and the X X X X X X
weather associated with Mistral and Bora.
Page 422 of 681

reference
IR
050 08 04 02 Harmattan
(01) Describe the Harmattan wind and the associated visibility X X X X X

problems as an example of local winds affecting visibility.
050 09 00 00 FLIGHT HAZARDS
050 09 01 00 Icing
050 09 01 01 Conditions for ice accretion
(01) Summarise the general conditions under which ice X X X X X X X

accretion occurs on aircraft (temperatures of outside air;
temperature of the airframe; presence of supercooled
water in clouds, fog, rain and drizzle; possibility of
sublimation).
(02) Explain the general weather conditions under which ice X X X X X X X
accretion occurs in a venturi carburettor.
(03) Explain the general weather conditions under which ice X X X X X X X
accretion occurs on airframe.
(04) Explain the formation of supercooled water in clouds, rain X X X X X X X
and drizzle.
(05) Explain qualitatively the relationship between the air X X X X X X X
temperature and the amount of supercooled water.
(06) Explain qualitatively the relationship between the type of X X X X X X X
cloud and the size and number of the droplets in
cumuliform and stratiform clouds.
(07) Indicate in which circumstances ice can form on an aircraft X X X X X X X
on the ground: air temperature, humidity, precipitation.
Page 423 of 681

reference
IR
(08) Explain in which circumstances ice can form on an aircraft X X X X X X X
in flight: inside clouds, in precipitation, and outside clouds
and precipitation.
(09) Explain the influence of fuel temperature, radiative
cooling of the aircraft surface and temperature of the
aircraft surface (e.g. from previous flight) on ice
formation.
(10) Describe the different factors that influence the intensity X X X X X X X
of icing: air temperature, amount of supercooled water in
a cloud or in precipitation, amount of ice crystals in the air,
speed of the aircraft, shape (thickness) of the airframe
parts (wings, antennas, etc.).
(11) Explain the effects of topography on icing. X X X X X X X
(12) Explain the higher concentration of water drops in X X X X X X X
stratiform orographic clouds.
050 09 01 02 Types of ice accretion
(01) X Define ‘clear ice’. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe the conditions for the formation of clear ice. X X X X X X X
(03) Explain the formation of the structure of clear ice with the X X X X X X X
release of latent heat during the freezing process.
(04) Describe the aspects of clear ice: appearance, weight, X X X X X X X
solidity.
(05) Define ‘rime ice’. X X X X X X X
(06) Describe the conditions for the formation of rime ice. X X X X X X X
Page 424 of 681

reference
IR
(07) Describe the aspects of rime ice: appearance, weight, X X X X X X X
solidity.
(08) Define ‘mixed ice’. X X X X X X X
(09) Describe the conditions for the formation of mixed ice. X X X X X X X
(10) Describe the aspects of mixed ice: appearance, weight, X X X X X X X
solidity.
(11) Describe the possible process of ice formation in snow X X X X X X X
conditions.
(12) Define ‘hoar frost’. X X X X X X X
(13) Describe the conditions for the formation of hoar frost. X X X X X X X
(14) Describe the aspects of hoar frost: appearance, solidity. X X X X X X X
050 09 01 03 Hazards of ice accretion, avoidance
(01) State the ICAO qualifying terms for the intensity of icing. X X X X X X X
Source: ICAO Doc 4444 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation
Services — Air Traffic Management’
(02) Describe, in general, the hazards of icing. X X X X X X X
(03) Assess the dangers of the different types of ice accretion. X X X X X X X
(04) Describe the position of the dangerous zones of icing in X X X X X X X
fronts, in stratiform and cumuliform clouds, and in the
different precipitation types.
(05) Indicate the possibilities of avoiding dangerous zones of X X X X X X X
icing:
— in the flight planning: weather briefing, selection of
Page 425 of 681

reference
IR
track and altitude;
— during flight: recognition of the dangerous zones,
selection of appropriate track and altitude.
050 09 01 04 Ice crystal icing
(01) Describe ice crystal icing. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe the atmospheric processes leading to high ice X X X X X X X
crystal concentration.
Define the variable ice water content (IWC).
(03) Identify weather situations and their relevant areas where X X X X X X X
high concentrations of ice crystals are likely to occur.
(04) Name, in general, the flight hazards associated with high X X X X X X X
concentrations of ice crystals.
(05) Explain how a pilot may possibly avoid areas with a high X X X X X X X
concentration of ice crystals.
050 09 02 00 Turbulence
050 09 02 01 Effects on flight, avoidance
(01) State the ICAO qualifying terms for the intensity of X X X X X X X

turbulence.
Services — Air Traffic Management’
(02) Describe the effects of turbulence on an aircraft in flight. X X X X X X X
(03) Indicate the possibilities of avoiding turbulence: X X X X X X X
track and altitude;
Page 426 of 681

reference
IR
— during flight: selection of appropriate track and
altitude.
(04) Describe atmospheric turbulence and distinguish between X X X X X X X
turbulence, gustiness and wind shear.
(05) Describe that forecasts of turbulence are not very reliable X X X X X X X
and state that pilot reports of turbulence are very valuable
as they help others to prepare for or avoid turbulence.
050 09 02 02 Clear-air turbulence (CAT): effects on flight, avoidance
(01) Describe the effects of CAT on flight. X X X X X

(02) Indicate the possibilities of avoiding CAT in flight: X X X X X
track and altitude;
— during flight: selection of appropriate track and
altitude.
050 09 03 00 Wind shear
050 09 03 01 Definition of wind shear
(01) Define ‘wind shear’ (vertical and horizontal). X X X X X X X

(02) Define ‘low-level wind shear’. X X X X X X X
050 09 03 02 Weather conditions for wind shear
(01) Describe the conditions, where and how wind shear can X X X X X X X
form (e.g. thunderstorms, squall lines, fronts, inversions,
land and sea breeze, friction layer, relief).
050 09 03 03 Effects on flight, avoidance
Page 427 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Describe the effects of wind shear on flight. X X X X X X X
(02) Indicate the possibilities of avoiding wind shear in flight: X X X X X X X
— in the flight planning;
— during flight.
050 09 04 00 Thunderstorms
050 09 04 01 Conditions for and process of development, forecast,

location, type specification
(01) Name the cloud types which indicate the development of X X X X X X X
thunderstorms.
(02) Describe the different types of thunderstorms, their X X X X X X X
location, the conditions for and the process of
development, and list their properties (air-mass
thunderstorms, frontal thunderstorms, squall lines,
supercell storms, orographic thunderstorms).
050 09 04 02 Structure of thunderstorms, life cycle
(01) Assess the average duration of thunderstorms and their X X X X X X X

different stages.
(02) Describe a supercell storm: initial, supercell, tornado and X X X X X X X
dissipating stage.
(03) Summarise the flight hazards associated with a fully X X X X X X X
developed thunderstorm.
(04) Indicate on a sketch the most dangerous zones in and X X X X X X X
around a single-cell and a multi-cell thunderstorm.
050 09 04 03 Electrical discharges
Page 428 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Describe the basic outline of the electric field in the X X X X X X X
atmosphere.
(02) Describe types of lightning, i.e. ground stroke, intra-cloud X X X X X X X
lightning, cloud-to-cloud lightning, upward lightning.
(03) Describe and assess the ‘St. Elmo’s fire’ weather X X X X X X X
phenomenon.
(04) Describe the development of lightning discharges. X X X X X X X
(05) Describe the effect of lightning strike on aircraft and flight X X X X X X X
execution.
050 09 04 04 Development and effects of downbursts
(01) Define the term ‘downburst’. X X X X X X X

(02) Distinguish between macroburst and microburst. X X X X X X X
(03) State the weather situations leading to the formation of X X X X X X X
downbursts.
(04) Describe the process of development of a downburst. X X X X X X X
(05) Give the typical duration of a downburst. X X X X X X X
(06) Describe the effects of downbursts. X X X X X X X
050 09 04 05 Thunderstorm avoidance
(01) Explain how the pilot can anticipate each type of X X X X X X X

thunderstorm: through pre-flight weather briefing,
observation in flight, use of specific meteorological
information, use of information given by ground weather
radar and by airborne weather radar.
Page 429 of 681

reference
IR
(Refer to Subject 050 10 01 04), use of a lightning
detector (stormscope).
(Refer to Subject 050 10 01 04), use of the stormscope
(lightning detector).
(02) Describe practical examples of flight techniques used to X X X X X X X
avoid the hazards of thunderstorms.
050 09 05 00 Tornadoes
050 09 05 01 Properties and occurrence
(01) Define ‘tornado’. X X X X X X X

(02) Describe the formation of a tornado. X X X X X
(03) Describe the typical features of a tornado such as X X X X X
appearance, season, time of day, stage of development,
speed of movement, and wind speed.
(04) Compare the occurrence of tornadoes in Europe with the X X X X X
occurrence in other locations, especially in the United
States of America.
(05) Compare the dimensions and properties of tornadoes and X X X X X
dust devils.
050 09 06 00 Inversions
050 09 06 01 Influence on aircraft performance
(01) Compare the flight hazards during take-off and approach X X X X X X X

associated with a strong inversion alone and with a strong
inversion combined with marked wind shear.
050 09 07 00 Stratospheric conditions
Page 430 of 681

reference
IR
050 09 07 01 Influence on aircraft performance
(01) Summarise the advantages of stratospheric flights. X X X X X

(02) List the influences of the phenomena associated with the X X X X X
lower stratosphere (wind, temperature, air density,
turbulence).
050 09 08 00 Hazards in mountainous areas
050 09 08 01 Influence of terrain on clouds and precipitation, frontal

passage
(01) Describe the influence of mountainous area on a frontal X X X X X X X
passage.
050 09 08 02 Vertical movements, mountain waves, wind shear,
turbulence, ice accretion
(01) Describe the vertical movements, wind shear and X X X X X X X
turbulence that are typical of mountain areas.
(02) Indicate on a sketch of a chain of mountains the turbulent X X X X X X X
zones (mountain waves, rotors).
(03) Explain the influence of relief on ice accretion. X X X X X X X
050 09 08 03 Development and effect of valley inversions
(01) Describe the formation of a valley inversion due to X X X X X X X

katabatic winds.
(02) Describe the valley inversion formed by warm winds aloft. X X X X X X X
(03) Describe the effects of a valley inversion for an aircraft in X X X X X X X
flight.
Page 431 of 681

reference
IR
050 09 09 00 Visibility-reducing phenomena
050 09 09 01 Reduction of visibility caused by precipitation and

obscurations
(01) Describe the reduction of visibility caused by precipitation: X X X X X X X
drizzle, rain, snow.
(02) Describe the reduction of visibility caused by obscurations: X X X X X X X
— fog, mist, haze, smoke, volcanic ash.
(03) Describe the reduction of visibility caused by obscurations: X X X
— sand (SA), dust (DU).
(04) Describe the differences between ground and flight X X X X X X X
visibility, and slant and vertical visibility when an aircraft is
above or within a layer of haze or fog.
050 09 09 02 Reduction of visibility caused by other phenomena
(01) Describe the reduction of visibility caused by low drifting X X X X X X X

and blowing snow.
(02) Describe the reduction of visibility caused by low drifting X X X X X
and blowing dust and sand.
(03) Describe the reduction of visibility caused by dust storm X X X X X
(DS) and sandstorm (SS).
(04) Describe the reduction of visibility caused by icing X X X X X X X
(windshield).
(05) Describe the reduction of visibility caused by the position X X X X X X X
of the sun relative to the visual direction.
(06) Describe the reduction of visibility caused by the reflection X X X X X X X
of the sun’s rays from the top of the layers of haze, fog and
Page 432 of 681

reference
IR
clouds.
050 10 00 00 METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION
050 10 01 00 Observation
050 10 01 01 Surface observations
(01) Define ‘gusts’, as given in METARs. X X X X X X X

(02) Distinguish wind given in METARs and wind given by the X X X X X X X
control tower for take-off and landing.
(03) Define ‘visibility’. X X X X X X X
(04) Describe the meteorological measurement of visibility. X X X X X X X
(05) Define ‘prevailing visibility’. X X X X X X X
(06) Define ‘ground visibility’. X X X X X X X
(07) List the units used for visibility (m, km, statute mile). X X X X X X X
(08) Define ‘runway visual range’. X X X X X X X
(09) Describe the meteorological measurement of runway X X X X X X X
visual range.
(10) Indicate where the transmissometers/forward-scatter X X X X X X X
meters are placed on the aerodrome.
(11) List the units used for runway visual range (m, ft). X X X X X X X
(12) List the different possibilities to transmit information to X X X X X X X
pilots about runway visual range.
(13) Compare ground visibility, prevailing visibility, and X X X X X X X
runway visual range.
Page 433 of 681
reference
IR
(14) Indicate the means of observation of present weather. X X X X X X
(15) Indicate the means of observing clouds for the purpose of X X X X X X
recording: type, amount, height of base (ceilometers), and
top.
(16) State the clouds which are indicated in METAR, TAF and X X X X X X X
SIGMET.
(17) Define ‘oktas’. X X X X X X X
(18) Define ‘cloud base’. X X X X X X X
(19) Define ‘ceiling’. X X X X X X X
(20) Name the unit and the reference level used for information X X X X X X X
about cloud base (ft).
(21) Define ‘vertical visibility’. X X X X X X X
(22) Explain briefly how and when vertical visibility is measured. X X X X X X X
(23) Name the units used for vertical visibility (ft, m). X X X X X X X
(24) Indicate the means of observation of air temperature X X X X X X X
(thermometer).
(25) Name the units of relative humidity (%) and dew-point X X X X X X
temperature (Celsius, Fahrenheit).
050 10 01 02 Radiosonde observations
(01) Describe the principle of radiosondes. X X X X X X

(02) X Describe and interpret the sounding by radiosonde given X X X X X X
on a simplified temperature–pressure (T–P) diagram.
Page 434 of 681

reference
IR
050 10 01 03 Satellite observations
(01) Describe the basic outlines of satellite observations. X X X X X X X

(02) Name the main uses of satellite pictures in aviation X X X X X X X
meteorology.
(03) Describe the different types of satellite imagery. X X X X X X X
(04) Interpret qualitatively the satellite pictures in order to get X X X X X X X
useful information for flights:
— location of clouds (distinguish between stratiform
and cumuliform clouds).
(05) Interpret qualitatively the satellite pictures in order to get X X X X X X X
useful information for flights:
— location of fronts.
(06) Interpret qualitatively the satellite pictures in order to get X
useful information for flights using atmospheric motion
vector images to locate jet streams.
050 10 01 04 Weather radar observations
(01) Describe the basic principle and the type of information X X X X X X
given by a ground weather radar.
(02) Interpret ground weather radar images. X X X X X X X
(03) Describe the basic principle and the type of information X X X X X X X
given by airborne weather radar.
(04) Describe the limits and the errors of airborne weather X X X X X X X
radar information.
Page 435 of 681

reference
IR
(05) Interpret typical airborne weather radar images. X X X X X X X
050 10 01 05 Aircraft observations and reporting
(01) Describe routine air-report and special air-report (ARS). X X X X X X X

(02) State the obligation of a pilot to prepare air-reports. X X X X X X X
(03) Name the weather phenomena to be stated in an ARS. X X X X X X X
050 10 02 00 Weather charts
050 10 02 01 Significant weather charts
(01) Decode and interpret significant weather charts (low, X X X X X X X

medium and high level).
(02) Describe from a significant weather chart the flight X X X X X X X
conditions at designated locations or along a defined flight
route at a given FL.
050 10 02 02 Surface charts
(01) Recognise the following weather systems on a surface X X X X X X X

weather chart (analysed and forecast): ridges, cols and
troughs; fronts; frontal side, warm sector and rear side of
mid-latitude frontal lows; high- and low-pressure areas.
(02) Determine from surface weather charts the wind direction X X X X X X X
and speed.
050 10 02 03 Upper-air charts
(01) Define ‘constant-pressure chart’. X X X
(02) Define ‘isohypse (contour line)’. X X X
Page 436 of 681

reference
IR
(03) Define ‘isotherm’. X X X
(04) Define ‘isotach’. X X X
(05) Describe forecast upper-wind and temperature charts. X X X
(06) For designated locations or routes determine from forecast X X X
upper-wind and temperature charts, if necessary by
interpolation, the spot/average values for outside-air
temperature, temperature deviation from ISA, wind
direction, and wind speed.
050 10 02 04 Gridded forecast products
(01) State that numerical weather prediction uses a 3D grid of X X X X X
weather data, consisting of horizontal data (latitude-
longitude) and vertical data (height or pressure).
(02) Explain that world area forecast centres prepare global X X X X X
sets of gridded forecasts for flight planning purposes
(upper wind, temperature, humidity).
(03) State that the WAFCs also produce gridded datasets for X X X X X
Flight Level and temperature of the tropopause, direction
and speed of maximum wind, cumulonimbus clouds, icing
and turbulence.
(04) Explain that the data on CB and turbulence can be used in X X X X X
the visualization of flight hazards.
(05) Explain that the gridded forecasts can be merged in X X X X X
information processing systems with data relayed from
aircraft or pilot reports, e.g. of turbulence, to provide
improved situation awareness.
Page 437 of 681

reference
IR
050 10 03 00 Information for flight planning
050 10 03 01 Aviation weather messages
(01) Describe, decode and interpret the following aviation X X X X X X X

weather messages (given in written or graphical format):
METAR, aerodrome special meteorological report (SPECI),
trend forecast (TREND), TAF, information concerning en-
route weather phenomena which may affect the safety of
aircraft operations (SIGMET), information concerning en-
route weather phenomena which may affect the safety of
low-level aircraft operations (AIRMET), area forecast for
low-level flights (GAMET), ARS, volcanic ash advisory
information.
(02) Describe, decode and interpret the tropical cyclone X X X X X
advisory information in written and graphical form.
(03) Describe the general meaning of MET REPORT and SPECIAL X X X X X X X
REPORT.
(04) List, in general, the cases when a SIGMET and an AIRMET X X X X X X X
are issued.
(05) Describe, decode (by using a code table) and interpret the X X X X X X X
following messages: runway state message (as written in a
METAR).
Remark: For runway state message, refer to ICAO
Doc 7754 ‘Air Navigation Plan — European Region’.
050 10 03 02 Meteorological broadcasts for aviation
(01) Describe the meteorological content of broadcasts for X X X X X X X

aviation:
Page 438 of 681

reference
IR
— meteorological information for aircraft in flight
(VOLMET);
— automatic terminal information service (ATIS).
(02) Describe the meteorological content of broadcasts for X X X X X
aviation:
— HF-VOLMET.
050 10 03 03 Use of meteorological documents
(01) Describe meteorological briefing and advice. X X X X X X X

(02) List the information that a flight crew can receive from X X X X X X X
meteorological services for pre-flight planning and apply
the content of this information on a designated flight
route.
(03) List the meteorological information that a flight crew can X X X X X X X
receive from flight information services during flight and
apply the content of this information for the continuation
of the flight.
050 10 03 04 Meteorological warnings
(01) Describe and interpret aerodrome warnings and wind- X X X X X X X

shear warnings and alerts.
050 10 04 00 Meteorological services
050 10 04 01 World area forecast system and meteorological offices
(01) X Name the world area forecast centres (WAFCs) as the X X X X X X X

provider for upper-air forecasts: WAFCs prepare upper-air
gridded forecasts of upper winds; upper-air temperature
and humidity; direction, speed and flight level of maximum
Page 439 of 681

reference
IR
wind; flight level and temperature of tropopause, areas of
cumulonimbus clouds, icing, clear-air and in-cloud
turbulence, and geopotential altitude of flight levels.
(02) X Name the meteorological (MET) offices as the provider X X X X X X X
for aerodrome forecasts and briefing documents.
(03) X Name the meteorological watch offices (MWOs) as the X X X X X X
provider for SIGMET and AIRMET information.
(04) X Name the aeronautical meteorological stations as the X X X X X X
provider for METAR and MET reports.
(05) X Name the volcanic ash advisory centres (VAACs) as the X X X X X X
provider for forecasts of volcanic ash clouds.
(06) X Name the tropical cyclone advisory centres (TCACs) as X X X
the provider for forecasts of tropical cyclones.
050 10 04 02 International organisations
(01) X Describe briefly the following organisations and their chief X X X X X X

activities in relation to weather for aviation:
— International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)
(Refer to Subject 010 ‘AIR LAW’);
— World Meteorological Organization (WMO).
Page 440 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 061 — NAVIGATION — GENERAL NAVIGATION’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 441 of 681

SUBJECT 061 — NAVIGATION — GENERAL NAVIGATION
Mental dead reckoning (MDR)

Where the term ‘mental dead reckoning’ (MDR) is used within a Learning Objective (LO), the applicable
technique which will be used for the European Central Question Bank (ECQB) questions is based on the
methods shown below.
Examination questions will state that an MDR technique is required to produce the solution. If other
techniques (e.g. trigonometry) are used to determine the answer, then the determined answer may be
incorrect.
MDR crosswind component (XWC)

The XWC can be calculated using a ‘clock code rule’, where each 15° of wind angle is represented by 1/4 of
an hour — meaning 1/4 the wind strength.
The XWC can be estimated using the values from the table below:
Wind angle 15° 30° 45° 60°

% of wind speed 25 50 75 100
(Wind angle (WA) is the angle between the wind vector and the track/runway direction to the nearest 10°)
Example:
RWY 04 and surface wind from tower is 085°/20 kt. What is the XWC?
WA = 45°
XWC = (0.75) × 20
= 15 kt
MDR headwind component (HWC)/tailwind component (TWC)

The H/TWC can be estimated using the values from the following table:
90° – wind angle 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60°

% of wind speed 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.9
Page 442 of 681

To assist recall, an aid is shown below:

90° – wind angle 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60°
Aid 1 1 2 2 3 3
% of wind speed 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.9
Example:
RWY 04 and surface wind from tower is 080°/20 kt. What is the HWC?
WA = 40°
90° – WA = 50°
HWC = (0.8) × 20
= 16 kt
Page 443 of 681

MDR triangle of velocities (TOV)

Heading is determined by calculating the XWC as previously described, then applying the 1:60 rule to the
TOV as follows:
Wind vector
Track and Heading and

ground speed TAS vector
vector
WCA
This MDR technique works for the relatively small WCAs which are typical for medium to high TAS values
(the ground speed (GS) therefore can be assumed to be equal to the TAS for application of the 1:60 rule).
Page 444 of 681

Example 1:
Planned track = 070° (T)
TAS = 400 kt
WV = 100° (T)/40 kt
WA = 30°
XWC = (0.5) × 40
= 20 kt
20 kt
≈ 400 kt
3°
Heading required = 073° (T)
GS is determined by using the headwind/tailwind example previously explained.
WA = 30°
90° – 30° = 60°
HWC = (0.9) × 40
= 36 kt
GS = 400 – 36 = 364 kt
Page 445 of 681

Example 2:
Planned track = 327° (T)
TAS = 240 kt
WV = 210° (T)/70 kt
WA = 60°
XWC = (0.9) × 7
= 63 kt
63 kt
≈ 240 kt
16°
WCA = 16°
GS is determined by using the headwind/tailwind example previously explained.
WA = 60°
90° – 60° = 30°
TWC = (0.5) × 70
= 35 kt
GS = 240 + 35 = 275 kt
Page 446 of 681

VFR navigation (061 02 00 00)

The techniques referred to within the LOs are based on the methods as described below.
Mental dead reckoning (MDR) off-track corrections

Based on the 1:60 rule
1 NM of cross-track error (XTE) for every 60 NM along track from waypoint = 1° of track error angle (TKE).
1 NM of XTE for every 60 NM along track to waypoint = 1° of closing angle (CA).
Change of heading required to regain track in same distance as covered from waypoint to position off track
= 2 × TKE.
Change of heading required to reach next waypoint from position off track = TKE + CA.
Example 1:
Planned heading is 162° (T), and after 40 NM along track the aircraft position is fixed 2 NM right of planned
track. What heading is required to regain track in approximately the same time as has taken to the fix
position?
TKE = 3°
Example 2:
Planned heading is 317° (T), and after 22 NM along track the aircraft position is fixed 3.5 NM left of planned
track. What heading is required to fly direct to the next waypoint which is another 45 NM down track?
TKE = 10°, CA = 5°
Page 447 of 681

Mental dead reckoning (MDR) estimated time of arrival (ETA) calculations

Round the GS to the nearest NM/min, and then make the same percentage adjustment for the distance.
Example:
Distance to go = 42 NM
GS = 132 kt
GS rounded to 120 kt = 2 NM/min

Percentage change = 10 %
Distance = 42 – 10 % = 38 NM
Time = 38 / 2 = 19 min
Unsure-of-position procedure
As soon as the position of the aircraft is in doubt:
1. note the time;
2. communicate if in contact with an air traffic control (ATC) unit to request assistance;
3. consider using any radio-navigation aids that may be available to give position information (do not
become distracted from flying the aircraft safely);
4. if short of fuel or near controlled airspace, and not in contact with ATC, set 121.5 MHz and make a
PAN call;
5. if that is not necessary, check the directional indicator (DI) and compass are still synchronised and
continue to fly straight and level and on route plan heading;
6. estimate the distance travelled since the last known position;
7. compare the ground with your estimated position on the map (look at the terrain for hills and valleys
or line features such as a motorway, railway, river or coastline);
8. once the position has been re-established, keep checking the heading (and look out for other
aircraft) and continue the flight by updating the estimated position regularly while looking for unique
features such as a lake, wood, built-up area, mast, or a combination of roads, rivers and railways.
Page 448 of 681

Procedure when lost

If the unsure-of-position procedure does not resolve the problem:
1. inform someone — call first on the working frequency and state the word ‘LOST’;
2. if there is no contact on that frequency or there is no frequency selected, change to 121.5 MHz and
make a PAN call; select 7700 with ALT on the transponder if fitted.
In all cases: maintain visual meteorological conditions (VMC), note the fuel state, and try to identify an area
suitable for a precautionary landing.
Consider the ‘HELP ME’ mnemonic:
H. High ground/obstructions — are there any nearby?
E. Entering controlled airspace — is that a possibility?
L. Limited experience, low time or student pilot — let someone know.
P. PAN call in good time — don’t leave it too late.
M. MET conditions — is the weather deteriorating?
E. Endurance — is fuel getting low?
Page 449 of 681

reference
IR
060 00 00 00 NAVIGATION
061 00 00 00 GENERAL NAVIGATION
061 01 00 00 BASICS OF NAVIGATION
061 01 01 00 The Earth
061 01 01 01 Form
(01) X State that the geoid is an irregular shape based on X X X X X

the surface of the oceans influenced only by
gravity and centrifugal force.
(02) X State that a number of different ellipsoids are used X X X X X
to describe the shape of the Earth for mapping but
that WGS-84 is the reference ellipsoid required for
geographical coordinates.
(03) State that the circumference of the Earth is X X X X X
approximately 40 000 km or approximately 21 600 NM.
061 01 01 02 Earth rotation
(01) X Describe the rotation of the Earth around its own X X X X X

spin axis and the plane of the ecliptic (including the
relationship of the spin axis to the plane of the
ecliptic).
(02) Explain the effect that the inclination of the Earth’s X X X X X
spin axis has on insolation and duration of daylight.
061 01 01 03 Earth rotation
061 01 02 00 Position
Page 450 of 681

reference
IR
061 01 02 01 Position reference system
(01) X State that geodetic latitude and longitude is used X X X X X

to define a position on the WGS-84 ellipsoid.
(02) Define geographic (geodetic) latitude and parallels X X X X X
of latitude.
(03) Calculate the difference in latitude between any X X X X X
two given positions.
(04) Define geographic (geodetic) longitude and X X X X X
meridians.
(05) Calculate the difference in longitude between any X X X X X
two given positions.
061 01 03 00 Direction
061 01 03 01 Datums
(01) X Define ‘true north’ (TN). X X X X X

(02) Measure a true direction on any given aeronautical X X X X X
chart.
(03) X Define ‘magnetic north’ (MN). X X X X X
(04) Define and apply variation. X X X X X
(05) Explain changes of variation with time and X X X X X
position.
(06) X Define ‘compass north’ (CN). X X X X X
(07) Apply deviation. X X X X X
Page 451 of 681

reference
IR
061 01 03 02 Track and heading
(01) Calculate XWC by:

— trigonometry; and
— MDR.
(02) Explain and apply the concepts of drift and WCA. X X X X X
(03) Calculate the actual track with appropriate data of X X X X X
heading and drift.
(04) Calculate TKE with appropriate data of WCA and X X X X X
drift.
(05) Calculate the heading change at an off-course fix to X X X X X
directly reach the next waypoint using the 1:60 rule.
(06) Calculate the average drift angle based upon an off- X X X X X
course fix observation.
061 01 04 00 Distance
061 01 04 01 WGS-84 ellipsoid
(01) X State that 1 NM is equal to 1 852 km, which is the X X X X X

average distance of 1' of latitude change on the
WGS-84 ellipsoid.
(02) State that 1' of longitude change at the equator on X X X X X
the WGS-84 ellipsoid is approximately equal to
1 NM.
061 01 04 02 Units
(01) Convert between units of distance (nautical mile X X X X X

(NM), kilometre (km), statute mile (SM), feet (ft),
Page 452 of 681

reference
IR
inches (in)).
061 01 04 03 Graticule distances
(01) Calculate the distance between positions on the X X X X X

same meridian, on opposite (antipodal) meridians,
on the same parallel of latitude, and calculate new
latitude/longitude when given distances north-
south and east-west.
061 01 04 04 Air mile
(01) Evaluate the effect of wind and altitude on air X X X X X

distance.
(02) Convert between ground distance (NM) and air X X X X X
distance (NAM) using the formula:
NAM = NM × TAS/GS.
061 01 05 00 Speed
061 01 05 01 True airspeed (TAS)
(01) Calculate TAS from CAS, and CAS from TAS by: X X X X X
— mechanical computer; and
— rule of thumb (2 % per 1 000 ft).
061 01 05 02 Mach number (M)
(01) Calculate TAS from M, and M from TAS. X X

061 01 05 03 CAS/TAS/M relationship
(01) Deduce the CAS, TAS and M relationship in X X

climb/descent/cruise (flying at constant CAS or M).
Page 453 of 681

reference
IR
(02) Deduce CAS and TAS in climb/descent/cruise (flying X X X
at constant CAS).
061 01 05 04 Ground speed (GS)
(01) Calculate headwind component (HWC) and tailwind X X X X X

component (TWC) by:
— trigonometry; and
— MDR.
(02) Apply HWC and TWC to determine GS from TAS X X X X
and vice versa.
(03) X Explain the relationship between GS and TAS with X X X X X
increasing WCA.
(04) Calculate GS with: X X X X X
— mechanical computer (TOV solution); and
— MDR (given track, TAS and WV).
(05) Perform GS, distance and time calculations. X X X X X
(06) Calculate revised GS to reach a waypoint at a X X X X X
specific time.
(07) Calculate the average GS based on two observed X X X X X
fixes.
061 01 05 05 Flight log
(01) Enter revised navigational en-route data, for the legs X X X X X

concerned, into the flight plan (e.g. updated wind and
GS and correspondingly losses or gains in time and
fuel consumption).
061 01 05 06 Gradient versus rate of climb/descent
Page 454 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Estimate average climb/descent gradient (%) or glide X X X X X
path degrees according to the following rule of
thumb:
— Gradient in degrees = (vertical distance (ft) /
100) / ground distance (NM))
— Gradient in % = (vertical distance (ft) / 60) /
ground distance (NM))
— Gradient in degrees = arctan (altitude
difference (ft) / ground distance (ft)).
N.B. These rules of thumb approximate 1 NM to 6 000 ft
and are based on the 1:60 rule.
(02) Calculate rate of descent (ROD) on a given glide-path X X X X X
angle or gradient using the following rule of thumb
formulae:
— ROD (ft/min) = GP° × GS (NM/min) × 100
— ROD (ft/min) = GP% × GS (kt)
(03) Calculate climb/descent gradient (ft/NM, % and X X X X X
degrees), GS or vertical speed according to the
following formula:
— Vertical speed (ft/min) = (GS (kt) × gradient
(ft/NM)) / 60.
(04) X State that it is necessary to determine the position of X X X X X
the aircraft accurately before commencing descent in
order to ensure safe ground clearance.
061 01 06 00 Triangle of velocities (TOV)
061 01 06 01 Construction
Page 455 of 681

reference
IR
(01) Draw and correctly label the TOV. X X X X X
061 01 06 02 Solutions
(01) Resolve the TOV for: X X X X X

— heading and GS (with mechanical computer
and MDR);
— WV (with mechanical computer); and
— track and GS (with mechanical computer and
MDR.
061 01 07 00 Dead reckoning (DR)
061 01 07 01 Dead reckoning (DR) technique
(01) Determine a DR position. X X X X X

(02) Evaluate the difference between a DR and a fix X X X X X
position.
(03) Define ‘speed factor’ (SF). X X X X X
Speed divided by 60, used for mental flight-path
calculations.
(04) Calculate wind correction angle (WCA) using the X X X X X
formula:
— WCA = XWC (crosswind component)/SF
061 01 08 00 Navigation in climb and descent
061 01 08 01 Average airspeed
(01) Average TAS used for climb problems is calculated at X X X X X

the altitude 2/3 of the cruising altitude.
Page 456 of 681

reference
IR
(02) Average TAS used for descent problems is calculated X X X X X
at the altitude 1/2 of the descent altitude.
061 01 08 02 Average wind velocity (WV)
(01) WV used for climb problems is the WV at the altitude X X X X X

2/3 of the cruising altitude.
(02) WV used for descent problems is the WV at the X X X X X
altitude 1/2 of the descent altitude.
(03) Calculate the average climb/descent GS from given X X X X X
TAS at various altitudes, and WV at various altitudes
and true track.
061 01 08 03 Ground speed (GS)/distance covered during climb or
descent
(01) X State that most aircraft operating handbooks supply X X X X X
graphical material to calculate climb and descent
problems.
(02) Calculate the flying time and distance during X X X X X
climb/descent from given average rate of
climb/descent and using average GS using the
following formulae valid for a 3°-glide path:
— rate of descent = (GS × 10) / 2
— rate of descent = speed factor (SF) × glide-path
angle × 100
(03) Given distance, speed and present altitude, calculate X X X X X
the rate of climb/descent in order to reach a certain
position at a given altitude.
(04) Given speed, rate of climb/descent and altitude, X X X X X
calculate the distance required in order to reach a
Page 457 of 681
reference
IR
certain position at a given altitude.
(05) Given speed, distance to go and altitude to X X X X X
climb/descent, calculate the rate of climb/descent.
061 02 00 00 VISUAL FLIGHT RULE (VFR) NAVIGATION
061 02 01 00 Ground features
061 02 01 01 Ground features
(01) Recognise which elements would make a ground X X X X X

feature suitable for use for VFR navigation.
061 02 01 02 Visual identification
(01) Describe the problems of VFR navigation at lower X X X X X

levels and the causes of reduced visibility.
(02) Describe the problems of VFR navigation at night. X X X X X
061 02 02 00 VFR navigation techniques
061 02 02 01 Use of visual observations and application to in-

flight navigation
(01) X Describe what is meant by the term ‘map reading’. X X X X X
(02) X Define the term ‘visual checkpoint’. X X X X X
(03) Discuss the general features of a visual checkpoint X X X X X
and give examples.
(04) State that the evaluation of the differences X X X X X
between DR positions and actual position can
refine flight performance and navigation.
Page 458 of 681

reference
IR
(05) X Establish fixes on navigational charts by plotting X X X X X
visually derived intersecting lines of position.
(06) X Describe the use of a single observed position line X X X X X
to check flight progress.
(07) X Describe how to prepare and align a map/chart for X X X X X
use in visual navigation.
(08) Describe visual-navigation techniques including: X X X X X
— use of DR position to locate identifiable
landmarks;
— identification of charted features/landmarks;
— factors affecting the selection of landmarks;
— an understanding of seasonal and
meteorological effects on the appearance and
visibility of landmarks;
— selection of suitable landmarks;
— estimation of distance from landmarks from
successive bearings;
— estimation of the distance from a landmark
using an approximation of the sighting angle
and the flight altitude.
(09) Describe the action to be taken if there is no visual X X X X X
checkpoint available at a scheduled turning point.
(10) Understand the difficulties and limitations that X X X X X
may be encountered in map reading in some
geographical areas due to the nature of terrain,
lack of distinctive landmarks, or lack of detailed
and accurate charted data.
Page 459 of 681

reference
IR
(11) X State the function of contour lines on a X X X X X
topographical chart.
(12) X Indicate the role of ‘layer tinting’ (colour gradient) X X X X X
in relation to the depiction of topography on a
chart.
(13) Using the contours shown on a chart, describe the X X X X X
appearance of a significant feature.
(14) Apply the techniques of DR, map reading, X X X X X
orientation, timing and revision of ETAs and
headings.
061 02 02 02 Unplanned events
(01) Explain what needs to be considered in case of X X X X X

diversion, when unsure of position and when lost.
061 03 00 00 GREAT CIRCLES AND RHUMB LINES
061 03 01 00 Great circles
061 03 01 01 Properties
(01) Describe the geometric properties of a great circle X X

(including the vertex) and a small circle.
(02) Describe the geometric properties of a great circle X X X
and a small circle, up to 30° difference of
longitude.
(03) X Explain why a great-circle route is the shortest X X X X X
distance between any two positions on the Earth.
(04) Name examples of great circles on the surface of X X X X X
the Earth.
Page 460 of 681

reference
IR
061 03 01 02 Convergence
(01) X Explain why the track direction of a great-circle X X X X X

route (other than following a meridian or the
equator) changes.
(02) State the formula used to approximate the value of X X X X X
Earth convergence as change of longitude × sine
mean latitude.
(03) Calculate the approximate value of Earth X X X X X
convergence between any two positions, up to 30°
difference of longitude.
061 03 02 00 Rhumb lines
061 03 02 01 Properties
(01) X Describe the geometric properties of a rhumb line. X X X X X
(02) X State that a rhumb-line route is not the shortest X X X X X
distance between any two positions on the Earth
(excluding meridians and equator).
061 03 03 00 Relationship
061 03 03 01 Distances
(01) Explain that the variation in distance of the great- X X X X X

circle route and rhumb-line route between any two
positions increases with increasing latitude or
change in longitude.
061 03 03 02 Conversion angle
(01) Calculate and apply the conversion angle. X X
Page 461 of 681

reference
IR
061 04 00 00 CHARTS
061 04 01 00 Chart requirements
061 04 01 01 ICAO Annex 4 ‘Aeronautical Charts’
(01) State the requirement for conformality and for a X X X X X

straight line to approximate a great circle.
061 04 01 02 Convergence
(01) Explain and calculate the constant of the cone (sine X X X X X

of parallel of origin).
(02) Explain the relationship between Earth and chart X X X X X
convergence with respect to the ICAO requirement
for a straight line to approximate a great circle.
061 04 01 03 Scale
(01) Recognise methods of representing scale on X X X X X

aeronautical charts.
(02) Perform scale calculations based on typical en- X X X X X
route chart scales.
061 04 02 00 Projections
061 04 02 01 Methods of projection
(01) X Identify azimuthal, cylindrical and conical X X X X X

projections.
061 04 02 02 Polar stereographic
(01) State the properties of a polar stereographic X X X X X

projection.
Page 462 of 681

reference
IR
(02) Calculate straight line track changes on a polar X X X X X
stereographic chart.
061 04 02 03 Direct Mercator
(01) State the properties of a direct Mercator X X X X X

projection.
(02) Given the scale at one latitude, calculate the scale X X X X X
at different latitudes.
(03) Given a chart length at one latitude, show that it X X X X X
represents a different Earth distance at other
latitudes.
061 04 02 04 Lambert
(01) State the properties of a Lambert projection. X X X X X

(02) Calculate straight line track changes on a Lambert X X X X X
chart.
(03) Explain the scale variation throughout the charts as X X X X X
follows:
— the scale indicated on the chart will be correct
at the standard parallels;
— the scale will increase away from the parallel of
origin;
— the scale within the standard parallels differs by
less than 1 % from the scale stated on the
chart.
(04) Given appropriate data, calculate initial, final or X X X X X
rhumb-line tracks between two positions
(lat./long.).
Page 463 of 681
reference
IR
(05) Given two positions (lat./long.) and information to X X X X X
determine convergency between the two positions,
calculate the parallel of origin.
(06) Given a Lambert chart, determine the parallel of X X X X X
origin, or constant of cone.
(07) Given constant of cone or parallel of origin, great- X X X X X
circle track at one position and great-circle track at
another position, calculate the difference of
longitude between the two positions.
061 04 03 00 Practical use
061 04 03 01 Symbology
(01) Recognise ICAO Annex 4 symbology. X X X X X

061 04 03 02 Plotting
(01) Measure tracks and distances on VFR and IFR en- X X X X X

route charts.
(02) Fix the aircraft position on an en-route chart with X X X X X
information from VOR and DME equipment.
(03) Resolve bearings of an NDB station for plotting on X X X X X
an aeronautical chart.
061 05 00 00 Time
061 05 01 00 Local Mean Time (LMT)
061 05 01 01 Mean solar day
(01) X Explain the concepts of a mean solar day and LMT. X X X X X
Page 464 of 681

reference
IR
061 05 01 02 Local Mean Time (LMT) and Universal Time
Coordinated (UTC)
(01) Perform LMT and UTC calculations. X X X X X
061 05 02 00 Standard time
061 05 02 01 Standard time and daylight saving time
(01) Explain and apply the concept of standard time and X X X X X

daylight saving time, and perform standard time
and daylight saving time calculations.
061 05 02 02 International Date Line
(01) State the changes when crossing the International X X X X X

Date Line.
061 05 03 00 Sunrise and sunset
061 05 03 01 Sunrise and sunset times
(01) Define sunrise, sunset, and civil twilight, and X X X X X

extract times from a suitable source (e.g. an
almanac).
(02) Explain the changes to sunrise, sunset, and civil X X X X X
twilight times with date, latitude and altitude.
(03) Explain at which time of the year the duration of X X X X X
daylight changes at the highest rate.
Page 465 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 062 — NAVIGATION — RADIO NAVIGATION’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 466 of 681

SUBJECT 062 — NAVIGATION — RADIO NAVIGATION
reference and EIR
IR
060 00 00 00 NAVIGATION
062 00 00 00 RADIO NAVIGATION
062 01 00 00 BASIC RADIO PROPAGATION THEORY
062 01 01 01 Electromagnetic waves
(01) X State that radio waves travel at the speed of light, being X X X X X X
approximately 300 000 km/s.
(02) X Define a ‘cycle’: a complete series of values of a X X X X X X
periodical process.
062 01 01 02 Frequency, wavelength, amplitude, phase angle
(01) X Define ‘frequency’: the number of cycles occurring in X X X X X X

1 second expressed in Hertz (Hz).
(02) X Define ‘wavelength’: the physical distance travelled by a X X X X X X
radio wave during one cycle of transmission.
(03) X Define ‘amplitude’: the maximum deflection in an X X X X X X
oscillation or wave.
(04) X State that the relationship between wavelength and X X X X X X
frequency is: wavelength (λ) = speed of light (c) /
frequency (f).
(05) X Define ‘phase angle’: the fraction of one wavelength X X X X X X
expressed in degrees from 000° to 360°.
Page 467 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(06) X Define ‘phase angle difference/shift’: the angular X X X X X X
difference between the corresponding points of two
cycles of equal wavelength, which is measurable in
degrees (°).
062 01 01 03 Frequency bands, sidebands, single sideband
(01) List the bands of the frequency spectrum for X X X X X X

electromagnetic waves:
— very low frequency (VLF): 3–30 kHz;
— low frequency (LF): 30–300 kHz;
— medium frequency (MF): 300–3 000 kHz;
— high frequency (HF): 3–30 MHz;
— very high frequency (VHF): 30–300 MHz;
— ultra-high frequency (UHF): 300–3 000 MHz;
— super high frequency (SHF): 3–30 GHz;
— extremely high frequency (EHF): 30–300 GHz.
(02) State that when a carrier wave is modulated, the X X X X X X
resultant radiation consists of the carrier frequency plus
additional upper and lower sidebands.
(03) State that HF meteorological information for aircraft in X X X X X X
flight (VOLMET) and HF two-way communication use a
single sideband.
(04) State that the following abbreviations (classifications X X X X X X
according to International Telecommunication Union
(ITU) regulations) are used for aviation applications:
— N0N: carrier without modulation as used by non-
directional radio beacons (NDBs);
— A1A: carrier with keyed Morse code modulation as
Page 468 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
used by NDBs;
— A2A: carrier with amplitude modulated Morse
code as used by NDBs;
— A3E: carrier with amplitude modulated speech
used for communication (VHF-COM).
062 01 01 04 Pulse characteristics
(01) Define the following terms that are associated with a X X X X X X

pulse string:
— pulse length;
— pulse power;
— continuous power.
062 01 01 05 Carrier, modulation
(01) X Define ‘carrier wave’: the radio wave acting as the carrier X X X X X X
or transporter.
(02) X Define ‘modulation’: the technical term for the process of X X X X X X
impressing and transporting information by radio waves.
062 01 01 06 Kinds of modulation (amplitude, frequency, pulse,
phase)
(01) X Define ‘amplitude modulation’: the information that is X X X X X X
impressed onto the carrier wave by altering the
amplitude of the carrier.
(02) X Define ‘frequency modulation’: the information that is X X X X X X
impressed onto the carrier wave by altering the
frequency of the carrier.
(03) X Describe ‘pulse modulation’: a modulation form used in X X X X X X
radar by transmitting short pulses followed by larger
Page 469 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
interruptions.
(04) X Describe ‘phase modulation’: a modulation form used in X X X X X X
GPS where the phase of the carrier wave is reversed.
062 01 02 00 Antennas
062 01 02 01 Characteristics
(01) X Define ‘antenna’: an antenna or aerial is an electrical X X X X X X

device which converts electric power into radio waves,
and vice versa.
(02) X State that the simplest type of antenna is a dipole, which X X X X X X
is a wire of length equal to one half of the wavelength.
(03) X State that an electromagnetic wave always consists of an X X X X X X
oscillating electric (E) and an oscillating magnetic (H) field
which propagates at the speed of light.
(04) X State that the E and H fields are perpendicular to each X X X X X X
other. The oscillations are perpendicular to the
propagation direction and are in-phase.
062 01 02 02 Polarisation
(01) X State that the polarisation of an electromagnetic wave X X X X X X

describes the orientation of the plane of oscillation of the
electrical component of the wave with regard to its
direction of propagation.
062 01 02 03 Types of antennas
(01) Name the common different types of directional X X X X X X

antennas:
— loop antenna used in old automatic direction-
Page 470 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
finding (ADF) receivers;
— parabolic antenna used in weather radars;
— slotted planar array used in more modern weather
radars.
(02) Explain ‘antenna shadowing’. X X X X X
(03) Explain the importance of antenna placement on X X X X X
aircraft.
062 01 03 00 Wave propagation
062 01 03 01 Structure of the ionosphere and its effect on radio

waves
(01) X State that the ionosphere is the ionised component of the X X X X X X
Earth’s upper atmosphere from approximately
60 to 400 km above the surface, which is vertically
structured in three regions or layers.
(02) X State that the layers of the ionosphere are named D, E X X X X X X
and F layers, and their depth varies with time.
(03) X State that electromagnetic waves refracted from the E X X X X X X
and F layers of the ionosphere are called sky waves.
(04) X Explain how the different layers of the ionosphere X X X X X X
influence wave propagation.
062 01 03 02 Ground waves
(01) X Define ‘ground or surface waves’: the electromagnetic X X X X X X

waves travelling along the surface of the Earth.
062 01 03 03 Space waves
Page 471 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) X Define ‘space waves’: the electromagnetic waves X X X X X X
travelling through the air directly from the transmitter to
the receiver.
062 01 03 04 Propagation with the frequency bands
(01) State that radio waves in VHF, UHF, SHF and EHF X X X X X X
propagate as space waves.
(02) State that radio waves in LF, MF and HF propagate as X X X X X X
surface/ground waves and sky waves.
062 01 03 05 Doppler principle
(01) X State that the Doppler effect is the phenomenon where X X X X X X

the frequency of a wave will increase or decrease if there
is relative motion between the transmitter and the
receiver.
062 01 03 06 Factors affecting propagation
(01) X Define ‘skip distance’: the distance between the X X X X X X

transmitter and the point on the surface of the Earth
where the first sky wave return arrives.
(02) State that skip zone/dead space is the distance between X X X X X X
the limit of the surface wave and the sky wave.
(03) Describe ‘fading’: when a receiver picks up two signals X X X X X X
with the same frequency, and the signals will interfere
with each other causing changes in the resultant signal
strength and polarisation.
(04) State that radio waves in the VHF band and above are X X X X X X
limited in range as they are not reflected by the
ionosphere and do not have a surface wave.
Page 472 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(05) X Describe the physical phenomena ‘reflection’, X X X X X X
‘refraction’, ‘diffraction’, ‘absorption’ and ‘interference’.
(06) State that multipath is when the signal arrives at the X X X X X X
receiver via more than one path (the signal being
reflected from surfaces near the receiver).
062 02 00 00 RADIO AIDS
062 02 01 00 Ground direction finding (DF)
062 02 01 01 Principles
(01) X Describe the use of a ground DF. X X X X X X

(02) Explain the limitation of range because of the path of the X X X X X X
VHF signal.
062 02 01 02 Presentation and interpretation
(01) Define the term ‘QDM’: the magnetic bearing to the X X X X X X X

station.
(02) Define the term ‘QDR’: the magnetic bearing from the X X X X X X X
station.
(03) Explain that by using more than one ground station, the X X X X X X
position of an aircraft can be determined and transmitted
to the pilot.
062 02 01 03 Coverage and range
(01) Use the formula: X X X X X X X

1.23 × √transmitter height in feet + 1.23 × √receiver
height in feet
to calculate the range in NM.
Page 473 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
062 02 01 04 Errors and accuracy
(01) X Explain why synchronous transmissions will cause errors. X X X X X X

(02) X Describe the effect of ‘multipath signals’. X X X X X X
(03) Explain that VDF information is divided into the following X X X X X X
classes according to ICAO Annex 10:
— Class A: accurate to a range within ± 2°;
— Class B: accurate to a range within ± 5°;
— Class C: accurate to a range within ± 10°;
— Class D: accurate to less than Class C.
062 02 02 00 Non-directional radio beacon (NDB)/automatic direction
finding (ADF)
(01) X Define the acronym ‘NDB’: non-directional radio beacon. X X X X X X X

(02) X Define the acronym ‘ADF’: automatic direction-finding X X X X X X X
equipment.
(03) X State that the NDB is the ground part of the system. X X X X X X X
(04) X State that the ADF is the airborne part of the system. X X X X X X X
(05) State that the NDB operates in the LF and MF frequency X X X X X X X
bands.
(06) State that the frequency band assigned to aeronautical X X X X X X X
NDBs according to ICAO Annex 10 is 190–1 750 kHz.
(07) Define a ‘locator beacon’: an LF/MF NDB used as an aid to X X X X X X X
final approach usually with a range of 10–25 NM.
Page 474 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(08) X State that certain commercial radio stations transmit X X X X X X X
within the frequency band of the NDB.
(09) X State that according to ICAO Annex 10, an NDB station X X X X X X X
has an automatic ground monitoring system.
(10) Describe the use of NDBs for navigation. X X X X X X X
(11) Describe the procedure to identify an NDB station. X X X X X X X
(12) X Interpret the term ‘cone of confusion’ in respect of an X X X X X X X
NDB.
(13) X State that an NDB station emits a N0N/A1A or a N0N/A2A X X X X X X X
signal.
(14) X State the function of the beat frequency oscillator (BFO). X X X X X X X
(15) X State that in order to identify a N0N/A1A NDB, the BFO X X X X X X X
circuit of the receiver has to be activated.
(16) X State that on modern aircraft, the BFO is activated X X X X X X X
automatically.
(01) X Name the types of indicators commonly in use: X X X X X X X

— electronic display;
— radio magnetic indicator (RMI);
— fixed-card ADF (radio compass);
— moving-card ADF.
(02) Interpret the indications given on RMI, fixed-card and X X X X X X X
moving-card ADF displays.
(03) Given a display, interpret the relevant ADF information. X X X X X X X
Page 475 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(04) Calculate the true bearing from the compass heading and X X X X X X X
relative bearing.
(05) Convert the compass bearing into magnetic bearing and X X X X X X X
true bearing.
(06) Describe how to fly the following in-flight ADF procedures X X X X X X X
according to ICAO Doc 8168 Volume 1:
— homing and tracking, and explain the influence of
wind;
— interceptions;
— procedural turns;
— holding patterns.
(01) X State that the power of the transmitter limits the range of X X X X X X X
an NDB.
(02) Explain the relationship between power and range. X X X X X X X
(03) X Describe the propagation path of NDB radio waves with X X X X X X X
respect to the ionosphere and the Earth’s surface.
(04) Explain that the interference between sky waves and X X X X X X X
ground waves leads to ‘fading’.
(05) Define that the accuracy the pilot has to fly the required X X X X X X X
bearing in order to be considered established during
approach, according to ICAO Doc 8168, has to be within
± 5°.
(06) State that there is no warning indication of NDB failure. X X X X X X X
Page 476 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) X Explain ‘coastal refraction’: as a radio wave travelling X X X X X X X
over land crosses the coast, the wave speeds up over
water and the wave front bends.
(02) X Define ‘night/twilight effect’: the influence of sky waves X X X X X X X
and ground waves arriving at the ADF receiver with a
difference of phase and polarisation which introduce
bearing errors.
(03) State that interference from other NDB stations on the X X X X X X X
same frequency may occur at night due to sky-wave
contamination.
062 02 02 05 Factors affecting range and accuracy
(01) Describe diffraction of radio waves in mountainous X X X X X X X

terrain (mountain effect).
(02) State that static radiation energy from a cumulonimbus X X X X X X X
cloud may interfere with the radio wave and influence
the ADF bearing indication.
(03) Explain that the bank angle of the aircraft causes a dip X X X X X X X
error.
062 02 03 00 VHF omnidirectional radio range (VOR): conventional
VOR (CVOR) and Doppler VOR (DVOR)
(01) X Explain the working principle of VOR using the following X X X X X X

general terms:
— reference phase;
— variable phase;
— phase difference.
Page 477 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) State that the frequency band allocated to VOR according X X X X X X X
to ICAO Annex 10 is VHF, and the frequencies used are
108.0–117.975 MHz.
(03) State that frequencies within the allocated VOR range X X X X X X X
108.0–111.975 MHz, which have an odd number in the
first decimal place, are used by instrument landing
system (ILS).
(04) State that the following types of VOR are in operation: X X X X X X X
— conventional VOR (CVOR): a first-generation VOR
station emitting signals by means of a rotating
antenna;
— Doppler VOR (DVOR): a second-generation VOR
station emitting signals by means of a combination
of fixed antennas utilising the Doppler principle;
— en-route VOR for use by IFR traffic;
— terminal VOR (TVOR): a station with a shorter
range used as part of the approach and departure
structure at major aerodromes;
— test VOR (VOT): a VOR station emitting a signal to
test VOR indicators in an aircraft.
(05) State that automatic terminal information service (ATIS) X X X X X X X
information is transmitted on VOR frequencies.
(06) X List the three main components of VOR airborne X X X X X X X
equipment:
— the antenna;
— the receiver;
— the indicator.
Page 478 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(07) Describe the identification of a VOR in terms of Morse- X X X X X X X
code letters and additional plain text.
(08) X State that according to ICAO Annex 10, a VOR station has X X X X X X
an automatic ground monitoring system.
(09) State that failure of the VOR station to stay within the X X X X X X X
required limits can cause the removal of identification
and navigation components from the carrier or radiation
to cease.
(01) Read off the radial on an RMI. X X X X X X

(02) Read off the angular displacement in relation to a X X X X X X
preselected radial on a horizontal situation indicator (HSI)
or omnibearing indicator (OBI).
(03) Explain the use of the TO/FROM indicator in order to X X X X X X
determine aircraft position relative to the VOR
considering also the heading of the aircraft.
(04) Interpret VOR information as displayed on HSI, CDI and X X X X X X
RMI.
(05) Describe the following in-flight VOR procedures according X X X X X X
to ICAO Doc 8168 Volume 1:
— tracking, and explain the influence of wind when
tracking;
— interceptions;
— procedural turns;
— holding patterns.
(06) State that when converting a radial into a true bearing, X X X X X X
Page 479 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
the variation at the VOR station has to be taken into
account.

(01) Define that the accuracy the pilot has to fly the required X X X X X X X
bearing in order to be considered established on a VOR
track when flying approach procedures, according to
ICAO Doc 8168, has to be within the half-full scale
deflection of the required track.
(02) State that due to reflections from terrain, radials can be X X X X X X X
bent and lead to wrong or fluctuating indications, which
is called ‘scalloping’.
062 02 04 00 Distance-measuring equipment (DME)
(01) State that DME operates in the UHF band. X X X X X X X

(02) X State that the system comprises two basic components: X X X X X X X
— the aircraft component: the interrogator;
— the ground component: the transponder.
(03) Describe the principle of distance measurement using X X X X X X
DME in terms of a timed transmission from the
interrogator and reply from the transponder on different
frequencies.
(04) Explain that the distance measured by DME is slant range. X X X X X X X
(05) Illustrate that a position line using DME is a circle with the X X X X X X X
Page 480 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
station at its centre.
(06) State that the pairing of VHF and UHF frequencies X X X X X X X
(VOR/DME) enables the selection of two items of
navigation information from one frequency setting.
(07) X Describe, in the case of co-location with VOR and ILS, the X X X X X X X
frequency pairing and identification procedure.
(08) State that military UHF tactical air navigation aid (TACAN) X X X X X X X
stations may be used for DME information.
(01) X State that when identifying a DME station co-located with X X X X X X X

a VOR station, the identification signal with the higher-
tone frequency is the DME which identifies itself
approximately every 40 seconds.
(02) Calculate ground distance from given slant range and X X X X X X X
altitude.
(03) Describe the use of DME to fly a DME arc in accordance X X X X X X X
with ICAO Doc 8168 Volume 1.
(04) X State that a DME system may have a ground speed (GS) X X X X X X X
and time to station read-out combined with the DME
read-out.
(01) Explain why a ground station can generally respond to a X X X X X X X

maximum of 100 aircraft.
(02) Explain which aircraft will be denied a DME range first X X X X X X X
when more than 100 interrogations are being made.
Page 481 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Explain why the GS read-out from a DME can be less than X X X X X X X
the actual GS, and is zero when flying a DME arc.
062 02 05 00 Instrument landing system (ILS)
(01) Name the three main components of an ILS: X X X X

— the localiser (LOC);
— the glide path (GP);
— range information (markers or DME).
(02) X State the site locations of the ILS components: X X X X
— the LOC antenna should be located on the
extension of the runway centre line at the stop-
end;
— the GP antenna should be locate beyond the
runway threshold, laterally displaced to the side of
the runway centre line.
(03) Explain that marker beacons produce radiation patterns X X X X
to indicate predetermined distances from the threshold
along the ILS GP.
(04) State that marker beacons are sometimes replaced by a X X X X
DME paired with the LOC frequency.
(05) State that in the ILS LOC frequency assigned band X X X X
108.0–111.975 MHz, only frequencies which have an odd
number in the first decimal are ILS LOC frequencies.
Page 482 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(06) State that the GP operates in the UHF band. X X X X
(07) X Describe the use of the 90-Hz and the 150-Hz signals in X X X X
the LOC and GP transmitters/receivers, stating how the
signals at the receivers vary with angular deviation.
(08) State that the UHF GP frequency is selected automatically X X X
by being paired with the LOC frequency.
(09) Explain that both the LOC and the GP antenna radiates X X X X
side lobes (false beams) which can give rise to false
centre-line and false GP indication.
(10) X Explain that the back beam from the LOC antenna may be X X X X
used as a published ‘non-precision approach’.
(11) State that the recommended GP is 3°. X X X X
(12) Name the frequency, modulation and identification X X X X
assigned to all marker beacons.
All marker beacons operate on 75-MHz carrier frequency.
The modulation frequencies of the audio are:
— outer marker: low;
— middle marker: medium;
— inner marker: high.
The audio frequency modulation (for identification) is the
continuous modulation of the audio frequency and is
keyed as follows:
— outer marker: 2 dashes per second continuously;
— middle marker: a continuous series of alternate
dots and dashes;
— inner marker: 6 dots per second continuously.
Page 483 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
The outer-marker cockpit indicator is coloured blue, the
middle marker amber, and the inner marker white.
(13) State that the final-approach area contains a fix or facility X X X X
that permits verification of the ILS GP–altimeter
relationship. The outer marker or DME is usually used for
this purpose.
(01) Describe the ILS identification regarding frequency and X X X X

Morse code or plain text.
(02) State that an ILS installation has an automatic ground X X X
monitoring system.
(03) State that the LOC and GP monitoring system monitors X X X
any shift in the LOC and GP mean course line or reduction
in signal strength.
(04) State that warning flags will appear for both the LOC X X X X
and the GP if the received signal strength is below a
threshold value.
(05) Describe the circumstances in which warning flags will X X X
appear for both the LOC and the GP:
— absence of the carrier frequency;
— absence of the modulation simultaneously;
— the percentage modulation of the navigation signal
reduced to 0.
(06) Interpret the indications on a CDI and an HSI: X X X X
— full-scale deflection of the CDI needle corresponds
to approximately 2.5° displacement from the ILS
centre line;
Page 484 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— full-scale deflection on the GP corresponds to
approximately 0.7° from the ILS GP centre line.
(07) Interpret the aircraft’s position in relation to the X X X
extended runway centre line on a back-beam approach.
(08) Explain the setting of the course pointer of an HSI and the X X X
course selector of an omnibearing indicator (OBI) for
front-beam and back-beam approaches.
(01) Sketch the standard coverage area of the LOC and GP X X X X

with angular sector limits in degrees and distance limits
from the transmitter:
— LOC coverage area is 10° on either side of the
centre line to a distance of 25 NM from the
runway, and 35° on either side of the centre line to
a distance of 17 NM from the runway;
— GP coverage area is 8° on either side of the centre
line to a distance of minimum 10 NM from the
runway.
(01) Explain that ILS approaches are divided into facility X X X X

performance categories defined in ICAO Annex 10.
(02) Define the following ILS operation categories: X X X
— Category I;
— Category II;
— Category IIIA;
— Category IIIB;
Page 485 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— Category IIIC.
(03) Explain that all Category III ILS operations guidance X X X
information is provided from the coverage limits of the
facility to, and along, the surface of the runway.
(04) Explain why the accuracy requirements are progressively X X X
higher for CAT I, CAT II and CAT III ILS.
(05) Explain the following in accordance with ICAO Doc 8168: X X X X
— the accuracy the pilot has to fly the ILS LOC to be
considered established on an ILS track is within the
half-full scale deflection of the required track;
— the aircraft has to be established within the half-
scale deflection of the LOC before starting descent
on the GP;
— the pilot has to fly the ILS GP to a maximum of half-
scale fly-up deflection of the GP in order to stay in
protected airspace.
(06) State that if a pilot deviates by more than half-course X X X X
deflection on the LOC or by more than half-dot deflection
on the GP, an immediate go-around should be executed
because obstacle clearance may no longer be guaranteed.
(07) Describe ILS beam bends as deviations from the nominal X X X
LOC and GP respectively which can be assessed by flight
test.
(08) Explain that multipath interference is caused by X X X
reflections from objects within the ILS coverage area.
Page 486 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Define the ‘ILS-critical area’: an area of defined X X X X
dimensions around the LOC and GP antennas where
vehicles, including aircraft, are excluded during all ILS
operations.
(02) Define the ‘ILS-sensitive area’: an area extending beyond X X X X
the ILS-critical area where the parking or movement of
vehicles, including aircraft, is controlled to prevent the
possibility of unacceptable interference to the ILS signal
during ILS operations.
062 02 06 00 Microwave landing system (MLS)
(01) Explain the principle of operation: X X X

— horizontal course guidance during the approach;
— vertical guidance during the approach;
— horizontal guidance for departure and missed
approach;
— DME (DME/P) distance;
— transmission of special information regarding the
system and the approach conditions.
(02) State that MLS operates in the S band on 200 channels. X X X
(03) Explain the reason why MLS can be installed at X X X
aerodromes where, as a result of the effects of
surrounding buildings or terrain, ILS siting is difficult.
(01) Interpret the display of airborne equipment designed to X X X

continuously show the position of the aircraft in relation
Page 487 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
to a preselected course and glide path, along with
distance information, during approach and departure.
(02) Explain that segmented approaches can be carried out X X X
with a presentation with two cross bars directed by a
computer which has been programmed with the
approach to be flown.
(03) Illustrate that segmented and curved approaches can X X X
only be executed with DME/P installed.
(04) Explain why aircraft are equipped with a multimode X X X
receiver (MMR) in order to be able to receive ILS, MLS
and GPS.
(05) Explain why MLS without DME/P gives an ILS lookalike X X X
straight-line approach.
(01) Describe the coverage area for the approach direction as X X X

being within a sector of ± 40° of the centre line out to a
range of 20 NM from the threshold (according to ICAO
Annex 10).
062 03 00 00 RADAR
062 03 01 00 Pulse techniques
062 03 01 01 Pulse techniques and associated terms
(01) Name the different applications of radar with respect to X X X X X X X

air traffic control (ATC), weather observations, and
airborne weather radar (AWR).
(02) X Describe the pulse technique and echo principle on which X X X X X X
Page 488 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
primary radar systems are based.
(03) X State that the range of a radar depends on pulse X X X X X X
repetition frequency (PRF), pulse length, pulse power,
height of aircraft, height of antenna and frequency used.
062 03 02 00 Ground radar
(01) Explain that primary radar provides bearing and distance X X X X X

of targets.
(02) X Explain that primary ground radar is used to detect X X X X X
aircraft that are not equipped with a secondary radar
transponder.
(01) State that modern ATC systems use inputs from various X X X X X
sensors to generate the display.
062 03 03 00 Airborne weather radar
(01) List the two main tasks of the weather radar in respect of X X X X X
weather and navigation.
(02) State that modern weather radars employ frequencies X X X X X
that give wavelengths of about 3 cm that reflect best
on wet hailstones.
(03) X State that the antenna is stabilised in the horizontal plane X X X X X
with signals from the aircraft’s attitude reference system.
(04) X Describe the cone-shaped pencil beam of about 3 to 5° X X X X X
Page 489 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
beam width used for weather detection.
(01) Explain the functions of the following different controls X X X X X

on the radar control panel:
— off/on switch;
— function switch with WX, WX+T and MAP modes;
— gain-control setting (auto/manual);
— tilt/autotilt switch.
(02) Name, for areas of differing reflection intensity, the X X X X X
colour gradations (green, yellow, red and magenta)
indicating the increasing intensity of precipitation.
(03) X State the use of azimuth-marker lines and range lines in X X X X X
respect of the relative bearing and the distance to a
thunderstorm on the screen.
(01) Explain how the radar is used for weather detection and X X X X X
for mapping (range, tilt and gain, if available).
062 03 03 04 Errors, accuracy, limitations
(01) Explain why AWR should be used with extreme caution X X X X X

when on the ground.
(01) Explain the danger of the area behind heavy rain (shadow X X X X X
area) where no radar waves will penetrate.
(02) Describe appropriate tilt settings in relation to altitude X X X X X
and thunderstorms.
Page 490 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(03) Explain why a thunderstorm may not be detected when X X X X X
the tilt is set too high.
062 03 03 06 Application for navigation
(01) Describe the navigation function of the radar in the X X X X X

mapping mode.
(02) Describe the use of the weather radar to avoid a X X X X X
thunderstorm (Cb).
(03) Explain how turbulence (not CAT) can be detected by a X X X X X
modern weather radar.
(04) Explain how wind shear can be detected by a modern X X X X X
weather radar.
062 03 04 00 Secondary surveillance radar and transponder
(01) State that the ATC system is based on the replies X X X X X X X

provided by the airborne transponders in response to
interrogations from the ATC secondary radar.
(02) X State that the ground ATC secondary radar uses X X X X X X X
techniques which provide the ATC with information that
cannot be acquired by the primary radar.
(03) X State that an airborne transponder provides coded-reply X X X X X X X
signals in response to interrogation signals from the
ground secondary radar and from aircraft equipped with
traffic alert and collision avoidance system (TCAS).
(04) State the advantages of secondary surveillance radar X X X X X X X
(SSR) over a primary radar regarding range and collected
information due to transponder principal information and
Page 491 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
active participation of the aircraft.
062 03 04 02 Modes and codes
(01) X State that the interrogator transmits its interrogations in X X X X X X X

the form of a series of pulse pairs.
(02) Name the interrogation modes: X X X X X X X
— Mode A and C, and successor Mode S;
— Mode S.
(03) State that the interrogation frequency and the reply X X X X X
frequency are different.
(04) Explain that the decoding of the time interval between X X X X X
the pulse pairs determines the operating mode of the
transponder:
— Mode A: transmission of aircraft transponder code;
— Mode C: transmission of aircraft pressure altitude;
— Mode S: selection of aircraft address and
transmission of flight data for the ground
surveillance.
(05) State that Mode A designation is a sequence of four digits X X X X X X X
which can be manually selected from 4 096 available
codes.
(06) State that in Mode C reply, the pressure altitude is X X X X X X
reported in 100-ft increments.
(07) State that in addition to the information provided, on X X X X X X
request from ATC, a special position identification (SPI)
pulse can be transmitted but only as a result of a manual
selection by the pilot (IDENT button).
Page 492 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(08) X State the need for compatibility of Mode S with Mode A X X X X X X
and C.
(09) Explain that Mode S transponders receive interrogations X X X X X X
from TCAS and SSR ground stations.
(10) X State that Mode S interrogation contains either the X X X X X X
aircraft address, selective call or all-call address.
(11) X State that every aircraft is allocated an ICAO aircraft X X X X X X X
address, which is hard-coded into the Mode S
transponder (Mode S address).
(12) Explain that a 24-bit address is used in all Mode S X X X X X X
transmissions, so that every interrogation can be directed
to a specific aircraft.
(13) State that Mode S can provide enhanced vertical tracking, X X X X X X
using a 25-ft altitude increment.
(14) State that SSR can be used for automatic dependent X X X X X X
surveillance — broadcast (ADS-B).
(01) State that an aircraft can be identified by a unique code. X X X X X X X

(02) State which information can be presented on the ATC X X X X X X X
display system:
— flight level;
— flight number or aircraft registration number;
— GS.
(03) X Explain the use and function of the selector modes: OFF, X X X X X X X
Standby, ON (Mode A), ALT (Mode A, C and S), TEST, and
Page 493 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
of the reply lamp.
(04) State that every aircraft is allocated an ICAO aircraft X X X X X X
address which is hard-coded into the airframe Mode S
transponder (Mode S address).
062 06 00 00 GLOBAL NAVIGATION SATELLITE SYSTEMS (GNSSs)
062 06 01 00 Global navigation satellite systems (GNSSs)
062 06 01 01 General
(01) State that there are four main GNSSs. These are: X X X X X X X
— USA NAVigation System with Timing And Ranging
Global Positioning System (NAVSTAR GPS);
— Russian GLObal NAvigation Satellite System
(GLONASS);
— European Galileo (under construction);
— Chinese BeiDou (under construction).
(02) X State that all four systems (will) consist of a constellation X X X X X X X
of satellites which can be used by a suitably equipped
receiver to determine position.
062 06 01 02 Operation
Global navigation satellite system (GNSS)
(01) State that there are currently two modes of operation: X X X X X X X

standard positioning service (SPS) for civilian users,
and precise positioning service (PPS) for authorised
Page 494 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
users.
(02) SPS was originally designed to provide civilian users X X X X X X X
with a less accurate positioning capability than PPS.
(03) X Name the three GNSS segments as follows: X X X X X X X
— space segment;
— control segment;
— user segment.
Space segment (example: NAVSTAR GPS)
(04) State that each satellite broadcasts ranging signals on X X X X X X
two UHF frequencies: L1 and L2.
(05) State that SPS is a positioning and timing service X X X X X X
provided on frequency L1.
(06) State that PPS uses both frequencies L1 and L2. X X X X X X
(07) X State that the satellites transmit a coded signal used for X X X X X X
ranging, identification (satellite individual PRN code),
timing and navigation.
(08) X State that the navigation message contains: X X X X X X
— satellite clock correction parameters;
— Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) parameters;
— an ionospheric model;
— satellite health data.
(09) X State that an ionospheric model is used to calculate the X X X X X X X
time delay of the signal travelling through the
ionosphere.
(10) X State that two codes are transmitted on the L1 frequency, X X X X X X
Page 495 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
namely a coarse acquisition (C/A) code and a precision (P)
code. The P code is not used for standard positioning
service (SPS).
(11) X State that satellites are equipped with atomic clocks X X X X X X X
which allow the system to keep very accurate time
reference.
Control segment
(12) X State that the control segment comprises: X X X X X X X

— a master control station;
— a ground antenna;
— monitoring stations.
(13) X State that the control segment provides: X X X X X X X
— monitoring of the constellation status;
— correction of orbital parameters;
— navigation data uploading.
User segment
(14) X State that GNSS supplies three-dimensional position fixes X X X X X X X

and speed data, plus a precise time reference.
(15) X State that a GNSS receiver is able to determine the X X X X X X X
distance to a satellite by determining the difference
between the time of transmission by the satellite and the
time of reception.
(16) X State that the initial distance calculated to the satellites is X X X X X X
called pseudo-range because the difference between the
GNSS receiver and the satellite time references initially
creates an erroneous range.
Page 496 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(17) X State that each range defines a sphere with its centre at X X X X X X X
the satellite.
(18) X State that there are four unknown parameters (x, y, z and X X X X X X X
Δt) (receiver clock error) which require the measurement
of ranges to four different satellites in order to get the
position.
(19) X State that the GNSS receiver is able to synchronise to the X X X X X X X
correct time reference when receiving four satellites.
(20) X State that the receiver is able to calculate aircraft ground X X X X X X
speed using the space vehicle (SV) Doppler frequency
shift or the change in receiver position over time.
NAVigation System with Timing And Ranging Global
Positioning System (NAVSTAR GPS) integrity
(21) Define ‘receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM)’ X X X X X X X
as a technique that ensures the integrity of the provided
data by redundant measurements.
(22) State that RAIM is achieved by consistency checks among X X X X X X X
range measurements.
(23) State that basic RAIM requires five satellites. A sixth one X X X X X X X
is for isolating a faulty satellite from the navigation
solution.
(24) State that agreements have been concluded between the X X X X X X
appropriate agencies for the compatibility and
interoperability by any approved user of NAVSTAR and
GLONASS systems.
(25) X State that the different GNSSs use different data with X X X X X X
respect to reference systems, orbital data, and navigation
Page 497 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
services.
062 06 01 03 Errors and factors affecting accuracy
(01) List the most significant factors that affect accuracy: X X X X X X X

— ionospheric propagation delay;
— dilution of position;
— satellite clock error;
— satellite orbital variations;
— multipath.
(02) State that a user equivalent range error (UERE) can be X X X X X X
computed from all these factors.
(03) X State that the error from the ionospheric propagation X X X X X X
delay (IPD) can be reduced by modelling, using a model of
the ionosphere, or can almost be eliminated by using two
frequencies.
(04) X State that ionospheric delay is the most significant error. X X X X X X
(05) State that dilution of position arises from the geometry X X X X X X
and number of satellites in view. It is called geometric
dilution of precision (GDOP).
(06) State that the UERE in combination with the geometric X X X X X X
dilution of precision (GDOP) allows for an estimation of
position accuracy.
(07) X State that errors in the satellite orbits are due to: X X X X X X
— solar winds;
— gravitation of the Sun and the Moon.
062 06 02 00 Ground-, satellite- and airborne-based augmentation
Page 498 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
systems
062 06 02 01 Ground-based augmentation systems (GBASs)
(01) Explain the principle of a GBAS: to measure on the X X X X X X X

ground the errors in the signals transmitted by GNSS
satellites and relay the measured errors to the user for
correction.
(02) X State that the ICAO GBAS standard is based on this X X X X X X X
technique through the use of a data link in the VHF band
of ILS–VOR systems (108–118 MHz).
(03) State that for a GBAS station the coverage is about X X X X X X X
20 NM.
(04) State that GBAS provides information for guidance in the X X X X X X X
terminal area, and for three-dimensional guidance in the
final approach segment (FAS) by transmitting the FAS
data block.
(05) State that one ground station can support all the aircraft X X X X X X
subsystems within its coverage providing the aircraft with
approach data, corrections and integrity information for
GNSS satellites in view via a VHF data broadcast (VDB).
(06) X State that the minimum software designed coverage area X X X X X X
is 10° on either side of the final approach path to a
distance between 15 and 20 NM, and 35° on either side
of the final approach path up to a distance of 15 NM.
(07) State that outside this area the FAS data of GBAS is not X X X X X X
used.
(08) X State that GBAS based on GPS is sometimes called local X X X X X X
area augmentation system (LAAS).
Page 499 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(09) State that a GBAS-based approach is called GLS X X X X X X
approach (GLS-GNSS landing system).
062 06 02 02 Satellite-based augmentation systems (SBASs)
(01) X Explain the principle of an SBAS: to measure on the X X X X X X X
ground the errors in the signals received from the satellites
and transmit differential corrections and integrity
messages for navigation satellites.
(02) X State that the frequency band of the data link is identical X X X X X X X
to that of the GPS signals.
(03) X Explain that the use of geostationary satellites enables X X X X X X X
messages to be broadcast over very wide areas.
(04) X State that pseudo-range measurements to these X X X X X X X
geostationary satellites can also be made, as if they were
GPS satellites.
(05) X State that SBAS consists of two elements: X X X X X X X
— ground infrastructure (monitoring and processing
stations);
— communication satellites.
(06) State that SBAS allows the implementation of three- X X X X X X X
dimensional Type A and Type B approaches.
(07) X State the following examples of SBAS: X X X X X X X
— European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service
(EGNOS) in western Europe and the
Mediterranean;
— wide area augmentation system (WAAS) in the
USA;
— multi-functional transport satellite (MTSAT)-based
Page 500 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
augmentation system (MSAS) in Japan;
— GPS and geostationary earth orbit augmented
navigation (GAGAN) in India.
(08) X State that SBAS is designed to significantly improve X X X X X X X
accuracy and integrity.
(09) Explain that integrity and safety are improved by alerting X X X X X X X
SBAS users within 6 seconds if a GPS malfunction occurs.
062 06 02 04 Airborne-based augmentation systems (ABASs)
(01) Explain the principle of ABAS: to use redundant elements X X X X X X X

within the GPS constellation (e.g. multiplicity of distance
measurements to various satellites) or the combination
of GNSS measurements with those of other navigation
sensors (such as inertial systems) in order to develop
integrity control.
(02) State that the type of ABAS using only GNSS information X X X X X X X
is named receiver autonomous integrity monitoring
(RAIM).
(03) State that a system using information from additional X X X X X X X
onboard sensors is named aircraft autonomous integrity
monitoring (AAIM).
(04) Explain that the typical sensors used are barometric X X X X X X X
altimeter and inertial reference system (IRS).
(05) Define ‘receiver autonomous integrity monitoring’ (RAIM) X X X X X X X
as a technique that ensures the integrity of the provided
data by redundant measurements.
Page 501 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(06) State that RAIM is achieved by consistency checks among X X X X X X X
range measurements.
(07) State that basic RAIM requires five satellites. A sixth one X X X X X X X
is for isolating a faulty satellite from the navigation
solution.
062 07 00 00 PERFORMANCE-BASED NAVIGATION (PBN)
062 07 01 00 Performance-based navigation (PBN) concept
(as described in ICAO Doc 9613)
062 07 01 01 PBN principles
(01) List the factors used to define area navigation (RNAV) or X X X X

required navigation performance (RNP) system
performance requirements (accuracy, integrity and
continuity).
(02) X State that these RNAV and RNP systems are necessary to X X X
optimise the utilisation of available airspace.
(03) State that it is necessary for flight crew and air traffic X X X
controllers to be aware of the on-board RNAV or RNP
system capabilities in order to determine whether the
performance of the RNAV or RNP system is appropriate
for the specific airspace requirements.
(04) Define accuracy as the conformance of the true position X X X
and the required position.
(05) Define continuity as the capability of the system to X X X X
perform its function without unscheduled interruptions
during the intended operation.
(06) Define integrity as a measure of the trust that can be X X X X
Page 502 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
placed in the correctness of the information supplied by
the total system. Integrity includes the ability of a system
to provide timely and valid alerts to the user.
(07) State that, unlike conventional navigation, PBN is not X X X X
sensor-specific.
(08) Explain the difference between raw data and computed X X X X
data.
(09) Define availability as the percentage of time (annually) X X X X
during which the system is available for use.
062 07 01 02 PBN components
(01) List the components of PBN as navigational aid (NAVAID) X X X

infrastructure, navigation specification and navigation
application.
062 07 01 03 PBN scope
(01) State that in oceanic/remote, en-route and terminal X X X

phases of flight, PBN is limited to operations with linear
lateral performance requirements and time constraints.
(02) State that in the approach phases of flight, PBN X X X
accommodates both linear and angular laterally guided
operations, and explain the difference between the two.
062 07 02 00 Navigation specifications
062 07 02 01 Area navigation (RNAV) and required navigation

performance (RNP)
(01) State the difference between RNAV and RNP in terms of X X X X
the requirement for on-board performance monitoring
and alerting.
Page 503 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
062 07 02 02 Navigation functional requirements
(01) X List the basic functional requirements of the RNAV and X X X

RNP specifications (continuous indication of lateral
deviation, distance/bearing to active waypoint, GS or
time to active waypoint, navigation data storage and
failure indication).
062 07 02 03 Designation of RNP and RNAV specifications
(01) Interpret X in RNAV X or RNP X as the lateral navigation X X X

(LNAV) accuracy (total system error) in nautical miles,
which is expected to be achieved at least 95 % of the
flight time by the population of aircraft operating within
the given airspace, route or procedure.
(02) State that aircraft approved to the more stringent X X X X
accuracy requirements may not necessarily meet some of
the functional requirements of the navigation
specification that has a less stringent accuracy
requirement.
(03) State that RNAV 10 and RNP 4 are used in the X X X
oceanic/remote phase of flight.
(04) State that RNAV 5 is used in the en-route and arrival X X X X
phases of flight.
(05) State that RNAV 2 and RNP 2 are also used as navigation X X X
specifications.
(06) State that RNP 2 is used in the en-route and X X X
oceanic/remote phases of flight.
(07) State that RNAV 2 might be used in the en-route X X X
continental, arrival and departure phases of flight.
Page 504 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(08) State that RNAV 1 and RNP 1 are used in the arrival and X X X X
departure phases of flight.
(09) State that required navigation performance approach X X X X
(RNP APCH) is used in the approach phase of flight.
(10) State that required navigation performance authorisation X X X X
required approach (RNP AR APCH) is used in the approach
phase of flight.
(11) State that RNP 0.3 navigation specification is used in all X X X
phases of flight except for oceanic/remote and final
approach, primarily for helicopters.
(12) State that RNAV 1, RNP 1 and RNP 0.3 may also be used X X X
in en-route phases of low-level instrument flight rule (IFR)
helicopter flights.
062 07 03 00 Use of performance-based navigation (PBN)
062 07 03 03 Specific RNAV and RNP system functions
(01) Recognise the definition of radius to fix (RF) leg. X X X X

(02) Recognise the definition of a fixed radius transition (FRT). X X X X
(03) State the importance of respecting the flight director X X X X
guidance and the speed constraints associated with an RF
procedure.
(04) Explain the difference between a fly-by-turn and a fly- X X X X
over.
Page 505 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(05) State that the Aeronautical Radio, Incorporated (ARINC) X X X
424 path terminators set the standards for coding the
SIDs, STARs and instrument approach procedures (IAPs)
from the official published government source
documentation into the ARINC navigation database
format.
(06) State that the path terminators define a specific type of X X X
termination of the previous flight path.
(07) Define the term ‘offset flight path’. X X X X
062 07 04 00 Performance-based navigation (PBN) operations
062 07 04 01 Performance-based navigation (PBN) principles
(01) Define ‘path definition error’ (PDE). X X X X

(02) Define ‘flight technical error’ (FTE) and state that the FTE X X X X
is the error in following the prescribed path, either by the
auto-flight system or by the pilot.
(03) Define ‘navigation system error’ (NSE) and state that the X X X X
accuracy of a navigation system may be referred to as
NSE.
(04) Define ‘total system error’ (TSE) and state that the X X X X
geometric sum of the PDE, FTE and NSE equals the TSE.
(05) State that navigation accuracy depends on the TSE. X X X
062 07 04 02 On-board performance monitoring and alerting
(01) State that on-board performance monitoring and alerting X X X X
Page 506 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
of flight technical errors is managed by on-board systems
or flight crew procedures.
of navigation system errors is a requirement of on-board
equipment for RNP.
(03) State that, dependent on the navigation sensor, the X X X
estimated position error (EPE) is compared with the
required navigation specification.
(04) Explain how a navigation system assesses the EPE. X X X
(05) Give an example of how the loss of the ability to operate X X X
in RNP airspace may be indicated by the navigation
system.
of path definition error is managed by gross
reasonableness checks of navigation data.
062 07 04 03 Abnormal situations
(01) State that abnormal and contingency procedures are to X X X X

be used in case of loss of the PBN capability.
062 07 04 04 Database management
(01) State that, unless otherwise specified in the operations X X X X

documentation or acceptable means of compliance
(AMCs), the navigational database must be valid for the
current aeronautical information regulation and control
(AIRAC) cycle.
062 07 05 00 Requirements of specific RNAV and RNP specifications
Page 507 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
062 07 05 01 RNAV 10
(01) State that RNAV 10 requires that aircraft operating in X X X

oceanic and remote areas be equipped with at least two
independent and serviceable long-range navigation
systems (LRNSs) comprising an INS, an inertial reference
system (IRS)/flight management system (FMS) or a GNSS.
(02) State that operators may extend their RNAV 10 X X X
navigation capability time by updating.
062 07 05 02 RNAV 5
(01) State that manual data entry is acceptable for RNAV 5. X X X X

062 07 05 03 RNAV 1/RNAV 2/RNP 1/RNP 2
(01) State that pilots must not fly an RNAV 1, RNAV 2, RNP 1 X X X X
or RNP 2 standard instrument departure (SID) or standard
instrument arrival (STAR) unless it is retrievable by route
name from the on-board navigation database and
conforms to the charted route.
(02) State that the route may subsequently be modified X X X X
through the insertion (from the database) or deletion of
specific waypoints in response to ATC clearances.
(03) State that the manual entry, or creation of new X X X X
waypoints by manual entry, of either latitude and
longitude or place/bearing/distance values is not
permitted.
062 07 05 05 Required navigation performance approach (RNP APCH)
Page 508 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) State that pilots must not fly an RNP APCH unless it is X X X X
retrievable by procedure name from the on-board
navigation database and conforms to the charted
procedure.
(02) State that an RNP APCH to LNAV minima is a non- X X X X
precision IAP designed for two-dimensional approach
operations.
(03) State that an RNP APCH to lateral navigation X X X X
(LNAV)/vertical navigation (VNAV) minima has lateral
guidance based on GNSS and vertical guidance based on
either SBAS or barometric vertical navigation (Baro-
VNAV).
(04) State that an RNP APCH to LNAV/VNAV minima may only X X X X
be conducted with vertical guidance certified for the
purpose.
(05) Explain why an RNP APCH to LNAV/VNAV minima based X X X X
on Baro-VNAV may only be conducted when the
aerodrome temperature is within a promulgated range if
the barometric input is not automatically temperature-
compensated.
(06) State that the correct altimeter setting is critical for the X X X X
safe conduct of an RNP APCH using Baro-VNAV.
(07) State that an RNP APCH to LNAV/VNAV minima is a X X X X
three-dimensional operation.
(08) State that an RNP APCH to localiser performance with X X X X
vertical guidance (LPV) minima is a three-dimensional
operation.
Page 509 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(09) State that RNP APCH to LPV minima requires a final X X X X
approach segment (FAS) data block.
(10) State that RNP approaches to LPV minima require SBAS. X X X X
(11) State that the FAS data block is a standard data format to X X X X
describe the final approach path.
062 07 05 06 Required navigation performance authorisation required
approach (RNP AR APCH)
(01) State that RNP AR APCH requires authorisation. X X X X
062 07 05 07 Advanced required navigation performance (A-RNP)
(01) State that A-RNP incorporates the navigation X X X

specifications RNAV 5, RNAV 2, RNAV 1, RNP 2, RNP 1 and
RNP APCH.
062 07 05 08 PBN point-in-space (PinS) departure
(01) State that a PinS departure is a departure procedure X X

designed for helicopters only.
(02) State that a PinS departure procedure includes either a X X
‘proceed VFR’ or a ‘proceed visually’ instruction from the
landing location to the initial departure fix (IDF).
(03) Recognise the differences in the instructions ‘proceed VFR’ X X
and ‘proceed visually’.
062 07 05 09 PBN point-in-space (PinS) approach
(01) State that a PinS approach procedure is an instrument X X

RNP APCH procedure designed for helicopters only, and
that it may be published with LNAV minima or LPV
minima.
Page 510 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(02) State that a PinS approach procedure includes either a X X
‘proceed VFR’ or a ‘proceed visually’ instruction from the
missed approach point (MAPt) to a landing location.
(03) Recognise the differences between ‘proceed VFR’ and X X
‘proceed visually’.
Page 511 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 070 — OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 512 of 681

SUBJECT 070 — OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
reference and EIR
IR
070 00 00 00 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
071 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
071 01 01 00 ICAO Annex 6
(01) Define the following: alternate aerodrome: flight time X X

(aeroplanes); take-off alternate; en-route alternate;
destination alternate.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 1
(02) Define ‘alternate heliport’; ‘flight time (helicopters)’. X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 1
071 01 01 02 Applicability
(01) State that Part I shall be applicable to the operation of X X

aeroplanes by operators authorised to conduct international
commercial air transport (CAT) operations.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 2
(02) State that Part III shall be applicable to all helicopters X X X
engaged in international CAT operations or in international
general aviation operations, except helicopters engaged in
aerial work.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
071 01 01 03 General
(01) Explain the compliance with laws, regulations and X X X X X
Page 513 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
procedures.
Source:
ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 3.1;
ICAO Annex 6, Part III, Section 2, Chapter 1.1
(02) State the condition(s) required for the establishment of a X X X X X
flight data analysis programme, and state what this
programme is part of.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 3.3
(03) Explain what is a flight safety documents system. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 3.3
(04) Explain what is maintenance release. X X X X X
Source:
ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 8.8;
ICAO Annex 6 Part III, Section 2, Chapter 6.7
(05) List and describe the lights to be displayed by aircraft. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Appendix 1: 2. Navigation
lights to be displayed in the air
071 01 02 00 Operational requirements
071 01 02 01 Applicability
(01) X State the operational regulations applicable to CAT and X X X X X
other activities (e.g. specialised operations (SPO)).
Source:
Regulation (EU) No 965/2012 on air operations;
Regulation (EU) No 1178/2011 on aircrew requirements
(02) State the nature of CAT operations and exceptions. X X X X X
Page 514 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source:
Regulation (EU) No 965/2012: Articles 1 and 5,
points ORO.GEN.005 ‘Scope’ and CAT.GEN.100 ‘Competent
authority’;
Regulation (EC) No 216/ 2008: Article 1
071 01 02 02 General
(01) X Explain why CAT flights must meet the applicable X X X X X
operational requirements.
Source:
Point ORO.GEN.105 ‘Competent authority’ and related
AMCs/GM;
Point ORO.GEN.110 ‘Operator responsibilities’ and related
AMCs/GM
(02) Define ‘flight manual limitations — flight through the height X X X
velocity (HV) envelope’.
(03) Define ‘helicopter emergency medical service (HEMS)’. X X X
(04) Define ‘operations over a hostile environment — X X X
applicability’.
Explain that there are certain areas which should not be
overflown and state possible sources of that information
(e.g. governmental warnings, operator risk assessment).
(05) Define ‘local area operations — approval’. X X X
(06) Explain the requirements about language used for crew X X X X X
communication and in the operations manual.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.120 ‘Common language’
(07) Explain which are the operator requirements regarding the X X X X X
Page 515 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
management system.
Source:
Point ORO.GEN.200 ‘Management system’;
AMCs/GM to ORO.GEN.205 ‘Contracted activities’ and to
ORO.GEN.220 ‘Record-keeping’
(08) Explain which are the operator requirements regarding X X X X X
accident prevention and the flight safety programme.
Source:
Point ORO.GEN.200 ‘Management system’;
AMCs/GM to ORO.GEN.205 ‘Contracted activities’, to
ORO.GEN.220 ‘Record-keeping’, and to ORO.AOC.130
‘Flight data monitoring — aeroplanes’
(09) Explain which are the regulations concerning the carriage of X X X X X
persons on an aircraft.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.165 ‘Method of carriage of
persons’
(10) Explain the operator’s and commander’s responsibility X X X X X
concerning portable electronic devices (PEDs).
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.140 ‘Portable electronic
devices’
(11) Explain the operator’s and commander’s responsibility X X X X X
regarding admission in an aircraft of a person under the
influence of drug or alcohol.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.170 ‘Alcohol and drugs’
(12) Explain the regulations concerning the endangerment of X X X X X
safety.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.175 ‘Endangering safety’
Page 516 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(13) List the documents to be carried on each flight. X X X X X
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.180 ‘Documents, manuals and
information to be carried’ and related AMCs/GM
(14) Explain the operator’s responsibility regarding manuals to be X X X X X
carried on board an aircraft.
information to be carried’ and related AMCs/GM
(15) List the additional information and forms to be carried on X X X X X
board an aircraft.
information to be carried on board an aircraft’ and related
AMCs/GM
(16) List the copies of items of information to be retained on the X X X X X
ground by the operator.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.185 ‘Information to be
retained on the ground’
(17) Explain what responsibilies the operator and the X X X X X
commander have regarding the production of and access to
records and documents.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.190 ‘Provision of
documentation and records’
071 01 02 03 Operator certification and supervision
(01) Explain what requirement has to be satisfied for the issue of X X X X X
an air operator certificate (AOC).
Source:
Point ARO.OPS.100 ‘Issue of the air operator certificate’;
Point ORO.GEN.210 ‘Personnel requirements’;
Page 517 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Point ORO.AOC.100 ‘Application for an air operator
certificate’
(02) Explain what the rules applicable to air operator certification X X X X X
are.
Source:
Point ORO.AOC.100 ‘Application for an air operator
certificate’;
Point ORO.AOC.105 ‘Operations specifications and
privileges of an AOC holder’
(03) Explain the conditions to be met for the issue or revalidation X X X X X
of an AOC.
Source: ARO.GEN.310 ‘Initial certification procedure —
organisations’
(04) Explain the contents and conditions of the AOC. X X X X X
Source: Regulation (EU) No 956/2012, Appendix I ‘AIR
OPERATOR CERTIFICATE’
071 01 02 04 Operational procedures (except preparation for long-range
flight)
(01) Define the terms used for operational procedures. X X
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.106 ‘Use of isolated aerodromes —
aeroplanes’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.107 ‘Adequate aerodrome’
(02) State the operator’s responsibilities regarding the use of air X X X X X
traffic services (ATS).
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.100 ‘Use of air traffic services’
Page 518 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(03) State the operator’s responsibilities regarding authorisation X X X X X
of aerodromes/heliports by the operator.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.105 ‘Use of aerodromes and operating
sites’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.106 ‘Use of isolated aerodromes —
aeroplanes’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.107 ‘Adequate aerodrome’
(04) Explain which elements must be considered by the operator X X X X X
when specifying aerodrome/heliport operating minima.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.110 (a) and (c) ‘Aerodrome operating
minima’,
Point CAT.OP.MPA.115 ‘Approach flight technique -
aeroplanes’ ,
Point SPA.LVO.100 ‘Low visibility operations’ and related
AMCs/GM;
Point SPA.LVO.110 ‘General operating requirements’
(05) Explain what the operator’s responsibilities are regarding X X X X X
departure and approach procedures.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.125 ‘Instrument departure and
approach procedures’
(06) Explain which parameters should be considered in noise- X X
abatement procedures.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.130 ‘Noise abatement procedures —
aeroplanes’;
Page 519 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.130;
GM1 CAT.OP.MPA.130
(07) Explain which elements should be considered regarding X X X X X
routes and areas of operation.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.135 ‘Routes and areas of operation —
general’;
single-engined aeroplanes’
(08) Explain the requirements for flights in reduced vertical X X
separation minima (RVSM) airspace.
Source:
Point SPA.RVSM.100 ‘RVSM operations’;
Point SPA.RVSM.105 ‘RVSM operational approval’;
Point SPA.RVSM.110 ‘RVSM equipment requirements’ and
AMC1 SPA.RVSM.110(a);
Point SPA.RVSM.115 ‘RVSM height-keeping errors’
(09) List the factors to be considered when establishing minimum X X X X X
flight altitude.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.145 ‘Establishment of minimum flight
altitudes’ and related AMCs/GM;
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.145(a); AMC1.1 CAT.OP.MPA.145(a)
(10) Explain the requirements for carrying persons with reduced X X X X X
mobility.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.155 ‘Carriage of special
categories of passengers (SCPs)’
Page 520 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(11) Explain the operator’s responsibilities for the carriage of X X X X X
inadmissible passengers, deportees or persons in custody.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.155 ‘Carriage of special
categories of passengers (SCPs)’
(12) Explain the requirements regarding passenger seating and X X X X X
emergency evacuation.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.165 ‘Passenger seating’ and
related AMCs/GM
(13) Detail the procedures for passenger briefing in respect of X X X X X
emergency equipment and exits.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.170 ‘Passenger briefing’;
AMC2 CAT.OP.MPA.170
(14) State the flight preparation forms to be completed before X X X X X
flight.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.175 ‘Flight preparation’ and related
AMCs/GM;
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.175(a)
(15) State the commander’s responsibilities during flight X X X X X
preparation.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.175 ‘Flight preparation’
(16) State the rules for aerodrome/heliport selection. X X X X X
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.180 ‘Selection of aerodromes —
aeroplanes’;
Page 521 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Point CAT.OP.MPA.181 ‘Selection of aerodromes and
operating sites — helicopters’
(17) Explain the planning minima for instrument flight rule (IFR) X X
flights.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.185 ‘Planning minima for IFR
flights — aeroplanes’
(18) Explain the rules for refuelling/defueling with passengers on X X X X X
board.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.195 ‘Refuelling/defuelling with
passengers embarking, on board or disembarking’ and
related AMCs;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.200 ‘Refuelling/ defuelling with wide-
cut fuel’ and related AMCs;
GM1 CAT.OP.MPA.200
(19) Explain the ‘crew members at station’ policy. X X X X X
Source:
CAT.OP.MPA.210 ‘Crew members at stations’ and related
AMCs;
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.210(b);
GM1 CAT.OP.MPA.210
(20) Explain the use of seats, safety belts and harnesses. X X X X X
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.225 ‘Seats, safety belts and
restraint systems’
(21) Explain the requirements for securing passenger cabin and X X X X X
galley.
Page 522 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.230 ‘Securing of passenger
compartment and galley(s)’
(22) Explain the commander’s responsibility regarding smoking X X X X X
on board.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.240 ‘Smoking on board’
(23) State under which conditions a commander can commence X X X X X
or continue a flight regarding meteorological conditions.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.245 ‘Meteorological conditions — all
aircraft’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.246 ‘Meteorological conditions —
aeroplanes’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.265 ‘Take-off conditions’
(24) Explain the commander’s responsibility regarding ice and X X X X X
other contaminants.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.250 ‘Ice and other contaminants —
ground procedures’ and related AMCs/GM;
flight procedures’ and related AMCs/GM;
GM1 CAT.OP.MPA.250 (a) to (l);
GM2 CAT.OP.MPA.250 (a) to (f);
GM3 CAT.OP.MPA.250 (a)(1) to (3);
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.255 (a)
(25) Explain the commander’s responsibility regarding fuel to be X X X X X
carried and in-flight fuel management.
Source:
Page 523 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Point CAT.OP.MPA.260 ‘Fuel and oil supply’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.280 ‘In-flight fuel management —
aeroplanes’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.281 ‘In-flight fuel management —
helicopters’ and AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.281
(26) Detail the rules regarding carriage and use of supplemental X X X X X
oxygen for passengers and aircrew.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.285 ‘Use of supplemental oxygen’;
Point CAT.IDE.A.235 ‘Supplemental oxygen — pressurised
aeroplanes’ and related AMCs/GM
Flight preparation
(27) Explain the commander’s responsibility regarding approach X X X X X
and landing.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.300 ‘Approach and landing conditions’
and AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.300;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.305 ‘Commencement and continuation
of approach’ and related AMCs/GM
(28) Explain the circumstances under which a report shall be X X X X X
submitted.
Source: Point ORO.GEN.160 ‘Occurrence reporting’ and
related AMCs/GM
071 01 02 05 All-weather operations
(01) Explain the operator’s responsibility regarding X X

aerodrome/heliport operating minima.
Page 524 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’ and
related AMCs/GM;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.115 ‘Approach flight technique —
aeroplanes’ and related AMCs/GM
Page 525 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) Define the following terms: ‘circling’, ‘low-visibility X X
procedures’, ‘low-visibility take-off’, ‘visual approach’.
Source: Regulation (EU) No 965/2012, Annex I
(03) Define the following terms: ‘flight control system’, ‘fail- X
passive flight control system’, ‘fail-operational flight control
system’, ‘fail-operational hybrid landing system’.
(04) Define the following terms: ‘final approach and take-off X
area’.
(05) Explain the general operating requirements for low-visibility X X
operations.
Source:
Point SPA.LVO.100 ‘Low visibility operations’ and related
AMCs;
Point SPA.LVO.105 ‘LVO approval’;
Point SPA.LVO.110 ‘General operating requirements’;
Point SPA.LVO.115 ‘Aerodrome related requirements’
(06) Define aerodrome/heliport considerations regarding low- X X
visibility operations.
Source: SPA.LVO.115 ‘Aerodrome related requirements’
(07) Explain the training and qualification requirements for flight X X
crew to conduct low-visibility operations.
Source: Point SPA.LVO.120 ‘Flight crew training and
qualifications’ and related AMCs
(08) Explain the operating procedures for low-visibility X X
operations.
Page 526 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source: Point SPA.LVO.125 ‘Operating procedures and
AMC1 SPA.LVO.125
(09) Explain the operator’s and commander’s responsibilities X X
regarding minimum equipment for low-visibility operations.
Source: Point SPA.LVO.130 ‘Minimum equipment’
(10) Explain the VFR operating minima. X X
Source: AMC12 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating
minima — VFR OPERATIONS WITH OTHER-THAN-COMPLEX
MOTOR-POWERED AIRCRAFT’
(11) Aerodrome operating minima: explain under which X X
conditions the commander can commence take-off.
Source:
related AMCs/GM;
Point SPA.LVO.110 ‘General operating requirements’ and
related AMCs/GM
(12) Aerodrome operating minima: explain that take-off minima X X
are expressed as visibility or runway visual range (RVR).
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’;
AMC2 CAT.OP.MPA.110
(13) Aerodrome operating minima: explain the take-off RVR value X X
depending on the aerodrome facilities.
Source:
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’,
Table 1.A;
Page 527 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
AMC2 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’,
Table 1.H
(14) Aerodrome operating minima: explain the system minima X X
for non-precision approach (NPA) (minimum descent
altitude/height (MDA/H) and decision altitude/height
(DA/H), not RVR).
Source:
AMC3 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’
(Table 3: ILS/MLS/GLS; SRA 1NM; VOR; NDB);
AMC6 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’
(15) Aerodrome operating minima: explain under which X X
conditions a pilot can continue the approach below MDA/H
or DA/H.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.305 ‘Commencement and continuation
of approach’;
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.305(e)
(16) Aerodrome operating minima: explain the lowest minima for X X
precision approach category 1 (including single-pilot
operations).
Source: AMC3 SPA.LVO.100 ‘Low visibility operations’
precision approach category 2 operations.
(18) Aerodrome operating minima: explain the lowest minima for X
precision approach category 3 operations.
Page 528 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
circling and visual approach.
Source:
AMC7 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’;
AMC8 CAT.OP.MPA.110
(20) Aerodrome operating minima: explain the RVR value and X
cloud ceiling depending on the aerodrome.
Source:
related AMCs/GM;
Point SPA.LVO.110 ‘General operating requirements’ and
related AMCs
(21) Aerodrome operating minima: explain under which X
conditions an airborne radar approach can be performed
and state the relevant minima.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.120 ‘Airborne radar approaches (ARAs)
for overwater operations — helicopters’;
AMC1 SPA.HOFO.120 ‘Selection of aerodromes and
operating sites — COASTAL AERODROME’;
AMC2 SPA.HOFO.120 ‘Selection of aerodromes and
operating sites — OFFSHORE DESTINATION ALTERNATE
AERODROME’;
AMC1 SPA.HOFO.125 ‘Airborne radar approach (ARA) to
offshore locations — GENERAL’;
GM1 SPA.HOFO.125 ‘Airborne radar approach (ARA) to
offshore locations — GENERAL’;
Page 529 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
GM2 SPA.HOFO.125 ‘Airborne radar approach (ARA) to
offshore locations — GLOBAL NAVIGATION SATELLITE
SYSTEM (GNSS)/AREA NAVIGATION SYSTEM’
071 01 02 06 Instruments and equipment
(01) Explain which items do not require an equipment approval. X X X X X

Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.100 ‘Instruments and equipment —
general’ and related GM, and
point CAT.IDE.H.100 ‘Instruments and equipment —
general’;
Points CAT.IDE.A.105/CAT.IDE.H.105 ‘Minimum equipment
for flight’
(02) Explain the requirements regarding availability of spare X X X X X
electrical fuses.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.110 ‘Spare electrical fuses’ and
related GM
(03) Explain the requirements regarding windshield wipers. X X
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.120 ‘Equipment to clear
windshield’ and related AMCs
(04) List the minimum equipment required for day and night VFR X X X X X
flights.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.125 ‘Operations under VFR by day’
and related AMCs/GM
(05) List the minimum equipment required for IFR flights. X X
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.130 ‘Operations under IFR or at night —
flight and navigational instruments and associated
Page 530 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
equipment’ and related AMCs/GM;
Point CAT.IDE.H.130 ‘Operations under IFR or at night —
flight and navigational instruments and associated
equipment’ and related AMCs/GM
(06) Explain the required additional equipment for single-pilot X X
operations under IFR.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.135/CAT.IDE.H.135 ‘Additional
equipment for single-pilot operation under IFR’
(07) State the requirements for an altitude alerting system. X X
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.140 ‘Altitude alerting system’
(08) State the requirements for radio altimeters. X X X
Source: Point CAT.IDE.H.145 ‘Radio altimeters’
(09) State the requirements for ground proximity warning system X X
(GPWS)/terrain awareness and warning system (TAWS).
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.150 ‘Terrain awareness warning
system (TAWS)’
(10) State the requirements for airborne collision avoidance X X
system (ACAS).
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.155 ‘Airborne collision avoidance
system (ACAS)’
(11) State the conditions under which an aircraft must be fitted X X X X X
with a weather radar.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.160/CAT.IDE.H.160 ‘Airborne
weather detecting equipment’
(12) State the circumstances under which a cockpit voice X X X X X
recorder (CVR) is compulsory (after 1998).
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.185/CAT.IDE.H.185 ‘Cockpit voice
Page 531 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
recorder’
(13) State the rules regarding the location, construction, X X X X X
installation, and operation of cockpit voice recorders (CVRs)
(after 1998).
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.185/CAT.IDE.H.185 ‘Cockpit voice
recorder’
(14) State the circumstances under which a flight data recorder X X X X X
(FDR) is compulsory (after 1998).
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.190/CAT.IDE.H.190 ‘Flight data
recorder’
(15) State the rules regarding the location, construction, X X X X X
installation, and operation of flight data recorders (FDRs)
(after 1998).
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.190/CAT.IDE.A.190 ‘Flight data
recorder’ and related AMCs/GM
(16) Explain the requirements about seats, seat safety belts, X X X X X
harnesses, and child-restraint devices.
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.205/CAT.IDE.H.205 ‘Seats, seat safety
belts, restraint systems and child restraint devices’
and related AMCs/GM
(17) Explain the requirements about ‘Fasten seat belt’ and X X X X X
‘No smoking’ signs.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.210/CAT.IDE.H.210 ‘Fasten seat
belt and no smoking signs’
(18) Explain the requirements regarding internal doors and X X
curtains.
Page 532 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.215 ‘Internal doors and curtains’
First-aid and emergency equipment
(19) Explain the requirements regarding first-aid kits. X X X X X

Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.220/CAT.IDE.H.220 ‘First-aid kit’ and
related AMCs/GM
(20) Explain the requirements regarding emergency medical kits X X
and first-aid oxygen.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.225 ‘Emergency medical kit’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.225;
AMC2 CAT.IDE.A.225;
AMC3 CAT.IDE.A.225;
AMC4 CAT.IDE.A.225;
GM1 CAT.IDE.A.225;
Point CAT.IDE.A.230 ‘First-aid oxygen’
(21) Detail the rules regarding crew protective breathing X X
equipment.
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.245 ‘Crew protective breathing
equipment’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.245
(22) Describe the type and location of handheld fire X X X X X
extinguishers.
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.250/CAT.IDE.H.250 ‘Hand fire extinguishers’
and related AMCs/GM
Page 533 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(23) Describe the location of crash axes and crowbars. X X
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.255 ‘Crash axe and crowbar’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.255
(24) Specify the colours and markings used to indicate break-in X X X X X
points.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.260/CAT.IDE.H.260 ‘Marking of
break-in points’ and related AMCs/GM
(25) Explain the requirements for means of emergency X X
evacuation.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.265 ‘Means for emergency
evacuation’
(26) Explain the requirements for megaphones. X X X X X
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.270/CAT.IDE.H.270 ‘Megaphones’ and
related AMCs/GM
(27) Explain the requirements for emergency lighting and X X X X X
marking.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.275/CAT.IDE.H.275 ‘Emergency
lighting and marking
(28) Explain the requirements for an emergency locator X X X X X
transmitter (ELT).
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.280/CAT.IDE.H.280 ‘Emergency locator
transmitter (ELT)’ and related AMCs/GM
(29) Explain the requirements for life jackets, life rafts, survival X X X X X
kits, and ELTs.
Page 534 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.285 ‘Flight over water’;
Point CAT.IDE.A.305 ‘Survival equipment’
Point CAT.IDE.H.280 ‘Emergency locator transmitter (ELT)’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.290 ‘Life-jackets’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.295 ‘Crew survival suits’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.300 ‘Life-rafts, survival ELTs and survival
equipment on extended overwater flights’
(30) Explain the requirements for crew survival suit. X X X
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.H.295 ‘Crew survival suits’;
GM1 CAT.IDE.H.295
(31) Explain the requirements for survival equipment. X X X X X
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.305/CAT.IDE.H.305 ‘Survival
equipment’
(32) Explain the additional requirements for helicopters X X X
operating to or from helidecks located in hostile sea areas.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.H.310 ‘Additional requirements for
helicopters conducting offshore operations in a hostile sea
area’
(33) Explain the requirements for emergency flotation X X X
equipment.
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.H.315 ‘Helicopters certified for operating on
water — miscellaneous equipment’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.320 ‘All helicopters on flights over water —
ditching’
Page 535 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
071 01 02 07 Communication and navigation equipment
(01) Explain the general requirements for communication and X X X X X

navigation equipment.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.325 ‘Headset’ and related
AMCs/GM
(02) Explain why the radio-communication equipment must be X X X X X
able to send and receive on 121.5 MHz.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.330/CAT.IDE.H.330 ‘Radio
communication equipment’
(03) Explain the requirements regarding the provision of an audio X X X X X
selector panel.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.335/CAT.IDE.H.335 ‘Audio
selector panel’
(04) List the requirements for radio equipment when flying under X X X X X
VFR by reference to visual landmarks.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.340/CAT.IDE.H.340 ‘Radio
equipment for operations under VFR over routes navigated
by reference to visual landmarks’
(05) List the requirements for communication and navigation X X X X X
equipment when operating under IFR or under VFR over
routes not navigated by reference to visual landmarks.
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.345/CAT.IDE.H.345 ‘Communication and
navigation equipment for operations under IFR or under
VFR over routes not navigated by reference to visual
landmarks’
(06) Explain what equipment is required to operate in airspace X X
Page 536 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
with reduced vertical separation minima (RVSM).
Source: Point SPA.RVSM.110 ‘RVSM equipment
requirements’
(07) Explain the conditions under which a crew member X X X X X
interphone system and public address system are
mandatory.
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.170/CAT.IDE.H.170 ‘Flight crew
interphone system’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.170/CAT.IDE.H.170;
Points CAT.IDE.A.175/CAT.IDE.H.175 ‘Crew member
interphone system’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.175/CAT.IDE.H.175;
Points CAT.IDE.A.180/CAT.IDE.H.180 ‘Public address
system’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.180/CAT.IDE.H.180
(08) List the equipment for operations requiring a radio X X X
communication.
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.H.325 ‘Headset’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.330 ‘Radio communication equipment’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.335 ‘Audio selector panel’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.340 ‘Radio equipment for operations
under VFR over routes navigated by reference to visual
landmarks’
(09) List the equipment for operations that require a radio X X X
navigation system.
Page 537 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.H.325 ‘Headset’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.H.325;
Point CAT.IDE.H.345 ‘Communication and navigation
equipment for operations under IFR or under VFR over
routes not navigated by reference to visual landmarks’
(10) Explain the requirements regarding the provision of a X X X X X
transponder.
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.350/CAT.IDE.H.350 ‘Transponder’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.350/CAT.IDE.H.350
(11) Explain the requirements regarding the provision of X X
electronic data management products.
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.355 ‘Electronic navigation data
management’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.355 ‘Electronic navigation data
management — ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION DATA
PRODUCTS’
071 01 02 09 Flight crew
(01) Explain the requirement regarding flight crew composition X X X X X

and in-flight relief.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.100 ‘Composition of flight crew;
AMC1 ORO.FC.100(c);
Page 538 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Point ORO.FC.105 ‘Designation as pilot-in-
command/commander’;
AMC1 ORO.FC.105(b)(2);(c);
GM1 ORO.FC.105 (b)(2);
AMC1 ORO.FC.105(c);
Point ORO.FC.110 ‘Flight engineer’;
Point ORO.FC.115 ‘Crew resource management (CRM)
training’;
Point ORO.FC.200 ‘Composition of flight crew’;
AMC1 ORO.FC.200(a);
Point ORO.FC.A.201 ‘In-flight relief of flight crew members’;
Point ORO.FC.202 Single-pilot operations under IFR or at
night
(02) Explain the requirement for conversion training and X X X X X
checking.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.120 ‘Operator conversion training’;
Point ORO.FC.145 ‘Provision of training’;
Point ORO.FC.220 ‘Operator conversion training and
checking’;
and related AMCs/GM
(03) Explain the requirement for differences training and X X X X X
familiarisation training.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.125 ‘Differences training and familiarisation
training’;
AMC1 ORO.FC.125
Page 539 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(04) Explain the conditions for upgrade from co-pilot to X X X X X
commander.
Source: Point ORO.FC.205 ‘Command course’
(05) Explain the minimum qualification requirements to operate X X X X X
as a commander.
Source: Point ORO.FC.A.250 ‘Commanders holding a CPL(A)’
(06) Explain the requirement for recurrent training and checking. X X X X X
Source: Point ORO.FC.230 ‘Recurrent training and checking’
(07) Explain the requirement for a pilot to operate on either X X X X X
pilot’s seat.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.235 ‘Pilot qualification to operate in either
pilot’s seat’;
AMC1 ORO.FC.235(d);
GM1 ORO.FC.235(f);(g)
(08) Explain the minimum recent experience requirements for X X X X X
the commander and the co-pilot.
Source:
Point FCL.060 ‘Recent experience’;
AMC1 FCL.060(b)(1);
GM1 FCL.060(b)(1)
(09) Specify the route and aerodrome/heliport knowledge X X X X X
required for a PIC/commander.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.105 ‘Designation as pilot-in-command/
commander’;
Page 540 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
AMC1 ORO.FC.105(b)(2);(c);
GM1 ORO.FC.105(b)(2);
AMC1 ORO.FC.105(c)
(10) Explain the requirement to operate on more than one X X X X X
aircraft type or variant.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.140 ‘Operation on more than one type or
variant’;
Point ORO.FC.240 ‘Operation on more than one type or
variant’;
AMC1 ORO.FC.240(a)(1)
(11) Explain that when a flight crew member operates both X X X X X
helicopters and aeroplanes, the operations are limited to
one of each type.
Source: Point ORO.FC.240 ‘Operation on more than one
type or variant’
(12) Explain the requirement(s) for training records. X X X X X
Source: Point ORO.MLR.115 ‘Record-keeping’
(13) Explain the crew members’ responsibilities in the execution X X X X X
of their duties, and define the commander’s authority.
Source:
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.100 ‘Crew responsibilities;
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.105 ‘Responsibilities of the
commander;
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.110 ‘Authority of the commander’
(14) Explain the operator’s and commander’s responsibilities X X X X X
regarding persons on board, admission to the flight crew
Page 541 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
compartment and carriage of unauthorised persons or
cargo.
Source:
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.135 ‘Admission to the flight crew
compartment;
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.165 ‘Method of carriage of persons;
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.105 ‘Responsibilities of the
commander’
(15) Explain the requirements for the initial operator’s crew X X X X X
resource management (CRM) training.
Source: Point ORO.FC.215 ‘Initial operator’s crew resource
management (CRM) training’
071 01 02 10 Cabin crew/crew members other than flight crew
(01) Explain who is regarded as cabin crew member. X X X X X

Source: Regulation (EU) No 965/2012, Annex I ‘Definitions’
(02) Detail the requirements regarding the number and X X X X X
composition of cabin crew.
Source:
Point ORO.CC.100 ‘Number and composition of cabin crew;
AMC1 ORO.CC.100;
GM1 ORO.CC.100;
Point ORO.CC.205 ‘Reduction of the number of cabin crew
during ground operations and in unforeseen circumstances’
(03) Explain the conditions and the additional conditions for X X X X X
assignment to duties.
Source:
Page 542 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Point ORO.CC.110 ‘Conditions for assignment to duties;
Point ORO.CC.210 ‘Additional conditions for assignment to
duties;
GM1 ORO.CC.210(d)
(04) Explain the requirements regarding senior cabin crew X X X X X
members.
Source:
Point ORO.CC.200 ‘Senior cabin crew member;
AMC1 ORO.CC.200(c);(d);(e)
(05) Explain the conditions for operating on more than one X X X X X
aircraft type or variant.
Source:
Point ORO.CC.250 ‘Operation on more than one aircraft
type or variant;
AMC1 ORO.CC.250(b);
GM1 ORO.CC.250
(06) Explain what is the operator’s responsibility regarding the X X X X X
distinction between cabin crew members and additional
crew members.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.115 ‘Personnel or crew
members other than cabin crew in the passenger
compartment’
071 01 02 12 Flight and duty time limitations and rest requirements
(01) Explain the definitions used for the regulation of flight time X X
limitations.
Page 543 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source:
Point ORO.FTL.100 ‘Scope’;
Point ORO.FTL.105 ‘Definitions’ (values of Table 1
excluded)
(02) Explain the flight and duty time limitations. X X
Source:
Point ORO.FTL.200 ‘Home base’;
Point ORO.FTL.210 ‘Flight times and duty periods’
(03) Explain the requirements regarding the maximum daily flight X X
duty period.
Source:
Point ORO.FTL.205 ‘Flight duty period (FDP)’;
Point ORO.FTL.205(b) ‘Basic maximum daily FDP’ (use of
the tables but not memorisation)
(04) Explain the requirements regarding rest periods. X X
Source: Point ORO.FTL.235 ‘Rest periods’
(05) Explain the possible extension of flight duty period due to in- X X
flight rest.
Source:
Point ORO.FTL.205(e) ‘Maximum daily FDP with the use of
extensions due to in-flight rest’
(06) Explain that it is the captain’s discretion to extend flight duty X X
in case of unforeseen circumstances in actual flight
operations.
Source:
Page 544 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
Point ORO.FTL.205(f) ‘Unforeseen circumstances in flight
operations — commander’s discretion’
(07) Explain the requirement regarding standby. X X
Source: Point ORO.FTL.225 ‘Standby and duties at the
airport’
071 01 03 00 Long-range flights
071 01 03 01 Flight management
(01) Minimum time routes: define and interpret minimum time X

route (route that gives the shortest flight time from
departure to destination adhering to all ATC and airspace
restrictions).
Source: N/A
(02) State the circumstances in which a take-off alternate must X X
be selected.
Source:
aeroplanes;
(03) State the maximum flight distance of a take-off alternate for: X X
— two-engined aeroplanes;
— ETOPS-approved aeroplanes;
— three- or four-engined aeroplanes.
Source:
aeroplanes’;
Page 545 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(04) State the factors to be considered in the selection of a take- X X
off alternate.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.185 ‘Planning minima for IFR flights —
aeroplanes’;
helicopters’
(05) State when a destination alternate need not be selected. X X
Source:
aeroplanes’;
(06) State when two destination alternates must be selected. X X
Source:
aeroplanes’;
(07) State the factors to be considered in the selection of a X X
destination alternate aerodrome.
Source:
aeroplanes’;
Page 546 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
helicopters’
(08) State the factors to be considered in the selection of an en- X X
route alternate aerodrome.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.185 ‘Planning minima for IFR
flights — aeroplanes’
071 01 03 02 Transoceanic and polar flights
(ICAO Doc 7030 ‘Regional Supplementary Procedures —
North Atlantic Operations and Airspace Manual’)
(01) According to ICAO Doc 7030, explain that special rules apply X
to the North Atlantic (NAT) Region, and crews need to be
specifically trained before flying in this area.
Source: NAT 007, 1.3.8 Crew Training
(02) Describe the possible indications of navigation system X
degradation, including any system-generated warning.
Source: NAT 007, Chapter 12 Procedures in the event of
navigation system degradation or failure
(03) Describe by what emergency means course and inertial X
navigation system (INS) can be cross-checked in the case of
three navigation systems and two navigation systems.
Source: NAT 007, Chapter 12 Procedures in the event of
navigation system degradation or failure
(04) Describe the general ICAO procedures applicable in NAT X
airspace if the aircraft is unable to continue the flight in
accordance with its air traffic control (ATC) clearance.
Source: NAT 007, 13.2 General procedures
(05) Describe the ICAO procedures applicable in NAT airspace in X
case of radio-communication failure.
Page 547 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source: NAT 007, 6.6 HF Communications failure
(06) Describe the recommended initial action if an aircraft is X
unable to obtain a revised ATC clearance.
Source: NAT 007, Chapter 13 Special procedures for in-flight
contingencies
(07) Describe the subsequent action for aircraft able to maintain X
assigned flight level and for aircraft unable to maintain
assigned flight level.
Source: NAT 007, Chapter 13 Special procedures for in-flight
contingencies
(08) Describe determination of tracks and courses for random X
routes in NAT airspace.
Source: ICAO Doc 7030, NAT 2.1.9.1 General; NAT 007,
2.1.3; NAT 007, Chapter 4 Flight Planning
(09) Specify the method by which planned tracks are defined (by X
latitude and longitude) in the NAT airspace: when operating
predominately in an east–west direction south of 70°N, and
when operating predominately in an east–west direction
north of 70°N.
Source: ICAO Doc 7030, NAT 2.1.9 Route; NAT 007,
Chapter 4 (Flights Planning on Random Route Segments in a
Predominantly East - West Direction)
(10) State the maximum flight time recommended between X
significant points on random routes.
Chapter 4 (Flights Planning on Random Route Segments in a
Predominantly East - West Direction and Predominantly
North - South Direction)
Page 548 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(11) Specify the method by which planned tracks for random X
routes are defined for flights operating predominantly in a
north–south direction.
Chapter 4 (Flights Planning on Random Routes in a
Predominantly North - South Direction)
(12) Describe how the desired random route must be specified in X
the ATC flight plan.
Source: NAT 007, 4.2 Flight planning requirements on
specific routes
(13) Describe what precautions can be taken when operating in X
the area of compass unreliability as a contingency against
INS failure.
Source:
NAT 007, Chapter 12 Procedures in the event of navigation
system degradation or failure (not including detailed
information on route structures and their coordinates);
NAT 007, Chapter 8 (Master document — position plotting)
071 01 03 03 North Atlantic High Level Airspace (NAT HLA)
NAT Region
North Atlantic Operations and Airspace Manual
(NAT Doc 007 Version 2017-1 and NAT Doc 7030)
(01) State the lateral dimensions (in general terms) and vertical X
limits of the NAT HLA.
Source: NAT 007, 17.1 GENERAL: 17.1.1 and 17.1.2
(02) Define the following acronyms: X
LRNS, MASPS, NAT HLA, OCA, OTS, PRM, RVSM, SLOP, and
Page 549 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
WATRS.
Source: NAT 007, Glossary of Terms
(03) State the NAT HLA operations. X
Source: NAT 007, 1.1.2; 1.1.3; 1.1.5; 1.1.6; 1.1.7; 1.2.1;
1.2.2; 1.3.1; 1.3.2; 1.3.6; 1.3.7; 1.3.8; 1.3.9; 1.3.10; 1.3.11;
1.3.12
(04) Describe the routes for aircraft with only one long-range X
navigation system (LRNS).
Source: NAT 007, 1.4.1
(05) Describe the routes for aircraft with short-range navigation X
equipment only.
Source: NAT 007, 1.4.2; 1.4.3
(06) Explain why the horizontal (i.e. latitudinal and longitudinal) X
and vertical navigation performance of operators within
NAT HLA is monitored on a continual basis.
(07) Describe the organised track system (OTS). X
Source: NAT 007, 2.1 GENERAL; 2.2 Construction of the
organised track system (OTS)
(08) State the OTS changeover periods. X
Source: NAT 007, 2.4 OTS Changeover periods
(09) Describe the NAT track message. X
Source: NAT 007, 2.3 The NAT track message
(10) Illustrate routes between northern Europe and the X
Spain/Canaries/Lisbon flight information region (FIR)
(T9, T13 and T16) within NAT HLA.
Page 550 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source: NAT 007, 3.2 Other routes within the NAT HLA
(11) Describe the function of the North American Routes (NARs) X
and Shannon Oceanic Transition Area (SOTA) and Northern
Oceanic Transition Area (NOTA).
Source: NAT 007, 3.3 Route structures adjacent to the NAT
HLA
(12) State that all flights should plan to operate on great-circle X
tracks joining successive significant waypoints.
(13) State that during the hours of validity of the OTS, operators X
are encouraged to plan flights:
— in accordance with the OTS;
— or along a route to join or leave an outer track of the
OTS;
— or on a random route to remain clear of the OTS,
either laterally or vertically.
(14) State which flight levels are available on OTS tracks during X
OTS periods.
Source: NAT 007, 4.1.10; 4.1.11 and 4.1.12 (dates not
required)
(15) State which flight levels are to be planned on random tracks X
or outside OTS periods.
Source: NAT 007, 4.1.13
(16) Selection of cruising altitude. X
Specify the appropriate cruising levels for normal long-range
IFR flights and for those operating on the North Atlantic OTS.
Page 551 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source:
NAT 007, Chapter 4 Flight Planning - Flight Levels;
SERA
(17) Oceanic ATC clearances X
State that it is recommended that pilots should request their
oceanic clearance at least 40 minutes prior to the oceanic
entry point estimated time of arrival (ETA).
(18) State that pilots should notify the oceanic area control X
centre (OAC) of the maximum acceptable flight level possible
at the boundary.
(19) State that at some aerodromes which are situated close to X
oceanic boundaries, the oceanic clearance must be obtained
before departure.
(20) State that if an aircraft, which would normally be RVSM- or X
NAT HLA-approved, encounters, whilst en-route to the NAT
Oceanic Airspace, a critical in-flight equipment failure, or at
dispatch is unable to meet the MEL requirements for RVSM
or NAT HLA approval of the flight, then the pilot must advise
ATC at initial contact when requesting oceanic clearance.
(21) State that after obtaining and reading back the clearance, X
the pilot should monitor the forward estimate for oceanic
entry, and if this changes by 3 minutes or more, unless
providing position reports via automatic dependent
surveillance — contract (ADS-C), the pilot must pass a
Page 552 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
revised estimate on to ATC.
(22) State that pilots should pay particular attention when the X
issued clearance differs from the flight plan as a significant
proportion of navigation errors investigated in the NAT
Region involve aircraft which have followed their flight plan
rather than the differing clearance.
(23) State that if the entry point of the oceanic route for which X
the flight is cleared differs from that originally requested or
the oceanic flight level differs from the current flight level,
the pilot is responsible for requesting and obtaining the
necessary domestic reclearance.
(24) State that there are three elements to an oceanic clearance: X
route, Mach number, and flight level, and that these
elements serve to provide for the three basic elements of
separation: lateral, longitudinal, and vertical.
(25) Communications and position-reporting procedures X
State that pilots communicate with OACs via aeradio stations
staffed by communicators who have no executive ATC
authority.
(26) State that messages are relayed from the ground station to X
the air traffic controllers of the relevant OAC for action.
Page 553 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(27) State that frequencies from the lower HF bands tend to be X
used for communications during night-time and those from
the higher bands during daytime. Generally, in NAT,
frequencies of less than 7 MHz are utilised at night and
frequencies greater than 8 MHz are utilised during the day.
When initiating contact with an aeradio station, the pilot
should state the HF frequency in use.
Source: NAT 007, 6.1.4 and 6.1.7
(28) State that since oceanic traffic typically communicates with X
ATC through aeradio facilities, a satellite communication
(SATCOM) call, made due to unforeseen inability to
communicate by other means, should be made to such a
facility rather than the ATC centre, unless the urgency of the
communication dictates otherwise.
Source: NAT 007, 6.1.17
(29) State that an air-to-air VHF frequency has been established X
for worldwide use when aircraft are out of range of VHF
ground stations which utilise the same or adjacent
frequencies. This frequency, 123.45 MHz, is intended for
pilot-to-pilot exchanges of operationally significant
information.
(30) State that any pilot, who provides position reports via data X
link and encounters significant meteorological phenomena
(such as moderate/severe turbulence or icing, volcanic ash
or thunderstorms), should report this information.
(31) State that all turbine-engined aeroplanes having a maximum X
Page 554 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
certified take-off mass exceeding 5 700 kg or authorised to
carry more than 19 passengers are required to carry and
operate airborne collision avoidance system (ACAS) II in the
NAT Region.
(32) State that even with the growing use of data-link X
communications, a significant volume of NAT air–ground
communications are conducted using voice on single
sideband (SSB) HF frequencies. To support air–ground ATC
communications in the North Atlantic Region, 24 HF
frequencies have been allocated, in bands ranging from 2.8
to 18 MHz.
(33) Application of the Mach number technique (NAT HLA) X
State that practical experience has shown that when two or
more turbojet aircraft, operating along the same route at
the same flight level, maintain the same Mach number, they
are more likely to maintain a constant time interval between
each other than when using other methods.
(34) State that after leaving oceanic airspace, pilots must X
maintain their assigned Mach number in domestic controlled
airspace unless and until the appropriate ATC unit authorises
a change.
North Atlantic High Level Airspace (NAT HLA) flight
operation and navigation procedures
(35) NAT HLA flight operation and navigation procedures X
Page 555 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
State that the pre-flight procedures for any NAT HLA flight
must include a Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) time
check.
(36) Describe the function and use of the master document. X
Source: NAT 007, 8.2.5 to 8.2.9
(37) State the requirements for position plotting. X
Source: NAT 007, 8.2.10 to 8.2.13
(38) Describe the pre-flight procedures for: X
— the alignment of IRS;
— the satellite navigation availability prediction
programme for flights using global navigation satellite
long-range navigation system (GNSS LRNS);
— loading of initial waypoints; and
— flight plan check.
Source: NAT 007, 8.3.2 to 8.3.5; 8.3.6 to 8.3.8; 8.3.13 to
8.3.17
(39) Describe the strategic lateral offset procedure (SLOP) and X
state that along a route or track there will be three positions
that an aircraft may fly: centre line, or 1 or 2 miles right.
Source: NAT 007, 8.5.1 to 8.5.5
(40) State that RNAV 10 retains the RNP 10 designation, as X
specified in the Performance-based Navigation Manual
(ICAO Doc 9613), 1.2.3.5. (ICAO Doc 7030, NAT Chapter 4).
(41) State that both aircraft and operators must be RNP 10- or X
RNP 4-approved by the State of the Operator or the State of
Page 556 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Registry, as appropriate.
(42) State that RNP 10 is the minimum navigation specification X
for the application of 93 km (50 NM) lateral separation.
Source: NAT 007, 1.3.4 and 4.1.18
(43) Reduced vertical separation minima (RVSM) flight in NAT X
HLA
State the altimeter cross-check to be performed before
entering NAT HLA.
Source: NAT 007, 9.1.10
(44) State the altimeter cross-check to be performed when X
entering and flying in NAT HLA.
Source: NAT 007, 9.1.12
(45) State that pilots not using controller–pilot data-link X
communications (CPDLC)/ADS-C always report to ATC
immediately on leaving the current cruising level and on
reaching any new cruising level.
Source: NAT 007, 9.1.15
(46) State that flight crew should report when a 300-ft deviation X
or more occurs.
Source: NAT 007, 11.3.4 and 11.3.6
(47) Navigation planning procedures X
List the factors to be considered by the commander before
commencing the flight.
Source: NAT 007, 8.3 Pre-flight procedures
Navigation system degradation
Page 557 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(NAT Doc 007, Chapter 12)
(48) For this part, consider aircraft equipped with only two X
operational LRNSs and state the requirements for the
following situations:
— one system fails before take-off;
— one system fails before the OCA boundary is reached;
— one system fails after the OCA boundary is crossed;
and
— the remaining system fails after entering NAT HLA.
Source: NAT 007, 12.2
Special procedures for in-flight contingencies
(NAT Doc 007, Chapter 13)
(49) State the general procedures and also state that the general X
concept of these NAT in-flight contingency procedures is,
whenever operationally feasible, to offset the assigned route
by 15 NM and climb or descend to a level which differs from
those normally used by 500 ft if below FL 410 or by 1 000 ft if
above FL 410.
Source: NAT 007, 13.1 and 13.2
(50) State all the factors which may affect the direction of turn X
including:
— direction to an alternate aerodrome;
— terrain clearance;
— levels allocated on adjacent routes or tracks and any
known SLOP offsets adopted by other nearby traffic.
Source: NAT 007, 13.3.2
(51) State that if the deviation around severe weather is to be X
Page 558 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
greater than 10 NM, the assigned flight level must be
changed by ± 300 ft depending on the followed track and the
direction of the deviation.
Source: NAT 007, 13.4
071 01 03 04 Extended-range operations with two-engined aeroplanes
(ETOPS)
(01) State that ETOPS approval is part of an AOC. X
Source:
Point SPA.ETOPS.100 ‘ETOPS’;
Point SPA.ETOPS.105 ‘ETOPS operational approval’
(02) State that prior to conducting an ETOPS flight, an operator X
shall ensure that a suitable ETOPS en-route alternate is
available, within either the approved diversion time or a
diversion time based on the MEL-generated serviceability
status of the aeroplane, whichever is shorter.
Source: Point SPA.ETOPS.110 ‘ETOPS en-route alternate
aerodrome’
(03) State the requirements for take-off alternate. X
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.180 ‘Selection of aerodromes —
aeroplanes’
(04) State the planning minima for ETOPS en-route alternate. X
Source: Point SPA.ETOPS.115 ‘ETOPS en-route alternate
aerodrome planning minima’
(05) Navigation-planning procedures. X
Describe the operator’s responsibilities concerning ETOPS
routes.
Page 559 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source:
general’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.145 ‘Establishment of minimum flight
altitudes’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.150 ‘Fuel policy’
(06) Selection of a route. X
Describe the limitations on extended-range operations with
two-engined aeroplanes with and without ETOPS approval.
(07) Selection of alternate aerodrome. X
State the maximum flight distance of a take-off alternate for:
— two-engined aeroplanes;
— ETOPS-approved aeroplanes;
— three- or four-engined aeroplanes.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.180 ‘Selection of aerodromes —
aeroplanes’
(08) State the maximum distance from an adequate aerodrome X
for two-engined aeroplanes without an ETOPS approval.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.140 ‘Maximum distance from an
adequate aerodrome for two-engined aeroplanes without
an ETOPS approval’
(09) State the requirement for alternate aerodrome accessibility X
check for ETOPS operations.
071 02 00 00 SPECIAL OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND HAZARDS —
GENERAL ASPECTS
071 02 01 00 Operations manual
(Points ORO.MLR.100, ORO.MLR.101 and related
Page 560 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
AMCs/GM)
071 02 01 01 Operating procedures
(01) Explain the general rules for the operations manual. X X X X X

Source:
Point ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual — general’;
AMC1 ORO.MLR.100
(02) Explain the structure and subject headings of the operations X X X X X
manual.
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.101 ‘Operations manual — structure for
commercial air transport’;
GM1 ORO.MLR.100(k) ‘Operations manual — general’
(03) Explain the requirements for a journey log or equivalent. X X X X X
Source: Point ORO.MLR.110 ‘Journey log’;
AMC1 ORO.MLR.110
(04) Describe the requirements regarding the operational flight X X X X X
plan.
Source: Point ORO.MLR.115 ‘Record-keeping’
(05) Explain the requirements for document-storage periods. X X X X X
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.115 ‘Record-keeping’;
AMC1 ORO.MLR.115;
GM1 ORO.MLR.115(c);(d)
(06) Explain that all non-type-related operational policies, X X X X X
instructions and procedures required for a safe operation
are included in Part A of the operations manual.
Page 561 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source:
commercial air transport;
AMC3 ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual — general’
(main topics in Part A, e.g. General/Basic, etc.)
(07) State that the following items are included into Part A: X X X X X
— de-icing and anti-icing on the ground;
— adverse and potentially hazardous atmospheric
conditions;
— wake turbulence;
— incapacitation of crew members;
— use of the minimum equipment list (MEL) and
configuration deviation list(s) (CDL);
— security;
— handling of accidents and occurrences.
Source:
(08) State that the following items are included into Part A: X X
— altitude alerting system procedures;
— ground proximity warning system procedures;
— policy and procedures for the use of traffic alert and
collision avoidance system (TCAS)/airborne collision
avoidance system (ACAS).
Source:
Page 562 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(09) State that rotor downwash is included into Part A. X X X
Source:
071 02 01 02 Aeroplane/helicopter operating matters — type-related
(01) State that all type-related instructions and procedures X X X X X

required for a safe operation are included in
Part B of the operations manual. They take account of any
differences between types, variants or individual aircraft
used by an operator.
Source: Point ORO.MLR.101 ‘Operations manual —
structure for commercial air transport’
(02) State that the following items are included into Part B: X X
— abnormal and emergency procedures;
— configuration deviation list (CDL);
— minimum equipment list (MEL);
— emergency evacuation procedures.
Source:
(03) State that the following items are included into Part B: X X X
— emergency procedures;
Page 563 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
— configuration deviation list (CDL);
— minimum equipment list (MEL);
— emergency evacuation procedures.
Source:
071 02 01 03 Minimum equipment list (MEL) and master minimum
equipment list (MMEL)
(01) Describe the following terms: ‘commencement of flight’, X X X X X
‘inoperative’, ‘MEL’, ‘MMEL’, ‘rectification interval’.
Source:
GM1 ORO.MLR.105(a) ‘Minimum equipment list’;
CS-MMEL;
GM2 ORO.MLR.105(d)(3)
(02) Explain the relation between MMEL and MEL. X X X X X
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.105 ‘Minimum equipment list’;
AMC1 ORO.MLR.105(j);(g)
GM1 ORO.MLR.105(j)
(03) Define the ‘extent of the MEL’. X X X X X
Source: AMC2 ORO.MLR.105(d)(3) ‘Minimum equipment
list’
(04) Explain the responsibilities of the operator and the X X X X X
competent authority with regard to MEL and MMEL.
Page 564 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.105 ‘Minimum equipment list’;
AMC1 ORO.MLR.105(c);
GM1 ORO.MLR.105(d)(3)
(05) Explain the responsibilities of the flight crew members with X X X X X
regard to MEL.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.105/CAT.IDE.H.105 ‘Minimum
equipment for flight’
(06) Explain the responsibilities of the commander with regard to X X X X X
MEL.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.175 ‘Flight preparation’;
Point CAT.IDE.A.105/CAT.IDE.H.105 ‘Minimum equipment
for flight’
071 02 02 00 Icing conditions
071 02 02 01 On-ground de-icing/anti-icing procedures,

types of de-icing/anti-icing fluids
‘anti-icing’, ‘de-icing’, ‘one-step de-icing/anti-icing’, ‘two-
step de-icing/anti-icing’, ‘holdover time’.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De-
icing/Anti-icing Operations’, Glossary
(02) Describe ‘the clean aircraft concept’ as presented in the X X
relevant chapter of ICAO Doc 9640.
Page 565 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
icing/Anti-icing Operations’, Chapter 2
(03) List the types of de-icing/anti-icing fluids available. X X X X X
icing/Anti-icing Operations’, Chapter 4, 4.1
(04) Explain the procedure to be followed when an aeroplane has X X
exceeded the holdover time.
(05) Interpret the guidelines for fluid holdover times and list the X X
factors which can reduce the fluid protection time.
icing/Anti-icing Operations’, Chapter 5: 5.1, 5.2 and
Attachment ( 5 tables)
(06) Explain how the pre-take-off check, which is the X X
responsibility of the pilot-in-command, ensures that the
critical surfaces of the aircraft are free of ice, snow, slush or
frost just prior to take-off. This check shall be accomplished
as close to the time of take-off as possible and is normally
made from within the aeroplane by visually checking the
wings.
(07) Explain why an aircraft has to be treated symmetrically. X X
(08) Explain why an operator shall establish procedures to be X X X X X
followed when ground de-icing and anti-icing and related
inspections of the aircraft are necessary.
Page 566 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
icing/Anti-icing Operations’, Chapter 1: Introduction 1.1
to 1.6
(09) Explain why a commander shall not commence take-off X X X X X
unless the external surfaces are clear of any deposit which
might adversely affect the performance or controllability of
the aircraft except as permitted in the flight manual.
Source:
ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De-icing/Anti-
icing Operations’;
ground procedures’
(10) Explain the requirements for operations in icing conditions. X X X X X
Source:
ground procedures’;
flight procedures’;
Point CAT.IDE.A.165 ‘Additional equipment for operations
in icing conditions at night’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.165 ‘Additional equipment for operations
in icing conditions at night’
(11) Explain why safety must come before commercial pressures X X X X X
in relation to de-icing and anti-icing of aircraft.
(Consider time and financial cost versus direct and indirect
effects of an incident/accident).
Source: N/A
Page 567 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
071 02 02 02 Procedure to apply in case of performance deterioration,
on ground/in flight
(01) Explain that the effects of icing are wide-ranging, X X X X X
unpredictable and dependent upon individual aircraft
design. The magnitude of these effects is dependent upon
many variables, but the effects can be both significant and
dangerous.
(02) Explain that in icing conditions, for a given speed and a given X X X X X
angle of attack, wing lift can be reduced by as much as 30 %
and drag increased by up to 40 %. State that these changes
in lift and drag will significantly increase stall speed, reduce
controllability, and alter flight characteristics.
(03) Explain that ice on critical surfaces and on the airframe may X X X X X
also break away during take-off and be ingested into
engines, possibly damaging fan and compressor blades.
(04) Explain that ice forming on pitot tubes and static ports or on X X X X X
angle-of-attack vanes may give false altitude, airspeed,
angle-of-attack and engine-power information for air-data
systems.
(05) Explain that ice, frost and snow formed on the critical X X X X X
Page 568 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
surfaces on the ground can have a totally different effect on
aircraft flight characteristics than ice, frost and snow formed
in flight.
(06) Explain that flight in known icing conditions is subject to X X X X X
limitations that are contained in Part B of the operations
manual.
Source: AMC4 ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual —
general’
(07) Explain where procedures and performances regarding flight X X X X X
in expected or actual icing conditions can be found.
Source: AMC4 ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual —
general’
071 02 03 00 Bird-strike risk
071 02 03 01 Bird-strike risk and avoidance
(01) Explain that the presence of birds that constitute a potential X X X X X

hazard to aircraft operations is part of the pre-flight
information.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, 8.1 Pre-flight information
(02) Explain how information concerning the presence of birds X X X X X
observed by aircrews is made available to the aeronautical
information service (AIS) for distribution as the
circumstances dictate.
(03) Explain that the Aeronautical Information Publication (AIP) X X X X X
Section En-route (ENR) 5.6 contains information regarding
Page 569 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
bird migrations.
(04) Explain significant data regarding bird strikes contained in X X X X X
ICAO Doc 9137 ‘Airport Services Manual’.
Source: ICAO Doc 9137 ‘Airport Services Manual’, Chapter 1
(05) Explain why birds constitute a hazard to aircraft (damage to X X X X X
probes, sensors, engines, windscreens, airframes,
degradation in vision, etc.).
Source: N/A, though history in ICAO Doc 9137, Chapter 1.
For more information, refer to the EGAST safety promotion
leaflet ‘Bird strike, a European risk with local specificities’,
available at:
www.easa.europa.eu/system/files/dfu/EGAST_GA6-bird-
strikes-final.pdf
(06) Define the commander’s responsibilities regarding the X X X X X
reporting of bird hazards and bird strikes.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.105 ‘Responsibilities of the
commander’
(07) State that birds tend to flock to areas where food is plentiful. X X X X X
Such areas include: rubbish (garbage) facilities; open sewage
treatment works; recently ploughed land; as well as their
natural habitats.
Source: N/A
071 02 04 00 Noise abatement
071 02 04 01 Noise-abatement procedures
(01) Define the operator’s responsibilities regarding the X X X X X
Page 570 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
establishment of noise-abatement procedures.
Source:
aeroplanes’
helicopters’
(02) State the main purpose of noise-abatement departure X X X X X
procedure (NADP) 1 and NADP 2.
Services — Aircraft Operations’ (PANS-OPS), Volume 1, Part
I, Section 7, Appendix to Chapter 3, 1.1
(03) State that the PIC/commander has the authority to decide X X X X X
not to execute an NADP if conditions preclude the safe
execution of the procedure.
Services — Aircraft Operations’ (PANS-OPS), Volume 1,
Part I, Section 7, Chapter 3, 3.2.1 General
071 02 04 02 Influence of the flight procedure (departure, cruise,
approach)
(01) List the main parameters for NADP 1 and NADP 2 X X
(i.e. speeds, heights and configuration).
Part I, Section 7, Chapter 3, 3.3 and Appendix to Chapter 3
(02) State that a runway lead-in lighting system should be X X X X X
provided where it is desired to provide visual guidance along
a specific approach path for noise-abatement purposes.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, 5.3.7.1/Volume 2,
Page 571 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
5.3.4.1
(03) State that detailed information about noise-abatement X X X X X
procedures is to be found in Part ‘Aerodromes’ (AD),
Sections 2 and 3 of the AIP.
071 02 04 03 Influence by the pilot (power setting, low drag)
(01) List the adverse operating conditions under which noise- X X
abatement procedures in the form of reduced-power take-
off should not be required
Services — Aircraft Operations’ (PANS-OPS), Volume 1, Part
I, Section 3, Chapter 1, 1.2.3 Reduced power take-off
(02) List the adverse operating conditions under which noise- X X
abatement procedures during approach should not be
required.
Part I, Section 7, Chapter 2, 2.1 Noise preferential runways
(03) State the rule regarding the use of reverse thrust on landing. X X
Part I, Section 7, Chapter 3, 3.5 Aeroplane operating
procedures — landing
071 02 04 04 Influence by the pilot (power setting, track of helicopter)
(01) List the adverse operating conditions under which noise- X X X

abatement procedures in the form of reduced-power take-
off should not be required.
Page 572 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
071 02 05 00 Fire and smoke
071 02 05 01 Carburettor fire
(01) Explain that the actions to be taken in the event of a X X X X X

carburettor fire may be type-specific and should be known
by the pilot.
071 02 05 02 Engine fire
(01) Explain that the actions to be taken in the event of an engine X X X X X

fire may be type-specific and should be known by the pilot.
071 02 05 03 Fire in the cabin, in the flight crew compartment and in the
cargo compartment
(01) Identify the different types of extinguishants used in X X X X X
handheld fire extinguishers and the type of fire for which
each one may be used.
(02) Describe the precautions to be considered when applying X X X X X
fire extinguishants.
(03) Identify the appropriate handheld fire extinguishers to be X X X X X
used in the flight crew compartment, the passenger cabin
and lavatories, and in the cargo compartments.
071 02 05 04 Smoke in the flight crew compartment and in the cabin
(01) Explain which actions should be taken in the event of smoke X X X X X

in the flight crew compartment or in the cabin, why these
actions may be type-specific, and why they should be known
by the pilot.
071 02 05 05 Actions in case of overheated brakes
Page 573 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Describe the problems and safety precautions in the event X X
that brakes overheat after a heavy-weight landing or a
rejected take-off.
(02) Explain the difference in the way steel and carbon brakes X X
react to energy absorption and the operational
consequences.
071 02 06 00 Decompression of pressurised cabin
071 02 06 01 Slow decompression
(01) Explain what can cause, and how to detect, a slow X X

decompression or an automatic pressurisation system
failure.
(02) Describe the actions required following a slow X X
decompression.
071 02 06 02 Rapid and explosive decompression
(01) Explain what can cause, and how to detect, a rapid or an X X

explosive decompression.
071 02 06 03 Dangers and action to be taken
(01) Describe the actions required following a rapid or explosive X X

decompression.
(02) Describe the effects on aircraft occupants of a slow X X
decompression and of a rapid or explosive decompression.
071 02 07 00 Wind shear and microburst
071 02 07 01 Effects and recognition during departure and approach
(01) Explain how to identify low-level wind shear. X X X X X
Page 574 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source: ICAO Circular 186 ‘Wind Shear’
071 02 07 02 Actions to avoid and actions to take when encountering
wind shear
(01) Describe the effects of wind shear and the actions required X X X X X
when wind shear is encountered at take-off and approach.
(02) Describe the precautions to be taken when wind shear is X X X X X
suspected at take-off and approach.
(03) Describe the effects of wind shear and the actions required X X X X X
following entry into a strong downdraft wind shear.
(04) Describe a microburst and its effects. X X X X X
071 02 08 00 Wake turbulence
071 02 08 01 Cause
(01) Describe the term ‘wake turbulence’. X X X X X

Source: ICAO Doc 9426 ‘Air Traffic Services Planning
Manual’, Part II
(02) Describe tip vortex circulation. X X X X X
Manual’, Part II
(03) State when vortex generation begins and ends. X X X X X
Manual’, Part II
Page 575 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(04) Describe vortex circulation on the ground with and without X X X X X
crosswind.
Manual’, Part II
071 02 08 02 List of relevant parameters
(01) List the three main factors which, when combined, give the X X X X X
strongest vortices (heavy, clean, slow).
Manual’, Part II
(02) Describe the wind conditions which are worst for wake X X X X X
turbulence near the ground.
Manual’, Part II
071 02 08 03 Actions to be taken when crossing traffic, during take-off
and landing
(01) Describe the actions to be taken to avoid wake turbulence, X X X X X
specifically separations.
Services — Air Traffic Management’ (PANS-ATM), 5.8 Time-
based wake turbulence longitudinal separation minima
071 02 09 00 Security (unlawful events)
071 02 09 01 ICAO Annex 17 and Regulation (EC) No 300/2008

‘aircraft security check’, ‘screening’, ‘security’, ‘security-
restricted area’, ‘unidentified baggage’.
Page 576 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) State the objectives of security. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 17, 2.1 Objectives
071 02 09 02 Use of secondary surveillance radar (SSR)
(01) Describe the commander’s responsibilities concerning X X X X X

notifying the appropriate ATS unit.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Attachment to Annex 17
operation of SSR.
departing from assigned track or cruising level.
(04) Describe the commander’s responsibilities concerning the X X X X X
action required or being requested by an ATS unit to confirm
SSR code and ATS interpretation response.
071 02 09 03 Security (Regulation (EC) No 300/2008 and ICAO Annex 17)
(01) Describe the relationship between Regulation (EC) X X X X X

No 300/2008 and ICAO Annex 17.
Source: Regulation (EC) No 300/2008, Articles 1 and 2
(02) Explain the requirements regarding training programmes. X X X X X
Source: Regulation (EC) No 300/2008, Annex: 10 ‘In-flight
security measures’ and 11 ‘Staff recruitment and training’;
ICAO Annex 17, 13.4 Training programmes
(03) State the requirements regarding reporting acts of unlawful X X X X X
Page 577 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
interference.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, 13.5 Reporting acts of unlawful
interference
(04) State the requirements regarding aircraft search procedures. X X X X X
Source: ICAO Annex 17:
4.3 Measures relating to aircraft;
5.1 Prevention;
13.3 Aeroplane search procedure checklist
071 02 10 00 Emergency and precautionary landing, and ditcing
071 02 10 01 Descriptions
(01) Describe the meaning of: ‘ditching’, ‘precautionary landing’, X X X X X

and ‘emergency landing’.
(02) Describe a ditching procedure. X X X X X
(03) Describe a precautionary landing procedure. X X X X X
(04) Describe an emergency landing procedure. X X X X X
(05) Explain the factors to be considered when deciding to X X X X X
conduct a precautionary/emergency landing or ditching.
071 02 10 02 Cause
(01) List some circumstances that may require a ditching, a X X X X X

precautionary landing or an emergency landing.
071 02 10 03 Passenger information
(01) Describe the briefing to be given to passengers before X X X X X

conducting a precautionary/emergency landing or ditching
Page 578 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(including evacuation).
Source: AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.170 ‘Passenger briefing’
071 02 10 04 Action after a precautionary/emergency landing or ditching
(01) Describe the actions and responsibilities of crew members X X X X X

after landing.
071 02 10 05 Evacuation
(01) Explain why the aircraft must be stopped and the engine(s) X X X X X
shut down before launching an emergency evacuation.
(02) Explain the CS-25 requirements regarding evacuation X X
procedures.
Source: CS 25.803 and Appendix J
071 02 11 00 Fuel jettisoning
071 02 11 01 Safety aspects
(01) Explain why an aircraft may need to jettison fuel so as to X X

reduce its landing mass in order to make a safe landing.
Services — Air Traffic Management’ (PANS-ATM),
15.5.3 Fuel dumping
(02) Explain that when an aircraft that operates within controlled X X
airspace needs to jettison fuel, the flight crew shall
coordinate with ATC the following:
— route to be flown which, if possible, should be clear of
cities and towns, preferably over water and away from
areas where thunderstorms have been reported or are
expected;
— the flight level to be used, which should be not less
Page 579 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
than 1 800 m (6 000 ft); and
— the duration of fuel jettisoning.
Services — Air Traffic Management’ (PANS-ATM),
15.5.3 Fuel dumping
(03) Explain how flaps and slats may adversely affect fuel X X
jettisoning.
Source: CS 25.1001 Fuel jettisoning system
071 02 11 02 Requirements
(01) Explain why a fuel-jettisoning system must be capable of X X

jettisoning enough fuel within 15 minutes.
Source: CS 25.1001 Fuel jettisoning system
071 02 12 00 Transport of dangerous goods by air
071 02 12 01 ICAO Annex 18 (4th Edition, July 2011)

‘dangerous goods’, ‘dangerous goods accident’, ‘dangerous
goods incident’, ‘exemption’, ‘incompatible’, ‘packaging’,
‘UN number’.
(02) Explain that detailed provisions for the transport of X X X X X
dangerous goods by air are contained in the Technical
Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by
Air.
Source:
ICAO Doc 9284 ‘Technical Instructions For The Safe
Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air’;
Page 580 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
ICAO Annex 18, Chapter 2, 2.2.1
(03) State that in the event of an in-flight emergency, the pilot-in- X X X X X
command must inform the ATC of the transport of
dangerous goods by air.
Source: ICAO Annex 18, Chapter 9, 9.5
071 02 12 02 Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous
Goods by Air (ICAO Doc 9284)
(01) Explain the principle of dangerous goods compatibility and X X X X X
segregation.
Source: ICAO Doc 9284 ‘Technical Instructions For The Safe
Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air’
(02) Explain the special requirements for the loading of X X X X X
radioactive materials.
(03) Explain the use of the dangerous goods list. X X X X X
(04) Identify the labels. X X X X X
071 02 12 03 Regulation (EU) No 965/2012 — Annex IV (Part-CAT) and
Annex V (Part-SPA)
(01) Explain the terminology relevant to dangerous goods. X X X X X
Source:
Point SPA.DG.100 ‘Transport of dangerous goods’;
Page 581 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Point SPA.DG.105 ‘Approval to transport dangerous goods’;
Point SPA.DG.110 ‘Dangerous goods information and
documentation’
(02) Explain the scope of that Regulation. X X X X X
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.200 ‘Transport of dangerous
goods’
(03) Explain why the transport of dangerous goods by air is
subject to operator approval.
Source:
AMC1 ARO.OPS.200 ‘Specific approval procedure’
(04) Explain the limitations on the transport of dangerous goods X X X X X
by air.
Source:
documentation’
(05) Explain the requirements for the acceptance of dangerous X X X X X
goods.
Source:
documentation’;
AMC1 SPA.DG.110(b) ‘Dangerous goods information and
documentation’
(06) Explain the requirements regarding inspection for damage, X X X X X
leakage or contamination.
Page 582 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
Source:
documentation’: (a)(1)
(07) Explain the requirement for the provision of information to X X X X X
flight crew.
Source:
documentation’;
AMC1 SPA.DG.110(a);(b) ‘Dangerous goods information
and documentation’
(08) Explain the requirements for dangerous goods incident and X X X X X
accident reports.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.200 ‘Transport of dangerous
goods’
(09) State that some articles and substances, which would X X X X X
otherwise be classed as dangerous goods, can be exempted
if they are part of the aircraft equipment, or required for use
during aeromedical flights. Source:
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.200 ‘Transport of dangerous goods’;
Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air’, 2.2 Exceptions for
dangerous goods of the operator
(10) Explain why some articles and substances may be forbidden X X X X X
for transport by air.
Source:
Page 583 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air’, 2.1 Dangerous goods
forbidden for transport by air under any circumstance
(11) Explain why packing must comply with the specifications of X X X X X
the Technical Instructions.
Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air’, Introductory
chapter, 2.4 (for packing purposes, etc.)
(12) Explain the need for an inspection prior to loading X X X X X
dangerous goods on an aircraft.
Source:
documentation’
(13) Explain why some dangerous goods are designated for X X X X X
carriage only on cargo aircraft.
Source:
ICAO Annex 18, 8.9 Loading on cargo aircraft;
Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air’, GENERAL
PRINCIPLES
(14) Explain how misdeclared or undeclared dangerous goods X X X X X
found in baggage are to be reported.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.200 and related AMCs/GM
071 02 13 00 Contaminated runways
071 02 13 02 Estimated surface friction, friction coefficient
Page 584 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Identify the difference between friction coefficient and X X
estimated surface friction.
(02) State that when estimated surface friction is 4 or 5, the X X
expected braking action is good.
071 02 13 03 Hydroplaning principles and effects
(01) Define the different types of hydroplaning. X X

Source: NASA TM-85652 — Tire friction performance
(02) Compute the two dynamic hydroplaning speeds using the X X
following formulas:
— spin-down speed (rotating tire) (kt) = 9 square root
(pressure in PSI)
— spin-up speed (non-rotating tire) (kt) = 7.7 square root
(pressure in PSI).
(03) State that it is the spin-up speed rather than the spin-down X X
speed which represents the actual tire situation for aircraft
touchdown on flooded runways.
071 02 13 05 SNOWTAM and contamination on the aerodrome
(01) Interpret from a SNOWTAM the contamination and braking X X

action on a runway, taxiways and apron.
Page 585 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) Explain which hazards can be identified from the X X X X X
SNOWTAM/METAR and how to mitigate them.
071 02 14 00 Rotor downwash
071 02 14 01 Describe downwash
(01) Describe the downwash. X X X

071 02 14 02 Effects
(01) Explain its effects: soil erosion, water dispersal and spray, X X X
recirculation, damage to property, loose articles.
071 02 15 00 Operation influence by meteorological conditions
(helicopter)
071 02 15 01 White-out/sand/dust
(01) Give the definition of ‘white-out’. X X X

(02) Describe loss of spatial orientation. X X X
(03) Describe take-off and landing techniques. X X X
071 02 15 02 Strong winds
(01) Describe blade sailing. X X X

(02) Describe wind operating envelopes. X X X
(03) Describe vertical speed problems. X X X
071 02 15 03 Mountain environment
(01) Describe constraints associated with mountain environment. X X X
Page 586 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
071 03 00 00 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES (HELICOPTER)
071 03 01 00 Influence of technical problems
071 03 01 01 Engine failure
(01) Describe recovery techniques in the event of engine failure X X X

during hover, climb, cruise, approach.
071 03 01 02 Fire in the cabin, in the flight crew compartment and in the
engine(s)
(01) Describe the basic actions when encountering fire in the X X X
cabin, flight deck or engine(s).
071 03 01 03 Tail-rotor directional control failure
(01) Describe the basic actions following loss of tail rotor. X X X

(02) Describe the basic actions following loss of directional X X X
control.
071 03 01 04 Ground resonance
(01) Describe recovery actions. X X X

071 03 01 05 Blade stall
(01) Describe cause of and recovery actions when encountering X X X

retreating blade stall.
071 03 01 06 Settling with power (vortex ring)
(01) Describe potential conditions for this event and recovery X X X

actions.
071 03 01 07 Overpitch
Page 587 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Describe recovery actions. X X X
071 03 01 08 Overspeed: rotor/engine
(01) Describe overspeed control. X X X

071 03 01 09 Dynamic rollover
(01) Describe potential conditions for this event and recovery X X X

action.
071 03 01 10 Mast bumping
(01) Describe potential conditions of the ‘conducive to’ and X X X

‘avoidance of’ effect.
071 04 01 00 SPECIALISED OPERATIONS
(Regulation (EU) No 965/2012 on air operations, as
amended)
071 04 01 01 Additional requirements for commercial specialised
operations and CAT operations
(Annex III (Part-ORO), Subpart FC, Section 3)
(01) Explain the requirements related to flight crew recurrent X X X X X
training and checking and operator proficiency check.
Source: Point ORO.FC.330 ‘Recurrent training and checking
— operator proficiency check’
071 04 01 02 General requirements (Annex VIII (Part-SPO), Subpart A)
(01) Explain the task specialist’s responsibilities. X X X X X

Source: Point SPO.GEN.106 ‘Task specialists responsibilities’
071 04 01 03 Helicopter external sling load operations (HESLO) X X X
(Annex VIII (Part-SPO), Subpart E)
Page 588 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(01) Explain the standard operating procedures and equipment X X X
requirements.
Source:
Point SPO.SPEC.HEC.100 ‘Standard operating procedures’
and related AMCs/GM;
Point SPO.SPEC.HEC.105 ‘Specific HEC equipment’ and
related AMCs/GM
071 04 01 04 Human external cargo operations (HEC) X X X
(Annex VIII (Part-SPO), Subpart E)
(01) Explain the standard operating procedures and equipment X X X
requirements.
Source:
Point SPO.SPEC.HEC.100 ‘Standard operating procedures’
and related AMCs/GM;
Point SPO.SPEC.HEC.105 ‘Specific HEC equipment’ and
related AMCs/GM
Page 589 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 081 — PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT — AEROPLANES’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 590 of 681

SUBJECT 081 — PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT — AEROPLANES
(1) The following standard symbols and their corresponding meanings are used for certain mathematical operations:
* multiplication
≥ greater than or equal to
≤ less than or equal to
SQRT(…) square root of the function, symbol or number in round brackets
(2) Normally, it should be assumed that the effect of a variable under review is the only variation that needs to be addressed, unless specifically stated
otherwise.
(3) Candidates are expected in simple calculations to be able to convert knots (kt) into metres/se cond (m/s), and know the appropriate conversion
factors by heart.
(4) In the subsonic range, as covered under Subject 081 01, compressibility effects normally are not considered, unless specifically mentioned.
(5) For those questions related to propellers (Subject 081 07), as a simplification of the physical reality, the inflow speed into the propeller plane is taken
as the aeroplane’s true airspeed (TAS).
(6) In addition, when discussing propeller rotational direction, it will always be specified as seen from behind the propeller plane.
(7) Note that the term ‘mass’ is used to describe a quantity of matter, and ‘weight’ when describing the force. However, the term ‘weight’ is normally
used in aviation to colloquially describe ‘mass’. The professional pilot should always note the units to determine whether the term ‘weight’ is being
used to describe a force (e.g. unit newton) or quantity of matter (e.g. unit kilogram).
Page 591 of 681

reference ATPL CPL ATPL/ ATPL CPL and EIR
IR
080 00 00 00 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT
081 00 00 00 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT — AEROPLANES
081 01 00 00 SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
081 01 01 00 Basics, laws and definitions
081 01 01 01 Laws and definitions
(01) List the international system of units of measurement (SI) for X X
mass, acceleration, weight, velocity, energy, density,
temperature, pressure, force, wing loading, and power.
(02) X Define ‘mass’, ‘force’, ‘acceleration’, and ‘weight’. X X
(03) State and interpret Newton’s three laws of motion. X X
(04) X Explain air density. X X
(05) X List the atmospheric properties that effect air density. X X
(06) Explain how temperature and pressure changes affect air X X
density.
(07) X Define ‘static pressure’. X X
(08) X Define ‘dynamic pressure’. X X
(09) X State the formula for ‘dynamic pressure’. X X
(10) Describe dynamic pressure in terms of an indication of the X X
energy in the system, and how it is related to indicated
airspeed (IAS) and air density for a given altitude and speed.
(11) State Bernoulli’s equation for incompressible flow. X X
Page 592 of 681

IR
(12) Define ‘total pressure’ and explain that the total pressure X X
differs in different systems.
(13) Apply Bernoulli’s equation to flow through a venturi stream X X
tube for incompressible flow.
(14) Describe how IAS is acquired from the pitot static system. X X
(15) Describe the relationship between density, temperature, and X X
pressure for air.
(16) Explain the equation of continuity and its application to the X X
flow through a stream tube.
(17) X Define ‘IAS’, ‘CAS’, ‘EAS’, and ‘TAS’. X X
081 01 01 02 Basics of airflow
(01) X Describe steady and unsteady airflow. X X
(02) X Explain the concept of a streamline and a stream tube. X X
(03) X Describe and explain airflow through a stream tube. X X
(04) X Explain the difference between two- and three-dimensional X X
airflow.
081 01 01 03 Aerodynamic forces on aerofoils
(01) Describe the originating point and direction of the resultant X X
force caused by the pressure distribution around an aerofoil.
(02) X Resolve the resultant force into the components ‘lift’ and X X
‘drag’.
(03) Describe the direction of lift and drag. X X
(04) X Define the ‘aerodynamic moment’. X X
Page 593 of 681

IR
(05) X List the factors that affect the aerodynamic moment. X X
(06) Describe the aerodynamic moment for a symmetrical aerofoil. X X
(07) Describe the aerodynamic moment for a positively and X X
negatively cambered aerofoil.
(08) X Define ‘angle of attack’ (). X X
081 01 01 04 Shape of an aerofoil section
(01) X Describe the following parameter of an aerofoil section: X X
leading edge.
trailing edge.
(03) Describe the following parameter of an aerofoil section: X X
chord line.
thickness-to-chord ratio or relative thickness.
location of maximum thickness.
camber line.
camber.
nose radius.
(09) X Describe a symmetrical and an asymmetrical aerofoil section. X X
081 01 01 05 Wing shape
Page 594 of 681

IR
(01) X Describe the following parameter of a wing: span. X X
(02) X Describe the following parameter of a wing: tip and root chord. X X
(03) Describe the following parameter of a wing: taper ratio. X X
(04) X Describe the following parameter of a wing: wing area. X X
(05) Describe the following parameter of a wing: wing planform. X X
(06) X Describe the following parameter of a wing: mean geometric X X
chord.
(07) Describe the following parameter of a wing: mean aerodynamic X X
chord (MAC).
(08) Describe the following parameter of a wing: aspect ratio. X X
(09) X Describe the following parameter of a wing: dihedral angle. X X
(10) X Describe the following parameter of a wing: sweep angle. X X
(11) X Describe the following parameter of a wing: wing twist, X X
geometric and aerodynamic.
(12) Describe the following parameter of a wing: angle of incidence. X X
Remark: In certain textbooks, angle of incidence is used as
angle of attack (α). For Part-FCL theoretical knowledge
examination purposes, this use is discontinued, and the angle of
incidence is defined as the angle between the aeroplane
longitudinal axis and the wing-root chord line.
081 01 02 00 Two-dimensional airflow around an aerofoil
081 01 02 01 Streamline pattern
(01) X Describe the streamline pattern around an aerofoil. X X
Page 595 of 681

IR
(02) Describe converging and diverging streamlines, and their effect X X
on static pressure and velocity.
(03) X Describe upwash and downwash. X X
081 01 02 02 Stagnation point
(01) Describe the stagnation point. X X
(02) Describe the movement of the stagnation point as the α X X
changes.
081 01 02 03 Pressure distribution
(01) Describe pressure distribution and local speeds around an X X
aerofoil including effects of camber and α.
(02) Describe where the minimum local static pressure is typically X X
situated on an aerofoil.
081 01 02 04 Centre of pressure (CP) and aerodynamic centre (AC)
(01) Explain CP and AC. X X
081 01 02 06 Drag and wake
(01) X List two physical phenomena that cause drag. X X
(02) Describe skin friction drag. X X
(03) Describe form (pressure) drag. X X
(04) X Explain why drag and wake cause loss of energy (momentum). X X
081 01 02 07 Influence of angle of attack (α)
(01) Explain the influence of α on lift. X X
Page 596 of 681

IR
081 01 02 09 The lift coefficient (CL) – angle of attack () graph
(01) Describe the CL–α graph. X X
(02) Explain the significant points: X X
— point where the curve crosses the horizontal axis (zero
lift);
— point where the curve crosses the vertical axis (= 0);
— point where the curve reaches its maximum (C LMAX).
081 01 03 00 Coefficients
081 01 03 01 General use of coefficients
(01) X Explain why coefficients are used in general. X X
081 01 03 02 The lift coefficient (CL)
(01) Explain the lift formula, the factors that affect lift, and perform X X
simple calculations.
(02) Describe the effect of camber on the CL– graph (symmetrical X X
and positively/negatively cambered aerofoils).
(03) Describe the typical difference in the CL– graph for fast and X X
slow aerofoil design.
(04) X Define ‘CLMAX’ (maximum lift coefficient) and ‘CRIT’ (stalling ) X X
on the graph.
(05) Describe CL and explain the variables that affect it in low X X
subsonic flight.
081 01 03 03 Drag
(01) Describe the two-dimensional drag formula and perform simple X X
Page 597 of 681

IR
calculations.
(02) Discuss the effect of the shape of a body, cross-sectional area, X X
and surface roughness on the drag coefficient.
081 01 04 00 Three-dimensional airflow around an aeroplane
081 01 04 01 Angle of attack (α)
(01) X Define ‘angle of attack’ (α). X X
Remark: For theoretical knowledge examination purposes, the
angle-of-attack definition requires a reference line. This
reference line for 3D has been chosen to be the longitudinal axis
and for 2D the chord line.
(02) Explain the difference between the α and the attitude of an X X
aeroplane.
081 01 04 02 Streamline pattern
(01) Describe the general streamline pattern around the wing, tail X X
section, and fuselage.
(02) Explain and describe the causes of spanwise flow over top and X X
bottom surfaces.
(03) Describe wing tip vortices and their contribution to downwash X X
behind the wing.
(04) Explain why wing tip vortices vary with α. X X
(05) Describe spanwise lift distribution including the effect of wing X X
planform.
(06) Describe the causes, distribution and duration of the wake X X
turbulence behind an aeroplane.
(07) Describe the influence of flap deflection on the wing tip vortex. X X
Page 598 of 681

IR
(08) Describe the parameters that influence wake turbulence. X X
081 01 04 03 Induced drag
(01) Explain the factors that cause induced drag. X X
(02) Describe the approximate formula for the induced drag X X
coefficient (including variables but excluding constants).
(03) Describe the relationship between induced drag and total drag X X
in straight and level flight with variable speed.
(04) Describe the effect of mass on induced drag at a given IAS. X X
(05) Describe the means to reduce induced drag: X X
— aspect ratio;
— winglets;
— tip tanks;
— wing twist;
— camber change.
(06) Describe the influence of lift distribution on induced drag. X X
(07) Describe the influence of downwash on the effective airflow. X X
(08) Explain induced and effective local α. X X
(09) Explain the influence of the induced α on the direction of the X X
lift vector.
(10) Explain the relationship between induced drag and: X X
— speed;
— aspect ratio;
— wing planform;
— bank angle in a horizontal coordinated turn.
Page 599 of 681

IR
(11) Explain the induced drag coefficient and its relationship with X X
the lift coefficient and aspect ratio.
(12) Explain the influence of induced drag on: X X
— the CL–α graph, and show the effect on the graph when
comparing high- and low-aspect ratio wings;
— the CL–CD (aeroplane polar), and show the effect on the
graph when comparing high- and low-aspect ratio wings;
— the parabolic aeroplane polar in a graph and as a
formula [CD = CPD + kCL2], where CD = coefficient of drag
and CPD = coefficient of parasite drag.
(13) Describe the CL–CD graph (polar). X X
(14) Indicate minimum drag on the graph. X X
(15) Explain why the CL–CD ratio is important as a measure of X X
performance.
(16) X State the normal values of CL–CD. X X
081 01 05 00 Total drag
081 01 05 01 Total drag in relation to parasite drag and induced drag
(01) X State that total drag consists of parasite drag and induced drag. X X
081 01 05 02 Parasite drag
(01) Describe the types of drag that are included in parasite drag. X X
(02) Describe form (pressure) drag and the factors which affect its X X
magnitude.
(03) Describe interference drag and the factors which affect its X X
magnitude.
Page 600 of 681

IR
(04) Describe friction drag and the factors which affect its X X
magnitude.
081 01 05 03 Parasite drag and speed
(01) Describe the relationship between parasite drag and speed. X X
081 01 05 04 Induced drag and speed
(Refer to 081 01 04 03)
081 01 05 05 Total drag

(01) Explain the total drag–speed graph and the constituent drag X X
components.
(02) Indicate the speed for minimum drag. X X
081 01 05 07 Variables affecting the total drag–speed graph
(01) Describe the effect of aeroplane gross mass on the graph. X X
(02) Describe the effect of pressure altitude on: X X
— drag–IAS graph;
— drag–TAS graph.
(03) Describe speed stability from the graph. X X
(04) Describe non-stable, neutral, and stable IAS regions. X X
(05) Explain what happens to the IAS and drag in the non-stable X X
region if speed suddenly decreases and why this could occur.
081 01 06 00 Ground effect
Page 601 of 681

IR
081 01 06 01 Influence of ground effect
(01) Explain the influence of ground effect on wing tip vortices, X X
downwash, airflow pattern, lift, and drag.
(02) Describe the influence of ground effect on induced  and the X X
coefficient of induced drag (CDi).
(03) Explain the effects of entering and leaving ground effect. X X
081 01 06 02 Effect on stalling angle of attack (αCRIT)
(01) Describe the influence of ground effect on αCRIT. X X
081 01 06 03 Effect on lift coefficient (CL)
(01) Describe the influence of ground effect on the effective  and X X
CL.
081 01 06 04 Effect on take-off and landing characteristics of an aeroplane
(01) Describe the influence of ground effect on take-off and landing X X
characteristics and performance of an aeroplane.
(02) Describe the difference in take-off and landing characteristics X X
of high- and low-wing aeroplanes.
081 01 07 00 The relationship between lift coefficient and speed in steady,
straight, and level flight
081 01 07 01 Represented by an equation
(01) Explain the effect on CL during speed increase/decrease in X X
steady, straight, and level flight, and perform simple
calculations.
081 01 07 02 Represented by a graph
(01) Explain, by using a graph, the effect on speed of CL changes at a X X
Page 602 of 681

IR
given weight.
081 01 09 00 CLMAX augmentation
081 01 09 01 Trailing-edge flaps and the reasons for their use in take-off
and landing
(01) From the given relevant diagrams, describe or identify the X X
following types of trailing-edge flaps:
— split flaps;
— plain flaps;
— slotted flaps;
— Fowler flaps.
(02) Describe how the wing’s effective camber increases the CL and X X
CD, and the reasons why this can be beneficial.
(03) Describe their effect on: X X
— the location of CP;
— pitching moments (due to wing CP movement);
— stall speed.
(04) Compare their influence on the CL– graph: X X
— indicate the variation in C L at any given ;
— indicate their effect on C LMAX;
— indicate their effect on critical ;
— indicate their effect on the  at a given C L.
(05) Compare their influence on the CL–CD graph: X X
— indicate how the (C L/CD)MAX differs from that of a clean
wing.
(06) Explain the influence of trailing-edge flap deflection on the X X
Page 603 of 681

IR
glide angle.
(07) Describe flap asymmetry: X X
— explain the effect on aeroplane controllability.
(08) Describe trailing-edge flap effect on take-off and landing: X X
— explain the advantages of lower-nose attitudes;
— explain why take-off and landing speeds/distances are
reduced.
(09) Explain the effects of flap-setting errors, such as mis-selection X X
and premature/late extension or retraction of flaps, on:
— take-off and landing distance and speeds;
— climb and descent performance;
— stall buffet margins.
081 01 09 02 Leading-edge devices and the reasons for their use in take-off
and landing
(01) From the given relevant diagrams, describe or identify the X X
different types of leading-edge high-lift devices:
— Krueger flaps;
— variable camber flaps;
— slats.
(02) Describe the function of the slot. X X
(03) Describe how the wing’s effective camber increases with a X X
leading-edge flap.
(04) Explain the effect of leading-edge flaps on the stall speed, also X X
in comparison with trailing-edge flaps.
(05) Compare their influence on the CL– graph, compared with X X
trailing-edge flaps and a clean wing:
— indicate the effect of leading-edge devices on CLMAX;
Page 604 of 681

IR
— explain how the CL curve differs from that of a clean wing;
— indicate the effect of leading-edge devices on αCRIT.
(06) Compare their influence on the CL–CD graph. X X
(07) Describe slat asymmetry: X X
— describe the effect on aeroplane controllability.
(08) Explain the reasons for using leading-edge high-lift devices on X X
take-off and landing:
— explain the disadvantage of increased nose-up attitudes;
— explain why take-off and landing speeds/distances are
reduced.
081 01 09 03 Vortex generators
(01) Explain the purpose of vortex generators. X X
(02) Describe the basic operating principle of vortex generators. X X
(03) State their advantages and disadvantages. X X
081 01 10 00 Means to reduce the CL–CD ratio
081 01 10 01 Spoilers and the reasons for their use in the different phases
of flight
(01) Describe the aerodynamic functioning of spoilers: X X
— roll spoilers;
— flight spoilers (speed brakes);
— ground spoilers (lift dumpers).
(02) Describe the effect of spoilers on the CL– graph and stall X X
speed.
(03) Describe the influence of spoilers on the CL–CD graph and X X
lift–drag ratio.
Page 605 of 681

IR
081 01 10 02 Speed brakes and the reasons for their use in the different
phases of flight
(01) Describe speed brakes and the reasons for using them in the X X
different phases of flight.
(02) State their influence on the CL–CD graph and lift–drag ratio. X X
(03) Explain how speed brakes increase parasite drag. X X
(04) Describe how speed brakes affect the minimum drag speed. X X
(05) Describe their effect on rate and angle of descent. X X
081 01 12 00 Aerodynamic degradation
081 01 12 01 Ice and other contaminants
(01) Describe the locations on an aeroplane where ice build-up will X X
occur during flight.
(02) Explain the aerodynamic effects of ice and other contaminants X X
on:
— lift (maximum CL);
— drag;
— stall speed;
— CRIT;
— stability and controllability.
(03) Explain the aerodynamic effects of icing during take-off. X X
081 01 12 02 Deformation and modification of airframe, ageing aeroplanes
(01) Describe the effect of airframe deformation and modification X X
of an ageing aeroplane on aeroplane performance.
Page 606 of 681

IR
(02) Explain the effect on boundary layer condition of an ageing X X
aeroplane.
081 02 00 00 HIGH-SPEED AERODYNAMICS
081 02 01 00 Speeds
081 02 01 01 Speed of sound
(01) X Define ‘speed of sound’. X
(02) Explain the variation of the speed of sound with altitude. X
(03) Explain the influence of temperature on the speed of sound. X
081 02 01 02 Mach number
(01) Define ‘Mach number’ as a function of TAS and speed of sound. X
081 02 01 03 Influence of temperature and altitude on Mach number
(01) Explain the absence of change of Mach number with varying X
temperature at constant flight level and calibrated airspeed.
(02) Explain the relationship between Mach number, TAS and IAS X
during climb and descent at constant Mach number and IAS,
and explain variation of lift coefficient, α, pitch and flight-path
angle.
(03) Explain: X
— risk of exceeding the maximum operation speed (V MO)
when descending at constant Mach number;
— risk of exceeding the maximum operating Mach number
(MMO) when climbing at constant IAS;
— risk of a low-speed stall at high altitude when climbing
at a too low Mach number.
Page 607 of 681

IR
081 02 01 04 Compressibility
(01) State that compressibility means that density can change along X
a streamline, and that this occurs in the high subsonic,
transonic, and supersonic flow.
(02) X State that compressibility negatively affects the pressure X
gradient, leading to an overall reduction of the CL.
(03) X State that Mach number is a measure of compressibility. X
(04) Describe that compressibility increases low-speed stall speed X
and decreases αCRIT.
081 02 01 05 Subdivision of aerodynamic flow
(01) X List the subdivision of aerodynamic flow: X
— subsonic flow;
— transonic flow;
— supersonic flow.
(02) Describe the characteristics of the flow regimes listed above. X
(03) Explain why some transport aeroplanes normally cruise at X
Mach numbers above the critical Mach number (MCRIT), but
below the divergence Mach number (MDRAG DIVERGENCE).
081 02 02 00 Shock waves
081 02 02 01 Definition of shock wave
(01) X Define a ‘shock wave’. X
081 02 02 02 Normal shock waves
(01) Describe a normal shock wave with respect to changes in: X
— static temperature;
Page 608 of 681

IR
— static and total pressure;
— velocity;
— local speed of sound;
— Mach number;
— density.
(02) Describe a normal shock wave with respect to orientation X
relative to the wing surface.
(03) Explain the influence of increasing Mach number on a normal X
shock wave, at positive lift, with respect to:
— strength;
— length;
— position relative to the wing;
— second shock wave at the lower surface.
(04) Explain the influence of  on shock-wave intensity and shock- X
wave location at constant Mach number.
081 02 03 00 Effects of exceeding the critical Mach number (MCRIT)
081 02 03 01 Critical Mach number (MCRIT)
(01) Define ‘MCRIT’. X
(02) Explain how a change in , aeroplane weight, manoeuvres, and X
centre-of-gravity (CG) position influences MCRIT.
081 02 03 02 Effect on lift
(01) Describe the behaviour of CL versus Mach number at constant X
.
(02) Explain the consequences of exceeding MCRIT with respect to X
CL and CLMAX.
Page 609 of 681

IR
(03) Explain the change in stall indicated airspeed (IAS) with X
altitude.
(04) Discuss the effect on αCRIT. X
(05) Explain the advantages of slightly exceeding MCRIT in aeroplanes
with supercritical aerofoils with respect to:
— speed versus drag ratio;
— specific range;
— optimum altitude.
081 02 03 03 Effect on drag
(01) Describe wave drag. X
(02) Describe the behaviour of CD versus Mach number at X
constant .
(03) Explain the effect of Mach number on the CL–CD graph. X
(04) Describe the effects and hazards of exceeding MDRAG DIVERGENCE, X
namely:
— drag rise;
— instability;
— Mach tuck;
— shock stall.
(05) State the relation between MCRIT and MDRAG DIVERGENCE. X
081 02 03 04 Effect on pitching moment
(01) Discuss the effect of Mach number on the CP location. X
(02) Describe the overall change in pitching moment from MCRIT to X
MDRAG DIVERGENCE and explain the ‘tuck under’ or ‘Mach tuck’
effect.
Page 610 of 681
IR
(03) X State the requirement for a Mach trim system to compensate X
for the effect of the CP movement and ‘tuck under’ effect.
(04) X Discuss the aerodynamic functioning of the Mach trim system. X
(05) Discuss the corrective measures if the Mach trim fails. X
081 02 03 05 Effect on control effectiveness
(01) Discuss the effects on the functioning of control surfaces. X
081 02 05 00 Means to influence critical Mach number (MCRIT)
081 02 05 01 Wing sweep
(01) Explain the influence of the angle of sweep on: X
— MCRIT;
— effective thickness/chord change or velocity component
perpendicular to the quarter chord line.
(02) Describe the influence of the angle of sweepback at subsonic X
speed on:
— CLMAX;
— efficiency of and requirement for high-lift devices;
— pitch-up stall behaviour.
(03) Discuss the effect of wing sweepback on drag. X
081 02 05 02 Aerofoil shape
(01) Explain the use of thin aerofoils with reduced camber. X
(02) Explain the main purpose of supercritical aerofoils. X
(03) X Identify the shape characteristics of a supercritical aerofoil X
Page 611 of 681

IR
shape.
(04) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of supercritical X
aerofoils for wing design.
081 02 05 03 Vortex generators
(01) Explain the use of vortex generators as a means to avoid or X
restrict flow separation caused by the presence of a normal
shock wave.
081 03 00 00 Stall, shock stall, and upset prevention and recovery
081 03 01 00 The stall
081 03 01 01 Flow separation at increasing α
(01) X Define the ‘boundary layer’. X X
(02) X Describe the thickness of a typical laminar and turbulent X X
boundary layer.
(03) Describe the properties, advantages and disadvantages of the X X
laminar boundary layer.
(04) Describe the properties, advantages and disadvantages of the X X
turbulent layer.
(05) Define the ‘transition point’. X X
(06) Explain why the laminar boundary layer separates easier than X X
the turbulent layer does.
(07) Describe why the airflow over the aft part of a wing slows X X
down as the α increases.
(08) Define the ‘separation point’ and describe its location as a X X
function of α.
(09) X Define αCRIT. X X
Page 612 of 681

IR
(10) Describe in straight and level flight the influence of increasing X X
the α on:
— the forward stagnation point;
— the pressure distribution;
— the CP location (straight and swept-back wing);
— CL;
— CD and D (drag);
— the pitching moment (straight and swept-back wing).
(11) Explain what causes the possible natural buffet on the controls X X
and on the aeroplane in a pre-stall condition.
(12) Describe the effectiveness of the flight controls in a pre-stall X X
condition.
(13) Describe and explain the normal post-stall behaviour of a X X
straight-wing aeroplane.
(14) Describe the effect and dangers of using the controls close to X X
the stall.
081 03 01 02 The stall speed
(01) Explain VS0, VS1, VSR, and VS1G. X X
(02) Solve VS1G from the lift formula given varying CL. X X
Page 613 of 681

IR
(03) Describe and explain the influence of the following parameters X X
on stall speed:
— CG;
— thrust component;
— slipstream;
— wing loading;
— mass;
— wing contamination;
— angle of sweep;
— altitude (for compressibility effects, see 081 02 03 02).
(04) X Define the ‘load factor n’. X X
(05) Explain why the load factor increases in a turn. X X
(06) Explain why the load factor increases in a pull-up and decreases X X
in a push-over manoeuvre.
(07) Describe and explain the influence of the ‘load factor n’ on stall X X
speed.
(08) X Explain the expression ‘accelerated stall’. X X
Remark: Sometimes, accelerated stall is also erroneously
referred to as high-speed stall. This latter expression will not be
used for Subject 081.
(09) Calculate the change of stall speed as a function of the load X X
factor.
(10) Calculate the increase of stall speed in a horizontal coordinated X X
turn as a function of bank angle.
(11) Calculate the change of stall speed as a function of the gross X X
mass.
Page 614 of 681

IR
081 03 01 03 The initial stall in spanwise direction
(01) Explain the initial stall sequence on the following planforms: X X
— elliptical;
— rectangular;
— moderate and high taper;
— sweepback or delta.
(02) Explain the purpose of washout. X X
(03) Explain the effect of aileron deflection. X X
(04) Explain the influence of fences, vortilons, saw teeth, vortex X X
generators, and strakes on engine nacelles.
081 03 01 04 Stall warning
(01) X Explain why stall warning is necessary. X X
(02) X Explain when aerodynamic and artificial stall warnings are X X
used.
(03) Explain why CS-23 and CS-25 require a margin to stall speed for X X
take-off and landing speeds.
(04) X Describe: X X
— buffet;
— stall strip;
— flapper switch (leading-edge stall-warning vane);
— angle-of-attack vane;
— angle-of-attack probe;
— stick shaker.
(05) Describe the recovery after: X X
— stall warning;
Page 615 of 681

IR
— stall;
— stick-pusher actuation.
081 03 01 05 Special phenomena of stall
(01) X Describe the basic stall requirements for commercial air X X
transport (CAT) aeroplanes.
(02) Explain the difference between power-off and power-on stalls X X
and recovery.
(03) Describe stall and recovery in a climbing and descending turn. X X
(04) Describe the effect on stall and recovery characteristics of: X X
— wing sweep (backward sweep);
— T-tailed aeroplane.
(05) Describe super stall or deep stall. X X
(06) Describe the philosophy behind the stick-pusher system. X X
(07) Describe the factors that can lead to the absence of stall X X
warning and explain the associated risks.
(08) Describe the indications and explain the consequences of X X
premature stabiliser stall due to ice contamination (negative
tail stall).
(09) Describe when to expect in-flight icing. X X
(10) Explain how the effect is changed when retracting/extending X X
lift-augmentation devices.
(11) Describe how to recover from a stall after a configuration X X
change caused by in-flight icing.
(12) Explain the effect of a contaminated wing on the stall speed X X
and αCRIT.
Page 616 of 681

IR
(13) Explain airframe contamination and the aerodynamic effects X X
when parked and during ground operations in winter
conditions.
(14) Explain de-icing/anti-icing holdover time and the likely hazards X X
after it has expired.
(15) Describe the aerodynamic effects of heavy tropical rain on stall X X
speed and drag, and the appropriate mitigation in such
conditions.
081 03 01 06 The spin
(01) Explain how to avoid spins. X X
(02) List the factors that cause a spin to develop. X X
(03) Describe an ‘incipient’, ‘developing’ and ‘developed’ spin, X X
recognition and recovery.
(04) Describe the differences in spin attitude with forward and aft X X
CG.
081 03 02 00 Shock stall
081 03 02 01 Definition and relationship with Mach buffet
(01) Explain shock-induced separation, shock stall, and describe its X
relationship with Mach buffet.
(02) X Define ‘shock stall’. X
following description is used for shock stall: Shock stall occurs
when the lift coefficient, as a function of Mach number, reaches
its maximum value (for a given α).
081 03 02 02 Buffet onset
Page 617 of 681

IR
(01) Explain the concept of buffet margin, and describe the X
influence of the following parameters on the concept of buffet
margin:
— ;
— Mach number;
— mass;
— load factor;
— angle of bank;
— CG location.
(02) Explain how the buffet onset boundary chart can be used to X
determine:
— manoeuvrability;
— buffet margin.
(03) Describe the effect of exceeding the speed on buffet onset. X
(04) Explain ‘aerodynamic ceiling’ and ‘coffin corner’. X
(05) Explain the concept of the ‘1.3g’ buffet margin altitude. X
(06) Find (using an example graph): X
— buffet free range;
— aerodynamic ceiling at a given mass;
— load factor and bank angle at which buffet occurs at a
given mass, Mach number, and pressure altitude.
(07) Explain why descent increases the buffet free range. X
081 03 03 00 Situations in which buffet or stall could occur
081 03 03 01 Explain why buffet or stall occurs
Page 618 of 681

IR
(01) Explain why buffet or stall could occur in the following pilot- X X
induced situations, and the methods to mitigate them:
— inappropriate take-off configuration, detailing the
consequences of errors associated with leading-edge
devices;
— steep turns;
— go-around using take-off/go-around (TOGA) setting
(underslung engines).
(02) Explain why buffet or stall could occur in the following X X
environmental conditions at low altitude, and how to mitigate
them:
— thunderstorms;
— wind shear and microburst;
— turbulence;
— wake turbulence;
— icing conditions.
(03) Explain why buffet or stall could occur in the following X
environmental conditions at high altitude, and how to mitigate
them:
— thunderstorms in the intertropical convergence zone
(ITCZ);
— jet streams;
— clear-air turbulence.
(04) Explain why buffet or stall could occur in the following X X
situations, and how to mitigate them:
— inappropriate autopilot climb mode;
— loss of, or unreliable, airspeed indication.
081 03 04 00 Recognition of stalled condition
Page 619 of 681

IR
081 03 04 01 Recognition and explanation of stalled condition
(01) Explain why a stalled condition can occur at any airspeed, or X X
attitude or altitude.
(02) Explain that a stall may be recognised by continuous stall- X X
warning activation accompanied by at least one of the
following:
— buffet, that can be heavy;
— lack of pitch authority;
— uncommanded pitch down and uncommanded roll;
— inability to arrest the descent rate.
(03) Explain that ‘stall warning’ means a natural or synthetic X X
indication provided when approaching the stall that may
include one or more of the following indications:
— aerodynamic buffeting;
— reduced roll stability and aileron effectiveness;
— visual or aural clues and warnings;
— reduced elevator (pitch) authority;
— inability to maintain altitude or arrest a rate of descent;
— stick-shaker activation.
081 04 00 00 STABILITY
081 04 01 00 Static and dynamic stability
081 04 01 01 Basics and definitions
(01) Define ‘static stability’: X X
— describe/identify a statically stable, neutral, and unstable
condition (positive, neutral, and negative static stability).
(02) Explain manoeuvrability. X X
Page 620 of 681

IR
(03) Explain why static stability is the opposite of manoeuvrability, X X
and why CAT aeroplanes are designed to be statically stable.
(04) Define ‘dynamic stability’: X X
— describe/identify a dynamically stable, neutral, and
unstable motion (positive, neutral, and negative dynamic
stability);
— describe/identify periodic and aperiodic motion.
(05) Explain what combinations of static and dynamic stability will X X
return an aeroplane to the equilibrium state after a
disturbance.
081 04 01 02 Precondition for static stability
(01) X Explain an equilibrium of forces and moments as the initial X X
condition for the concept of static stability.
081 04 01 03 Sum of forces
(01) X Identify the forces considered in the equilibrium of forces. X X
081 04 01 04 Sum of moments
(01) Identify the moments about all three axes considered in the X X
equilibrium of moments.
(02) Discuss the effect of sum of moments not being zero. X X
081 04 03 00 Static and dynamic longitudinal stability
081 04 03 01 Methods for achieving balance
(01) X Explain the stabiliser as the means to satisfy the condition of X X
nullifying the total sum of the moments about the lateral axis.
Page 621 of 681

IR
(02) Explain the influence of the location of the wing CP relative to X X
the CG on the magnitude and direction of the balancing force
on the stabiliser.
(03) Explain the influence of the indicated airspeed on the X X
magnitude and direction of the balancing force on the
stabiliser.
(04) Explain the use of the elevator deflection or stabiliser angle for X X
the generation of the balancing force and its direction.
(05) Explain the elevator deflection required to balance thrust X X
changes.
081 04 03 02 Static longitudinal stability
(01) Discuss the effect of the CG location on pitch manoeuvrability X X
and longitudinal stability.
081 04 03 03 Neutral point
(01) X Define ‘neutral point’. X X
(02) X Explain why the location of the neutral point is only dependent X X
on the aerodynamic design of the aeroplane.
081 04 03 04 Factors affecting neutral point
(01) Describe the location of the neutral point relative to the X X
locations of the aerodynamic centre of the wing and tail.
081 04 03 05 Location of centre of gravity (CG)
(01) Explain the influence of the CG location on the static X X
longitudinal stability of the aeroplane.
(02) Explain the CG forward and aft limits with respect to: X X
— longitudinal control forces;
Page 622 of 681

IR
— elevator effectiveness;
— stability.
(03) Define ‘static margin’. X X
081 04 03 06 The Cm– graph
(01) X Describe the Cm– graph with respect to the relationship X X
between the slope of the graph and static stability.
081 04 03 07 Factors affecting the Cm– graph
(01) Explain: X X
— the effect on the Cm– graph of a shift of CG in the forward
and aft direction;
— the effect on the Cm– graph when the elevator is moved
up or down;
— the effect on the Cm– graph when the trim is moved;
— the effect of the wing contribution and how it is affected by
the CG location;
— the effect of the fuselage contribution and how it is
affected by the CG location;
— the tail contribution;
— the effect of aerofoil camber change.
081 04 03 10 The stick force versus speed graph (IAS)
(01) Explain how a pilot perceives stable static longitudinal stick X X
force stability regarding changes in:
— speed;
Page 623 of 681

IR
— altitude;
— mass.
081 04 03 12 The manoeuvring stability/stick force per g
(01) X Define the ‘stick force per g’, and describe that the stick force X X
increases linearly with increase in g.
(02) Explain why: X X
— the stick force per g has a prescribed minimum and
maximum value;
— the stick force per g decreases with pressure altitude at
the same indicated airspeed.
081 04 03 14 Factors affecting the manoeuvring stability/stick force per g
(01) Explain the influence on stick force per g of: X X
— CG location;
— trim setting.
081 04 03 16 Dynamic longitudinal stability
(01) Describe the phugoid and short-period motion in terms of X X
period, damping, variations (if applicable) in speed, altitude,
and α.
(02) Explain why the short-period motion is more hazardous than X X
the phugoid.
(03) Describe ‘pilot-induced oscillations’. X X
Page 624 of 681

IR
(04) Explain the effect of high altitude on dynamic stability. X X
(05) Describe the influence of the CG location on the dynamic X X
longitudinal stability of the aeroplane.
081 04 04 00 Static directional stability
081 04 04 01 Definition and effects of static directional stability
(01) X Define ‘static directional stability’. X X
(02) Explain the effects of static directional stability being too weak X X
or too strong.
081 04 04 02 Sideslip angle
(01) Define ‘sideslip angle’. X X
(02) Identify β as the symbol used for the sideslip angle. X X
081 04 04 03 Yaw-moment coefficient Cn
(01) X Define the ‘yawing-moment coefficient Cn’. X X
(02) X Define the relationship between Cn and β for an aeroplane with X X
static directional stability.
081 04 04 04 Cn–β graph
(01) X Explain why: X X
— Cn depends on β;
— Cn equals zero for that β that provides static equilibrium
about the aeroplane’s normal axis;
— if no asymmetric engine thrust, flight control or loading
condition prevails, the equilibrium β equals zero.
(02) X Identify how the slope of the Cn–β graph is a measure for static X X
Page 625 of 681

IR
directional stability.
(03) X Identify how the slope of the Cn–β graph is affected by altitude. X X
081 04 04 05 Factors affecting static directional stability
(01) Describe how the following aeroplane components contribute X X
to static directional stability:
— wing;
— fin;
— dorsal fin;
— ventral fin;
— angle of sweep of the wing;
— angle of sweep of the fin;
— fuselage at high α;
— strakes.
(02) Explain why both the fuselage and the fin contribution reduce X X
static directional stability when the CG moves aft.
081 04 05 00 Static lateral stability
081 04 05 01 Definition and effects of static lateral stability
(01) X Define ‘static lateral stability’. X X
(02) Explain the effects of static lateral stability being too weak or X X
too strong.
081 04 05 02 Bank angle Ø
(01) X Define ‘bank angle Ø’. X X
081 04 05 03 The roll-moment coefficient Cl
(01) X Define the ‘roll-moment coefficient Cl’. X X
Page 626 of 681

IR
081 04 05 04 Contribution of sideslip angle (β)
(01) Explain how without coordination the bank angle (Ø) creates X X
sideslip angle (β).
081 04 05 05 The Cl–β graph
(01) X Describe the Cl– graph. X X
(02) X Identify the slope of the Cl– graph as a measure for static X X
lateral stability.
(03) X Identify how the slope of the Cl–β graph is affected by altitude. X X
081 04 05 06 Factors affecting static lateral stability
(01) Explain the contribution to the static lateral stability of: X X
— dihedral, anhedral;
— high wing, low wing;
— sweep angle of the wing;
— ventral fin;
— vertical tail.
081 04 06 00 Dynamic lateral/directional stability
081 04 06 02 Tendency to spiral dive
(01) Explain how lateral and directional stability are coupled. X X
(02) Explain how high static directional stability and low static X X
lateral stability may cause spiral divergence (unstable spiral
dive), and under which conditions the spiral dive mode is
neutral or stable.
Page 627 of 681

IR
(03) Describe an unstable spiral dive mode with respect to X X
deviations in speed, bank angle, nose low-pitch attitude, and
decreasing altitude.
081 04 06 03 Dutch roll
(01) Describe Dutch roll. X X
(02) Explain: X X
— why Dutch roll occurs when the static lateral stability is
large compared to static directional stability;
— the condition for a stable, neutral or unstable Dutch roll
motion;
— the function of the yaw damper;
— the actions to be taken when the yaw damper is not
available.
(03) State the effect of Mach number on Dutch roll. X
081 04 06 04 Effects of altitude on dynamic stability
(01) Explain that increased pressure altitude reduces dynamic X X
lateral/directional stability.
081 05 00 00 CONTROL
081 05 01 00 General
081 05 01 01 Basics — The three planes and three axes
(01) X Define: X X
— lateral axis;
— longitudinal axis;
— normal axis.
Page 628 of 681

IR
(02) X Define: X X
— pitch angle;
— bank angle (Ø);
— yaw angle.
(03) Describe the motion about the three axes. X X
(04) Name and describe the devices that control these motions. X X
081 05 01 02 Camber change
(01) State that camber is changed by movement of a control surface X X
and explain the effect.
081 05 01 03 Angle-of-attack (α) change
(01) X Explain the influence of local α change by movement of a X X
control surface.
081 05 02 00 Pitch (longitudinal) control
081 05 02 01 Elevator/all-flying tails
(01) Explain the working principle of the elevator/all-flying tail and X X
describe its function.
081 05 02 02 Downwash effects
(01) Explain the effect of downwash on the tailplane α. X X
(02) Explain in this context the use of a T-tail or stabiliser trim. X X
081 05 02 04 Location of centre of gravity (CG)
(01) Explain the relationship between elevator deflection and CG X X
location to produce a given aeroplane response.
Page 629 of 681

IR
(02) Explain the effect of forward CG limit on pitch control. X X
081 05 02 05 Moments due to engine thrust
(01) Describe the effect of engine thrust on pitching moments for X X
different engine locations.
081 05 03 00 Yaw (directional) control
081 05 03 01 The rudder
(01) Explain the working principle of the rudder and describe its X X
function.
State the relationship between rudder deflection and the
moment about the normal axis.
Describe the effect of sideslip on the moment about the
normal axis.
081 05 03 02 Rudder limiting
(01) Explain why and how rudder deflection is limited on CAT X
aeroplanes.
081 05 04 00 Roll (lateral) control
081 05 04 01 Ailerons
(01) Explain the functioning of ailerons. X X
(02) Describe the adverse effects of aileron deflection. X X
(Refer to Subjects 081 05 04 04 and 081 06 01 02)
(03) Explain why some aeroplanes have inboard and outboard X X
ailerons.
(04) State that the outboard ailerons are locked beyond a given X X
speed to prevent:
Page 630 of 681

IR
— over-control;
— exceeding structural limitations;
— aeroelastic phenomena (flutter, divergence and
aileron reversal).
(05) Describe the use of aileron deflection in normal flight, flight X X
with sideslip, crosswind landings, horizontal turns, flight with
one-engine-inoperative.
(06) X Define ‘roll rate’. X X
(07) X List the factors that affect roll rate. X X
(08) Describe flaperons and aileron droop. X X
081 05 04 03 Spoilers
(01) Explain how spoilers can be used to control the rolling X X
movement in combination with or instead of the ailerons.
081 05 04 04 Adverse yaw
(01) Explain why the use of ailerons induces adverse yaw. X X
081 05 04 05 Means to avoid adverse yaw
(01) Explain how the following reduce adverse yaw: X X
— Frise ailerons;
— differential aileron deflection;
— rudder aileron cross-coupling;
— roll spoilers.
081 05 05 00 Roll/yaw interaction
Page 631 of 681

IR
081 05 05 01 Explain roll/yaw interaction
(01) Explain the secondary effect of roll. X X
(02) Explain the secondary effect of yaw. X X
081 05 06 00 Means to reduce control forces
081 05 06 01 Aerodynamic balance
(01) Describe the purpose of aerodynamic balance. X X
(02) Describe the working principle of the horn balance. X X
(03) Describe the working principle of the internal balance. X X
(04) Describe the working principle and application of: X X
— balance tab;
— anti-balance tab;
— spring tab;
— servo tab.
081 05 06 02 Artificial means
(01) State the differences between fully powered controls and X X
power-assisted controls.
(02) Describe power-assisted controls. X X
(03) Describe the advantages of artificial feel in fully powered X X
control.
081 05 08 00 Trimming
081 05 08 01 Reasons to trim
Page 632 of 681

IR
(01) State the reasons for using trimming devices. X X
(02) Explain the difference between a trim tab and the various X X
balance tabs.
081 05 08 02 Trim tabs
(01) Describe the working principle of a trim tab including cockpit X X
indications.
081 05 08 03 Stabiliser trim
(01) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a stabiliser trim X X
compared to a trim tab.
(02) Explain elevator deflection when the aeroplane is trimmed in X X
the case of fully powered and power-assisted pitch controls.
(03) Explain the relationship between CG position, take-off trim X X
setting, and stabiliser trim position.
(04) Explain the effect of errors in the take-off stabiliser trim setting X X
on the rotation characteristics and stick force during take-off
rotation.
(05) Discuss the effects of jammed and runaway stabiliser. X X
(06) Explain the consequences of a jammed stabiliser during take- X X
off, landing, and go-around.
081 06 00 00 LIMITATIONS
081 06 01 00 Operating limitations
081 06 01 01 Flutter
(01) Describe the phenomenon of flutter and how IAS and mass X X
distribution affects the likelihood of flutter occurrence.
Page 633 of 681

IR
(02) Describe the use of mass balance to alleviate the flutter X X
problem by adjusting the mass distribution:
— wing-mounted engines on pylons;
— control surface mass balance.
(03) State how to avoid flutter, and possible actions if flutter X X
occurred.
081 06 01 02 Aileron reversal
(01) Describe the phenomenon of aileron reversal: X X
— at low speeds;
— at high speeds.
Describe the aileron reversal speed in relationship to VNE and
VNO.
081 06 01 03 Landing gear/flap operating
(01) Describe the reason for flap/landing gear limitations. X X
— Define ‘VLO’.
— Define ‘VLE’.
(02) Explain why there is a difference between VLO and VLE in the X X
case of some aeroplane types.
(03) Define ‘VFE’ and describe flap limiting speeds. X X
(04) Describe flap design features, procedures and warnings to X X
prevent overload.
081 06 01 04 VMO, VNO, and VNE
(01) X Define ‘VMO’, ‘VNO’, and ‘VNE’. X X
(02) Describe VMO, VNO and VNE, the relevance of the airspeed on X X
which they are based, and the differences between the
Page 634 of 681

IR
airspeeds.
(03) Explain the hazards of flying at speeds close to VNE and VMO. X X
081 06 01 05 MMO
(01) Define ‘MMO’ and state its limiting factors. X
081 06 02 00 Manoeuvring envelope
081 06 02 01 Manoeuvring–load diagram
(01) Describe the manoeuvring–load diagram. X X
(02) Define limit and ultimate load factor, and explain what can X X
happen if these values are exceeded.
(03) Define ‘VA’, ‘VC’, and ‘VD’. X X
(04) Identify and explain the varying features on the VN diagram: X X
— load factor ‘n’;
— speed scale, equivalent airspeed;
— equivalent airspeed envelope;
— CLMAX boundary;
— 1g stall speed;
— accelerated stall boundary (refer to 081 03 01 02).
(05) Describe the relationship between VMO or VNE and VC. X X
(06) State all the manoeuvring load-factors limits applicable to X X
CS-23 and CS-25 aeroplanes.
(07) Explain the relationship between VA and VS in a formula, and X X
calculate the values.
(08) Explain the significance of VA and the adverse consequences of X X
applying full, abrupt nose-up elevator deflection when
Page 635 of 681

IR
exceeding VA.
081 06 02 02 Factors affecting the manoeuvring–load diagram
(01) State the relationship of mass to: X X
— load-factor limits;
— accelerated stall speed boundary limit;
— VA and explain why if a single value for VA is given, it will
be at the aeroplane’s maximum structural take-off mass
and at low altitude.
(02) Calculate the change of VA with changing mass. X X
(03) Explain why VA loses significance at higher altitude where X
compressibility effects occur.
(04) X Define ‘MC’ and ‘MD’ and their relation with ‘VC’ and ‘VD’. X
081 06 03 00 Gust envelope
081 06 03 01 Gust–load diagram
(01) Recognise a typical gust–load diagram, and state the minimum X X
gust speeds in ft/s, m/s and kt that the aeroplane must be
designed to withstand at VB to VC and VD.
(02) Discuss considerations for the selection of VRA. X X
(03) Explain the adverse effects on the aeroplane when flying in X X
turbulence.
081 06 03 02 Factors affecting the gust–load diagram
(01) Describe and explain the relationship between the gust–load X X
factor and the following: lift–curve slope, aspect ratio, angle of
sweep, altitude, wing loading, weight, wing area, equivalent
airspeed (EAS), and speed of vertical gust.
Page 636 of 681

IR
081 07 00 00 PROPELLERS
081 07 01 00 Conversion of engine torque to thrust
081 07 01 01 Explain conversion of aerodynamic force on a propeller blade
(01) Explain the resolution of aerodynamic force on a propeller X X
blade element into lift and drag or into thrust and torque.
(02) Describe how propeller thrust and aerodynamic torque vary X X
with IAS.
081 07 01 02 Relevant propeller parameters
(01) Describe the geometry of a typical propeller blade element at X X
the reference section:
— blade chord line;
— propeller rotational velocity vector;
— true airspeed vector;
— blade angle of attack;
— pitch or blade angle;
— advance or helix angle.
Define ‘geometric pitch’, ‘effective pitch’, and ‘propeller slip’.
following definition is used for geometric pitch: the theoretical
distance a propeller would advance in one revolution at zero
blade angle of attack.
(02) Describe how the terms ‘fine pitch’ and ‘coarse pitch’ can be X X
used to express blade angle.
081 07 01 03 Blade twist
(01) X Define ‘blade twist’. X X
Page 637 of 681

IR
(02) Explain why blade twist is necessary. X X
081 07 01 04 Fixed pitch and variable pitch/constant speed
(01) X List the different types of propellers: X X
— fixed pitch;
— adjustable pitch or variable pitch (non-governing);
— variable pitch (governing)/constant speed.
(02) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of fixed-pitch and X X
constant-speed propellers.
(03) Discuss climb and cruise propellers. X X
(04) Explain the relationship between blade angle, blade angle of X X
attack, and airspeed for fixed and variable pitch propellers.
(05) Describe and explain the forces that act on a rotating blade X X
element in normal, feathered, windmilling, and reverse
operation.
(06) Explain the effects of changing propeller pitch at constant IAS. X X
081 07 01 05 Propeller efficiency versus speed
(01) Define ‘propeller efficiency’. X X
(02) Explain and describe the relationship between propeller X X
efficiency and speed (TAS) for different types of propellers.
(03) Explain the relationship between blade angle and thrust. X X
081 07 01 06 Effects of ice on propeller
(01) Describe the effects and hazards of ice on a propeller. X X
081 07 02 00 Engine failure
Page 638 of 681

IR
081 07 02 01 Windmilling drag
(01) Describe the effects of an inoperative engine on the X X
performance and controllability of an aeroplane:
— thrust loss/drag increase;
— influence on yaw moment during asymmetric power.
081 07 02 02 Feathering
(01) Explain the reasons for feathering a propeller, including the X X
effect on the yaw moment, performance and controllability.
081 07 03 00 Design features for power absorption
081 07 03 01 Propeller design characteristics that increase power
absorption
(01) X Name the propeller design characteristics that increase power X X
absorption.
081 07 03 02 Diameter of propeller
(01) Explain the reasons for restricting propeller diameter. X X
081 07 03 03 Number of blades
(01) X Define ‘solidity’. X X
(02) Describe the advantages and disadvantages of increasing the X X
number of blades.
081 07 03 04 Propeller noise
(01) X Describe how propeller noise can be minimised. X X
081 07 04 00 Secondary effects of propellers
081 07 04 01 Torque reaction
Page 639 of 681

IR
(01) Describe the effects of engine/propeller torque. X X
(02) Describe the following methods for counteracting X X
engine/propeller torque:
— counter-rotating propellers;
— contra-rotating propellers.
081 07 04 02 Gyroscopic precession
(01) X Describe what causes gyroscopic precession. X X
(02) X Describe the effect on the aeroplane due to the gyroscopic X X
effect.
081 07 04 03 Slipstream effect
(01) Describe the possible effects of the rotating propeller X X
slipstream.
081 07 04 04 Asymmetric blade effect
(01) Explain the asymmetric blade effect (also called P factor). X X
(02) Explain the influence of direction of rotation on the critical X X
engine on twin-engine aeroplanes.
081 07 04 05 Hazards and management of propeller effects
(01) Describe, given direction of propeller rotation, the propeller X X
effects during take-off run, rotation and initial climb, and their
consequence on controllability.
(02) Describe, given the direction of propeller rotation, the X X
propeller effects during a go-around and their consequence on
controllability.
(03) Explain how the hazards associated with propeller effects X X
during go-around can be aggravated by:
Page 640 of 681

IR
— high engine performance conditions and their effect
on the VMC speeds;
— loss of the critical engine;
— crosswind;
— high flap setting;
— engine failure at the moment of the go-around.
081 08 00 00 FLIGHT MECHANICS
081 08 01 00 Forces acting on an aeroplane
081 08 01 01 Straight, horizontal, steady flight
(01) X Describe the forces that act on an aeroplane in straight, X X
horizontal, and steady flight.
(02) X List the four forces and state where they act on. X X
(03) Explain how the four forces are balanced, including the X X
function of the tailplane.
081 08 01 02 Straight, steady climb
(01) X Define ‘flight-path angle’ (). X X
(02) Describe the relationship between pitch attitude,  and α for X X
zero-wind and zero-bank conditions.
(03) X Describe the forces that act on an aeroplane in a straight, X X
steady climb.
(04) Name the forces parallel and perpendicular to the direction of X X
flight.
— Apply the formula relating to the parallel forces
(T = D + W sin ).
— Apply the formula relating to the perpendicular forces
Page 641 of 681

IR
(L = W cos ).
(05) Explain why thrust is greater than drag. X X
(06) Explain why lift is less than weight. X X
(07) Explain the formula (for small angles) that gives the X X
relationship between , thrust, weight, and lift–drag ratio, and
use this formula for simple calculations.
(08) Explain how IAS, α, and  change in a climb performed with X X
constant vertical speed and constant thrust setting.
081 08 01 03 Straight, steady descent
steady descent.
flight.
— Apply the formula for forces parallel to the direction of
flight (T = D – W sin ).
— Apply the formula relating to the perpendicular forces
(L = W cos ).
(03) Explain why lift is less than weight. X X
(04) Explain why thrust is less than drag. X X
081 08 01 04 Straight, steady glide
steady glide.
flight.
— Apply the formula for forces parallel to the direction of
Page 642 of 681

IR
flight (D = W sin ).
— Apply the formula for forces perpendicular to the
direction of flight (L = W cos ).
(03) Describe the relationship between the glide gradient and the X X
lift–drag ratio, and calculate glide range given:
— initial height;
— L–D ratio;
— glide speed and wind speed.
(04) Explain the relationship between α, VMD and the best lift–drag X X
ratio.
(05) Explain the effect of wind component on glide angle, duration, X X
and distance.
(06) Explain the effect of mass change on glide angle, duration, and X X
distance, given that the aeroplane remains at either the same
airspeed or at VMD.
(07) Explain the effect of configuration change on glide angle and X X
duration.
(08) Describe the relation between TAS, gradient of descent, and X X
rate of descent.
(09) Describe that the minimum rate of descent in the glide will be X X
at VMP, and explain the relationship of this speed to the
optimum speed for minimum glide angle.
(10) Discuss when a pilot could elect to fly for minimum glide rate of X X
descent or minimum glide angle, and why speed stability or
headwinds/tailwinds may favour a speed that is faster or
slower than the optimum airspeed in still air.
081 08 01 05 Steady, coordinated turn
Page 643 of 681

IR
(01) Describe the forces that act on an aeroplane in a steady, X X
coordinated turn.
(02) Resolve the forces that act horizontally and vertically during a X X
2
coordinated turn (tan  = V ).
gR
(03) Describe the difference between a coordinated and an X X
uncoordinated turn, and describe how to correct an
uncoordinated turn using turn and slip indicator or turn
coordinator.
(04) Explain why the angle of bank is independent of mass, and that X X
it only depends on TAS and radius of turn.
(05) Resolve the forces to show that for a given angle of bank the X X
2
radius of turn is determined solely by airspeed (tan  = V ).
gR
(06) Calculate the turn radius of a steady turn given TAS and angle X X
of bank.
(07) Explain the effects of bank angle on: X X
— load factor (LF = 1/cos  );
— α;
— thrust;
— drag.
(08) X Define ‘angular velocity’. X X
(09) X Define ‘rate of turn’ and ‘rate-1 turn’. X X
(10) Explain the influence of TAS on rate of turn at a given bank X X
angle.
(11) Calculate the load factor and stall speed in a turn given angle of X X
Page 644 of 681

IR
bank and 1g stall speed.
(12) Explain situations in which turn radius is relevant for safety, X X
such as maximum speed limits on departure or arrival plates, or
outbound speed categories on approach plates, and the
implications/hazards of exceeding given speeds.
(13) Describe the hazards of excessive use of rudder to tighten a X X
turn in a swept-wing aeroplane.
081 08 02 00 Asymmetric thrust
081 08 02 01 Jet-engined and propeller-driven aeroplanes
(01) Describe the effects on the aeroplane of asymmetric thrust X X
during flight, for both jet-engined and propeller-driven
aeroplanes.
(02) Explain critical engine, including the effect of crosswind when X X
on the ground, and explain, for a propeller-driven aeroplane,
the direction of propeller rotation.
(03) X Explain the effect of steady, asymmetric flight on a X X
conventional (ball) slip indicator/turn indicator.
081 08 02 02 Balanced moments about the normal axis
(01) Explain the yaw moments about the CG. X X
(02) Explain the change to the yaw moment caused by the effect of X X
air density on thrust.
(03) Describe the changes to the yaw moment caused by engine X X
distance from CG.
(04) Describe the methods to achieve directional balance following X X
engine loss.
Page 645 of 681

IR
081 08 02 03 Forces parallel to the lateral axis
(01) Explain: X X
— the force on the vertical fin;
— the fuselage side force due to sideslip (using wing-level
method);
— the use of bank angle to tilt the lift vector (in wing-down
method).
(02) Explain why the required small bank angle is limited by: X X
— increased overall lift required, and increase in drag in
banked attitude;
— fin stalling angle.
(03) Explain the effect on fin α due to sideslip. X X
081 08 02 04 Influence of aeroplane mass
(01) Explain why controllability with one-engine-inoperative is a X X
typical problem arising from the low speeds associated with
low aeroplane mass.
081 08 02 08 Minimum control speed (VMC)
(01) Define ‘VMC’. X X
(02) Describe how VMC is determined. X X
(03) Explain the influence of the CG location. X X
Page 646 of 681

IR
081 08 02 09 Minimum control speed during approach and landing (VMCL)
(01) Define ‘VMCL’. X X
(02) Describe how VMCL is determined. X X
081 08 02 10 Minimum control speed on the ground (VMCG)
(01) Define ‘VMCG’. X X
(02) Describe how VMCG is determined. X X
081 08 02 11 Influence of density
(01) Describe the influence of density. X X
(02) Explain why VMC, VMCL and VMCG reduce with an increase in X X
altitude and temperature.
081 08 03 00 Significant points on a polar curve
081 08 03 01 Identify and explain
(01) Identify and explain the significant points on a polar curve. X X
Page 647 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT 082 — PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT — HELICOPTERS’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 648 of 681

SUBJECT 082 — PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT — HELICOPTERS
(1) VOCABULARY OF MECHANICS

Speed is a scalar quantity; it has only magnitude.
Velocity is a vector quantity with magnitude and direction.
The velocity of a point on a rotor blade, when rotating around an axis, is the ‘linear’ or ‘tangential’ velocity which can be expressed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Density is the mass of the fluid per unit volume (kg/m3) in the international system of units of measurement (SI (Système International)).
(2) AERONAUTICAL DEFINITIONS

A rotor blade is a high-aspect ratio aerofoil attached by its root to the rotor hub with hinges or flexible elements.
A blade element is a spanwise slice of the blade, so thin that the aerodynamic forces involved may be assumed not to vary. The forces produce lift (L),
drag (D), and a pitching moment. Such a cross section has a contour, a leading and trailing edge, a chord line, a mean camber line, a maximum
thickness or depth, and a thickness-to-chord ratio.
The centre of pressure (CP) is defined as the point on the chord line where the resultant of all aerodynamic forces acts.
The planform is the shape of a blade as seen from above.
The pitch angle (of a blade or an element) is the angle between the chord line and the plane of rotation.
The blade is not twisted when the pitch angle is constant from root to tip.
A blade is twisted when the pitch angle of its elements’ sections varies with their distance from the root (in other words, the chord lines of the
elements involved are not parallel). Washout exists when the pitch angle decreases towards the blade tip.
The vector sum of the undisturbed upstream velocity (i.e. that found in the plane of rotation of the blades) and the induced velocity is the relative
airflow.
The angle between the relative airflow and the chord line of a blade element is the angle of attack ().
Lift is the component of the aerodynamic force on a blade element that is perpendicular to the relative airflow.
Page 649 of 681

Profile drag is the component of the aerodynamic force on a blade element that is parallel to the plane of rotation. Induced drag is the component of
the aerodynamic force on a blade element that is parallel to the relative airflow.
Profile drag consists of pressure forces and skin friction acting on the surface of the blade element. The component of profile drag that arises from
pressure forces (between the leading and trailing edges) is pressure or form drag. The component of profile drag due to shear forces over the surface
is skin friction.
The total rotor thrust is the vertical upwards force from the rotor disc as a whole, as the sum of all the blade thrusts. This term has been reinstated
because there is already the term ‘rotor thrust’ that is used to denote the thrust along the axis of rotation that acts directly opposite the weight of the
helicopter in a blade element.
(3) HELICOPTER CHARACTERISTICS

Disc loading is the mass (M) of the helicopter divided by the area of the disc.
Blade loading is the mass divided by the total planform area of the blades.
The area of a rectangular blade is given by the chord multiplied by the blade tip radius. For tapered blades, the mean geometric chord is taken as an
approximately equivalent chord.
Rotor solidity is the ratio of the total blade area to the disc area.
(4) PLANES, AXES AND REFERENCE SYSTEMS OF THE ROTOR

— Shaft axis: The physical axis of the rotor shaft (mast).
— Hub plane: A plane perpendicular to the shaft axis through the centre of the hub.
— Tip path plane: The plane traced out by the blade tips.
— Virtual rotation axis: The axis through the centre of the hub and perpendicular to the tip path plane.
— Rotor disc: The disc traced out by the blade tips in the tip path plane.
— Plane of rotation: The plane parallel to the tip path plane that acts through the hub centre.
(5) ANGLES OF THE BLADES, INDUCED VELOCITY
Page 650 of 681

— Pitch angle of a blade element: The angle between the chord line of the element and its plane of rotation, sometimes called ‘local pitch angle’.
— Blade pitch angle: Taken to be equivalent to the pitch angle of the blade element found at 75 % of the blade radius.
— Flapping angle: The angle between the longitudinal axis of the blade and the hub plane.
— Coning angle: The angle between the longitudinal axis of the blade and the tip path plane. Induced velocity is that induced by the engine power
perpendicular to the plane of rotation.
Aerodynamic forces on the blades and the rotor

The thrust from a blade (blade thrust) is the sum of the thrusts from each blade element.
The sum of the thrusts from all blades is the (total) rotor thrust acting perpendicular to the tip path in the direction of the virtual rotation axis.
The result of the induced drag forces on all the blade elements of all blades is a torque on the shaft which, multiplied by the angular velocity of the
blade, gives the required induced power.
The result of the profile drag forces is a torque on the shaft which, multiplied by the angular velocity of the blade, gives the required profile power.
(6) TYPES OF ROTOR HUBS

There are basically four types of rotor hubs in use:
1. Teetering rotor or seesaw rotor: The two blades are connected together; the ‘hinge’ is on the shaft axis, and the head is underslung. A variation
is the gimballed hub; the blades and the hub are attached to the rotor shaft by means of a gimbal or universal joint (Bell 47). It is sometimes
called semi-rigid because there is no movement of the blade in a drag-wise sense.
2. Fully articulated rotor: There are more than two rotor blades and each has a flapping hinge, a lead-lag (drag) hinge, and a feathering hinge or
bearing.
3. Hingeless rotor: There are no flapping or dragging hinges. They are replaced by flexible elements (virtual hinges) at some part of the blade
radius which allow such movements. A feathering bearing allows feathering of the blade.
4. Bearingless rotor: There are no hinges or rotating bearings. Flapping and dragging movements are obtained with flexible elements called
elastomeric hinges. Feathering is obtained by twisting the element.
When referring to their equipment, Airbus call this a ‘semi-articulated head’ (ref.: their training material).
Two remarks:
Page 651 of 681
1. Hinge offset and equivalent hinge offset

The hinge offset is the distance between the shaft axis and the axis of the hinge. Hingeless and bearingless rotors have an equivalent hinge
offset.
2. Elastomeric hinges
This bearing consists of alternate layers of elastomer and metal. The flexibility of the elastomer allows flapping, dragging and feathering.
(7) DRAG AND POWERS

Induced power is that required to generate the induced velocity in the rotor disc for the production of lift. For any given thrust, induced power is
minimum when the induced velocity is uniform over the rotor disc. This can be approximated by using washout and ensuring that the blades are in
track (a truly uniform velocity cannot be obtained).
Rotor profile drag results from those components acting in the opposite direction to the blade velocities (i.e. the sum of all the profile drags from each
blade element). The power required to overcome it is rotor profile power (the sum of the powers required to overcome the torque).
Parasite drag is the drag from the helicopter fuselage including that from the rotor hub and all external equipment such as wheels, the winch, external
loads, etc. (any drag from the tail rotor is included, but not from the rotor blades, which produce profile drag). The power to overcome this drag is
parasite power.
In level flight at constant speed, induced power, rotor profile power and parasite power are summed to give the total power required to drive the main
rotor.
Induced power and profile power for the tail rotor are summed to give the power required to drive the tail rotor.
The power required to drive auxiliary services, such as oil pumps and electrical generators, is called accessory or ancillary power. It includes the power
required to overcome mechanical friction in transmissions.
The total power required in level flight at constant speed is the sum of all the above.
When transitioning from the hover, the power required decreases as speed increases. This is called translational lift.
The term limited power means that the total power required to hover out of ground effect (HOGE) is greater than the available power.
(8) PHASE ANGLE IN FLAPPING MOVEMENT OF THE BLADE

The movement of the cyclic control tilts the rotor disc in the direction of the intended movement of the helicopter.
Page 652 of 681

For teetering heads, the flapping response is 90° later than the applied cyclic control movement (less than 90° for rotors with offset hinges).
The pitch mechanism consists of the swash plate, and for each blade the pitch mechanism consists of a pitch link attached to the swash plate and a
pitch horn attached to the blade.
(9) AXES THROUGH THE CENTRE OF THE HELICOPTER

Longitudinal axis or roll axis: A straight line through the centre of gravity (CG) of the helicopter from the nose to the tail about which the helicopter can
roll left or right.
Lateral axis, transverse axis or pitch axis: A straight line through the CG of the helicopter about which the helicopter can pitch its nose up or down
(this axis is also perpendicular to the reference plane of the aircraft, which is the plane either side of which the components that constitute the major
part of the aircraft are symmetrically disposed in the port and starboard sense).
Normal axis or yaw axis: A straight line perpendicular to the plane defined by the longitudinal and lateral axes and about which the helicopter can yaw.
Note that the term ‘mass’ is used to describe a quantity of matter, and ‘weight’ when describing the force. However, the term ‘weight’ is normally used
in aviation to colloquially describe mass. The professional pilot should always note the units to determine whether the term ‘weight’ is being used to
describe a force (e.g. unit newton) or quantity of matter (e.g. unit kilogram).
Page 653 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
080 00 00 00 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT
082 00 00 00 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT — HELICOPTERS
082 01 00 00 SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
082 01 01 00 Basic concepts, laws and definitions
082 01 01 01 International system of units of measurement (SI) and conversion
of SI units
(01) X List the fundamental quantities and units in SI, such as mass (kg), X X X
length (m), time (s).
(02) X Be able to convert imperial units to SI units and vice versa. X X X
082 01 01 02 Definitions and basic concepts of air
(01) X Describe air temperature and pressure as functions of height. X X X
(02) X Define the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA). X X X
(03) X Define air density, and explain the relationship between air X X X
density, pressure, and temperature.
(04) X Explain the influence of moisture content on air density. X X X
(05) X Define pressure altitude and air density altitude. X X X
082 01 01 03 Newton’s laws
(01) X State and interpret Newton’s three laws of motion. X X X
(02) X Distinguish between mass and weight, and their units. X X X
082 01 01 04 Basic concepts of airflow
(01) X Describe steady and unsteady airflow. X X X
Page 654 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(02) X Define ‘streamline’ and ‘stream tube’. X X X
(03) X Explain the principle of the continuity equation or the X X X
conservation of mass.
(04) X Describe the mass flow rate through a stream tube section. X X X
(05) State Bernoulli’s equation and use it to explain and define the X X X
relationship between static, dynamic and total pressure.
(06) Define the stagnation point in the flow around an aerofoil, and X X X
explain the pressure obtained at the stagnation point.
(07) Use the pitot system to explain the measurement of airspeed X X X
(no compressibility effects).
(08) Define ‘TAS’, ‘IAS’, and ‘CAS’. X X X
(09) X Define two-dimensional airflow and its relationship to an aerofoil X X X
of infinite span (i.e. no blade tip vortices and, therefore, no
induced drag). Explain the difference between two- and three-
dimensional airflows.
(10) X Explain that viscosity is a feature of any fluid (gas or liquid). X X X
(11) Explain the tangential friction between air and the surface of an X X X
aerofoil, and the development of a boundary layer.
(12) Describe laminar and turbulent boundary layers and the transition X X X
from laminar to turbulent. Show the influence of the roughness of
the surface on the position of the transition point.
082 01 02 00 Two-dimensional airflow
082 01 02 01 Aerofoil section geometry
(01) X Define the terms: ‘aerofoil section’, ‘aerofoil element’, ‘chord line’, X X X
Page 655 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
‘chord’, ‘thickness’, ‘thickness-to-chord ratio, ‘camber line’,
‘camber’, and ‘leading-edge radius’.
(02) Describe symmetrical and asymmetrical aerofoil sections. X X X
082 01 02 02 Aerodynamic forces on aerofoil elements
(01) Define the angle of attack (α). X X X
(02) Describe: X X X
— the resultant force from the pressure distribution and the
friction at the element;
— the resultant force from the boundary layers and the
velocities in the wake; and
— the loss of momentum due to friction forces.
(03) Resolve the aerodynamic force into the components of lift (L) and X X X
drag (D).
(04) Define the lift coefficient (CL) and the drag coefficient (CD). X X X
(05) Show that the CL is a function of the α. X X X
(06) Explain how drag is caused by pressure forces on the surfaces of an X X X
aerofoil and by friction in the boundary layers. Define the term
‘profile drag’.
(07) Define the L–D ratio. X X X
(08) Use the lift and drag equations to show the influence of speed and X X X
density on lift and drag for a given α.
(09) Define the action line of the aerodynamic force and the CP. X X X
(10) Know that symmetrical aerofoils have a CP that is approximately a X X X
quarter chord behind the leading edge.
Page 656 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
082 01 02 03 Stall
(01) Explain the boundary layer separation when α increases beyond X X X
the onset of stall and the decrease of lift and the increase of drag.
Define the ‘separation point’.
082 01 02 04 Disturbances due to profile contamination
(01) Explain ice contamination, the modification of the section profile X X X
and surfaces due to ice and snow, the influence on L and D and the
L–D ratio, the influence on α (at stall onset), and the effect of the
increase in weight.
(02) Explain the effect of erosion by heavy rain on the blade and X X X
subsequent increase in profile drag.
082 01 03 00 Three-dimensional airflow around a blade
082 01 03 01 The blade
(01) Describe the various blade planforms. X X X
(02) Define aspect ratio and blade twist. X X X
082 01 03 02 Airflow pattern and influence on lift (L)
(01) Explain the spanwise flow around a blade and the appearance of X X X
blade tip vortices which are a loss of energy.
(02) Show that the strength of the vortices increases as α and L X X X
increase.
(03) Show that downwash causes vortices. X X X
(04) Define the relative airflow as the resultant of the undisturbed air X X X
velocity and induced velocity, and define α.
Page 657 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(05) Explain the spanwise L distribution and the way in which it can be X X X
modified by twist (washout).
082 01 03 03 Induced drag
(01) Explain induced drag and the influence of α and aspect ratio. X X X
082 01 03 04 The airflow around the fuselage
(01) Describe the fuselage and the external components that cause X X X
(parasite) drag, the airflow around the fuselage, and the influence
of the pitch angle of the fuselage.
Describe fuselage shapes that minimise drag.
(02) Define profile drag as the sum of pressure (form) drag and skin X X X
friction drag.
(03) Define ‘interference drag’. X X X
(04) Know the drag formula. X X X
082 02 00 00 TRANSONIC AERODYNAMICS AND COMPRESSIBILITY EFFECTS
082 02 01 00 Airflow speeds and velocities
082 02 01 01 Speeds and Mach number
(01) Define the speed of sound in air. X X X
(02) State that the speed of sound is proportional to the square root of X X X
the absolute temperature (in Kelvins).
(03) Explain the variation in the speed of sound with altitude. X X X
(04) Define Mach number. X X X
(05) Explain the meaning of incompressibility and compressibility of air; X X X
Page 658 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
relate this to the value of the Mach number.
(06) Define high subsonic, transonic and supersonic flows in relation to X X X
the value of the Mach number.
082 02 01 02 Shock waves
(01) Describe shock waves in a supersonic flow and the changes in X X X
pressure and speed.
(02) Describe the appearance of local supersonic flows on the surfaces X X X
of a blade.
082 02 01 03 Influence of aerofoil section and blade planform
(01) Explain the different shapes that allow higher Mach numbers X X X
without generating a shock wave on the upper surface, such as:
— reducing the section thickness-to-chord ratio;
— a planform with a sweep angle.
082 03 00 00 ROTORCRAFT TYPES
082 03 01 00 Rotorcraft
082 03 01 01 Rotorcraft types
(01) Explain the difference between an autogyro and a helicopter. X X X
082 03 02 00 Helicopters
082 03 02 01 Helicopter configurations

(01) Describe (briefly) the single-main-rotor helicopter and other X X X
configurations: tandem, coaxial, side-by-side, synchrocopter (with
intermeshing blades), the compound helicopter and tilt rotor.
082 03 02 02 The helicopter, characteristics and associated terminology
Page 659 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Mention the tail rotor, the Fenestron, and the no tail rotor X X X
(NOTAR).
(02) Define the rotor disc area and the blade area. X X X
(03) Describe the teetering rotor with its hinge axis on the shaft axis, X X X
and rotors with more than two blades with offset hinge axes.
(04) Define the fuselage centre line and the three axes: roll, pitch, and X X X
normal (yaw).
(05) Define gross weight and gross mass (and the units involved), disc X X X
and blade loading.
082 04 00 00 MAIN-ROTOR AERODYNAMICS
082 04 01 00 Hover flight outside ground effect
082 04 01 01 Airflow through the rotor disc and around the blades
(01) X Based on Newton’s second law (momentum), explain that the X X X
upward vertical force from the disc, i.e. the rotor thrust, is the
result of vertical downward velocities inside the rotor disc.
(02) Explain why the production of the induced flow requires power X X X
applied to the shaft, i.e. induced power. Induced power is least if
the induced velocities have the same value on the whole disc
(i.e. there is uniformity of flow over the disc).
(03) Explain why vertical rotor thrust must be higher than the weight of X X X
the helicopter because of the vertical drag on the fuselage.
(04) Define the pitch angle and the α of a blade element. X X X
(05) Explain L and D relating to a blade element (including induced and X X X
profile drag).
Page 660 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(06) Explain the necessity for collective pitch angle changes, the X X X
influence on the α and rotor thrust, and the need for blade
feathering.
(07) Describe the different blade shapes (as viewed from above). X X X
(08) Explain how profile drag on the blade elements generates a torque X X X
on the main shaft, and define the resulting rotor profile power.
(09) Explain the influence of air density on the required powers. X X X
082 04 01 02 Anti-torque force and tail rotor
(01) Using Newton’s third law (motion), explain the need for tail-rotor X X X
thrust, the required value being proportional to main-rotor
torque.
Show that tail-rotor power is proportional to tail-rotor thrust.
(02) Explain the necessity for feathering of the tail-rotor blades and X X X
their control by the yaw pedals, and the maximum and minimum
values of the pitch angles of the blades.
082 04 01 03 Total power required and hover outside ground effect (HOGE)
(01) Define ancillary equipment and its power requirement. X X X
(02) Define the total power required. X X X
(03) X Describe the influence of ambient pressure, temperature and X X X
moisture on the required power.
082 04 02 00 Vertical climb
082 04 02 01 Relative airflow and angles of attack (α)
(01) X Describe the dependence of the vertical climb speed on the X X X
opposite vertical air velocity relative to the rotor disk.
Page 661 of 681
reference and EIR
IR
(02) Explain how α is controlled by the collective pitch angle control. X X X
082 04 02 02 Power and vertical speed
(01) Define total main-rotor power as the sum of parasite power, X X X
induced power, climb power, and rotor profile power.
(02) Explain why the total main-rotor power required increases when X X X
the rate of climb increases.
082 04 03 00 Forward flight
082 04 03 01 Airflow and forces in uniform inflow distribution
(01) Explain the assumption of a uniform inflow distribution on the X X X
rotor disc.
(02) Show the upstream air velocities relative to the blade elements X X X
and the different effects on the advancing and retreating blades.
Define the area of reverse flow.
Explain the influence of forward speed on the circumferential
speed of the blade tip.
(03) Assuming constant pitch angles and rigid blade attachments, X X X
explain the roll moment from the asymmetric distribution of L.
(04) Show that through cyclic feathering this imbalance could be X X X
eliminated by a low α (accomplished by a low pitch angle) on the
advancing blade, and a high α (accomplished by a high pitch angle)
on the retreating blade.
(05) Describe the high air velocity at the advancing blade tip and the X X X
compressibility effects which limit maximum speed.
(06) Describe the low air velocity on the retreating blade tip resulting X X X
from the difference between the circumferential speed and
Page 662 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
forward speed, the need for high α, and the onset of stall.
(07) Define the blade tip speed ratio. X X X
(08) Explain the total rotor thrust that is perpendicular to the rotor disc X X X
and the need for tilting the thrust vector forward.
(09) Explain the conditions of equilibrium in steady straight and level X X X
flight.
082 04 03 02 The flare (powered flight)
(01) Explain the flare in powered flight, the rearward tilt of the rotor X X X
disc and the thrust vector. Show the horizontal thrust component
that is in the opposite direction to forward velocity.
(02) State the increase in thrust due to the upward inflow, and show X X X
the modifications in the α.
(03) Explain the increase in rotor rpm for a non-governed rotor. X X X
082 04 03 03 Non-uniform inflow distribution in relation to inflow roll
(01) Describe the inflow distribution which modifies α and L especially X X X
on the advancing and retreating blades.
082 04 03 04 Power and maximum speed
(01) Explain that the induced velocities and power values decrease as X X X
the speed of the helicopter increases.
(02) Define profile drag and profile power, and the increase in their X X X
values with the speed of the helicopter.
(03) Define parasite drag and parasite power, and the increase in their X X X
values with the speed of the helicopter.
(04) Define total drag and its increase with the speed of the helicopter. X X X
Page 663 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(05) Describe the power required for the tail rotor and the power X X X
required by ancillary equipment.
(06) Define the total power requirement as a sum of the above partial X X X
powers, and explain how it varies with the speed of the helicopter.
(07) Explain the influence of helicopter mass, air density, and X X X
additional external equipment on the partial powers and the total
power required.
(08) Describe translational lift and show the decrease in required total X X X
power as the helicopter increases its speed from the hover.
082 04 04 00 Hover and forward flight in ground effect
082 04 04 01 Airflow in ground effect, downwash
(01) Explain how the vicinity of the ground changes the downward flow X X X
pattern and the consequences on lift (thrust) at constant rotor
power. Show that ground effect depends on the height of the
rotor above the ground and the rotor diameter. Show the required
rotor power at constant all-up mass (AUM) as a function of height
above the ground. Describe the influence of forward speed.
082 04 05 00 Vertical descent
082 04 05 01 Vertical descent, power on
(01) Describe the airflow around the rotor disc in a trouble-free vertical X X X
descent, power on, the airflow opposing the helicopter’s velocity,
the relative airflow, and α.
(02) Explain the vortex-ring state, also known as settling with power. X X X
State the approximate vertical descent speeds that allow the
formation of vortex ring, related to the values of the induced
velocities.
Page 664 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(03) Describe the airflow relative to the blades, the root stall, the loss X X X
of lift at the blade tip, and the turbulence. Show the effect of
raising the lever and describe the effects on the controls.
082 04 05 02 Autorotation
(01) State the need for early recognition and for a quick initiation of X X X
recovery. Describe the recovery actions.
(02) Explain that the collective lever must be lowered quickly enough X X X
to avoid a rapid decay of rotor rpm due to drag on the blades, and
explain the influence of rotational inertia of the rotor on the rate
of decay.
(03) Show the induced flow through the rotor disc, the rotational X X X
velocity and relative airflow, the inflow and inflow angles.
(04) Show how the aerodynamic forces on the blade elements vary X X X
from root to tip and distinguish three zones: the inner stalled
region, the middle driving region, and the driven region.
(05) Explain the control of the rotor rpm with collective pitch. X X X
(06) Show the need for negative tail-rotor thrust with yaw control. X X X
(07) Explain the final increase in rotor thrust caused by raising the X X X
collective pitch to decrease the vertical descent speed and the
decay in rotor rpm.
082 04 06 00 Forward flight — autorotation
082 04 06 01 Airflow at the rotor disc
(01) Explain the factors that affect inflow angle and α, the autorotative X X X
power distribution, and the dissymmetry over the rotor disc in
forward flight.
Page 665 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
082 04 06 02 Flight and landing
(01) Show the effect of forward speed on the vertical descent speed. X X X
(02) Explain the effects of gross weight, rotor rpm, and altitude X X X
(density) on endurance and range.
(03) Explain the manoeuvres for turning and touchdown. X X X
(04) Explain the height–velocity curves. X X X
082 05 00 00 MAIN-ROTOR MECHANICS
082 05 01 00 Flapping of the blade in hover

082 05 01 02 Centrifugal turning moment (CTM)
(01) Describe the centrifugal forces on the mass elements of a blade X X X
with pitch applied and the components of those forces. Show how
the forces generate a moment that tries to reduce the blade pitch
angle.
(02) Explain the methods of counteracting CTM with hydraulics, bias X X X
springs, and balance masses.
082 05 01 03 Coning angle in the hover
(01) Define the tip path plane and the coning angle. X X X
(02) Show how the equilibrium of the moments about the flapping X X X
hinge of lift (thrust) and of the centrifugal force determine the
coning angle of the blade (the blade mass being negligible).
(03) Justify the lower limit of rotor rpm. X X X
Page 666 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(04) Explain the effect of the mass of a blade on the tip path and the X X X
tracking.
082 05 02 00 Flapping angles of the blade in forward flight
082 05 02 01 Forces on the blade in forward flight without cyclic feathering
(01) Assume rigid attachments of the blade to the hub and show the X X X
periodic lift, moment and stresses on the attachment, the ensuing
metal fatigue, the roll moment on the helicopter, and justify the
necessity for a flapping hinge.
(02) Assume no cyclic pitch and describe the lift on the advancing and X X X
retreating blades.
(03) State the azimuthal phase lag (90° or less) between the input X X X
(applied pitch) and the output (flapping angle). Explain flapback
(the rearward tilting of the tip path plane and total rotor thrust).
082 05 02 02 Cyclic pitch (feathering) in forward flight
(01) Show that in order to assume and maintain forward flight, the X X X
total rotor thrust vector must obtain a forward component by
tilting the tip path plane.
(02) Show how the applied cyclic pitch modifies the lift on the X X X
advancing and retreating blades and produces the required
forward tilting of the tip path plane and the total rotor thrust.
(03) Show the cone described by the blades and define the virtual axis X X X
of rotation. Define the plane of rotation.
(04) Define the reference system in which the movements are defined: X X X
the shaft axis and the hub plane.
(05) Describe the swash plates, the pitch links and horns. Explain how X X X
the collective lever moves the non-rotating swash plate up or
Page 667 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
down the shaft axis.
(06) Describe the mechanism by which the desired cyclic blade pitch X X X
can be produced by tilting the swash plate with the cyclic stick.
(07) Explain the translational lift effect when the speed increases. X X X
(08) X Justify the increase of the tilt angle of the thrust vector and of the X X X
disc in order to increase the speed.
082 05 03 00 Blade-lag motion in forward flight
082 05 03 01 Forces on the blade in the disc plane (tip path plane) in forward
flight
(01) Explain the Coriolis force due to flapping, the resulting periodic X X X
moments in the hub plane, and the resulting periodic stresses
which make lead-lag hinges necessary to avoid material fatigue.
(02) Describe the profile drag forces on the blade elements and the X X X
periodic variation of these forces.
082 05 03 03 Ground resonance
(01) Explain the movement of the CG of the blades due to lead-lag X X X
movements in the multibladed rotor.
(02) Show the effect on the fuselage and the danger of resonance X X X
between this force and the fuselage and undercarriage when the
gear touches the ground.
082 05 04 00 Rotor systems
082 05 04 01 See-saw or teetering rotor
(01) Explain that a teetering rotor is prone to mast bumping in low-G X X X
Page 668 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
situations, and that it is difficult to counteract because there is no
lift force to provide sideways movement.
082 05 04 03 Hingeless rotor, bearingless rotor
(01) Show the forces on the flapping hinges with a large offset (virtual X X X
hinge) and the resulting moments, and compare them with other
rotor systems.
082 05 05 00 Blade sailing
082 05 05 01 Blade sailing and causes
(01) Define blade sailing, the influence of low rotor rpm and of a X X X
headwind.
082 05 05 02 Minimising the danger
(01) Describe actions that minimise danger and the demonstrated wind X X X
envelope for engaging and disengaging rotors.
082 05 05 03 Droop stops
(01) Explain the purpose of droop stops, and their retraction. X X X
082 05 06 00 Vibrations due to main rotor
082 06 00 00 TAIL ROTORS

082 06 01 00 Conventional tail rotor
Page 669 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
082 06 01 02 Tail-rotor aerodynamics
(01) Explain the airflow around the blades in the hover and in forward X X X
flight, and the effects of the tip speeds on noise production and
compressibility.
(02) Explain the effect of wind on tail-rotor aerodynamics and thrust in X X X
the hover, and any problems.
(03) Explain tail-rotor thrust and the control through pitch alterations X X X
(feathering).
(04) Explain tail-rotor flapback, and the effects of Delta 3. X X X
(05) Describe the roll moment and drift as side effects of the tail rotor. X X X
(06) Explain the effects of tail-rotor failure. X X X
(07) Explain the loss of tail-rotor effectiveness (LTE), tail-rotor vortex- X X X
ring state, causes, crosswind, and yaw speed.
082 06 01 03 Strakes on the tail boom
(01) Describe the strake and explain its function. X X X
082 07 00 00 EQUILIBRIUM, STABILITY AND CONTROL
082 07 01 00 Equilibrium and helicopter attitudes
082 07 01 01 Hover
(01) Explain why the vector sum of forces and moments must be zero X X X
in any acceleration-free situation.
(02) Indicate the forces and the moments about the lateral axis in a X X X
Page 670 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
steady hover.
(03) Indicate the forces and the moments about the longitudinal axis in X X X
a steady hover.
(04) Deduce how the roll angle in a steady hover without wind results X X X
from the moments about the longitudinal axis.
(05) Explain how the cyclic is used to equalise moments about the X X X
lateral axis in a steady hover.
(06) Explain the consequence of the cyclic stick reaching its forward or X X X
aft limit during an attempt to take off to the hover.
(07) Explain the influence of density altitude on the equilibrium of X X X
forces and moments in a steady hover.
(01) Explain why the vector sum of forces and of moments must be X X X
zero in unaccelerated flight.
(02) Indicate the forces and the moments about the lateral axis in X X X
steady straight and level flight.
(03) Explain the influence of AUM on the forces and moments about X X X
the lateral axis in forward flight.
(04) Explain the influence of the CG position on the forces and X X X
moments about the lateral axis in forward flight.
(05) Explain the role of the cyclic stick position in creating equilibrium X X X
of forces and moments about the lateral axis in forward flight.
(06) Explain how forward speed influences the fuselage attitude. X X X
(07) Describe and explain the inflow roll effect. X X X
082 07 02 00 Stability
Page 671 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
082 07 02 01 Static longitudinal, roll and directional stability
(01) Define static stability; give an example of static stability and of X X X
static instability.
(02) Explain the contribution of the main rotor to speed stability. X X X
(03) Describe the influence of the horizontal stabiliser on static X X X
longitudinal stability.
(04) Explain the effect of hinge offset on static stability. X X X
(05) Describe the influence of the tail rotor on static directional X X X
stability.
(06) Describe the influence of the vertical stabiliser on static directional X X X
stability.
(07) Explain the influence of the main rotor on static roll stability. X X X
(08) Describe the influence of the longitudinal position of the CG on X X X
static longitudinal stability.
082 07 02 02 Static stability in the hover
(01) Describe the initial movements of a hovering helicopter after the X X X
occurrence of a horizontal gust.
082 07 02 03 Dynamic stability
(01) Define dynamic stability; give an example of dynamic stability and X X X
of dynamic instability.
(02) Explain why static stability is a precondition for dynamic stability. X X X
082 07 02 04 Longitudinal stability
(01) Explain the individual contributions of α and speed stability X X X
Page 672 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
together with the stabiliser and fuselage to dynamic longitudinal
stability.
082 07 02 05 Roll stability and directional stability
(01) Know that a large static roll stability together with a small X X X
directional stability may lead to a Dutch roll.
082 07 03 00 Control
082 07 03 01 Manoeuvre stability
(01) Explain how helicopter control can be limited because of available X X X
stick travel.
(02) Explain how the CG position influences the remaining stick travel. X X X
082 07 03 02 Control power
(01) Explain the meaning of the control moment. X X X
(02) Explain the importance of the CG position on the control moment. X X X
(03) Explain the influence of hinge offset on controllability. X X X
082 07 03 03 Static and dynamic rollover
(01) Explain the mechanism which causes dynamic rollover. X X X
(02) Explain the required pilot action when dynamic rollover is starting X X X
to develop.
082 08 00 00 HELICOPTER FLIGHT MECHANICS
082 08 01 00 Flight limits

082 08 01 01 Hover and vertical flight
Page 673 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
(01) Show the power required for HOGE and HIGE, and the power X X X
available.
(02) Explain the effects of AUM, ambient temperature and pressure, X X X
density altitude, and moisture.
(03) Describe the rate of climb in a vertical flight. X X X
(01) Compare the power required and the power available as a X X X
function of speed in straight and level flight.
(02) Define the maximum speed limited by power and the value X X X
relative to VNE and VNO.
(03) Use the power graph to determine the speeds of maximum rate of X X X
climb and the maximum angle of climb.
(04) Use the power graph to define true airspeed (TAS) for maximum X X X
range and maximum endurance, and consider the case of piston
engine and turbine engine. Explain the effects of tailwind or
headwind on the speed for maximum range.
(05) Explain the effects of AUM, pressure and temperature, density X X X
altitude, and humidity.
082 08 01 03 Manoeuvring
(01) Define the load factor, the radius, and the rate of turn. X X X
(02) Explain the relationship between the angle of bank, the airspeed X X X
and the radius of turn, and between the angle of bank and the
load factor.
(03) Explain the influence of AUM, pressure and temperature, density X X X
altitude, and humidity.
Page 674 of 681

reference and EIR
IR
082 08 02 00 Special conditions
082 08 02 01 Operating with limited power

(01) Explain operations with limited power, use the power graph to X X X
show the limitations on vertical and level flight, and describe
power checks and procedures for take-off and landing.
(02) Describe manoeuvres with limited power. X X X
082 08 02 02 Overpitch, overtorque
(01) Describe overpitching and show the consequences. X X X
(02) Describe situations likely to lead to overpitching. X X X
(03) Describe overtorquing and show the consequences. X X X
(04) Describe situations likely to lead to overtorquing. X X X
Page 675 of 681


Amendment 3’
Appendix
‘SUBJECT AREA 100 — KNOWLEDGE, SKILLS AND ATTITUDES (KSA)’
to
AMC1 FCL.310; FCL.515(b); FCL.615(b)
Page 676 of 681

SUBJECT AREA 100 — KNOWLEDGE, SKILLS AND ATTITUDES (KSA)
Syllabus reference Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives Aeroplane Helicopter
/IR
100 00 00 00 KNOWLEDGE, SKILLS AND ATTITUDES (KSA)
100 01 00 00 ICAO CORE COMPETENCIES
(01) Recognise the ICAO Core Competencies listed below and the associated competency descriptions X X X X X
(ICAO Doc 9995 ‘Manual of Evidence-based Training’):
— Application of Procedures;
— Communication;
— Aircraft Flight Path Management, automation;
— Aircraft Flight Path Management, manual control;
— Leadership and Teamwork;
— Problem Solving and Decision Making;
— Situation Awareness;
— Workload Management.
100 02 00 00 CORE COMPETENCIES LEARNING OBJECTIVES
100 02 01 00 Communication
(01) Show the ability to identify whether the recipient is ready and able to receive the information. X X X X X
(02) Show the ability to appropriately select what, when, how and with whom to communicate. X X X X X
(03) Show the ability to communicate clearly, accurately and concisely. X X X X X
(04) Show the ability to confirm whether the recipient correctly understands important information. X X X X X
(05) Show the ability to listen actively and show you understand the information you receive. X X X X X
(06) Show the ability to ask relevant and effective questions. X X X X X
Page 677 of 681

/IR
(07) Show the ability to adhere to standard radio-telephony phraseology. X X X X X
(08) Show the ability to accurately read, interpret, construct and respond to given documentation in X X X X X
English.
(09) Show the ability to correctly interpret non-verbal communication. X X X X X
(10) Show the ability to use appropriate eye contact, body movement and gestures that are consistent X X X X X
with and support verbal messages.
100 02 02 00 Leadership and teamwork
(01) Show the ability to create an atmosphere of open communication that encourages participation. X X X X X
(02) Show the initiative and the ability to give directions when required. X X X X X
(03) Show the ability to admit mistakes and take responsibility. X X X X X
(04) Show the ability to anticipate and respond appropriately to others’ needs. X X X X X
(05) Show the ability to carry out instructions when directed. X X X X X
(06) Show the ability to communicate relevant concerns and intentions. X X X X X
(07) Show the ability to give and receive feedback constructively. X X X X X
(08) Show empathy, respect and tolerance for others. X X X X X
(09) Show the ability to engage others in planning and to allocate activities fairly and appropriately X X X X X
according to others’ abilities.
(10) Show the ability to address and resolve conflicts and disagreement in a constructive manner. X X X X X
(11) Show the ability to project self-control. X X X X X
100 02 03 00 Problem-solving and decision-making
Page 678 of 681

/IR
(01) Show the ability to seek accurate and adequate information from appropriate sources. X X X X X
(02) Show the ability to identify and verify what and why things have gone wrong. X X X X X
(03) Show the ability to employ proper problem-solving strategies. X X X X X
(04) Show the ability to persevere in working through problems. X X X X X
(05) Show the ability to use appropriate and timely decision-making processes. X X X X X
(06) Show the ability to set priorities appropriately. X X X X X
(07) Show the ability to identify and consider options effectively. X X X X X
(08) Show the ability to monitor, review and adapt decisions as required. X X X X X
(09) Show the ability to identify and manage risks. X X X X X
100 02 04 00 Situation awareness
(01) Demonstrate the ability to identify and assess accurately the general environment as it may affect X X X X X
the operation.
(02) Demonstrate the ability to identify threats, errors and undesirable aircraft states. X X X X X
(03) Demonstrate the ability to manage threats, errors and undesirable aircraft states. X X X X X
100 02 05 00 Workload management
(01) Show the ability to maintain self-control. X X X X X
(02) Show the ability to plan, prioritise and schedule tasks effectively. X X X X X
(03) Show the ability to manage time effectively when carrying out tasks. X X X X X
(04) Show the ability to offer and accept assistance, delegate when necessary and ask for help early. X X X X X
Page 679 of 681

/IR
(05) Show the ability to manage interruptions, distractions, variations and failures effectively. X X X X X
100 03 00 00 ADDITIONAL THREAT AND ERROR MANAGEMENT (TEM) RELATED LEARNING OBJECTIVES
100 03 01 00 Application of knowledge
(01) Demonstrate the ability to complete pre-flight planning in practical exercises. X X X X X
(02) Demonstrate the KSA and TEM relating to phases of flight in the ground training environment. X X X X X
100 03 02 00 Upset prevention and recovery training (UPRT) and resilience

Note: Resilience is defined as ‘the ability to recognise, absorb and adapt to disruptions’.
It is supported by the pilot’s core competencies and improved by experience, which can be gained by
training for unexpected events or situations.
Recognise potential upset ‘threats’ and suggest effective ‘threat management’ in scenario X X
(01)
situations.
(02) Recognise potential upset ‘errors’ and suggest effective ‘error management’ in scenario situations. X X
(03) Explain the causes of and contributing factors to upsets. X X

(04) Demonstrate resilience during scenario and/or other exercises. X X X X X
(05) Show the ability to identify the signs and discuss the effects of stress, fatigue and aviation lifestyle X X X X X
on situation awareness, and how to cope with them in order to maintain situation awareness.
100 04 00 00 MENTAL MATHS
Note: Demonstrate, in non-calculator test scenarios or scenario exercises, the ability in a time-
efficient manner to make correct mental calculation approximations for the following.
(01) Convert between volumes and masses of fuel using range of units. X X X X X
(02) Estimate time, distance and speed. X X X X X
Page 680 of 681

/IR
(03) Estimate the rate of climb or rate of descent, distance and time. X X
(04) Add or subtract time, distance, and fuel mass. X X X X X
(05) Calculate fuel burn given time and fuel flow. X X X X X
(06) Calculate the time available (for decision-making) given relevant fuel information. X X X X X
Determine the top of descent using a simple method that is described by the approved training X X
(07)
organisation (ATO).
(08) Determine the values that vary by a percentage, e.g. dry-to-wet landing distance and fuel burn. X X X X X
(09) Estimate heights at distances on a 3-degree glideslope. X X X X X
(10) Estimate headings using the 1-in-60 rule. X X X X X
(11) Estimate headwind and crosswind components given wind speed and direction and runway in use. X X X X X
Page 681 of 681

Appendix To Annex I To ED Decision 2018-001-R

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Appendix To Annex I To ED Decision 2018-001-R

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Appendix To Annex I To ED Decision 2018-001-R

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Appendix to Annex I to ED Decision 2018/001/R

Appendix to Annex I to ED Decision 2018/001/R

‘Acceptable Means of Compliance (AMCs) and Guidance Material (GM) to Part-FCL

SUBJECT 010 — AIR LAW

(01) X Recall the general contents of relevant parts of the X X X X X

(01) Explain the three commercial freedoms of the air. X X X X X

010 01 03 01 The International Air Transport Association (IATA)

010 02 00 00 AIRWORTHINESS OF AIRCRAFT, AIRCRAFT NATIONALITY

(01) State the issuing authority of a CofA. X X X X X

010 02 04 01 Nationality marks, common marks and registration marks

revalidation, skill test, solo flight time.

Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.001 Competent

(03) X State the requirements for the issue of an MPL. X

Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.740 Validity and renewal of

Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.045 Validity, revalidation

Rules of the Air, e.g. ICAO, SERA, national rules.

(04) Identify under what circumstances departure from the X X X X X

(09) Describe the requirements when carrying out simulated X X X X

Source: SERA.8015 Air traffic control clearances

(18) Describe the required actions to be carried out if the X X X X X

(01) Describe the IFRs as contained in Commission Implementing X X X X

010 06 02 00 Definitions and abbreviations (PANS-OPS Flight Procedures,

(excluding maximum speeds)

010 06 03 03 Omnidirectional departures

Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4,

010 06 04 03 Arrival and approach segments

Chapter 4 Intermediate approach segment

(06) State the main task of the final approach segment. X X X X

(04) Describe how an MAPt may be established in an approach X X X X

(03) State for which category of aircraft the obstacle clearance X X X X

(01) Describe the provisions that must be fulfilled before carrying X X X X

(03) Describe the shape and terminology associated with the X X X X

(02) Define the terms ‘QNH’ and ‘QFE’. X X X X X X X

Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1,

(17) State when the QNH altimeter setting shall be made X X X X X X X

— simultaneous instrument departures;

approach procedures and departures in case of simultaneous

(06) Describe the consequences of a transponder failure in flight. X X X X X X X

(05) Explain the significance of TAs in view of possible resolution X X X X X X

(01) Recall the definitions in the Regulation not already given in X X X X X X X

(05) Describe the procedure for the transfer of an aircraft from X X X X X

zones (CTRs) designated within an FIR shall form part of that

Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.1 Application

Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.2 Scope of flight

(01) State who provides the alerting service. X X X X X

(03) X Describe the reason for establishing a system of route X X X X X

Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 1 Definitions

010 07 02 03 ATS system capacity and air traffic flow management

010 07 02 07 Change from IFR to VFR flight

— transition layer; and

the transition level

(08) Decide how and when a flight crew member shall be X X X X X X X

(05) Indicate the item of a position report which may be omitted X X X X X X X

ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5;

(10) Describe how lateral separation of aircraft at the same level X X X X

(03) State the condition to enable ATC to initiate a visual X X X X X X X

separation minima may be allowed.

without delay to a departing aircraft.